Final Handbook

Bureau of Indian Standards
Ministry of Consumer Affairs,

food & Public Distribution,
Government of India
HANDBOOK
ON
INDIAN STANDARDS
ON SUSTAINABLE PACKAGING
A drive towards Sustainable Packaging
New Packaging of India
FOREWORD
No one has been left untouched by recent climate changes. Thus it has become imperative for
each one of us to pause, think and act in a manner that each one of us can help mitigate this
climatic change, what way better than making sustainable choices.
Sustainability is the ability to maintain or support a process over time. Sustainability is often
broken into three core concepts: economic, environmental, and social. If we focus on
environmental sustainability, Sustainable packaging plays an important role. Sustainable
packaging refers to sourcing, developing, and using packaging solutions with minimal
environmental impact and footprint. Sustainable packaging is the development and use of
packaging which results in improved sustainability. This involves increased use of life cycle
inventory and life cycle assessment to help guide the use of packaging. Sustainable packaging
is a relatively new addition to the environmental considerations for packaging. It requires more
analysis and documentation to look at the package design, choice of materials, processing, and
life-cycle. Factors for sustainable design of packaging may include Use of minimal materials,
Energy efficiency, Recycled content, Recyclability, Reusable packaging, Use of renewable,
biodegradable and compostable materials, etc. The 3R’s i.e. Reduce, Reuse and Recycle are
the backbone of sustainability.
To ensure safety of public health along with the environmental impact, it is necessary to follow
the requirements against the standards. Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), being the National
Standard body of India, has laid down the requirements for various sustainable packaging
materials through Indian Standards.
Bureau of Indian Standards through Chemical department (CHD), Petroleum, Coal and Related
Products department (PCD) and Textile department (TXD) is involved in the formulation of
Indian Standards in the field of sustainable packaging.
CHD has published Indian Standards on consumer products paper packaging, food products
paper packaging and for industrial paper packaging. PCD has published Indian Standards on
biodegradable plastic, which is presently a provisional standard, Compostable plastic, adoption
of ISO Standard and recycling of plastics. TXD has published Indian Standards on Jute bag,
Hessian, sand bags, etc. These Indian Standards are given in this handbook.
Please note that Indian Standards are available on our website www.bis.gov.in and indigenous
Indian Standards can be downloaded for free. ISO adoptions are priced publications and can
be purchased from website.
This handbook is prepared by compiling the available Indian Standards available for
sustainable packaging. The different requirements given in the Indian Standards are to
understand the basic need and procedure of testing for safe and reliable packaging.
The compiled list of the Indian Standards is not comprehensive, BIS website may be referred
for detailed information.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION I INDIAN STANDARDS FROM CHEMICAL DEPARTMENT
SUBSECTION I Paper Packaging for Consumer Products
Sl IS No. Title
No.
1 IS 1397 : 2020 Kraft paper for packing and wrapping — Specification (third
revision)
2 IS 1776 : 1989 Folding box board, uncoated — Specification (first revision)
3 IS 2771 (Part 1) : Corrugated fibreboard boxes — Specification : Part 1 General
2022 requirements (third revision)
4 IS 2991 : 1988 Specification for base paper for waxed paper (Revision under
publication)
5 IS 5012 : 1987 Specification for cellulose film (first revision)
6 IS 6615 : 2021 General purpose packing/wrapping paper — Specification (first
revision)
7 IS 6622 : 1972 Specification for greaseproof paper
8 IS 8970 : 1991 Aluminium foil laminate for Packaging — Specification (first
revision)
9 IS 9493 : 1980 Specification for cartons for non-soapy detergents
10 IS 10176 : 1982 Specification for fibreboard boxes for packing of soap
11 IS 3303 : 1997 Match paper for match box — Specification (second revision)
SUBSECTION II Paper Packaging for food products
Sl IS No. Title
No.
1 IS 7149 : 1973 Specification for fibreboard boxes for canned sea foods for
export
2 IS 9313 : 1979 Specification for corrugated fibreboard boxes for the export
packaging of glass jars and bottles filled with processed foods
3 IS 10066 : 1981 Specification for corrugated fibreboard boxes for packing
cigarettes
4 IS 11844 : 1987 Specification for corrugated fibreboard boxes for transport
packaging of apples
5 IS 12212 : 1987 Specification for corrugated fibreboard boxes for transport
packaging of butter packed in primary cartons
SUBSECTION III Paper Packaging for industrial products
Sl IS No. Title
No.
1 IS 11324 : 1985 Specification for multy-ply paper sacks for carbon black
(Revision under publication)
2 IS 11761 : 1997 Multi-wall paper sacks for cement — Specification (Revision
under publication)
SECTION II INDIAN STANDARDS FROM TEXTILE DEPARTMENT
Sl IS No. Title
No.
1 IS 16186 : 2014 Textiles — lightweight jute sacking bags for packing 50 kg
foodgrains — Specification
2 IS 1943 : 1995 Textiles – A-twill jute bags — Specification
(second revision)
3 IS 2566 : 1993 Textiles — b-twill jute bags for packing foodgrains –
Specification
4 IS 2818 : 2015 Textiles — hessian — Specification (third revision)
5 IS 2874 : 1993 Textiles - heavy CEE jute bags - Specification (first revision)
6 IS 3790 : 1991 Textiles – hessian bags – Specification
(second revision)
7 IS 3984 : 2002 Indian standard textiles — DW flour bags — specification (first
revision)
8 IS 4436 : 1989 Jute bagging for wrapping cotton bales – Specification (first
revision)
9 IS 9685 : 2002 Textiles — sand bags — Specification (first revision)
10 IS 11193 : 1984 Specification for jute canvas postal bags
11 IS 12174 : 1987 Specification for jute synthetic union bags for packing cement
12 IS 12650 : 2018 Textiles — jute Bags For Packing 50 Kg foodgrains —
Specification (third revision)
13 IS 13649 : 1993 Textiles – polyethylene lined jute bags for packing tea –
Specification
14 IS 15138 : 2010 Textiles — jute bags for packing 50 kg sugar — Specification
(first revision)
15 IS 16372 : 2015 Textiles — jute bags for packing up to 30 kg foodgrains —
Specification
SECTION III INDIAN STANDARDS FROM PETROLEUM, COAL AND

RELATED PRODUCTS DEPARTMENT
Sl IS No. Title
No.
1 IS 14534 : 2016 Plastics — guidelines for the recovery and recycling of
plastics waste (first revision)
2 IS 17899T : 2022 Assessment of biodegradability of plastics in varied
conditions
3 IS/ISO 17088 : Compostable plastics — Specification (second revision)
2021
SECTION I
INDIAN STANDARDS
FROM CHEMICAL
DEPARTMENT
SUBSECTION I
PAPER PACKAGING
FOR CONSUMER
PRODUCTS
भारतीय मानक IS 1397 : 2020
Indian Standard
पैकिंग और रैपिंग के लिए क्राफ्ट

काग़ज़ — विशिष्टि
( तीसरा पनु रीक्षण )
Kraft Paper for Packing and

Wrapping — Specification
( Third Revision )
ICS 85.060
© BIS 2020
भारतीय मानक ब्रयू ो

B U R E A U O F I N D I A N S TA N D A R D S
मानक भवन, 9 बहादरु शाह ज़फर मार्ग, नई िदल्ली – 110002
MANAK BHAVAN, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG
NEW DELHI-110002
www.bis.gov.in
www.standardsbis.in
July 2020 Price Group 4

Paper and Pulp Based Packaging Materials Sectional Committee, CHD 16
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard (Third Revision) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized by
the Paper Based Packaging Materials Sectional Committee had been approved by the Chemical Division Council.
This standard was first published in 1960. It was later felt that certain additional requirements were necessary for
some special end uses. As such, Grade 1 was introduced which satisfied the optional requirements of pH, ash,
alkalinity, etc, and the standard revised in 1967. The standard was second revised in 1990 in which the kraft paper
was classified into three grades, depending upon the use of the raw materials and the end uses.
This standard has been formulated in order to define the quality of kraft paper and to assure the availability
of proper quality of such paper to the consumers. The kraft paper is meant for wrapping and general packing
purposes and is not meant for use in corrugated board box manufacture. The requirements of the kraft liner is
covered in a separate standard (see IS 9588 : 1990 Kraft liner — Specification).
In preparing this standard, considerable assistance has been derived from the data made available by the Stationery
Office, Government of India, Calcutta and the Forest Research Institute, Dehradun.
In this revision, the title of standard has been modified to give more clarity to content and use of standard. Except
change in title, requirements of Cobb value and elongation at break (an optional requirement) have also been
modified based on technological developments and needs. Amendments issued so far have been amalgamated.
A scheme for labelling environment friendly products to be known as ECO Mark has been introduced at the
instance of the Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change (MoEF&CC). The ECO Mark shall be
administered by the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) under the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 2016 as per
the Resolution No. 71 dated 20 February 1991 and No. 425 dated 28 October 1992 published in the Gazette of
the Government of India. For a product to be eligible for ECO Mark it shall also carry Standard Mark of BIS
for quality, besides meeting additional environment friendly (EF) requirements. For this purpose, the Standard
Mark of BIS would be a single mark being a combination of the ISI Mark and the ECO logo. Requirements to be
satisfied for a product to qualify for the BIS Standard Mark for ECO friendliness, will be included in the relevant
published Indian Standard through an amendment. These requirements will be optional, manufacturing units will
be free to opt for the BIS Standard Mark alone also.
This standard was formulated by CHD 16 technical committee. The list of experts who had made significant
contribution to the formulation of this standard is given at Annex C.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with the final value,
observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis shall be rounded off in accordance with
IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised )’ . The number of significant places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
IS 1397 : 2020
Indian Standard
KRAFT PAPER FOR PACKING AND
WRAPPING — SPECIFICATION
( Third Revision )
1 SCOPE 5.1.3 Grade 3

This Indian Standard prescribes the requirements, It may be made from 100 percent waste paper or a
methods of sampling and test for kraft paper for mixture of waste paper and agricultural waste or any
wrapping and general packing purposes. other material that will ensure compliance with the
requirements given for this grade of kraft paper in Table
2 REFERENCES 1. Grade 3 kraft is normally called non-virgin kraft by
the paper trade and industry.
The Indian Standards listed in Annex A contain
provisions which through reference in this text, 5.2 Finish
constitute provisions of this Indian Standard. At the
time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. 5.2.1 Grade 1
All standards are subject to revisions, and parties The surface shall be machine glazed, ribbed or plain
to agreements based on this Indian Standard are or machine finished. The paper shall be of uniform
encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying formation, thickness and substance. It will be free
the most recent editions of the Indian Standards. from specks, shives, foreign matter, holes and other
blemishes. The surface should also be receptive to
3 TERMINOLOGY printing.
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions given in
5.2.2 Grade 2
IS 4661: 1991 and the following shall apply.
The surface shall be machine finished or machine
3.1 Kraft Paper — It is a paper made from the glazed with reasonably good formation, thickness and
unbleached pulp and complying with the requirements substance. It shall generally be free of specks, shives,
as laid down in this standard. foreign matter, holes and other blemishes. The surface
should be receptive to printing.
4 GRADES
5.2.3 Grade 3
Kraft paper shall be of three grades, namely, Grade 1,
Grade 2, and Grade 3. The surface shall be machine glazed with reasonably
good formation and thickness and moderately uniform
5 REQUIREMENTS substance. Specks, shives and foreign matter, although
expected to be present, shall be within acceptable limits.
5.1 Materials
5.3 Size
5.1.1 Grade 1 The size of the rolls shall be as agreed to between the
Generally it is made from 100 percent unbleached purchaser and the supplier. When in the sheet form, it
sulphate pulp, or from a mixture of bamboo pulp and shall be either of Al or any other size of A-series as
wood pulp, or from any other equivalent pulp that will given in Table 1 of IS 1064: 1980. The permissible
ensure compliance with the requirements given for this tolerance on the size shall be in accordance with 4 of
grade of kraft paper in Table 1. Grade 1 kraft is normally IS 1064 : 1980.
called virgin kraft by the paper trade and industry.
5.4 Substance
5.1.2 Grade 2 The substance of kraft paper shall be as agreed to
It may be made from bagasse, rice/wheat straw, grass, between the purchaser and the supplier. A tolerance of
jute, a mixture of these along with sulphate pulp or any ± 5 percent shall be permitted on the nominal substance
other equivalent materials that will ensure compliance when tested in accordance with IS 1060 (Part 5/Sec 5).
with the requirements given for this grade of kraft paper
in Table 1. Grade 2 kraft is normally called semi virgin 5.5 The paper shall also comply with the requirements
kraft by the paper trade and industry. It is designated as as given in Table 1.
agricultural residue kraft (ARKraft).
1
IS 1397 : 2020
Table 1 Requirements for Kraft Paper

( Clauses 5.5 and 8.1 )
Sl No. Characteristic Requirement Method of Test
Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Moisture content, percent, Max 9 9 9 IS 1060 ( Part 5 / Sec 2) : 2014

(as received without conditioning)
ii) pH, Min 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 of IS 1060 (Part 1) : 1966
iii) Burst index KPam /g, Min
2
2.45 1.95 1.50 IS 1060 ( Part 6 / Sec 2) : 2014
iv) Tear index (each direction) mN.m2/g, Min 8.80 6.85 4.90 IS 1060 ( Part 6 / Sec 1) : 2014
v) Tensile index N. m/g Min
MD 64.0 44.0 29.5 IS 1060 ( Part 5 / Sec 6) : 2014
CD 34.5 24.5 15.5
vi) Folding endurance, CD Min
( No. of double folds )
30 18 10 IS 1060 ( Part 6 / Sec 3) : 2015
60 g/m2
80 g/m2 40 25 16
vii) Cobb value, 60 sec 27°C
Front, Max 30 30 30 IS 1060 ( Part 5 / Sec 4) : 2014
Back, Max 30 30 30
NOTE: Burst factor = Burst index × 10.2
Tear factor = Tear index × 10.2
Breaking length Km = Tensile index × 0.102
Table 2 Optional Requirements for Kraft Paper, Grade 1

(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) pH 5.5 to 7.5 10 of IS 1060 (Part 1):1966
ii) Ash (at 900°C), percent, Max 7.5 IS 1060 ( Part 4 / Sec 3) : 2018
iii) Elongation at break, percent, Min
CD 3 IS 1060 ( Part 5 / Sec 6) : 2014
MD 1.3
iv) Chlorides ( as NaCl ), percentby weight, Max 0.02 IS 1060 ( Part 4 / Sec 8) : 2014
v) Sulphates ( as Na2SO4 ), percent by weight, Max 0.12 18 of IS 1060 (Part 2) : 1960
vi) Fatty and/or similar acids 19 of IS 1060 (Part 2) : 1960
0.25
( as C17H33COOH ), percent by weight, Max
vii) Alkalinity ( as CaCO3 ), percent by weight, Max 2.0 Annex B
5.6 Optional Requirements 5.7.1.2 The manufacturer shall produce to BIS, the
When agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier, environmental consent clearance from the concerned
Grade 1 of the kraft paper shall also comply with the State Pollution Control Board as per the provisions of
requirements given in Table 2. Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974
and Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act,
5.7 Additional Requirements for ECO Mark 1981 along with the authorization, if required under
the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and the Rules
5.7.1 General Requirements made thereunder, while applying for ECO Mark
5.7.1.1 The product shall conform to the requirements Additionally the manufacturers shall also comply with
for quality and performance prescribed under 5.1 to 5.5. the provisions under Prevention of Food Adulteration
2
IS 1397 : 2020
Act, 1954 and the Rules made thereunder wherever c) Weight in kg, per ream of 500 sheets including
necessary. wrapping paper;
d) Size in millimetres;
5.7.2 Product Specific Requirements
e) Machine direction;
The paper and paper boards packaging materials shall
be manufactured from the following raw materials: f) Lot number;
a) 100 per cent waste paper or agricultural/industrial g) Month and year of manufacture; and
wastes; h) Trade-mark, if any.
b) A minimum of 60 per cent by mass of pulp made 6.3.2 Roll
from materials other than bamboo, hardwood,
softwood and reed; and a) Description, substance and grade of the paper;
NOTE ― The manufacturer shall provide documentary
b) Length and width of the roll;
evidence by the way of certificate or declaration to this effect c) Weight in kg, of the roll including the weight of
to Bureau of Indian Standards while applying for Ecomark for the core and the plugs;
requirements under (a) and (b) above. d) Lot number;
c) Paper and paper boards used for packaging of food e) Month and year of manufacture; and
materials shall be manufactured from virgin pulp
f) Trade-mark, if any.
and shall be free from dioxins. Printed surfaces of
paper shall not come into contact with the food 6.4 BIS Certification Marking
and the maximum amounts of contaminants in
paper intended to come into contact with food The product(s) conforming to the requirements of
shall not exceed the limits prescribed in Table 3 this standard may be certified as per the conformity
when tested according to the methods given in assessment schemes under the provisions of the
Annex C of IS 3962. Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 2016 and the Rules
and Regulations framed thereunder, and the products
6 PACKING AND MARKING may be marked with the Standard Mark.
6.1 A ream of 500 sheets shall be the measure of quantity 6.5 Additional Requirements for ECO Mark
for kraft paper in sheets. Packages shall contain 500 or
6.5.1 For ECO Mark, kraft paper shall be packed in
250 sheets according to the size and the weight of the
such packages which shall be recyclable/reusable or
paper and packed as agreed to between the purchaser
biodegradable.
and the vendor.
6.2 Kraft paper in rolls shall be rolled on a core of 6.5.2 The kraft paper may display in brief the criteria
70-75 mm inside diameter and in length corresponding based on which the product has been labelled as
to the width of the paper, with a wooden plug at each environment friendly.
end extending to a minimum of 75 mm into the core. 6.5.3 The kraft paper may be sold along with
6.3 Each package and roll shall be marked with the instructions for proper use and mode of safe disposal so
following information: as to maximize its performance and minimize wastage.
6.3.1 Package 6.5.4 It shall be suitably marked on kraft paper that

ECO Mark label is applicable only to the packaging
a) Description, substance and grade of the paper; material/package if content is not separately covered
b) Contents of the package ( number of sheets ); under the ECO Mark scheme.
Table 3 Limits of Contaminants in Paper

( Clause 5.7.2 )
Contaminant Paper Intended to Come Paper Intended to Come into Contact with Paper for
into Contact with Dry Food Wet Food and Food with Fatty Surface Filtration
(mg/kg of paper) (mg/kg of paper) (mg/kg of paper)
Cadmium (Cd) ― 0.5 0.5
Chromium (Cr6+) ― 0.1 0.1
Lead(Pb) ― 3.0 3.0
Mercury (Hg) ― 0.3 0.3
Pentachlorophenol (PCP) 0.05 0.05 0.05
Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB5) 2.0 2.0 0.5
3
IS 1397 : 2020
NOTE — It may be stated that the ECO Mark is applicable to 7.3 Criteria for Conformity
the product or packaging material or both.
A lot shall be declared as conforming to the
7 SAMPLING requirements of this specification if the requirement
for pH is satisfied and if the number of defective rolls
7.1 Representative samples for the test shall be drawn and sheets does not exceed the acceptance number.
as prescribed in 3 of IS 1060 ( Part 1 ) : 1966. This acceptance number shall depend on the size of the
sample (see 8.1) and shall be equal to 0 if the sample
7.2 Number of Tests size is less than 13. It shall be equal to 1 if the sample
Each of the rolls/packages selected from the lot size is greater than or equal to 13.
(see 7.1) shall first be examined for the requirements
given in 5.3. Then from each of these rolls/packages, a 8 TESTS
sheet of suitable size shall be cut out after removing at
least the top three layers. Test pieces shall then be cut 8.1 Tests shall be carried out as prescribed in the
from these sheets for testing the various requirements method referred to in column 6 of Table 1 and column
mentioned in 5.2, 5.4, 5.5 and 5.6. A roll or sheet not 4 of Table 2.
meeting the requirements for any one or more of these 8.2 Quality of Reagents
characteristics shall be considered as defective. Test for
pH shall be conducted on a composite sample. Unless specified otherwise, pure chemicals and distilled
water (see IS 1070) shall be employed in tests.
NOTE — ‘Pure chemicals’ shall mean chemicals that do not
contain impurities which affect the results of analysis.
4
IS 1397 : 2020
ANNEX A
( Clause 2 )
IS No. Title IS No. Title

1060 (Part 1) : 1966 Methods of sampling and IS 1060 ( Part 5/Sec 6) Methods of sampling and
test for paper and allied : 2014 test for paper and allied
products: Part 1 (revised) ISO 1924-2 : 2008 products: Part 5 Methods
of test for paper and board,
1060 (Part 2): 1960 Methods of sampling and Section 6 Determination
test for paper and allied of tensile properties —
products: Part 2 Constant rate of elongation
IS 1060 (Part 4/Sec 3) Methods of sampling and method 20 mm min
: 2018 test for paper and allied IS 1060 ( Part 6/Sec 1) Methods of sampling and
products: Part 4 Methods : 2014 test for paper and allied
of test for paper board products: Part 6 Methods
and pulps, Section 3 ISO 1974 : 2012
of test for paper, Section 1
Determination of residue Determination of tearing
ash on ignition at 900 C resistance — Elmendorf
IS 1060 (Part 4/Sec 8) Methods of sampling method
: 2014 and test for paper and IS 1060 ( Part 6/Sec 2) Methods of sampling and
ISO 9197 : 2006 allied products: Part 4 : 2014 test for paper and allied
Methods of test for paper products: Part 6 Methods
board and pulp, Section ISO 2758 : 2001
of test for paper, Section 2
8 Determination of water Determination of bursting
soluble chlorides strength of paper
IS 1060 (Part 5/Sec 2) Methods of sampling and IS 1060 ( Part 6/Sec 3) Methods of sampling and
: 2014 test for paper and allied : 2015 test for paper and allied
ISO 287 : 2009 products: Part 5 Methods products: Part 6 Methods
of test for paper and board, ISO 5626 : 1993
Section 2 Determination of Section 3 Determination of
moisture content of a lot — folding Endurance of paper
Oven-drying method
1064 : 1980 Paper sizes
IS 1060 ( Part 5/Sec 4) Methods of sampling and (second revision)
: 2014 test for paper and allied
products: Part 5 Methods 1070 : 1992 Reagent grade water
ISO 535 : 1991
of test for paper and board, 3962 : 1967 Waxed paper for general
Section 4 Determination packaging
of water absorptiveness — 4661 : 1999 Glossary of terms used in
Cobb method paper trade and industry
IS 1060 ( Part 5/Sec 5) Methods of sampling and (second revision)
: 2014 test for paper and allied
ISO 536 : 2012 products: Part 5 Methods
Section 5 Determination of
grammage
5
IS 1397 : 2020
ANNEX B
[ Table 2, Item (vii) ]
DETERMINATION OF ALKALINITY
B-1 REAGENTS B-3 CALCULATIONS
B-1.1 Hydrochloric Acid, 0.02 N. Alkalinity (asCaCo3), percent by mass

= 1 250 (A ─ B) N
B-1.2 Standard Sodium Hydroxide Solution, 0.1 N. VW
Where,
B-2 PROCEDURE
A = volume of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide required
Place about 5 g, accurately weighed sample of paper for the blank titration;
(cut into small pieces) in a stoppered bottle containing
B = volume of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide required
250 ml of 0.02 N hydrochloric acid. Allow the mixture
for the extract;
to stand for about one hour with occasional shaking.
Decant a portion of this solution and titrate a measured N = normality of sodium hydroxide;
quantity against 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution using V = volume of the extract taken for the titration;
methyl orange as indicator. Carry out a blank titration and
taking the same volume of hydrochloric acid as of the W = weight of sample taken.
solution taken in the previous titration.
6
IS 1397 : 2020
ANNEX C
( Foreword )
COMMITTEE COMPOSITION
Experts Who Made Significant Contribution to the Development of this Standard
Organization Representative(s)
In Personal Capacity Dr N. C. Saha, (Chairman) CHD 16
(Ex-Director, Indian Institute of Packaging)
CPPRI, Saharanpur Dr Sanjay Tyagi
Dr Reddy Laboratories Shri Avinash Talwar
Shri Vinay Kr. Singh (Alternate)
Havells India Shri Sanjay Ghoshal
Shri Deepak Rangi (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Packaging Shri Madhab Chakraborty
Dr Tanweer Alam (Alternate)
Indian Paper Manufacturers Association, New Delhi Mr Biswaranjan Dash,
Mr Rohit Pandit (Alternate)
Indian Agro & Recycled Paper Mills Association, Dr M. Patel
New Delhi Mr P. G. Mukundan (Alternate)
ITC Life Sciences, Bengaluru Shri Ajith Kumar
Dr Kamal (Alternate)
ITC, Bhadrachalam Shri Chidambaram Vinayagam
Shri P. N. Sridharr (Alternate)
Package Design Research and Test Lab, Moradabad Shri L. M. Gupta
Shri Mayank Gupta (Alternate)
Federation of Corrugated Box Manufacturers of India, Shri Satish Tyagi
Mumbai Shri K P Singh (Alternate)
Directorate General, BIS Shri U. K. Das, Scientist ‘E’ and Head (CHD)
[ Representing Director General ( Ex-officio ) ]
Member Secretary
Shrishti Dixit
Scientist ‘C’ (CHD), BIS
7
BIS is a statutory institution established under the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 2016 to promote harmonious
development of the activities of standardization, marking and quality certification of goods and attending to
connected matters in the country.
Copyright
BIS has the copyright of all its publications. No part of these publications may be reproduced in any form without
the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in the course of implementing the
standard, of necessary details, such as symbols and sizes, type or grade designations. Enquiries relating to
copyright be addressed to the Director (Publications), BIS.
Review of Indian Standards
Amendments are issued to standards as the need arises on the basis of comments. Standards are also reviewed
periodically; a standard along with amendments is reaffirmed when such review indicates that no changes are
needed; if the review indicates that changes are needed, it is taken up for revision. Users of Indian Standards
should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest amendments or edition by referring to the latest issue of
‘BIS Catalogue’ and ‘Standards: Monthly Additions’.
This Indian Standard has been developed from Doc No.: CHD 16 (13770).
Amendments Issued Since Publication

Amend No. Date of Issue Text Affected
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

Headquarters:
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002
Telephones: 2323 0131, 2323 3375, 2323 9402 Website: www.bis.gov.in
Regional Offices: Telephones
Central : Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg
NEW DELHI 110002 { 2323 7617
2323 3841
Eastern : 1/14 C.I.T. Scheme VII M, V.I.P. Road, Kankurgachi
KOLKATA 700054 { 2337 8499, 2337 8561
2337 8626, 2337 9120
Northern : Plot No. 4-A, Sector 27-B, Madhya Marg
CHANDIGARH 160019 { 265 0206
265 0290
Southern : C.I.T. Campus, IV Cross Road, CHENNAI 600113
{ 2254 1216, 2254 1442
2254 2519, 2254 2315
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East)
MUMBAI 400093 { 2832 9295, 2832 7858
2832 7891, 2832 7892
Branches : AHMEDABAD. BENGALURU. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE.
DEHRADUN. DURGAPUR. FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI.
HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. JAMMU. JAMSHEDPUR. KOCHI. LUCKNOW.
NAGPUR. PARWANOO. PATNA. PUNE. RAIPUR. RAJKOT. VISAKHAPATNAM.
Published by BIS, New Delhi
IS 1776 : 1989
(Reaffirmed 2008)
Indian Standard
FOLDING BOX BOARD, UNCOATED –
SPECIFICATION
( First Revision )
UDC 676.84
© BIS 1989
NEW DELHI 110002
December 1989 Price Group 2

Paper and Pulp Based Packaging Materials Sectional Committee, CDC 45
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard ( First Revision ) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards on 29 January
1989, after the draft finalized by the Paper and Pulp Based Packaging Materials Sectional Committee
had been approved by the Chemical Division Council.
The manufacture of packing cartons from folding box board requires that the board should not only
be mechanically sound for the purpose but also possess the qualities necessary for taking good multi-
colour and bronze printing. A proper specification for the board is therefore, of importance to
manufacturers of printed cartons. This standard will provide useful guidance to carton manu-
factures as well as the manufacturers of boards.
In this revision, Appendix A and B of the original standard have been deleted and reference has been
made to the corresponding test methods in IS 1060 ( Part 3 ) : 1969 'Methods of sampling and test for
paper and allied products, Part 3' and IS 4006 ( Part 1) : 1985 'Methods of test for paper and pulp
based packaging materials, Part 1' ). Further, SI units have been prescribed in place of the existing
units. A new requirement of delamination has been introduced.
The detailed study is going on for the requirements of patchiness and IGT printability. The Com-
mittee decided to include these requirements at a later stage when sufficient data has been generated.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the
final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in
accordance with IS 2 : 1960 'Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised )'. The number of
significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in
this standard.
AMENDMENT NO. 2 AUGUST 2004
TO
IS 1776 : 1989 FOLDING BOX BOARD, UNCOATED —
SPECIFICATION
( First Revision )
( Page 1, clause 4.2.1, line 2 ) — Substitute the words 'shall be not less
than' for 'shall be not more than'.
( Page 1, clause 5.1, line 5 ) — Substitute '±4 percent' for '±20 microns'.
( Page 1, clause 5.1, line 6 ) — Substitute '±4 percent' for '±25 microns'.
( Page 1, clause 5.2 ) — Substitute the following for the existing clause:
'5.2 Substance
When tested in accordance with 6 of IS 1060 (Part 1) : 1966, the tolerance of ±5
percent for individual test results and ±3 percent for the average of 10 test results
shall be allowed on the nominal substance.'
( Page 1, clause 5.3 ) — Substitute the following for the existing clause:
'5.3 Size
The sizes of folding box board shall be subject to a tolerance of ±0.5 percent
with a maximum of 1 mm and a minimum of 0.5 mm.'
[ Page 2, Table 1, Sl No. (iv)(b), col 3 ] — Substitute '30' for '25'.
[ Page 2, Table 1, Sl No. (vi), col 3 ] — Substitute '70' for '72'.
[ Page 2, Table 1, Sl No. (viii)(b), col 3 ] – Substitute '6A' for '5A'.
( CHD 15 )
Reprography Unit, BIS, New Delhi, India

AMENDMENT NO. 1 JANUARY 1998
TO
IS 1776 : 1989 F O L D I N G B O X B O A R D , U N C O A T E D —
SPECIFICATION
(First Revision)
(Second cover page, Foreword) — Insert the following as the fourth paragraph
in the FOREWORD:
'A scheme for labelling environment friendly products to be known as ECO Mark
has been introduced at the instance of the Ministry of Environment and Forests
(MEF). The ECO Mark shall be administered by the Bureau of Indian Standards
(BIS) under the BIS Act, 1986 as per the Resolution No. 71 dated 20 February 1991,
published in the Gazette of the Government of India. For a product to be eligible for
ECO Mark it shall also carry Standard Mark of BIS for quality, in addition to the
compliance with the optional environment friendly (EF) requirements. For this
purpose, the Standard Mark of BIS would be a single mark being a combination of
the ISI Mark and the ECO logo. Requirements to be satisfied for a product to qualify
for the BIS Standard Mark for ECO friendliness, will be included in the relevant
published Indian Standard through an amendment. These requirements will be
optional; manufacturing units will be free to opt for the ISI Mark alone also.
This amendment is based on the Gazette Notification No. 364 dated 7 September
1995 for packaging material/package (Part I Paper Board and Plastics Excluding
Laminates) as environment friendly products, published in the Gazette of India. This
amendment is, therefore, being issued to this standard to include EF requirements
for folding box board, uncoated.'
(Page 1, clause 4.5) — Insert the following new clauses after 4.5:
4.6 Additional Requirements for ECO Mark
4.6.1 General Requirements

4.6.1.1 The product shall conform to the requirements for quality and performance
prescribed under clauses 4.1 to 4.5.
Price Group 1 1
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
4.6.1.2 The manufacturer shall produce to BIS, the environmental consent clearance
from the concerned State Pollution Control Board as per the provisions of Water
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and Air (Prevention and Control of
Pollution) Act, 1981 alongwith the authorization, if required under the Environment
(Protection) Act, 1986 and the Rules made thereunder, while applying for ECO
Mark. Additionally the manufacturers shall also comply with the provisions under
Prevention of Food Adulteration Act, 1954 and the Rules made thereunder wherever
necessary.
4.6.2 Specific Requirements
4.6.2.1 The material shall be of the following two types depending on the raw
material used in the manufacture:
a) Type A — Manufactured from pulp containing not less than 60 percent by mass
of pulp made from materials other than bamboo, hardwood, softwood and reed.
b) Type B — Manufactured from pulp made from 100 percent waste paper or
agricultural/industrial waste.
4.6.2.2 The material if used for the packaging of food materials, shall be
manufactured from virgin pulp and shall be free from dioxins. Printed surfaces of
the paper shall not come into contact with the food and the maximum amounts of
contaminants in paper intended to come into contact with food shall not exceed the
limits prescribed in Table 3 when tested according to the methods given in
Annex B.

Contaminant Paper Intended to Paper Intended to Paper for Filtration
Come into Contact Come into Contact with
with Dry Food Wet Food and Food
witn Fatty Surface
Cadmium (Cd) — 0.5 0.5
Chromium (Cr6+) — 0.1 0.1
Lead (Pb) — 3.0 3.0
Mercury (Hg) — 0.3 0.3
Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) 2.0 2.0 0.5
2
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
'6.3 Additional Requirements for ECO Mark

6.3.1 For ECO Mark, folding box board shall be packed in such packages which
shall be recyclable/reusable or biodegradable.
6.3.2 The folding box board may display in brief the criteria based on which the
product has been labelled as environment friendly.
6.3.3 The folding box board shall be sold along with instruction for proper use and
mode of safe disposal so as to maximise its performance and minimise wastage.
6.3.4 It shall be suitably marked that ECO Mark label is applicable only to the
folding box board if content is not separately covered under the ECO Mark scheme.
NOTE — It may be stated that the ECO Mark is applicable to the product or packaging material or
both.'
(Page 3, Annex A) — Insert the following after Annex A:

ANNEX B
( Clause 4.6.2.2 )
DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM, LEAD, MERCURY, CADMIUM,
PENTACHLOROPHENOL AND POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS
B-1 DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM (as Cr6+)
B-1.1 Principle
The hexavalent chromium is determined colorimetrically by reaction with
diphenylcarbazide in acid solution at a wavelength of 550 nm.
B-1.2 Apparatus
B-1.2.1 Spectrophotometer
Any spectrophotometer suitable for measurement at a wavelength of about 550 nm

or photoelectric absorptiometer fitted with filters giving maximum transmission near
550 nm.
3
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
B-1.2.2 Shaker
Any shaker suitable tor rotating/moving at 30 ± 2 rev/min.
B-1.3 Reagents
B-1.3.1 Extraction Fluid — Mix 5.7-ml of acetic acid in distilled water.
B-1.3.2 Nitric Acid — Concentrated.
B-1.3.3 Sulphuric acid — Approximately 0.2 N.
B-1.3.4 Diphenylcarbazide Solution
Dissolve 0.25 g of diphenylcarbazide in 50-ml acetone. Store in a brown bottle.

Discard when solution becomes discoloured.
B-1.3.5 Stock Chromium Solution
Dissolve 0.141 g K2Cr2O7 in distilled water and dilute to 100 ml. One millilitre of
this solution contains 500 μg of chromium (as Cr 6 + ).
B-1.3.6 Intermediate Chromium Solution
Take 10-ml of stock chromium solution and dilute to 1 000-ml with distilled water.
One millilitre of this solution contains 5.00 μg of chromium (as Cr 6 + ).
B-1.3.7 Standard Chromium Solution
Take 10-ml of intermediate chromium solution and dilute to 1 000-ml with distilled
6+
water. One millilitre of this solution contains 0.05 μg of chromium (as Cr ).
B-1.3.8 Indicator Paper — Covering the pH range 0.5 to 1.5.
B-1.4 Procedure
B-1.4.1 Preparation of Calibration Curve
Into each of a series of ten 250-ml volumetric flasks, place the quantities of standard
chromium solution as indicated below.
4
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
Standard Chromium Corresponding to Cr 6+

Solution
ml μg
1.0 0.05
2.0 0.10
3.0 0.15
4.0 0.20
5.0 0.25
6.0 0.30
7.0 0.35
8.0 0.40
9.0 0.45
10.0 0.50
B-1.4.1.1 Add sulphuric acid to adjust the solution pH to 1.0 ± 0.3 in each flask and
dilute to 100-ml. Add 2.0-ml diphenylcarbazide solution, mix thoroughly and wait
for 10 minutes.
B-1.4.1.2 Carry out the measurement on the spectrophotometer or on a photoelectric
colorimeter using appropriate filter with a 1-cm cell at a wavelength of 550 nm. As
references use extraction fluid. Correct the absorbance readings of standard solution
by subtracting absorbance of a reagent blank carried through the above method.
B-1.4.1.3 Construct a calibration curve by plotting corrected absorbance values
against chromium content in microgram per 102-ml.
B-1.4.2 Determination
B-1.4.2.1 Sample preparation
Tear the air dry sample into pieces of suitable size. Do not use cut or punched edges
or other parts where metallic contamination may have occurred.
B-1.4.2.2 Preparation of test solution
Weigh to the nearest 0.01 g about 20 g of paper, leach the paper with about 200-ml
of extraction fluid for 18 ± 2 h using shaker rotating/moving at 30 ± 2 rev/min. Filter
the extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron pore size. Add sufficient
5
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
amount of aluminium sulphate and filter if any precipitate appears. Transfer the
solution quantitatively to a volumetric flask of suitable capacity, dilute to the mark
and mix.
B-1.4.2.3 According to the expected chromium content, take an aliquot portion of
the test solution containing 10 to 100 μg of chromium to a 100-ml volumetric flask.
Adjust the pH of the solution to 1.0 ± 0.3 by adding 0.2 N sulphuric acid. Dilute to
100-ml. Add 2-ml diphenylcarbazide solution, mix thoroughly, and wait for 10
minutes.
B-1.4.2.4 Photometric measurement
Carry out the photometric measurements of the test solution according to the
methods given in B-1.4.1.1.
B-1.4.3 Calculation
By means of the calibration curve (see B-1.4.1.3) determine the quantity of
chromium present:
Chromium (as Cr 6+ ), ppm =
where
m = mass in μg of chromium determined in the aliquot of the sample
solution,
M = mass in g of the test sample, and
D = ratio of the volume of test solution to the volume of aliquot portion
taken for the colour development.
B-2 DETERMINATION OF MERCURY (as Hg)
B-2.1 Principle
The flameless atomic absorption procedure is a physical method based on the
absorption of radiation at 253.7 nm by mercury vapour. The mercury is reduced to
the elemental state and aerated from solution in a closed system. The mercury vapour
passes through a cell positioned in the light path of mercury hallow cathode lamp of
an atomic absorption spectrophotometer. Absorbance (peak height) is measured as
a function of mercury concentration and record.
6
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
B-2.2 Apparatus
B-2.2.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer (AAS) and Associated Equipment
Instrument settings recommended by the manufacturer shall be followed.
Instruments designed specifically for the measurement of mercury using the cold
vapour technique may be substituted for the AAS.
B-2.2.2 Mercury Vapour Generation Assembly
Consists of an absorption cell, peristaltic pump, flow meter, aeration tubing and a
drying tube containing magnesium perchlorate.
B-2.2.3 Mercury Hollow Cathode Lamp
B-2.2.4 Recorder/Printer/Display Meter
Any multi-range variable recorder that is compatible with the UV detection system
is suitable.
B-2.3 Reagents
B-2.3.1 Sulphuric Acid — Concentrated.
B-2.3.3 Stannous Chloride Solution
Dissolve 25 g of stannous chloride (SnCl2) in water containing 50 ml of concentrated
hydrochloric acid and dilute to 250-ml. If a suspension forms, stir reagent
continuously during use.
B-2.3.4 Sodium Chloride — Hydroxylamine Sulphate Solution.
Dissolve 12 g of sodium chloride and 12 g of hydroxylamine sulphate (NH2OH)2
H2SO4 in distilled water and dilute to 100-ml.
B-2.3.5 Potassium Permanganate Solution
Dissolve 5 g of potassium permanganate in distilled water and dilute to 100-ml.
B-2.3.6 Potasium Persulphate Solution
Dissolve 5 g of potassium persulphate in distilled water and dilute to 100-ml.
7
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
B-2.3.7 Stock Mercury Solution

Dissolve 1.354 g of mercuric chloride in about 700-ml of distilled water. Add 10-ml
of concentrated nitric acid and make up to 1 000 ml. One millilitre of the solution
contains 1 mg of mercury as Hg.
B-2.3.8 Standard Mercury Solution
Prepare a series of standard mercury solutions containing 0 to 5 μg/l by appropriate
dilution of stock mercury solution (B-2.3.7) with water containing 10-ml of
concentrated nitric acid per litre. Prepare standards daily.
NOTE — Use mercury free distilled water for the preparation of reagents and standards.
B-2.4 Procedure
B-2.4.1 Instrument Operation
Follow the procedure of the manufacturer's operating manual. Connect the mercury
vapour generating assembly as shown in Fig. 1.
FIG. 1 SCHEMATIC ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT FOR MEASUREMENT

OF MERCURY BY COLD VAPOUR ATOMIC ABSORPTION TECHNIQUE
8
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
B-2.4.2 Standardization
Transfer 100-ml of each of the 1.0, 2.0 and 5.0 μg/l standard mercury solution and
a blank of 100-ml water to 300-ml BOD bottles. Add 5 ml of concentrated sulphuric
acid and 2.5-ml of concentrated nitric acid to each bottle. Add 15-ml of potassium
permanganate solution to each bottle and let stand for at least 15 minutes. Add 8-ml
of potassium persulphate ( K2S2O8 ) solution to each bottle and heat for 2 hours in a
water bath at 95°C. Cool and add 6-ml of sodium chloride-hydroxylamine sulphate
solution to reduce the excess permanganate. After decolourization add 5-ml of
stannous chloride solution and attach the bottle immediately to the aeration apparatus
forming a closed system. As mercury is volatilised and carried into the absorption
cell, absorbance will increase to a maximum within a few seconds. As soon as
recorder returns approximately to the base line, remove stopper holding the aeration
frit from the reaction bottle and replace with a bottle containing distilled water. Flush
the system for a few seconds and run the next standard in the same manner. Construct
a standard calibration curve by plotting absorbance (peak height) versus mercury
concentration in μg.
of extraction fluid for 18 ± 2 h using shaker rotating/moving at 30 ± 2 rev/min.
Filter the extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron pore size. Transfer the
solution quantitatively to a volumetric flask of suitable capacity, dilute to the mark
and mix.
B-2.4.3.3 According to the expected mercury content, take an aliquot portion of the
test solution containing not more than 5 μg/1 of mercury to a 300-ml BOD bottle and
treat as in B-2.4.2.
9
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
B-2.5 Calculation
Determine peak height of sample from recorder chart and read mercury value from
standard curve and determine the mercury content of the sample using the following
formula:
Mercury (as Hg), ppm =
where
C = concentration of mercury from the calibration curve;
V = volume of test solution prepared, ml; and
M = mass of paper sample taken for testing, g.
B-3 DETERMINATION OF LEAD (as Pb)
B-3.1 Principle
The lead content of the sample is determined by electrothermal atomic absorption
spectrometric method.
B-3.2 Apparatus
B-3.2.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer — with graphite oven technique in place
of conventional burner assembly.
B-3.2.2 Lead Hollow-Cathode Lamp or Multielement Hollow-Cathode Lamp —
for use at 283.3 nm.
B-3.2.3 Hot Plate
B-3.3 Reagents
B-3.3.1 Nitric Acid — concentrated.
B-3.3.2 Nitric Acid — 1 : 1.
B-3.3.3 Dilute Nitric Acid — 1 : 499.
B-3.3.4 Stock Lead Solution
Dissolve 1.599 9 g of Pb(NO3)2 in a mixture of 10-ml of concentrated HNO3 and
100-ml of water and dilute to 1 litre. One millilitre of this solution contains 1.0 mg
of lead (as Pb).
10
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
B-3.3.5 Intermediate Lead Solution

B-3.3.6 Standard Lead Solution
Dilute l00-ml of intermediate lead solution to 1 litre with dilute nitric acid ( 1 :
499 ). One millilitre of this solution contains 0.1 mg of lead (as Pb).
B-3.4 Procedure
B-3.4.1 Sample Preparation
B-3.4.2 Preparation of Test Solution
the extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron pore size.
B-3.4.3 Transfer the extract to a 250-ml conical flask. Add 5-ml concentrate nitric
acid and a few boiling chips or glass beads. Slowly evaporate on a hot plate to about
10 to 20-ml. Continue heating and adding concentrated nitric acid until digestion is
complete. Wash down with water and then filter if necessary. Quantitatively transfer
filtrate to a 100-ml volumetric flask, dilute to the mark and mix thoroughly.
B-3.4.4 Inject a measured portion of the digested solution into the graphite oven.
Dry, char and atomize according to the preset programme. Measure the absorbance.
B-3.4.5 Prepare a reagent blank and sufficient standards containing 5.0, 7.5 and 10.0
mg/l of lead by diluting suitable volume of the standard lead solution with nitric acid
( 1:499 ) and repeat as above ( B-3.4.3 ). Inject a suitable portion of each standard
solution in order of increasing concentration. Analyse each standard solution and
measure the absorbances.
B-3.4.6 Calculation
Construct a standard calibration graph by plotting the absorbance versus mg of lead

concentration of each standard. Read the concentration of the sample from the graph
using the following formula.
11
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
Lead (as Pb), ppm =
where
C = concentration of lead from the calibration curve;
F = dilution factor; and
B-4 DETERMINATION OF CADMIUM (as Cd)
B-4.1 Principle
The cadmium content of the sample is determined by electrothermal atomic
absorption spectrometric method.
B-4.2 Apparatus
B-4.2.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer — with graphite oven technique in place
B-4.2.2 Cadmium Hollow — Cathode Lamp or Multielement Hollow Cathode Lamp
— for use at 228.8 nm.
B-4.2.3 Hot Plate
B-4.3 Reagents
B-4.3.2 Nitric Acid — 1 : 1.
B-4.3.3 Dilute Nitric Acid — 1 : 499.
B-4.3.4 Stack Cadmium Solution
Dissolve 1.0 g of pure cadmium metal in minimum quantity of concentrated nitric
acid and dilute to 1 litre with distilled water. One millilitre of this solution contains
1 mg of cadmium (as Cd).
B-4.3.5 Intermediate Cadmium Solution
Add 1-ml of concentrated nitric acid to 50-ml of stock solution and dilute to 1 litre
with distilled water. One millilitre of this solution contains 50 μg of cadmium
( as Cd ).
12
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
B-4.3.6 Standard Cadmium Solution
To 10-ml of cadmium intermediate solution add 1-ml of concentrated nitric acid and
dilute to 1 litre with distilled water. One millilitre of this solution contains 0.5 μg of
cadmium (as Cd).
B-4.4 Procedure
B-4.4.3 Transfer the extract to a 250-ml conical flask. Add 5-ml concentrate nitric
10 to 20-ml. Continue heating and adding concentrated nitric acid until digestion is
complete. Wash down with distilled water and then filter if necessary. Quantitatively
transfer filtrate to a 100-ml volumetric flask, dilute to the mark and mix thoroughly.
B-4.4.5 Prepare a reagent blank and sufficient standards containing 5.0, 7.5 and 10.0
mg/1 of cadmium by diluting suitable volume of the standard cadmium solution with
nitric acid (1 : 499). Inject a suitable portion of each standard solution in order of
increasing concentration. Analyse each standard solution and measure the
absorbances.
B-4.4.6 Calculation
Construct a standard calibration graph by plotting the absorbance versus mg of

cadmium concentration of each standard. Read the concentration of the sample from
the graph using the following formula:
13
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
Cadmium (as Cd), ppm =
where
C = concentration of cadmium from the calibration curve;
B-5 DETERMINATION OF PENTACHLOROPHENOL (PCP)
B-5.1 Principle
PCP is extracted with acetone by Soxhlet extraction. Acetone extract is evaporated
to dryness and subjected to acetylation. The acetylated PCP is determined
quantitatively by Gas Chromatograph-Electron Capture Detector (GC-ECD).
B-5.2 Apparatus
B-5.2.1 Round Bottom Flask — 250-ml.

B-5.2.2 Soxhlet Extractor
B-5.2.3 Water Bath
B-5.2.4 Separating Funnels — 60-ml and 100-ml.
B-5.2.5 Injection Syringes — 1 μl, 5 μl and 10 μl
B-5.2.6 Gas Chromatograph with ECD — Capillary columns.
B-5.2.7 Glass Columns — Length 20 cm, internal diameter 12 mm filled with 5
cm of silica gel having particle size 63 μg × 200 μg.
B-5.3 Reagents
B-5.3.1 Acetone
B-5.3.2 n-Hexane
B-5.3.3 Acetic Anhydride
B-5.3.4 Sodium Sulphate Anhydrous
14
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
B-5.3.5 PCP Stock Solution
Dissolve 10 mg of pentachlorophenol in 100-ml of acetone. One millilitre of this

solution contains 0.1 mg of pentachlorophenol.
B-5.3.6 PCP Standard Solution
Dilute 10-ml of stock solution with acetone to 100-ml. One millilitre of this solution
contains 0.01 mg of pentachlorophenol.
B-5.3.7 Internal Standard Stock Solution
Dissolve 1 g of 2,4 dibromophenol in 11 of acetone. One millilitre of this solution

contains 1 mg of dibromophenol.
B-5.3.8 Internal Standard Solution
Dilute 1-ml of the stock solution (B-5.3.7) with acetone to 100 ml. One millilitre of
this solution contains 10 μg of dibromophenol.
B-5.4 Procedure
B-5.4.1 Determine the moisture content of the sample as given in 9 of IS 1060

(Part 1) : 1966.
B-5.4.2 Weigh accurately about 1 g of the paper sample pieces up to two decimal
places and put into a thimble. Extract with about 150-ml of acetone by Soxhlet
extraction for 6 h. Filter the acetone extract, dry over anhydrous sodium sulphate,
and evaporate under vacuum to a small volume approximately to 5-ml and cool.
B-5.4.3 Clean Up
Transfer the extract (B-5.4.2) to the silica gel packed coloumn and elute with about
25-ml of n-hexane at the rate of 2-ml/min. Collect the eluent in a flask. Dry over
anhydrous sodium sulphate and evaporate nearly to dryness.
B-5.4.4 Treat the residue (B-5.4.3) with 1-ml of acetic anhydride, and heat on a
water bath for about 30 min. Remove the flask from the water bath and cool the
acetylated product. Transfer the content in a separating funnel and add 10-ml of
hexane and 5-ml distilled water. Shake well for 2 minutes and let the layers be
15
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
separated. Collect the hexane layer, dry over anhydrous sodium sulphate and
evaporate nearly to dryness. Cool for at least 10 minutes, add 1-ml of internal
standard solution and adjust the volume to 5.0-ml with n-hexane.
B-5.4.5 Inject 2 μl of the solution into the Gas Chromatograph. Record the peak
size in area and peak height units. If peak response exceeds linear range of the system,
dilute the concentration of the extract and reanalyze.
B-5.4.6 Calibration
Prepare three calibration standards from the PCP standard solutions. Add 1-ml of
internal standard solution and follow the steps as above (B-5.4.3 to B-5.4.5).
Tabulate peak height or area responses against calculated equivalent mass of
underivatized pentachlorophenol injected. Prepare a calibration curve.
B-5.5 Calculation
Determine the PCP content of the sample from the calibration graph using the
following formula:
PCP content, mg/kg on dry matter =
where
A = PCP content in μg from the graph;
B = total volume of hexane extract before derivetization, ml;
V1 = volume of eluent injected, ml;
M = mass of the paper sample taken for testing, g;
C = volume of hexane extract carried through derivatization, ml;
Vt = volume of total eluent, ml; and
X = moisture content, percent by mass.
B-6 DETERMINATION OF POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBs)
B-6.1 Principle
PCB is extracted with boiling ethanolic potassium hydroxide solution. An aliquot of

the extract is mixed with distilled water and subjected to extraction with hexane. The
PCB content is determined quantitatively by GC-ECD by comparing the pattern of
the peaks with the pattern of a suitable technical PCB.
16
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
B-6.2 Apparatus
B-6.2.1 Erlenmeyer Flask — 200-ml.
B-6.2.2 Water Bath
B-6.2.3 Separating Funnels — 60-ml and 100-ml.
B-6.2.4 Injection Syringes — 1 μl, 5 μl and 10 μl
B-6.2.6 Glass Columns — Length 20 cm, internal diameter 12 mm filled with 5
cm of silica gel having particle size 63 μm × 200 μm.
B-6.3 Reagents
B-6.3.1 Ethanolic Potassium Hydroxide Solution
Prepare 1 N ethanolic potassium hydroxide solution by dissolving the required

amount of potassium hydroxide in absolute ethanol that has been purified as follows:
Dissolve 1.5 g of silver nitrate in 3-ml of water and add it to one litre of alcohol.
Dissolve 3 g of potassium hydroxide in the smallest amount of hot distilled water,
cool, and add it to the silver nitrate solution. Shake thoroughly, allow the solution
to stand for at least 24 h, filter and distill.
NOTE — Absolute alcohol denatured with 10 percent by volume of methanol may also be used.
B-6.3.2 n-Hexane
B-6.3.4 PCB Stock Solution
Dissolve 10 mg of any PCB technical in 100-ml of hexane. One millilitre of this

solution contains 0.1 mg of PCB.
B-6.3.5 PCB Standard Solution
Dilute 10-ml of stock solution with hexane to 100-ml. One millilitre of this solution
contains 0.01 mg of PCB.
17
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989

Dissolve 1 g of 2,4 dibromophenol in 1 1 of n-hexane. One millilitre of this solution
Dilute 1-ml of the stock solution (B-6.3.6) with hexane to 100-ml. One millilitre of
this solution contains 10 μg of dibromophenol.
B-6.4 Procedure
B-6.4.1 Determine the moisture content of the sample as given in 9 of IS 1060 (Part
1) : 1966.
places and take into a 200-ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 50-ml of ethanolic potassium
hydroxide solution and heat under reflux condenser for 4 h, filter and dilute to the
mark with alcohol in a 250-ml volumetric flask. Take an aliquot portion of the test
solution in a separating funnel, add sufficient distilled water and 15-ml hexane.
Shake well for 5 minutes and wait for 15 minutes. Collect the hexane phase.
B-6.4.3 Filter the hexane extract. Dry the filtrate over anhydrous sodium sulphate,
and evaporate under vacuum to approximately 5-ml. Take the residue for clean
up.
B-6.4.4 Clean Up
Transfer the hexane extract (B-6.4.3) to the silica gel packed column and elute with
about 25-ml of n-hexane at the rate of 2-ml/min. Collect the eluent in a flask and
evaporate to a small volume. Add 1-ml of internal standard solution and made up to
10-ml with hexane.
B-6.4.5 Inject 2 μl of the solution to the Gas chromatograph. From the peaks
obtained PCB and Internal Standard are identified by their retention times as well as
relative retention time.
B-6.4.6 Calibration
Prepare three calibration standards from the PCB standard solutions and follow the
steps as above (B-6.4.3 to B-6.4.5). Tabulate peak height or area responses against
18
Amend No. 1 to IS 1776 : 1989
calculated equivalent mass of underivatized pentachlorophenol injected. Prepare a

calibration curve.
B-6.5 Calculation
Determine the PCB content of the sample from the calibration graph using the
following formula:
PCB content, mg/kg on dry matter =
where
A = PCB content in μg from the graph;
Vi = volume of eluent injected, ml;
(CHD 16)
Printed at Simco Printing Press, Delhi, India
19
IS 1776 : 1989
Indian Standard
FOLDING BOX BOARD, UNCOATED —
SPECIFICATION
( First Revision )
1 SCOPE 4.2 Strength
1.1 This standard prescribes the requirements for The board shall be stiff, shall not easily delaminate,
folding box board, uncoated, white and coloured, and after being properly creased, shall fold neatly
used for multi-colour and bronze printing in line through 180° without cracking.
and half-tone screen and subsequent conversion
into folding cartons. 4.2.1 The value of delamination, in terms of
internal bond strength, shall be not more than
2 REFERENCES 36 g/cm when tested by the method prescribed in
Annex A.
2.1 The following Indian Standards are necessary
adjuncts to this standard. 4.3 Slitting and Cutting
IS No. Title Sheets shall be cut cleanly and square to the
IS 1060 Methods of sampling and test specified dimensions. Reels shall be evenly wound.
All cut edges shall be entirely free from loose
( Part 1 ) : 1966 for paper and allied products, fibres and dust.
Part 1 ( revised )
( Part 2 ) : 1960 Methods of sampling and test 4.4 The board shall also comply with the require-
for paper and allied products, ments given in Table 1.
Part 2
( Part 3 ) : 1969 Methods of sampling and test 4.5 Optional Requirements
for paper and allied products, When agreed to between the purchaser and the
Part 3 supplier, the board shall also comply with the re-
IS 4006 Methods of test for paper and quirements given in Table 2.
( Part 1 ) : 1985 pulp board packaging materials,
Part 1 ( first revision ) 5 TOLERANCES
IS 4261 : 1967 Glossary of terms relating to 5.1 Thickness
paper and pulp based packag-
ing materials When tested in accordance with 7 of IS 1060
IS 9894 : 1981 Method of test for smoothness/ (allowed
Part 1 ) : 1966, the following tolerances shall be
on the average thickness:
roughness of paper
3 TERMINOLOGY Average Thickness Tolerance
3.1 For the purpose of this standard, the defini- Up to 500 microns ± 20 microns
tions given in IS 4261 : 1967 shall apply. Above 500 microns ± 25 microns
4 REQUIREMENTS
5.2 Substance
4.1 General
When tested in accordance with 6 of IS 1060
The board shall be uniform in thickness, free from ( Part 1 ) : 1966, the tolerance on the nominal
holes, hard spots and lumps, shall lie flat and be substance shall be ±5 percent.
dimensionally stable. The printing surface shall
be smooth, of even finish, formation, absorbancy 5.3 Size
and colour. The front liner shall be opaque and
free from patchy finish. Both sides of the board The sizes of folding box board shall be subject to
shall be clean and free from loosely bound fibres a tolerance of ± 0.5 percent with a maximum of
and loading. 5 mm and a minimum of 3 mm.
1
IS 1776 : 1989
Table 1 Requirements for Folding Box Board
( Clause 4.4 )
Sl No. Characteristic Requirement Test Method, Ref to Clause

and I S No.
(1) (2) (3) (4)

2
i) Burst index, kPa m /g, Min 1.4 12.5 of IS 1060 ( Part 1 ) : 1966
ii) pH ( b o t h sides ) 5.0 t o 6.5 10 — do —
iii) Ash, percent by mass, Max 15 11 — do —
iv) O n e m i n u t e C o b b test, Max 13.2.2 — do —
a) Front 25
b) Back Within 25 percent of
the front value
v) M o i s t u r e (as received), 6 to 8 9 — do —
p e r c e n t by mass
vi) Brightness of w h i t e b o a r d s , 72 13 of IS 1060 ( Part 2 ) : 1960
front side only, Min
vii) Stiffness factor, Min 14 7 of IS 1060 ( Part 3 ) : 1969
viii) Wax pick n u m b e r , Min : 8 of IS 1060 ( P a r t 3) : 1969
a) F r o n t 8A
b) Back 5A
ix) Smoothness s/50 ml, Max 35 4 of IS 9894 : 1981
Table 2 Optional Requirements for Folding Box Board

( Clause 4.5 )
Sl N o . Characteristic Requirement Method of Test, Ref to Clause N o .

of IS 1060 ( P a r t 2 ) : 1960
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Water s o l u b l e c h l o r i d e s ( as NaCl ), 0.08 17

percent by mass, Max
ii) W a t e r soluble sulphates ( as N a 2 S o 4 ), 0.25 18
percent by mass, Max
iii) F a t t y a n d / o r similar acids ( as C 1 7 H 3 3 0.25 19
C O O H ), percent by mass, Max
6 PACKING AND MARKING 7 SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR

CONFORMITY
6.1 The boards shall be securely and suitably
packed as agreed to between the purchaser and 7.1 The boards shall be sampled in accordance
the supplier. with 3 of IS 1060 ( Part 1 ) : 1960.
6.2 Each package shall be marked with the
following particulars: 7.2 Tests
a) Description of the material,
From each of the packets, selected from the lot
b) Thickness and substance, ( see 7.1 ), the board shall be taken out at
c) Net mass of contents, random. These boards shall constitute the sample.
d) Batch number, The boards selected shall first be tested for general
requirements given in 4.1. One test piece shall be
e) Date of manufacture, and cut, from each board selected and tested for each
f) Manufacturer's name and/or recognized of the characteristics mentioned in 4.2 and
trade name. Table 1. A board not meeting the requirements
2
IS 1776 : 1989
for any one or more characteristics shall be requirements of this specification if the number of
considered as defective. defective boards found does not exceed the
acceptance number. This acceptance number
7.3 Criterion for Conformity shall depend upon the size of the sample and shall
be zero if the size is less than 13 and one if it is
A lot shall be declared as conforming to all the greater than or equal to 13.
ANNEX A
( Clause 4.2.1 )
DETERMINATION OF DELAMINATION VALUE
A-1 SCOPE A-4 PROCEDURE

The method is measurement of the internal bond A-4.1 Cut 2 strips of tape, approximately 150 mm
strength of paper and paper type materials using in length. Seal the sample between these two
tensile testing machine, internal bond strength strips. The tape should project beyond the end
being defined as the transverse force required to of the samples by 25 mm in the direction of
delaminate a material. length. Two pieces of note paper should be placed
between two tape ends where there is no sample.
A-2 APPARATUS This prevents the tape from sticking to itself.
A-2.1 Tensile Testing Machine, jaw width not less Cool, if necessary and cut strip to 25 mm width.
than 25 mm. A-4.2 Start separation by hand and mount in jaws
A-2.2 Paper Cutter of tensile tester, folding than outward for con-
venience in inserting them. Clamp one of the
A-2.3 Pressure or Temperature Sensitive Tape, separated ends in each of the jaws, the unsepa-
approx 38 mm wide. rated portion remaining at right angles to the
direction of movement of the jaws. Keep the
A-3 PREPARATION OF SAMPLE sample perpendicular to the direction of move-
ment during the entire test.
A-3.1 Cut five test specimens 38 mm wide and
approximately 280 mm in length. The length NOTES
direction of the specimens shall be parallel to the 1 The transverse jaw separation speed shall be
machine direction of the paper. 300 mm/min.
2 Run the test long enough to obtain a good
A-3.2 The samples shall be conditioned and average. This may be estimated from a varying
tested as prescribed in IS 1060 ( Part 1 ) : 1966. readout or obtained from a graph readout.
3
Standard Mark
The use of the Standard Mark is governed by the provisions of the Bureau of Indian
Standards Act, 1986 and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The Standard Mark on
products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced
to comply with the requirements of that standard under a well defined system of inspection,
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised by BIS and operated by the
producer. Standard marked products are also continuously checked by BIS for conformity
to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the
use of the Standard Mark may be granted to manufacturers or producers may be obtained
from the Bureau of Indian Standards.
BIS is a statutory institution established under the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1986 to promote
harmonious development of the activities of standardization, marking and quality certification of goods
and attending to connected matters in the country.
Copyright
BIS has the copyright of all its publications. No part of these publications may be reproduced in
any form without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in the
course of implementing the standard, of necessary details, such as symbols and sizes, type or grade
designations. Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director ( Publications ), BIS.
Revision of Indian Standards

Indian Standards are reviewed periodically and revised, when necessary and amendments, if any, are
issued from time to time. Users of Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in possession of
the latest amendments or edition. Comments on this Indian Standard may be sent to BIS giving the
following reference:
Doc : No. CDC 45 ( 9171 )

Headquarters :
Telephones : 331 01 31, 331 13 75 Telegrams : Manaksanstha
( Common to all Offices )
Regional Offices : Telephone
Central : Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg 331 01 31

NEW DELHI 110002 331 13 75
Eastern : 1/14 C. I. T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Maniktola

CALCUTTA 700054 36 24 99
2 18 43
Northern : SCO 445-446, Sector 35-C, CHANDIGARH 160036 3 16 41
41 24 42
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600113 41 25 19
41 29 16
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri ( East )
BOMBAY 400093 6 32 92 95
Branches : AHMADABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR.
GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR. PATNA.
TRIVANDRUM.
Printed at Printwell Printers, Delhi, India

भारतीय मानक IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
Indian Standard
नालीदार फाइबरबोर्ड डिब्बे — विशिष्टि

भाग 1 सामान्य आवश्यकताएँ
( तीसरा पनु रीक्षण )
Corrugated
Fibreboard Boxes — Specification
Part 1 General Requirements
( Third Revision )
ICS 85.080.30
© BIS 2022

NEW DELHI-110002
www.bis.gov.in
www.standardsbis.in
Price Group 7
Paper Based Packaging Materials Sectional Committee, CHD 16
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard (Third Revision) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards after the draft finalized by
the Paper Based Packaging Materials Sectional Committee, had been approved by the Chemical Division Council.
This standard was first published in 1965 and was covering both solid fiberboard as well as corrugated fiberboard
boxes. However, it was revised in 1977 and split into two parts, Part 1 covering CFB boxes only, and Part 2
covering solid fiberboard boxes. With the experience gained by the use of corrugated fiberboard boxes over the
years, it was felt that one single specification could not cover all the requirements of these boxes for variety of
items. Depending upon the nature of the product to be packed into these boxes, the requirements like compression
strength, puncture resistance, bursting strength and water-proofing were varying and in some cases some of these
requirements were not applicable. Hence, during second revision of the standard, only general requirements like
bursting strength, internal dimensions and manufacturing which are applicable to all the boxes, by and large, have
been specified. The other requirements like compression strength, puncture resistance and water-proofing have
been left for the user of these boxes to specify, if required, depending upon the product to be packed into them.
Some further modification in the flute heights and pitch have been made besides adding the flap bend test and the
joint strength test.
During this revision, the requirement of edge crush test has been incorporated to substantiate load bearing capacity
of corrugated fiberboard boxes. Apart from this, referred test methods have been updated and amendments have
been amalgamated.
instance of the Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change (MoEF&CC). The ECO Mark shall be
administered by the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) under the BIS Act, 2016, 19 as per the Resolution No. 71
dated 20 February 1991, published in the Gazette of the Government of India. For a product to be eligible for
ECO Mark it shall also carry Standard Mark of BIS for quality, in addition to the compliance with the optional
environment friendly (EF) requirements. For this purpose, the Standard Mark of BIS would be a single mark being
a combination of the BIS Standard Mark and the ECO logo. Requirements to be satisfied for a product to qualify
for the BIS Standard Mark for ECO friendliness, will be included in the relevant published Indian Standard
through an amendment. These requirements will be optional; manufacturing units will be free to opt for the
BIS Standard Mark alone also.
The composition of technical committee responsible for formulation of this standard is given in Annex B.
observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis shall he rounded off in accordance with
IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised )’. The number significant places retained in the
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
Indian Standard
CORRUGATED
FIBREBOARD BOXES — SPECIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
( Third Revision )
1 SCOPE IS No. Title

1.1 This standard (Part 1) lays down guidelines for
strength requirements, manufacturing details, sampling 1060 (Part 5/Sec 2) Methods of sampling and
and testing of corrugated fibreboard material and : 2021 test for paper and allied
boxes, suitable both as inner and outer containers for products: Part 5 Methods
the transport of goods. of test for paper and board,
Section 2 Determination of
1.2 This standard does not cover the requirements for
moisture content of a lot —
waterproofness, compression strength and puncture
Oven-drying method
strength of the corrugated fibreboard boxes which shall
be specified by the purchaser depending upon the type 1060 (Part 6/Sec 2) Methods of sampling and test
of product to be packed by him. However, requirement : 2014 for paper and allied products:
of edge crush test is prescribed in the standard to verify Part 6 Methods of test for
the load bearing capacity of box. paper, Section 2 Determination
of bursting strength of paper
2 REFERENCES 4006 (Part 1) : Methods of test for and pulp
The Indian Standards listed below contain provisions 1985 based packaging materials:
which through reference in this text, constitute provisions Part 1
of this Indian Standard. At the time of publication, the 4261 : 2001 Glossary of terms relating
editions indicated were valid. All standards are subject to paper and pulp-based
to revisions, and parties to agreements based on this packaging materials
Indian Standard are encouraged to investigate the
4661 : 1991 Glossary of terms used in
possibility of applying the most recent editions of the
paper trade and industry
Indian Standards.
6481 : 1971 Guide for principal uses and
IS No. Title styles of fibreboard containers
7063 (Part 2) : Method of test for
1060 (Part 1) : Methods of sampling and test 2018/ corrugated fibreboard: Part 2
2022 for paper and allied products: ISO 3037 : 2013 Determination of edgewise
Part 1 Test methods for general crush resistance (Unwaxed
purpose (second revision) edge method)
1060 (Part 4/Sec 1) Methods of sampling and test 7186 : 1973 Glossary of terms relating to
: 2014 for paper and allied products: paper and flexible packaging
Part 4 Methods of test for paper,
board and pulp, Section 1 3 TERMINOLOGY
Standard atmosphere for The definitions given in IS 4261, IS 4661 and IS 7186
conditioning and testing and along with the following shall apply.
procedure for monitoring the
atmosphere and conditioning 3.1 Manufacturer’s Joint — The manufacturer’s joint
of samples is that part of the box where the ends of the scored and
slotted blanks are joined together by stitching or gluing.
1
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
4 MATERIALS 4.3.3 Glue

The glue used for the manufacturer’s joint shall be
4.1 Corrugated Fibreboard
adequately resistant to moisture and climatic conditions.
Consists of one, or more sheets of fluted paper (fluting)
stuck or interposed between two or more flat sheets 5 MANUFACTURE AND WORKMANSHIP
of paper or board (liner), usually of kraft. If it is lined
on one side only, it is a single face board; If lined on 5.1 The boxes shall be manufactured to the style and
both sides, it is a single wall, 3-ply, or double-faced design as agreed to between the purchaser and the
board. Additional liners yield double-wall or 5-ply supplier. Various styles of fibreboard boxes are given in
and triple-wall or 7-ply board. Fig. 1 illustrates these IS 6481.
combinations.
5.2 The blanks shall be properly creased and slotted so
4.2 Corrugated Flutes that when the box is assembled, there shall be no holes
at the corners.
The corrugations or flutes impressed in the medium
give strength to corrugated board and cushioning 5.3 Manufacturer’s Joint
qualities. Double and triple wall boards are usually
produced by a combination of flutes of the same type The manufacturer’s joint may be made either by a lap or
or of different types. In corrugated containers, flutes are by butting the edges, as agreed to between the purchaser
usually vertical to give maximum stacking strength. and the supplier.
They come in four standard sizes as given in Table 1. 5.3.1 Lap Joint
Table 1 Details of Types of Flutes The joint may either be stitched or glued.
( Clause 4.2 )
5.3.1.1 Stitches
Flute No. of Corrugations Height of Corrugations
Per 30 cm Exclusive of Liners The width of the lap shall not be less than 30 mm. Wire
staples or stitches shall be not more than 60 mm apart
A (Broad) 32 to 38 4.0 to 4.9
in each row and the first and last no farther than 25 mm
B (Narrow) 46 to 54 2.2 to 3.0 from the beginning and the end of the joint respectively.
C (Medium) 38 to 44 3.1 to 3.9 The staples and stitches shall be centrally located along
E (Micro) 86 to 100 1.0 to 1.8 the lap and may be at an angle of 45°.
5.3.1.2 Glue
4.2.1 A-flute is used when stacking strength or
The width of the lap shall be not less than 30 mm with an
cushioning is the primary concern. B-flute gives better
extension to the normal length of the lap of not less than
resistance, folds more easily and is stronger at the score
25 mm at both ends, unless otherwise agreed to between
lines than A or C-flutes. C-flute has qualities that fall
the purchaser and the supplier. The joint shall be firmly
between A and B making it a good compromise and
glued throughout the entire area of the joint.
expanding its wide usage. E-flute is a special grade, that
is, easiest to fold, can be printed very well and is used 5.3.2 Butt Joint
for some folding cartons.
When the joint is made by butting the edges, it shall be
4.2.2 Adhesive secured by the adhesive tape along the complete length
of the joint. The tape used shall be not less than 50 mm
Any suitable adhesive capable of firmly adhering the
wide.
various plies together may be used. Sodium silicate or
any other highly alkaline adhesive shall not be used. 6 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES
4.3 Joining Materials
6.1 The boxes shall conform to the dimensions as ordered.
4.3.1 Stitching Wire or Staples The ordered dimensions are internal dimensions of the
erected assembled box as shown in Fig. 2. These are
For staples and stitches, flat wire shall be used as agreed
given to the nearest mm and normally in the following
to between the purchaser and the supplier.
order:
4.3.2 Tape a) Length (L) — The longer dimensions at the opening;
The tape used for the manufacturer’s joint may be of b) Width (W) — The shorter dimension at the opening;
cambric, suitably prepared for the purpose or of two and
thicknesses of kraft laminated with reinforcing fibres of c) Height (H) — The dimension from the top of the
cotton linen, fibre glass, nylon or other suitable material opening to the base measured, where applicable,
as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. from centre of crease to centre of crease.
2
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
Fig. 1 Corrugated Fibreboards
Fig. 2 Internal Dimensions of Box
3
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
The sum of length, width and height (L + W + H) is 7.2 Water Absorption Test
termed the combined internal dimensions. The outer surface of the fibreboard shall be subjected
6.2 The normal manufacturing tolerances on the to water absorption test or cobb test for 30 min as per
individual internal dimension of the erected assembled method given in 6 of IS 4006 (Part 1). The test shall be
box shall be as under: done on unprinted area wherever possible. When the
test is done on the printed area, it shall be reported in
± 3 mm for 3 ply boxes; the test report and a correction factors of – 5 percent
± 5 mm for 5 ply boxes; and shall be applied to the observed values. The increase
± 7 mm for 7 ply boxes. in the mass of the board after the test shall not be more
than 225 g/m2.
If special tolerances are required for example, automatic
case erection and filling, arrangements shall be made 7.3 Flap Bend Test
between the manufacturer and the user but tolerances The flaps of the box shall be capable of being folded
closer than ± 1 mm cannot be expected. through 180°inside and then 180° outside along the line
of creasing without cracking of the board or facing.
7 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS AND TESTING
7.4 Joint Strength
7.1 Bursting Strength, ECT, Maximum Mass of the
Contents and Maximum Internal Dimensions of the The strength of the joints shall be observed by grasping
Box a body or a cover in the hands, one on each side of the
joint, and pulling it apart until the joint ruptures. The
As a general guide Table 2 may be referred for the failure shall occur in the board and not in the fasteners.
selection of single wall, double wall and triple wall
corrugated fibreboard used for the construction of 7.5 Edge Crush Test
general purpose boxes. In certain circumstances, for The corrugated fiberboard boxes shall fulfill the
example for palletized and/or containerized loads, requirement of edge crush test as specified in column
complete rail wagon loads, user’s own transport, and 5 of Table 2 when tested according to method prescribed
for some types of commodities, a lighter grade of board in IS 7063 (Part 2).
may be used or the contents mass increased beyond
that shown in Table 2. Alternatively, a header grade of 7.6 Additional Requirements for ECO Mark
board for a given mass may be necessary for overseas
shipment, dangerous goods, and explosives, and to 7.6.1 General Requirements
meet hazardous conditions of transit and storage. 7.6.1.1 The product shall conform to the requirements
for quality and performance prescribed under 4.1 to 7.4.
Table 2 General Guidance on Fibreboard Boxes and Requirements

( Clauses 7.1, 7.5, 8.3.1 and 8.3.1.1 )
Types of Corrugated Maximum Mass Maximum Combined Internal Minimum Bursting Minimum Edge
Board of Contents kg Dimensions of the Box Strength of the Board Crush Test of the
(L + W + H) mm kgf/cm2 (kPa) Board kN/m
5 635 6 (600) 3.0 kN/m

Single wall or 3-ply 8 900 8 (800) 4.0 kN/m
10 1125 9 (900) 4.25 kN/m
15 1275 10 (1000) 4.5 kN/m
Double-wall or 5-ply 20 1525 12 (1200) 5.0 kN/m
25 1715 13 (1300) 5.3 kN/m
30 1905 14 (1400) 5.6 kN/m
40 2286 17 (1700) 7.0 kN/m
Triple-wall or 7-ply
55 2667 24 (2400) 9.6 kN/m
75 2921 35 (3448) 12.4 kN/m
NOTES
1 Boxes should be made with no single dimension exceeding 50 percent of the combined internal dimensions
2 For calculating the maximum combined dimensions for any intermediate mass content, for each 10 percent reduction in mass of
contents below the maximum permitted for a box, the calculated combined dimensions from the table may be increased by 5 percent.
3 Where compression strength of the box is specified, the ECT is not necessary.
4
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
7.6.1.2 The manufacturer shall produce to BIS, the shall be in accordance with the guidelines given in
environmental consent clearance from the concerned Table 2 of IS 1060 (Part 1).
State Pollution Control Board as per the provisions of
Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 8.2 Conditioning
and Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, The sample of boxes so selected shall be deemed to
1981 along with the authorization, if required under represent the whole consignment of boxes and shall
the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and the Rules be conditioned for testing by the method prescribed in
made thereunder, while applying for ECO Mark. IS 1060 (Part 4/Sec 1).
Additionally the manufacturers shall also comply with 8.3 Testing
the provisions under Prevention of Food Adulteration
Act, 1954 and the Rules made thereunder wherever 8.3.1 The types of tests and selection of boxes for
necessary. testing shall be as indicated in Table 2.
7.6.2 Product Specific Requirements 8.3.1.1 The requirements for the material of
The paper and paper boards packaging materials shall construction of box as well as method of test for
be manufactured from the following raw materials: evaluating these requirements shall be as given in
relevant clauses and in Table 2.
a) 100 per cent waste paper or agricultural/industrial
wastes; 8.4 Acceptance and Retesting
b) A minimum of 60 per cent by mass of pulp made
8.4.1 Acceptance
from materials other than bamboo, hardwood,
softwood and reed; and The consignment of box shall be deemed to comply
NOTE — The manufacturer shall provide documentary with the test requirements of the standard if after
evidence by the way of certificate or declaration to this effect specified number of boxes from the test sample as
to Bureau of Indian Standards while applying for Ecomark for given in Table 3 have been tested as required in
requirements under (a) and (b) above. relevant clause:
c) Paper and paper boards used for packaging of food a) All the boxes pass the test, or
materials shall be manufactured from virgin pulp
b) Only one box fails to pass one or more of the
and shall be free from dioxins. Printed surfaces of
tests and on retesting in accordance with 8.4.2 no
paper shall not come into contact with the food
further box fails to pass the test or tests.
and the maximum amounts of contaminants in
paper intended to come into contact with food 8.4.2 Retests
shall not exceed the limits prescribed in Table 3
If only one box from the test sample fails to meet one
when tested according to the methods given in
or more of the test requirements of the specification
Annex A.
further boxes shall be selected at random from the
8 SAMPLING, CONDITIONING AND consignment of boxes for testing for the defective
TESTING property or properties. The number of additional boxes
to be tested shall be twice the number specified in
8.1 The boxes shall be sampled and tested by the Table 4 for the test or tests in which the box from the
purchaser. The number of boxes selected from a lot original test sample failed.

( Clauses 7.6.2 and 8.4.1 )
Contaminant Paper Intended to Come into Paper Intended to Come into Contact with Paper for Filtration
Contact with Dry Food Wet Food and Food with Fatty Surface
Cadmium (Cd) – 0.5 0.5
Chromium (Cr ) 6+
– 0.1 0.1
Lead (Pb) – 3.0 3.0
Mercury (Hg) – 0.3 0.3
Polychlorinated biphenyls 2.0 2.0 0.5
(PCBs)
5
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
Table 4 Testing of Boxes

( Clauses 8.4.2 and 8.3.1.1 )
Sl No. Type of Test No. of Boxes Selected No. of Test No. of Tests Methods of Test
from Sample for Specimens Obtained on each Test
Testing from each Box Specimen
i) Bursting strength 3 1 10 (5 each side) IS 1060 (Part 6/Sec 2)
ii) Water absorption Cobb/30 min 3 1 1 6 of IS 4006 (Part 1)
iii) Flap bend 3 2 1 Clause 7.3
(iv) Joint strength 3 2 1 Clause 7.4
(v) ECT 3 3 1 IS 7063 (Part 2)
9 PACKING AND MARKING 9.3 Additional Requirements for ECO Mark
9.1 The boxes shall be packed and supplied as agreed to 9.3.1 For ECO Mark, corrugated fiberboard boxes
between the purchaser and he supplier. shall be packed in such packages which shall be
recyclable/reusable or biodegradable.
9.2 Each box shall be legibly and indelibly marked on
the bottom flap with the following particulars: 9.3.2 The corrugated fiberboard boxes may display in
brief the criteria based on which the product has been
a) Gross weight limit,
labelled as environment friendly.
b) Minimum bursting strength,
c) Dimensions ( L + W + H ), 9.3.3 The corrugated fiberboard boxes shall be sold
along with instruction for proper use and mode of
d) Batch or lot number, and safe disposal so as to maximize its performance and
e) Indication of the source of manufacture. minimize wastage.
9.2.1 BIS Certification Marking 9.3.4 It shall be suitably marked that ECO Mark label
The product(s) conforming to the requirements of is applicable only to the corrugated fiberboard boxes if
this standard may be certified as per the conformity content is not separately covered under the ECO Mark
assessment schemes under the provisions of the scheme.
Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 2016 and the Rules NOTE — It may be stated that the ECO Mark is applicable to
and Regulations framed thereunder, and the products the product or packaging materia1 or both.
may be marked with the Standard Mark.
6
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
ANNEX A
( Clause 7.6.2 )
DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM, LEAD, MERCURY, CADMIUM, PENTACHLOROPHENOL
AND POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS
A-1 DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM A-1.4 Procedure

(AS CR6+)
A-1.4.1 Preparation of Calibration Curve
A-1.1 Principle Into each of a series of ten 250 ml volumetric flasks,
The hexavalent chromium is determined place the quantities of standard chromium solution as
colorimetrically by reaction with diphenylcarbazide in indicated below:
acid solution at a wavelength of 550 nm. Standard Corresponding to
A-1.2 Apparatus Chromium Cr6+ Solution
ml µg
A-1.2.1 Spectrophotometer
1.0 0.05
Any spectrophotometer suitable for measurement
at a wavelength of about 550 nm or photoelectric 2.0 0.10
absorptiometer fitted with filters giving maximum 3.0 0.15
transmission near 550 nm. 4.0 0.20
A-1.2.2 Shaker 5.0 0.25
Any shaker suitable for rotating/moving at 6.0 0.30
30 ± 2 rev/min. 7.0 0.35
A-1.3 Reagents 8.0 0.40
A-1.3.1 Extraction Fluid — Mix 5.7 ml of acetic acid in 9.0 0.45
200 ml distilled water. 10.0 0.50
A-1.3.2 Nitric Acid ― Concentrated.
A-1.4.1.1 Add sulphuric acid to adjust the solution pH
A-1.3.3 Sulphuric Acid — Approximately 0.2 N. to 1.0 ± 0.3 in each flask and dilute to 100 ml. Add
2.0 ml diphenylcarbazide solution, mist thoroughly and
A-1.3.4 Diphenylcarbazide Solution — Dissolve 0.25 g wait for 10 min.
of diphenylcarbazide in 50 ml acetone. Store in a brown
bottle. Discard when solution becomes discoloured. A-1.4.1.2 Carry out the measurement on the
spectrophotometer or on a photoelectric colorimeter
A-1.3.5 Stock Chromium Solution — Dissolve 0.141 g using appropriate filter with a 1 cm cell at a wavelength
K2Cr2O7 in distilled water and dilute to 100 ml. One of 550 nm. As references use extraction fluid. Correct
millilitre of this solution contains 500 RI; of chromium the absorbance readings of standard solution by
(as Cr 6+). subtracting absorbance of a reagent blank carried
through the above method.
A-1.3.6 Intermediate Chromium Solution — Take 10 ml
of stock chromium solution and dilute to 1 000 ml with A-1.4.1.3 Construct a calibration curve by plotting
distilled water. One millilitre of this solution contains corrected absorbance values against chromium content
5.00 µg of chromium (as Cr6+). in microgram per 102 ml.
A-1.3.7 Standard Chromium Solution — Take 10 A-1.4.2 Determination
ml of intermediate chromium solution and dilute to
1 000 ml with distilled water. One millilitre of this A-1.4.2.1 Sample preparation
solution contains 0.05 pg of chromium (as Cr6+). Tear the air dry sample into pieces of suitable size.
Do not use cut or punched edges or other parts where
A-1.3.8 Indicator Paper — Covering the pH range
metallic contamination may have occurred.
0.5 to 1.5.
7
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
A-1.4.2.2 Preparation of test solution for the measurement of mercury using the cold vapour
Weigh to the nearest 0.01 g about 20 g of paper, leach the technique may be substituted for the AAS.
paper with about 200 ml of extraction fluid for 18 ± 2 h A-2.2.2 Mercury Vapour Generation Assembly
using shaker rotating/moving at 30 ± 2 rev/min. Filter the
extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron pore Consists of an absorption cell, peristaltic pump, flow
size. Add sufficient amount of aluminium sulphate to meter, aeration tubing and a drying tube containing
bring the pH below 5.0 and filter if any precipitate magnesium perchlorate.
appears. Transfer the solution quantitatively to a A-2.2.3 Mercury Hollow Cathode Lamp
volumetric flask of suitable capacity, dilute to the mark
and mix. A-2.2.4 Recorder/Printer/Display Meter
A-1.4.2.3 According to the expected chromium content, Any multi-range variable recorder that is compatible with
take an aliquot portion of the test solution containing the UV detection system is suitable.
10 to 100 jig of chromium to a 100 ml volumetric flask. A-2.3 Reagemts
Adjust the pH of the solution to 1.0 ± 0.3 by adding
0.2 N sulphuric acid. Dilute to 100 ml. Add 2 ml A-2.3.1 Sulphuric Acid, concentrated.
diphenylcarbazide solution, mix thoroughly, and wait for
10 min. A-2.3.2 Nitric Acid, concentrated.
A-1.4.2.4 Photometric measurement A-2.3.3 Stannous Chloride Solution

Carry out the photometric measurements of the test Dissolve 25 g of stannous chloride (SnC12) in water
solution according to the methods given in A-1.4.1.1. containing 50 ml of concentrated hydrochloric acid
and dilute to 250 ml. If a suspension forms, stir reagent
A-1.4.3 Calculation continuously during use.
By means of the calibration curve (see A-1.4.13)
A-2.3.4 Sodium Chloride — Hydroxylamine Sulphate
determine the quantity of chromium present:
Solution
m D
Chromium as Cr 6+ , ppm Dissolve 12 g of sodium chloride and 12 g of
M hydroxylamine sulphate (NH2OH)2 H2SO4 in distilled
where water and dilute to 100 ml.
m = mass of chromium determined in the aliquot of A-2.3.5 Potassium Permanganate Solution

the sample solution, µg; Dissolve 5 g of potassium permanganate in distilled water
M = mass of paper sample taken for testing, g; and and dilute to 100 ml.
D = ratio of the volume of test solution to the
A-2.3.6 Potassium Persulphate Solution
volume of aliquot portion taken for the colour
development. Dissolve 5 g of potassium persulphate in distilled water
and dilute to 100 ml.
A-2 DETERMINATION OF MERCURY
(AS HG) A-2.3.7 Stock Mercury Solution
Dissolve 1.354 g of mercuric chloride in about 700 ml
A-2.1 Principle of distilled water. Add 10 ml of concentrated nitric acid
The flameless atomic absorption procedure is a and make up to l 000 ml. One millilitre of the solution
physical method based on the absorption of radiation at contains 1 mg of mercury as Hg.
253.7 nm by mercury vapour. The mercury is reduced
A-2.3.8 Standard Mercury Solution
to the elemental state and aerated from solution in a
closed system. The mercury vapour passes through Prepare a series of standard mercury ablutions containing
a cell positioned in the light path of mercury hallow 0 to 5 µg/1 by appropriate dilution of stock mercury
cathode lamp of an atomic absorption spectrophotometer. solution (A-2.3.7) with water containing 10 ml of
Absorbance (peak height) is measured as a function of concentrated nitric acid per litre. Prepare standards daily.
mercury concentration and record. NOTE — Use mercury free (bathed water for the preparation of
reagents and standards.
A-2.2 Apparatus
A-2.4 Procedure
A-2.2.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer (AAS) and
Associated Equipment A-2.4.1 Instrument Operation
Instrument settings recommended by the manufacturer Follow the procedure of the manufacturer’s operating
shall be followed. Instruments designed specifically manual. Connect the mercury vapour generating
assembly as shown in Fig. 3.
8
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
Fig. 3 Schematic Arrangement of Equipment for Measurement of Mercury

by Cold Vapour Atomic Absorption Technique
A- 2.4.2 Standardization A-2.4.3.2 Preparation of test solution

Transfer 100 ml of each of the 1.0, 2.0 and 5.0 µg/1 Weigh to the nearest 0.01 g about 20 g of paper, leach the
standard mercury solution and a blank of 100 ml water paper with about 200 ml of extraction fluid for 18 ± 2 h
to 300 ml BOD bottles. Add 5 ml of concentrated using shaker rotating/moving at 30 ± 2 rev/min. Filter the
sulphuric acid and 2.5 ml of concentrated nitric acid extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron pore
to each bottle. Add 15 ml of potassium permanganate size. Transfer the solution quantitatively to a volumetric
solution to each bottle and let stand for at least 15 min. flask of suitable capacity, dilute to the mark and mix.
Add 5 ml of potassium persulphate (K2S2O8) solution
to each bottle and heat for 2 h in a water bath at 95 °C. A-2.4.3.3 According to the expected mercury content,
Cool and add 6 ml of sodium chloride-hydroxylamine take an aliquot portion of the test solution containing
sulphate solution to reduce the excess permanganate. not more than 5 µg/1 of mercury to a 300 ml
After decolourization add 5 nil of stannous chloride BOD bottle and treat as in A-2.4.2.
solution and attach the bottle immediately to the A-2.5 Calculation
aeration apparatus forming a closed system. As
mercury is volatilised and carried into the absorption Determine peak height of sample from recorder chart,
cell, absorbance will increase to a maximum within a read mercury value from standard curve and determine
few seconds. As soon as recorder returns approximately the mercury content of the sample using the following
to the base line, remove stopper holding the aeration formula:
frit from the reaction bottle and replace with bottle C ×V
containing distilled water. Flush the system for a few Mercury (as Hg), ppm =
M × 1 000
seconds and run the next standard in the same manner. where
Construct a standard calibration curve by plotting
C = concentration of mercury from the calibration
absorbance (peak height) versus mercury concentration
curve;
in µg.
V = volume of teat solution prepared, ml; and
A-2.4.3 Determination M = mass of paper sample taken for testing, g.
A-2.4.3.1 Sample preparation A-3 DETERMINATION OF LEAD (AS PB)
Tear the air dry sample into pieces of suitable size.
Do not use cut or punched edges or other parts where A-3.1 Principle
metallic contamination may have occurred. The lead content of the sample is determined by
electrotherm.al atomic absorption spectrometric method.
9
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
A-3.2 Apparatus suitable volume of the standard lead solution with nitric
acid (1 : 499) and repeat as above (A-3.4.3). Inject a
A.3.2.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer, with graphite suitable portion of each standard solution in order
oven technique in place of conventional burner of increasing concentration. Analyse each standard
assembly. solution and measure the absorbances.
A-3-2.2 Lead Hollow — Cathode Lamp or Multielement A-3.4.6 Calculation
Hollow — Cathode Lamp, for use at 283.3 nm.
Construct a standard calibration graph by plotting the
A-3.2.3 Hot Plate absorbance versus mg of lead concentration of each
standard. Read the concentration of the sample from
A-3.3 Reagents the graph and determine the lead content of the sample
A-3.3.1 Nitric Acid, concentrated. from the calibration graph using the following formula:
C × F ×100
A-3.3.2 Nitric Acid, 1 : 1. Lead (as Pb), ppm =
M
A-3.3.3 Dilute Nitric Acid, 1 : 499. where
C = concentration of lead from the calibration
A-3.3.4 Stock Lead Solution curve;
Dissolve 1.599 9 g of Pb(NO3)2 in a mixture of 10 mi F = dilution factor; and
of concentrated HNO3 and 100 ml of water and dilute
to 1 litre. One millilitre of this solution contains 1.0 mg M = mass of paper sample taken for testing, g.
of lead (as Pb). A-4 DETERMINATION OF CADMIUM
A-3.3.5 Intermediate Lead Solution (AS CD)
A-3.3.6 Standard Lead Solution A-4.1 Principle

Dilute 100 ml of intermediate lead solution to 1 litre The cadmium content of the sample is determined
with dilute nitric acid (1 : 499). One millilitre of this by electrothermal atomic absorption spectrometric
solution contains 0.1 mg of lead (as Pb). method.
A-3.4 Procedure A-4.2 Apparatus
A-3.4.1 Sample Preparation A-4.2.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer, with graphite
Tear the air dry sample into pieces of suitable size. oven technique in place of conventional burner
Do not use cut or punched edges or other parts where assembly.
metallic contamination may have occurred. A-4.2.2 Cadmium Hollow — Cathode Lamp or
A-3.4.2 Preparation of Test Solution Multielement Hollow Cathode Lamp, for use at
228.8 nm.
Weigh to the nearest 0.01 g about 20 g of paper, leach the
paper with about 200 ml of extraction fluid for 18 ± 2 h A-4.2.3 Hot Plate
using shaker rotating/moving at 30 ± 2 rev/min. Filter
the extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron A-4.3 Reagents
pore size.
A-4.3.1 Nitric Acid, concentrated.
A-3.4.3 Transfer the extract to a 250 m1 conical flask.
Add 5 ml concentrate nitric acid and a few boiling chips A-4.3.2 Nitric Acid, 1 : 1.
or glass beads. Slowly evaporate on a hot plate to about A-4.3.3 Dilute Nitric Acid, 1 : 499.
10 to 20 ml. Continue heating and adding concentrated
nitric acid until digestion is complete. Wash down A-4.3.4 Stock Cadmium Solution
with water and then filter if necessary. Quantitatively Dissolve 1.0 g of pure cadmium metal in minimum
transfer filtrate to a 100 ml volumetric flask, dilute to quantity of concentrated nitric acid and dilute to 1
the mark and mix thoroughly.
litre with distilled water. One millilitre of this solution
A-3.4.4 Inject a measured portion of the digested contains 1 mg of cadmium (as Cd).
solution into the graphite oven. Dry, char and atomize
A-4.3.5 Intermediate Cadmium Solution
according to the preset programme. Measure the
absorbance. Add 1 ml of concentrated nitric acid to 50 ml of stock
solution and dilute to 1 litre with distilled water. One
A-3.4.5 Prepare a reagent blank and sufficient standards millilitre of this solution contains 50 µg of cadmium
containing 5.0, 7.5 and 10.0 mg/1 of lead by diluting (as Cd).
10
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
A-4.3.6 Standard Cadmium Solution A-5 DETERMINATION OF

To 10 ml of cadmium intermediate solution add 1 ml PENTACHLOROPHENOL (PCP)
of concentrated nitric acid and dilute to 1 litre with
A-5.1 Principle
distilled water. One millilitre of this solution contains
0.5 µg of cadmium (as Cd). PCP is extracted with acetone by Soxhlet extraction.
Acetone extract is evaporated to dryness and subjected
A-4.4 Procedure to acetylation. The acetylated PCP is determined
quantitatively by Gas Chromatograph-Electron Capture
A-4.4.1 Sample Preparation
Detector (GC-ECD).
Tear the air dry sample into pieces of suitable size.
Do not use cut or punched edges or other parts where A-5.2 Apparatus
metallic contamination may have occurred.
A-5.2.1 Round Bottom Flask, 250 ml.
A-4.4.2 Preparation of Test Solution
A-5.2.2 Soxhlet Extractor
Weigh to the nearest 0.01 g about 20 g of paper, leach the
paper with about 200 ml of extraction fluid for 18 ± 2 h A-5.2.3 Water Bath
using shaker rotating/moving at 30 ± 2 rev/min. Filter the
A-5.2.4 Separating Funnels, 60 ml and 100 ml.
extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron pore
size. A-5.2.5 Injection Syringes, 1 µl, 5 µl and 10 µl
A-4.4.3 Transfer the extract to a 250 ml conical flask. A-5.2.6 Gas Chromatograph with ECD, capillary
Add 5 ml concentrate nitric acid and a few boiling chips columns.
or glass beads. Slowly evaporate on a hot plate to about
10 to 20 ml. Continue heating and adding concentrated A-5.2.7 Glass Columns, length 20 cm, internal diameter
nitric acid until digestion is complete. Wash down with 12 mm filled with 5 cm of silica gel having particle size
distilled water and then filter if necessary. Quantitatively 63 µm × 200 µm.
transfer filtrate to a 100 ml volumetric flask, dilute to
the mark and mix thoroughly. A-5.3 Reagents
A-4.4.4 Inject a measured portion of the digested A-5.3.1 Acetone

solution into the graphite oven. Dry, char and atomize A-5.3.2 n-Hexane
absorbance. A-5.3.3 Acetic Anhydride
A-4.4.5 Prepare a reagent blank and sufficient standards A-5.3.4 Sodium Sulphate Anhydrous
containing 5.0, 7.5 and 10.0 mg/1 of cadmium by
diluting suitable volume of the standard cadmium A-5.3.5 PCP Stock Solution
solution with nitric acid (1 : 499). Inject a suitable Dissolve 10 mg of pentachlorophenol in 100 ml of
portion of each standard solution in order of increasing acetone. One millilitre of this solution contains 0.1 mg
concentration. Analyse each standard solution and of pentachlorophenol.
A-5.3.6 PCP Standard Solution
A-4.4.6 Calculation Dilute 10 ml of stock solution with acetone to
Construct a standard calibration graph by plotting the 100 ml. One millilitre of this solution contains 0.01 mg
absorbance versus mg of cadmium concentration of of pentachlorophenol.
each standard. Read the concentration of the sample
from the graph and determine the cadmium content A-5.3.7 Internal Standard Stock Solution
of the sample from the calibration graph using the Dissolve 1 g of 2,4 dibromophenol in l l of acetone.
following formula: One millilitre of this solution contains 1 mg of
C × F ×100 dibromophenol.
M
where A-5.3.8 Internal Standard Solution
C = concentration of cadmium from the calibration Dilute 1 ml of the stock solution (A-5.3.7) with acetone
curve; to 100 ml. One millilitre of this solution contains 10 µg
F = dilution factor; and of dibromophenol.
11
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
A-5.4 Procedure X= moisture content, percent by mass;

A-5.4.1 Determine the moisture content of the sample Vi = volume of eluent injected, ml;
as given in 9 IS 1060 (Part 5/Sec 2). Vt = volume of total eluent, ml;
B= total volume of hexane extract before
A-5.4.2 Weigh accurately about 1 g of the paper derivetization, ml; and
sample pieces up to two decimal places and put into
a thimble. Extract with about 150 ml of acetone by C = volume of hexane extract carried through
Soxhlet extraction for 6 h. Filter the acetone extract, derivatization, ml.
dry over anhydrous sodium sulphate, and evaporate
A-6 DETERMINATION OF
under vacuum to a small volume approximately to
POLYCHLORINATED B1PHENYLS (PCBS)
5 ml and cool.
A-5.4.3 Clean Up A-6.1 Principle
Transfer the extract (A-5.4.2) to the silica gel packed PCB is extracted with boiling ethanolic potassium
coloumn and elute with about 25 ml of n-hexane at the hydroxide solution. An aliquot of the extract is mixed
rate of 2 ml/min Collect the eluent in a flask. Dry over with distilled water and subjected to extraction with
anhydrous sodium sulphate and evaporate nearly to hexane. The PCB content is determined quantitatively
dryness. by GC-ECD by comparing the pattern of the peaks with
the pattern of a suitable technical PCB.
A-5.4.4 Treat the residue (A-5.4.3) with 1 ml of acetic
anhydride, and heat on a water bath for about 30 min. A-6.2 Apparatus
Remove the flask from the water bath and cool the A-6.2.1 Erlenmeyer Flask, 200 ml.
acetylated product. Transfer the content in a separating
funnel and add 10 ml of hexane and 5 ml distilled water. A-6.2.2 Water Bath
Shake well for 2 min and let the layers be separated.
Collect the hexane layer, dry over anhydrous sodium A-6.2.3 Separating Funnels, 60 ml and 100 ml.
sulphate and evaporate nearly to dryness. Cool for at A-6.2.4 Injection Syringes, 1 µ1, 5µl and 10 µl.
least 10 min, add 1 ml of internal standard solution and
adjust the volume to 5.0 ml with n-hexane. A-6.2.5 Gas Chromatograph with ECD, capillary
columns
A-5.4.5 Inject 2 µl of the solution into the gas
chromatograph. Record the peak size in area and peak A-6.2.6 Glass Columns, length 20 cm, internal diameter
height units. If peak response exceeds linear range of 12 mm filled with 5 cm of silica gel having particle size
the system, dilute the concentration of the extract and 63 µm × 200 µm.
reanalyze.
A-6.3 Reagents
A-5.4.6 Calibration
A-6.3.1 Ethanolic Potassium Hydroxide Solution
Prepare three calibration standards from the PCP
standard solutions. Add 1 ml of internal standard Prepare 1 N ethanolic potassium hydroxide solution by
solution and follow the steps as above (A-5.4.3 to dissolving the required amount of potassium hydroxide
A-5.4.5). Tabulate peak height or area responses in absolute ethanol that has been purified as follows:
against calculated equivalent mass of underivatized Dissolve 1.5 g of silver nitrate in 3 ml of water and
pentachlorophenol injected. Prepare a calibration add it to one litre of alcohol. Dissolve 3 g of potassium
curve. hydroxide in the smallest amount of hot distilled water,
cool, and add it to the silver nitrate solution. Shake
A-5.5 Calculation
thoroughly, allow the solution to stand for at least
Determine the PCP content of the sample from the 24 h, filter and distill.
calibration graph using the following formula: NOTE — Absolute alcohol denatured with 10 percent by
PCP content, mg/kg on dry matter = volume of methanol may also be used.
A B Vi 100 A-6.3.2 n-Hexane

M C Vt (100 X ) A-6.3.3 Sodium Sulphate Anhydrous
where A-6.3.4 PCB Stock Solution
M = mass of the paper sample taken for testing, g; Dissolve 10 mg of any PCB technical in 100 ml of
A = PCP content in µg, from the graph; hexane. One millilitre of this solution contains 0.1 mg
of PCB.
12
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
A-6.3.5 PCB Standard Solution A-6.4.4 Clean Up

Dilute 10 ml of stock solution with hexane to 100 ml. Transfer the hexane extract (A-6.4.3) to the silica gel
One millilitre of this solution contains 0.01 mg of PCB. packed column and elute with about 25 ml of n-hexane
at the rate of 2 ml/min. Collect the eluent in a flask
A-6.3.6 Internal Standard Stock Solution and evaporate to a small volume. Add 1 ml of internal
Dissolve 1 g of 2,4 dibromophenol in 1 1 of n-hexane. standard solution and made up to 10 ml with hexane.
One millilitre of this solution contains 1 mg of
dibromophenol. A-6.4.5 Inject 2 ul of the solution to the gas
chromatograph. From the peaks obtained PCB and
A-6-3.7 Internal Standard Solution Internal Standard are identified by their retention times
Dilute 1 ml of the stock solution (A-6.3.6) with hexane as well as relative retention time.
to 100 ml. One millilitre of this solution contains 10 µg A-6.4.6 Calibration
of dibromophenol.
Prepare three calibration standards from the PCB
A-6.4 Procedure standard solutions and follow the steps as above
(A-6.4.3 to A-6.4.5). Tabulate peak height or area
A-6.4.1 Determine the moisture content of the sample responses against calculated equivalent mass of
as given in 9 of IS 1060 (Part 5/Sec 2). underivatized pentachlorophenol injected. Prepare a
calibration curve.
A-6.4.2 Weigh accurately about 1 g of the paper
sample pieces up to two decimal places and take into a A-6.5 Calculation
200 ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 50 ml of ethanolic
potassium hydroxide solution and heat under reflux Determine the PCB content of the sample from the
condenser for 4 h, filter and dilute to the mark with calibration graph using the following formula:
alcohol in a 250 m1 volumetric flask. Take an aliquot PCB content, mg/kg on dry matter =
portion of the test solution in a seperating funnel, add A Vi 100
sufficient distilled water and 15 ml hexane. Shake well
for 5 min and wait for 15 min. Collect the hexane phase. M Vt (100 X )
A-6.4.3 Filter the hexane extract. Dry the filtrate over where
anhydrous sodium sulphate, and evaporate under A= PCB content in µg from the graph;
vacuum to approximately 5 ml. Take the residue for M= mass of the paper sample taken for testing, g;
clean up.
X= moisture content, percent by mass;
Vi = volume of eluent injected, ml; and
Vt = volume of total eluent, ml.
13
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
ANNEX B
( Forward )
Indian Institute of Packaging, Mumbai Dr Tanweer Alam (Chairman)

B & A Packaging (I) Ltd Kolkata Shri Amal Kumar Mohanty
Shri Tapan Kr. Chand (Alternate)
CPPRI, Saharanpur Dr M. K. Gupta
Dr Sanjay Tyagi (Alternate)
Dr Reddy Laboratories Shri Avinash Talwar
Shri Vinay Kr Singh (Alternate)
Federation of Corrugated Box Manufacturers of Shri Satish Tyagi
India, Mumbai Shri K. P. Singh (Alternate)
Federation of Paper Convertors of India Shri Mukesh Gupta
Shri Sushil Kumar Singh (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Packaging, Mumbai Shri Madhab Chakraborty
Indian Institute of Technology, Roorkee Dr Dharm Dutt
Dr Kirtiraj K. Gaikwad (Alternate)
Dr Vibhor Kumar Rastogi (Alternate)
Indian Paper Manufacturers Association, New Delhi Mr Biswaranjan Dash
Mr Rohit Pandit (Alternate)
Indian Agro and Recycled Paper Mills Association, Dr B. P. Thapliyal
New Delhi Dr Anil Naithani (Alternate)
ITC Life Sciences, Bengaluru Shri Ajith Kumar
Dr Kamal (Alternate)
ITC, Bhadrachalam Shri Chidambara Vinayagam
Shri P. N. Sridharr (Alternate)
J K Paper Shri Mahesh Narayan Bhat
Shri Aayush Srivastava (Alternate)
Nestle India Ltd Shri Barun Banerjee
Shri Deepak Singh (Alternate)
Package Design Research and Test Lab, Moradabad Shri L. M. Gupta
Shri Mayank Gupta (Alternate)
Prem Industries, Ghaziabad Shri Alok Goel
Shri H. P. Singh (Alternate)
Suprabha Protective Products Pvt Ltd, Pune Shri P. R. Bantwal
Ms Rachel Jacob (Alternate)
Tetra Pak India Pvt Ltd, Gurugram Shri Sharad Sharma
Shri Jaideep Gokhale (Alternate)
Uflex Limited, Noida Shri Ashvani Sharma
Shri Rakesh Sharma (Alternate)
Safepack Industries Limited, Pune Shri Rajendra Tapadia
Shri Anand Tapadi (Alternate)
Century Pulp and Paper Limited, Nainital Shri Sanjay Kumar Yadav
Shri Sunesh Yadav (Alternate)
14
IS 2771 (Part 1) : 2022
Yash Papers, Faizabad Shri Jagdeep Hira

Stora Enso, Gurugram Shri Sanjeev Khandelwal
Parksons Packaging, Rudrapur Shri Srikanth Ramamurthy
Shri Pawan Kumar Singh (Alternate)
Siegwerk, Bhiwadi Shri Jatin Thakkar
Priyanka Baweja (Alternate)
Hersheys India Pvt Ltd, Mumbai Ms Deepa Mandar Naik
BIS Directorate General Shri A. K. Lal, Scientist ‘E’ and Head (CHD)
Member Secretary
Shrishti Dixit
Scientist ‘D’ (CHD), BIS
15
Copyright


Headquarters:
NEW DELHI 110002 { 2323 7617
2323 3841
KOLKATA 700054 { 2337 8499, 2337 8561
2337 8626, 2337 9120
CHANDIGARH 160019 { 265 0206
265 0290
{ 2254 1216, 2254 1442
2254 2519, 2254 2315
MUMBAI 400093 { 2832 9295, 2832 7858
2832 7891, 2832 7892
UDC 676’256 : 676’263’8’064’1 IS : 2991 - 1988
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
BASE PAPER FOR WAXED PAPER
( First Revision )
I. Scope - Prescribes the requirements, and the methods of sampling and test for base paper for
Naxed paper.
I.I This standard does not apply to specialized paper for confectionery and food wrapping purposes.
2. Terminology - For the purpose of this standard, the definitions of terms given in IS : 4661-A 986
Glossary of terms used in paper trade and industry ( first revision )’ shall apply.
3. Grades -There shall be two grades of base paper for waxed paper, namely, Grade 1 and Grade 2.
4. Requirements
Q.1 The base paper shall comply with the requirements given in Table 1 when tested according to test
methods given in col 6.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR BASE PAPER FOR WAXED PAPER
SI Characteristic Requirements for Method ~of Test, Ref to

No. r--------*--? c-----~---~
Grade 1 Grade 2 Clause~in Appendix
IS : 1060
(Part I)-1966*
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Substance, g/m* 30 to 60 17 to 26 6 -
ii) Burst index, kPa, ma/g, Min 2’0 2’0 12’5
iii) Tear index mN.m*jg:
Machine direction, Min 8’1 5’5 12’7 -
Cross direction, Min 9’0 6’9 - -
iv) pH, Min 6 6 10

v) Wa~a~;orrpti;ness, percent by 30 14 A
Burst index = Burst factor x0.098; Tear index = Tear factorx0’098
*Methods of sampling and test for paper and allied products, Part 1 (revised).
4.2 The fillers added in base paper for waxed paper shall be such that they do not produce discolour.
ation on ageing.
5. Packing and Marking
5.1 The base paper shall be packed securely and suitably wasagreed to between the purchaser am
the supplier.
5.2 Each package shall be marked with the following information:
a) Description and grade of the material;

b) Mass of package;
c) Batch number;
d) Month and year of manufacture; and
e) Name of manufacturer and trade-mark, if any.
5.2.1 Standard marking - Details available with the Bureau of Indian Standards.
Adopted 3 March 1988 Q October 1988, BIS Or 1

I I

MANAK BHAVAN. 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG
NEW DELHI llDOO2
tS : 2991 - 1988
6. Sampling and Criteria for Conformity
6.1 The paper shall be sampled in accordance with IS : 1060 ( Part 1 )-1966.
6.2 Tests - From each of the packets selected from the lot ( see 6.1 ), one sheet shall be taken out at
random. These sheets shall constitute the sample. One test piece shall be cut from each sheet selected
for each-of the characteristics mentioned in Table 1 and tested. A sheet not meeting the requirements
for any one or more characteristics shall be considered as defective.
6.3 Criterion for Conformity - A lot shall be declared as conforming to all the requirements of this
specification if the number of defective sheets found does not exceed the acceptance number. This
acceptance number shall depend upon the size of the sample and shall be zero if the size is less than
13 and one if it is greater than or equal to 13.
APPENDIX A
[ Table 1, S/No. (v)]
METHODS FOR DETERMINATION OF WAX ABSORPTIVENESS
A-O. General - Two methods are prescribed for the determination of wax absorptiveness. The
method prescribed in 6 of IS : 1060 ( Part 3)-1969 ‘Methods of sampling and test for paper and allied
products, Part 3’ will be referee method and used in case of dispute. Method given below will be a
routine method for quick results.
A-l. Method
A-l .I Apparatus
A-1.1.1 Analyticalbalance - Sensitive to 0’01 g.
A-l .1.2 Oven - Capable of ~maintaining a temperature of 105 III 2°C throughout the interior.
A-l .1.3 Wexbath - A rectangular metal open container measuring about 120 mm by 150 mm and
SO mm deep for keeping paraffin wax with melting point 54’4 to 55°C.
A-1.1.4 Hotplate
A-l .2 Procedure - Cut representative samples of paper 74 mm by 105 mm and weigh each sample
to nearest 0’01 g. Dip the samples into the paraffin waxbath maintained at 70 f2”C and let them
remain there for 10 min. Remove the samples and let them cool. Hang these waxed papers in oven,
maintained at 103 f 2X, for 60 min with short~axis of the sheets parallel to the bottom of oven. Remove
the sheets from the oven and allow them to cool to room temperature for about 15 min. Scrap off
the excess deposited wax from the lower edge of the papers with the help of blade. Weigh them again.
A-l .3 Calculation
(A-B) x 100
Wax absorptiveness, percent by mass =
B
where
A = mass of the test specimen after wax absorption, and
B = mass of the test specimen before wax absorption.
A-1.3.1 An average of five repetitions is to be reported.
EXPLANATORY NOTE
This standard was first published in 1965. In this revision, the requirement of furnish has been
deleted and the value of pH has been fixed at minimum 6. An alternative method for wax absorp-
tiveness for routine testing has,been incorporated.
2
Printed at Printrade, New Delhi, India
AMENDMENT NO. 1 SEPTEMBER 1993
TO
IS 2991: 1988 SPECIFICATION FOR BASE PAPER FOR
WAXED PAPER
(First Revision)
(Page 2, Exphatoty Note) -Add the folowing as second paragraph:

‘A scheme for labelling environment friendly products known as EC0 Mark has
been introduced at the instance of the Ministry of Environment and Forests
(MEF), Government of India. The EC0 Mark would be administered by the
Buteau of Indian Standards (BIS) under the BIS Act, 1986 as per the Resolutions
No. 71 dated 21 February 1991 and No. 42.5 dated 28 October 1992 published in
the Gaz;ctte of the Government of India. For a product to be eligible for marking
with EC0 logo, it shall also carry the ed Mark of BIS besides meeting additional
optional environment friendly requirements. ~For this purpose, the Standard Mark
of BIS would be a single mark being a combination of the m Mark and the EC0
logo. Requirements to be satisfied for a product to qualify for the BIS Standard
Mark for EC0 friendliness, will be inlcuded in the relevant published Indian
Standards through an amendment. These requirements will be optional;
manufrcturing units will be free to opt for the a Mark alone also.
This amendment is based on the Gazette Notification No. 455 dated 13 November
1992 for paper as environment friendly products published in the Gazette of India.
This lmetulment is, therefore, being issued to this standard to include environment
friendly requirements for base paper for waxed paper.’
( Page 1, clause 4.2 ) - Add the following new clause after clause 4.2:
‘4.3 Optional Requirements for EC0 Mark
43.1 General Requirements
43.1.1 The product shall conform to the requirements for quality and performance
prescribed under clause 4.1 and 4.2.
43.13 The manufacturer shall produce to BIS, the environmental consent
clunrrce from the concerned State Pollution Control Board as~per the provisions
of Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and Air (Prevention and
Control of Polution) Act, 1981 along with the authorisation, if required, under the
Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and the ales made thereunder, while
applying for EC0 Mark
a) Trpe A - Manufactured from pulp containing not less than 60 percent by
mass of pulp made from materials other than bamboo, hard wads, soft
woods and reed.
b) Type B - Manufactured from pulp made from 100 percent waste paper.’
(Page 1, clause 5.1 ) -Add the following new clause after 5.1:
“51.1 For EC0 Mark, the product shall be packed in such packages which shall
be recyclable/reusable or biodegradable.’
(Page 1, clause 5.2.1) - Add the following new clause after 5.2.1:
‘5.23 For EC0 Mark, :following additional information may also be marked on
the container/package:
The_criteria for which the product has been labelled with EC0 Mark.’
(CHDO15)
ReprographyUnit, BIS, New Delhi, India
AMENDMENT NO. 2 SEPTEMBER 2008
TO
IS 2991:1988 SPECIFICATION FOR BASE PAPER
FOR WAXED PAPER
( First Revision)
(Page 1, clause 4.3, read with Amendment No. 1) — Substitute

‘Additional Requirements for ECO Mark’ for ‘Optional Requirements for
EC() Mark’.
(CHD 15)
Rcprogrdphy Unit, BIS, New Delhi, India
.
---- -
IS : 5012 - 1987
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
CELLULOSE FILM
(First Revision)
UDC 678.542.3—416 : 621.798.264
© Copyright 1987
NEW DELHI 110002
Gr 9 November 1987
AMENDMENT NO. 1 FEBRUARY 1998
TO
IS 5012 : 1987 SPECIFICATION FOR CELLULOSE FILM
(First Revision)
(Page 3, clause 0.4) — Insert the following after 0.4 and renumber the
subsequent clause:
'0.5 A scheme for labelling environment friendly products to be known as ECO
Mark has been introduced at the instance of the Ministry of Environment and
Forests (MEF). The ECO Mark shall be administered by the Bureau of Indian
Standards (BIS) under the BIS Act, 1986 as per the Resolution No. 71 dated 20
February 1991, published in the Gazette of the Government of India. For a
product to be eligible for ECO Mark it shall also carry Standard Mark of BIS
for quality, in addition to the compliance with the optional environment
friendly (EF) requirements. For this purpose, the Standard Mark of BIS would
be a single mark being a combination of the ISI Mark and the ECO logo.
Requirements to be satisfied for a product to qualify for the BIS Standard Mark
for ECO friendliness, will be included in the relevant published Indian Standard
through an amendment. These requirements will be optional; manufacturing
units will be free to opt for the ISI Mark alone also.
This amendment is based on the Gazette Notification No. 364 dated 7
September 1995 for packaging material/package (Part I Paper Board and
Plastics Excluding Laminates) as environment friendly products, published in
the Gazette of India.This amendment is, therefore, being issued to this standard
to include EF requirements for cellulose film.'
4.6.1.1 The product shall conform to the requirements for quality and
performance prescribed under 4.1 to 4.5.
Price Group 1 1
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
4.6.1.2 The manufacturer shall produce to BIS, the environmental consent

clearance from the concerned State Pollution Control Board as per the
provisions of Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and Air
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 along with the authorization, if
required under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and the Rules made
thereunder, while applying for ECO Mark. Additionally the manufacturers
shall also comply with the provisions under Prevention of Food Adulteration Act,
1954 and the Rules made thereunder wherever necessary.
a) Type A — Manufactured from pulp containing not less than 60 percent
by mass of pulp made from materials other than bamboo, hardwood,
softwood and reed.
b) Type B — Manufactured from pulp made from 100 percent waste paper
or agricultural/industrial waste.
manufactured from virgin pulp and shall be free from dioxins. Printed surfaces
of the paper shall not come into contact with the food and the maximum
amounts of contaminants in paper intended to come into contact with food shall
not exceed the limits prescribed in Table 2 when tested according to the methods
given in Appendix B.

(Clause 4.6.2.2)
Come Into Contact Come Into Contact
with Dry Food with Wet Food and
Food with Fatty Surface
Cadmium (Cd) — 0.5 0.5
Chromium (Cr6+ ) — 0.1 0.1
Lead (Pb) — 3.0 3.0
Mercury (Hg) — 0.3 0.3
2
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
(Page 7, clause 5.2.1) — Insert the following new clauses after 5.2.1:
5.3.1 For ECO Mark, cellulose film shall be packed in such packages which
5.3.2 The cellulose film may display in brief the criteria based on which the
5.3.3 The cellulose film may be sold along with instruction for proper use and
5.3.4 It shall be suitably marked on cellulose film that ECO Mark label is
applicable only to the packaging material/package if content is not separately
covered under the ECO Mark scheme.
NOTE — It may be stated that the ECO Mark is applicable to the product or packaging material
or both.'
(Page 8, Appendix A) — Insert the following text after Appendix A:
APPENDIX B
(Clause 4.6.2.2)
PENTACHLOROPHENOLANDPOLYCHLORINATEDBIPHENYLS
B-1 DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM (as Cr6+)
B-1.1 Principle
The hexavalent chromium is determined colorimetrically by reaction with
B-1.2 Apparatus
Any spectrophotometer suitable for measurement at a wavelength of about 550
nm or photoelectric absorptiometer fitted with filters giving maximum
transmission near 550 nm.
3
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
B-1.2.2 Shaker
Any shaker suitable for rotating/moving at 30 ± 2 rev/min.
B-1.3 Reagents
B-1-3.1 Extraction Fluid — Mix 5.7 ml of acetic acid in distilled water.
B-1.3.3 Sulphuric Acid — Approximately 0.2 N.
B-1.3.4 Diphenylcarbazide Solution
Dissolve 0.25 g of diphenylcarbazide in 50 ml acetone. Store in a brown bottle.
Dissolve 0.141 g K2Cr2O7 in distilled water and dilute to 100 ml. One millilitre
6+
of this solution contains 500 µg of chromium (as Cr ).
Take 10 ml of stock chromium solution and dilute to 1 000 ml with distilled

6+
water. One millilitre of this solution contains 5.00 µg of chromium (as Cr ).
Take 10 ml of intermediate chromium solution and dilute to 1 000 ml with

distilled water. One millilitre of this solution contains 0.05 µg of chromium (as
6+
Cr ).
B-1.3.8 Indicator Paper — Covering the pH range 0.5 to 1.5.
B-1.4 Procedure
Into each of a series of ten 250-ml volumetric flasks, place the quantities of
standard chromium solution as indicated below:
4
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
Standard Chromium Solution Corresponding to Cr6+

ml µg
1.0 0.05
2.0 0.10
3.0 0.15
4.0 0.20
5.0 0.25
6.0 0.30
7.0 0.35
8.0 0.40
9.0 0.45
10.0 0.50
B-1.4.1.1 Add sulphuric acid to adjust the solution pH to 1.0 ± 0.3 in each flask
and dilute to 100 ml. Add 2.0 ml diphenylcarbazide solution, mix thoroughly
and wait for 10 minutes.
B-1.4.1.2 Carry out the measurement on the spectrophotometer or on a
photoelectric colorimeter using appropriate filter with a 1-cm cell at a
wavelength of 550 nm. As references use extraction fluid. Correct the
absorbance readings of standard solution by subtracting absorbance of a reagent
blank carried through the above method.
against chromium content in microgram per 102 ml.
Tear the air dry sample into pieces of suitable size. Do not use cut or punched
edges or other parts where metallic contamination may have occurred.
Weigh to the nearest 0.01 g about 20 g of paper, leach the paper with about 200
ml of extraction fluid for 18 ± 2 h using shaker rotating/moving at 30±2 rev/min.
Filter the extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron pore size. Add
sufficient amount of aluminium sulphate and filter if any precipitate appears.
5
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
Transfer the solution quantitatively to a volumetric flask of suitable capacity,

dilute to the mark and mix.
B-1.4.2.3 According to the expected chromium content, take an aliquot
portion of the test solution containing 10 to 100 µg of chromium to a 100 ml
volumetric flask. Adjust the pH of the solution to 1.0 ± 0.3 by adding 0.2 N
sulphuric acid. Dilute to 100 ml. Add 2 ml diphenylcarbazide solution, mix
thoroughly, and wait for 10 minutes.
B-1.4.3 Calculation
By means of the calibration curve (see B-1.4.1.3 ) determine the quantity of
chromium present:
Chromium (as Cr 6 + ), ppm =
where
m = mass of chromium determined in the aliquot of the sample
solution, µg;
D = ratio of the volume of test solution to the volume of aliquot
portion taken for the colour development; and
B-2.1 Principle

absorption of radiation at 253.7 nm by mercury vapour. The mercury is reduced
to the elemental state and aerated from solution in a closed system. The mercury
vapour passes through a cell positioned in the light path of mercury hallow
cathode lamp of an atomic absorption spectrophotometer. Absorbance (peak
height) is measured as a function of mercury concentration and record.
6
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
B-2.2 Apparatus
Instruments designed specifically for the measurement of mercury using the
cold vapour technique may be substituted for the AAS.
Consists of an absorption cell, peristaltic pump, flow meter, aeration tubing and
a drying tube containing magnesium perchlorate.
Any multi-range variable recorder that is compatible with the UV detection
system is suitable.
B-2.3 Reagents
B-2.3.1 Sulphuric Acid — Concentrated.
Dissolve 25 g of stannous chloride (SnCl2) in water containing 50 ml of
concentrated hydrochloric acid and dilute to 250 ml. If a suspension forms, stir
reagent continuously during use.
B-2.3.4 Sodium Chloride — Hydroxylamine Sulphate Solution
Dissolve 12 g of sodium chloride and 12 g of hydroxylamine sulphate (NH2OH) 2
H2SO4 in distilled water and dilute to 100 ml.
Dissolve 5 g of potassium permanganate in distilled water and dilute to 100 ml.
B-2.3.6 Potassium Persulphate Solution
Dissolve 5 g of potassium persulphate in distilled water and dilute to 100 ml.
7
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987

Dissolve 1.354 g of mercuric chloride in about 700 ml of distilled water Add 10
ml of concentrated nitric acid and make up to 1 000 ml. One millilitre of the
solution contains 1 mg of mercury as Hg.
Prepare a series of standard mercury solutions containing 0 to 5 µg/l by
appropriate dilution of stock mercury solution (B-2.3.7) with water containing
10 ml of concentrated nitric acid per litre. Prepare standards daily.
NOTE — Use mercury free distilled water for the preparation of reagents and standards.
B-2.4 Procedure
Follow the procedure of the manufacturer's operating manual. Connect the
mercury vapour generating assembly as shown in Fig. 1.
F I G . 1 SCHEMATIC ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT FOR MEASUREMENT OF

MERCURY BY COLD VAPOUR ATOMIC ABSORPTION TECHNIQUE
8
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
Transfer 100 ml of each of the 1.0, 2.0 and 5.0 µg/l standard mercury solution
and a blank of 100 ml water to 300 ml BOD bottles. Add 5 ml of concentrated
sulphuric acid and 2.5 ml of concentrated nitric acid to each bottle. Add 15 ml
of potassium permanganate solution to each bottle and let stand for at least 15
minutes. Add 8 ml of potassium persulphate (K 2 S 2 O 8 ) solution to each bottle
and heat for 2 hours in a water bath at 95°C. Cool and add 6 ml of sodium
chloride-hydroxylamine sulphate solution to reduce the excess permanganate.
After decolourization add 5 ml of stannous chloride solution and attach the
bottle immediately to the aeration apparatus forming a closed system. As
mercury is volatilised and carried into the absorption cell, absorbance will
increase to a maximum within a few seconds. As soon as recorder returns
approximately to the base line, remove stopper holding the aeration frit from
the reaction bottle and replace with a bottle containing distilled water. Flush
the system for a few seconds and run the next standard in the same manner.
Construct a standard calibration curve by plotting absorbance (peak height)
versus mercury concentration in µg.
Filter the extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron pore size. Transfer
the solution quantitatively to a volumetric flask of suitable capacity, dilute to
the mark and mix.
B-2.4.3.3 According to the expected mercury content, take an aliquot portion
of the test solution containing not more than 5 µg/1 of mercury to a 300 ml BOD
bottle and treat as in B-2.4.2.
9
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
B-2.5 Calculation
Determine peak height of sample from recorder chart, read mercury value from
standard curve and determine the mercury content of the sample using the
following formula:
where
B-3.1 Principle
The lead content of the sample is determined by electrothermal atomic
B-3.2 Apparatus
B-3.2.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer — with graphite oven technique in
place of conventional burner assembly.
B-3.2.2 Lead Hollow-Cathode Lamp or Multielement Hollow-Cathode Lamp—
B-3.2.3 Hot Plate
B-3.3 Reagents
B-3.3.1 Nitric Acid — concentrated.
B-3.3.2 Nitric Acid — 1:1.
B-3.3.3 Dilute Nitric Acid — 1:499.
Dissolve 1.599 9 g of Pb(NO 3 ) 2 in a mixture of 10 ml of concentrated H N O 3 and
100 ml of water and dilute to 1 litre. One millilitre of this solution contains 1.0
mg of lead (as Pb).
10
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987

Dilute 100 ml of intermediate lead solution to 1 litre with dilute nitric acid
(1:499). One millilitre of this solution contains 0.1 mg of lead (as Pb).
B-3.4 Procedure
Filter the extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron pore size.
B-3.4.3 Transfer the extract to a 250-ml conical flask. Add 5 ml concentrate
nitric acid and a few boiling chips or glass beads. Slowly evaporate on a hot plate
to about 10 to 20 ml. Continue heating and adding concentrated nitric acid until
digestion is complete. Wash down with water and then filter if necessary.
Quantitatively transfer filtrate to a 100-ml volumetric flask, dilute to the mark
and mix thoroughly.
B-3.4.4 Inject a measured portion of the digested solution into the graphite
oven. Dry, char and atomize according to the preset programme. Measure the
absorbance.
B-3.4.5 Prepare a reagent blank and sufficient standards containing 5.0, 7.5 and
10.0 mg/l of lead by diluting suitable volume of the standard lead solution with
nitric acid (1:499) and repeat as above (B-3.4.3). Inject a suitable portion of
each standard solution in older of increasing concentration. Analyse each
standard solution and measure the absorbances.
B-3.4.6 Calculation
lead concentration of each standard. Read the concentration of the sample from
11
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
the graph and determine the lead content of the sample from the calibrat
graph using the following formula:
Lead (as Pb), ppm =
where
C = concentration of lead from the calibration curve:
B-4.1 Principle

B-4.2 Apparatus
B-4.2.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer — with graphite oven technique in

place of conventional burner assembly.
B-4.2.2 Cadmium Hollow-Cathode Lamp or Multielement Hollow-Cathode
Lamp — for use at 228.8 nm.
B-4.2.3 Hot Plate
B-4.3 Reagents

B-4.3.2 Nitric Acid — 1:1.
B-4.3.3 Dilute Nitric Acid — 1:499.
B-4.3.4 Stock Cadmium Solution
Dissolve 1.0 g of pure cadmium metal in minimum quantity of concentrated
nitric acid and dilute to 1 litre with distilled water. One millilitre of this solution
contains 1 mg of cadmium (as Cd).
12
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987

Add 1 ml of concentrated nitric acid to 50 ml of stock solution and dilute to 1
litre with distilled water. One millilitre of this solution contains SO µg of
cadmium (as Cd)
To 10 ml of cadmium intermediate solution add 1 ml of concentrated nitric acid
and dilute to 1 litre with distilled water. One millilitre of this solution contains
0.5 µg of cadmium (as Cd).
B-4.4 Procedure
Filter the extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron pore size.
B-4.4.3 Transfer the extract to a 250-ml conical flask. Add 5 ml concentrate
nitric acid and a few boiling chips or glass beads. Slowly evaporate on a hot plate
to about 10 to 20 ml. Continue heating and adding concentrated nitric acid until
digestion is complete. Wash down with distilled water and then filter if
necessary. Quantitatively transfer filtrate to a 100-ml volumetric flask, dilute to
B-4.4.4 Inject a measured portion of the digested solution into the graphite
oven. Dry, char and atomize according to the preset programme. Measure the
absorbance.
B-4.4.5 Prepare a reagent blank and sufficient standards containing 5.0, 7.5 and
10.0 mg/l of cadmium by diluting suitable volume of the standard cadmium
solution with nitric acid (1:499). Inject a suitable portion of each standard
solution in order of increasing concentration. Analyse each standard solution
and measure the absorbances.
13
Amend N o . 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
B-4.4.6 Calculation
Construct a standard calibration graph by plotting the absorbance versus
cadmium concentration of each standard. Read the concentration of the
from the graph and determine the cadmium content of the sample fro
calibration graph using the following formula:
where
B-5 DETERMINATION OF PENTACHLOROPHENOL (PCP)
A-5.1 Principle
P C P is extracted with acetone by Soxhlet extraction. A c e t o n e extrac

evaporated to dryness and subjected to acetylation. The acetylated PCF
determined quantitatively by Gas Chromatography- Electron Capture Detec
(GC-ECD).
B-5.2 Apparatus
B-5.2.1 Round Bottom Flask — 250 ml.

B-5.2.3 Water Bath
B-5.2.4 Separating Funnels — 60 ml and 100 ml.
B-5.2.5 Injection Syringes — 1 µl, 5 µl a n d 10 µl.

B-5.2.7 Glass Columns — Length 20 cm, internal d i a m e t e r 12 mm filled with
5 cm of silica gel having particle size 63 µm × 200 µm.
14
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
B-5.3 Reagents
B-5.3.1 Acetone
B-5.3.2 n-Hexane
Dissolve 10 mg of pentachlorophenol in 100 ml of acetone. One millilitre of
this solution contains 0.1 mg of pentachlorophenol.
Dilute 10 ml of stock solution with acetone to 100 ml. One millilitre of this
Dissolve 1 g of 2, 4 dibromophenol in 1 1 of acetone.One millilitre of this
solution contains 1 mg of dibromophenol.
Dilute 1 ml of the stock solution (B-5.3.7) with acetone to 100 ml. One millilitre
of this solution contains 10 µg of dibromophenol.
B-5.4 Procedure
(Part 1) : 1966.
B-5.4.2 Weigh accurately about 1 g of the paper sample pieces up to two
decimal places and put into a thimble. Extract with about 150 ml of acetone by
Soxhlet extraction for 6 h. Filter the acetone extract, dry over anhydrous sodium
sulphate, and evaporate under vacuum to a small volume approximately to 5 ml
and cool.
B-5.4.3 Clean Up
Transfer the extract (B-5.4.2) to the silica gel packed column and elute with
about 25 ml of n-hexane at the rate of 2 ml/min. Collect the eluent in a flask.
Dry over anhydrous sodium sulphate and evaporte nearly to dryness.
15
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
B-5.4.4 Treat the residue (B-5.4.3) with 1 ml of acetic anhydride, and heat
a water bath for about 30 min. Remove the flask from the water bath and cc
the acetylated product. Transfer the content in a separating funnel and add
ml of hexane and 5 ml distilled water. Shake well for 2 minutes and let the laye
be separated. Collect the hexane layer, dry over anhydrous sodium sulphate at
evaporate nearly to dryness. Cool for at least 10 minutes, add 1 ml of intern
standard solution and adjust the volume to 5.0 ml with n-hexane.
B-5.4.5 Inject 2 µl of the solution into the Gas Chromatograph. Record the
peak size in area and peak height units. If peak response exceeds linear range
of the system, dilute the concentration of the extract and reanalyze.
B-5.4.6 Calibration
Prepare three calibration standards from the PCP standard solutions. Add 1 ml
of internal standard solution and follow the steps as above (B-5.4.3 to B-5.4.5).
B-5.5 Calculation
following formula:
where
A = PCP content in µg from the graph;
C = volume of hexane extract carried through derivatization, ml;
16
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
B-6.1 Principle
PCB is extracted with boiling ethanolic potassium hydroxide solution. An
aliquot of the extract is mixed with distilled water and subjected to extraction
with hexane. The PCB content is determined quantitatively by GC-ECD by
comparing the pattern of the peaks with the pattern of a suitable technical PCB.
B-6.2 Apparatus
B-6.2.1 Erlenmeyer Flask — 200 ml.
B-6.2.2 WaterBath
B-6.2.3 Separating Funnels — 60 ml and 100 ml.
B-6.2.4 Injection Syringes — 1 µl, 5 µl and 10 µl.
B-6.2.6 Glass Columns — Length 20 cm, internal diameter 12 mm filled with
5 cm of silica gel having particle size 63 µm × 200 µm.
B-6.3 Reagents
amount of potassium hydroxide in absolute ethanol that has been purified as
follows:
Dissolve 1.5 g of silver nitrate in 3 ml of water and add it to one litre of alcohol.
Dissolve 3 g of potassium hydroxide in the smallest amount of hot distilled
water, cool, and add it to the silver nitrate solution. Shake thoroughly, allow
the solution to stand for at least 24 h, filter and distill.
NOTE—Absolute alcohol denatured with 10 percent by volume of methanol may also be used.
B-6.3.2 n-Hexane
Dissolve 10 mg of any PCB technical in 100 ml of hexane. One millilitre of this
17
Amend No. 1 to IS 5012 : 1987
B-6.4.6 Calibration
Prepare three calibration standards from the PCB standard solutions and follow
the steps as above (B-6.4.3 to B-6.4.5). Tabulate peak height or area responses
against calculated equivalent mass of underivatized pentachlorophenol
injected. Prepare a calibration curve.
B-6.5 Calculation
following formula:
PCB content, mg/kg on dry matter =
where
A = PCB content in ug from the graph;
(CHD 16)
Printed at Simco Printing Press, Delhi, India
19
IS : 5012 - 1987
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
CELLULOSE FILM
( First Revision )
Paper and Pulp Based Packaging Materials Sectional Committee,
CDC 45
Chairman
S H R I S. K. K E S H A V A
25/5, R a m Bagh Road
Muzaffar Nagar ( UP )
Members Representing
SHRI M. L. AGRAWAL Federation of Corrugated Box Manufacturers of
India, Bombay
S H R I N . K . D A W A R ( Alternate )
S H R I B. D. AMAR The Metal Box Co of India Ltd, Calcutta
S H R I T . K . DUTTA ( Alternate )
W G - C D R V. B. BATRA Ministry of Defence ( DGI )
S H R I J . K. S I N H A ( Alternate )
S H R I A. K. BOSE Hindustan Lever Ltd, Bombay
S H R I K . K . S E T H ( Alternate )
S H R I S. P. C H A T T E R J E E India Foils Ltd, Calcutta
S H R I B. M A L L I K ( Alternate )
SHRI T. V. FRANCIS T h e Tata Oil Mills Co Ltd, Bombay
S H R I V . SIVARAMAN ( Alternate )
D R JIVENDRA Indian Pulp and Paper Technical Association,
Saharanpur
S H R I S. K. K A P O O R Central Pulp and Paper Research Institute,
Dehra Dun
S H R I A. G. K U L K A R N I ( Alternate )
S H R I P. C. K H A N N A Federation of Biscuit Manufacturers of India, Delhi
S H R I G. N . DALMIA ( Alternate )
SHRI K. V. KRISHNAMURTHY I.T.C. Ltd, Calcutta
DR S. S. R A O K O V A L L I ( Alternate )
SHRI P. R. MALHAN Development Commissioner, Small Scale Industries,
New Delhi
S H R I S. R . S I N G H ( Alternate )
SHRI R. G. M A L L Indian Paper Mills' Association, Calcutta
S H R I L. M . G U P T A ( Alternate )
( Continued on page 2 )
© Copyright 1987
This publication is protected under the Indian Copyright Act ( XIV of 1957 ) and
reproduction in whole or in part by anv means except with written permission of the
publisher shall be deemed to be an infringement of copyright under the said Act.
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard prescribes the requirements and methods of sampling
and test for commonly used cellulose film.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this standard, the definitions given in IS : 4261-
1967* shall apply.
3. GRADES
3.1 Cellulose film shall be of three grades, namely, Grade 300, Grade
400 and Grade 600. Each grade may be plain coloured or coated or
both.
NOTE — These grades, namely, Grade 300, Grade 400 and Grade 600 denote the
normal mass in grams for 10 sq metre of the material.
4. REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Substances — Each grade of cellulose film shall have the substance
as given below:
Grade Weight in g/m2
Grade 300 plain 29 to 34
Grade 300 coated 32 to 37
4.2 Cellulose film shall also comply with the requirements given in
Table 1, when tested according to the methods given in col 6, 7 and 8 of
Table 1.
4.2.1 All test specimens shall be conditioned at a temperature of
27 ± 2°C and a relative humidity of 65 ± 2 percent for a maximum
period of one hour in the case of plain films and for 24 hours in the case
of coated films.
4.3 Flexibility — The film, when folded, under the maximum pressure
of thumb and the first finger shall not show any sign of splitting or
rupture.
4.3.1 The film after heat sealing at 130°C and conditioning for
24 hours at a temperature of 27 ± 2°C and 65 ± 2 percent relative
humidity shall also behave as in 4.3.
*Glossary of terms relating to paper and pulp based packaging materials.
4
IS : 5012 - 1987
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR CELLULOSE FILM

( Clauses 4.2 and 6.3.2 )
SL CHARACTERISTIC REQUIREMENTS FOR METHOD OF TEST,
No. R E F TO CL NO. IN
Grade Grade Grade
300 400 600 IS : 1060 IS : 1060 IS : 4006
( Part 1 )- ( Part 2 )- ( Part 1 )-
1966* 1960† 1985‡
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Moisture content, per- 7.5 to 7.5 to 7.5 to 9 — —

cent by mass 10.5 10.5 10.5
ii) Tensile strength, kg/cm, 12.3 — —
Min:
MD 1.45 2.00 2.90
CD§ 0.72 0.90 1.08
iii) Elongation at break, per- 12.3 — —
cent, Min:
MD 13 13 13
CD 25 25 25
iv) Bursting strength, kg/ 2.25 2.5 3.5 12.5 — —
cm2, Min
v) pH 5.5 to 5.5 to 5.5 to 10 — —
8.0 8.0 8.0
vi) Water soluble chlorides 0.2 0.2 0.2 — 17 —
( as NaCl ), percent by
mass, Max
vii) Water soluble sulphates 0.3 0.3 0.3 — 18 —
( as Na3SO4 ), percent
by mass, Max
viii) Water vapour2 permea- — 14 —
bility, g/m at 38°C
and 90 ± 2 percent
RH for 24 h ( only for
coated grades of cellu-
lose film ), Max:
Creased 30 30 30
Uncreated 15 15 15
ix) Blocking resistance at Nil Nil Nil — — 10
30°C and 75 percent
RH for 24 hours ( only
for coated grades of
cellulose film )
*Methods of sampling and test for paper and allied products, Part 1 ( revised ).
†Methods of sampling and test for paper and allied products, Part 2.
‡Methods of test for paper and pulp based packaging materials, Part 1 ( first
sion ).
§The term CD is sometimes also referred to as TD.
5
QUANTITY UNIT SYMBOL
Length metre m
Mass kilogram kg
Time second s
Electric current ampere A
Thermodynamic kelvin K
temperature
Luminous intensity candela cd
Amount of substance mole mol
Supplementary Units
Plane angle radian rad

Solid angle steradian sr
Derived Units
QUANTITY UNIT SYMBOL DEFINITION
Force newton N 1 N = 1 kg.m/s 2

Energy joule J 1 J = 1 N.m
Power watt W 1 W = 1 J/s
Flux weber Wb 1 Wb = l V.s
Flux density tesla T 1 T = 1 Wb/m 2
Frequency herts Hz 1 Hz = 1 c/s (s - 1 )
Electric conductance siemens S 1 S = 1 A/V
Electromotive force volt V 1 V = 1 W/A
Pressure, stress pascal Pa 1 Pa = 1 N/m 2
Headquarters:
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, NEW DELHI 110002
Telephones: 3 31 01 3 1 , 3 31 13 75 Telegrams: Manaksanstha
Regional Offices: Telephone
*Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri ( East ), 6 32 92 95
BOMBAY 400093
†Eastern : 1/14 C. I. T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, 36 24 99
Maniktola, CALCUTTA 700054
Northern : SCO 445-446, Sector 35C, 2 18 43
CHANDIGARH 160036 3 16 41
41 24 42
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, MADRAS 600113 41 25 19
41 29 16
Branch Offices:
'Pushpak', Nurmohamed Shaikh Marg, Khanpur, 2 63 48
AHMADABAD 380001 2 63 49
'F' Block, Unity Bldg, Narasimharaja Square, 22 48 05
BANGALORE 560002
Gangotri Complex, 5th Floor, Bhadbhada Road, T. T. Nagar, 6 67 16
BHOPAL 462003
Plot No. 82/83, Lewis Road, BHUBANESHWAR 751002 5 36 27
53/5, Ward No. 29, R.G. Barua Road, 5th Byelane –
GUWAHATI 781003
5-8-56C L. N. Gupta Marg ( Nampally Station Road ). 23 10 83
HYDERABAD 500001
R14 Yudhister Marg, C Scheme, JAIPUR 302005 6 34 71
6 98 32
117/418 B Sarvodaya Nagar, KANPUR 208005 21 68 76
21 82 92
Patliputra Industrial Estate, PATNA 800013 6 23 05
Hantex Bldg ( 2nd Floor ), Railway Station Road, 7 66 37
TRIVANDRUM 695001
Inspection Offices ( With Sale Point ):
Pushpanjali, 205A West High Court Road, 2 51 71
Bharampeth Extension, NAGPUR 440010
Institution of Engineers ( India ) Building, 1332 Shivaji Nagar, 5 24 35
PUNE 411005
*Sales Office in Bombay is at Novelty Chambers, Grant Road, 89 65 28
Bombay 400007
†Sales Office in Calcutta is at 5 Chowringhee Approach, P. O. Princap 27 68 00
Street, Calcutta 700072
Printed at Printograph, New Delhi, India
भारतीय मानक IS 6615 : 2021
Indian Standard
सामान्य प्रयोजन पैकिंग/लपेटे हुए

कागज — विशिष्टि
( पहला पनु रीक्षण )
General Purpose Packing/Wrapping

Paper — Specification
( First Revision )
ICS 85.080
© BIS 2021

NEW DELHI-110002
www.bis.gov.in
www.standardsbis.in
Price Group 6
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard (First Revision) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized by
the Paper Based Packaging Materials Sectional Committee had been approved by the Chemical Division Council.
This standard was first published in 1972. In this revision the value of burst index has been increased considering
Wrapping paper of high GSM Kraft papers are being used in core making. This would lead to good core strength
and minimize the core collapse/ crush. It has been observed that if the paper moisture is more, the absorption
of glue, a pasting media, is low and the adhesive property will get affected and will yield poor core strength.
Considering this and also that the binding property of the wrapping paper depends on the moisture content of
the paper, the requirement of moisture has been included. It has also been found that the round discs made
of high GSM wrapping paper are used while packing reels. Gum is applied on the outer surface of the round
disc. The Cobb with a higher value will cause the applied gum to find its way on to the inside paper which will
ultimately cause sticking of paper layers. Therefore, Cobb60 value has been included. Considering the present
market trend Packages contain 125 sheets also incorporated in addition to 500 or 250 sheets. This revised version
also incorporates all the Amendments issued so far.
instance of the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MEF). The ECO Mark is administered by the Bureau of
Indian Standards (BIS) under the BIS Act, 1986 as per the Resolution No. 71 dated 20 February 1991, published in
the Gazette of the Government of India. For a product to be eligible for ECO Mark it shall also carry Standard Mark
of BIS for quality, in addition to the compliance with the optional environment friendly (EF) requirements. For this
purpose, the Standard Mark of BIS would be a single mark being a combination of the ISI Mark and the ECO logo.
Requirements to be satisfied for a product to qualify for the BIS Standard Mark for ECO friendliness are included
in this Indian Standard. These requirements are optional; manufacturing units will be free to opt for the ISI Mark
alone also. It is based on the Gazette Notification No. 364 dated 7 September 1995 for packaging material/package
(Part I Paper Board and Plastics Excluding Laminates) as environment friendly products, published in the Gazette
of India. This requirement is, therefore, included in this standard to include EF requirements for general purpose
packing/wrapping paper.
The composition of the Committee responsible for formulation of this standard is given in Annex C.
observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis shall be rounded off in accordance with
IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised )’. The number of significant places retained in the
IS 6615 : 2021
Indian Standard
GENERAL PURPOSE PACKING/WRAPPING
PAPER — SPECIFICATION
( First Revision )
1 SCOPE 4.2 Grammage and Tolerance on Grammage — The

nominal grammage shall be as agreed to between the
This standard prescribes the requirements and
purchaser and supplier. However, when tested as per
methods of sampling and test for general purpose
6 of IS 1060 (Part 1) no single test result shall vary
packing/wrapping paper including the brown wrapping
by more than ± 6 percent from the nominal grammage.
paper.
Further, mean of 10 test results shall not vary from the
2 REFERENCES nominal by more than ± 4 percent.
The standards listed in Annex A contain provisions 4.3 The paper shall also comply the requirements given
which through reference in this text, constitute in Table 1.
provisions of and necessary adjuncts to this standard.
4.4 Additional Requirements for ECO Mark
At the time of publication, the editions indicated were
valid. All standards are subject to revision and parties 4.4.1 General Requirements
to agreements based on this standard are encouraged to
investigate the possibility of applying the most recent 4.4.1.1 The product shall conform to the requirements
editions of the standards indicated in Annex A. for quality and performance prescribed under 4.1 to 4.3.
3 TERMINOLOGY 4.4.1.2 The manufacturer shall produce to BIS, the

environmental consent clearance from the concerned
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions given in State Pollution Control Board as per the provisions
IS 4661 shall apply. of Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act,
1974 and Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution)
4 REQUIREMENTS Act, 1981 along with the authorization, if required
under the Environment (Protection), Act, 1986 and the
4.1 General — The paper shall be machine finished
Rules made thereunder, while applying for ECO Mark.
or machine glazed. The paper shall be of uniform
Additionally the manufacturers shall also comply with
formation, thickness and substance and shall be evenly
the provisions under Prevention of Food Adulteration
finished, free from creases, cuts and holes. It shall also
Act, 1954 and the Rules made thereunder wherever
be reasonably free from specks.
necessary.
Table 1 Requirements for General Purpose Packing/Wrapping Paper

( Clause 4.3 )
Sl No. Characteristic Requirement Method of Test, Ref to Cl No. in
IS 1060 (Part 1)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Burst index, kPa.m2/g, Min 1.96 12.5
ii) Tear index, in both machine and cross direction, m N.m2/g, Min 5.88 12.7
iii) Tensile index, in machine direction, Nm/g, Min 29.4 12.3
iv) Moisture content, Percent, Max 8 9.0
v) Cobb60, g/ m2, Max, 13.2.2

Top side 40

Bottom side 40
Burst index = Burst factor × 0.098
Tear index = Tear factor × 0.098
Tensile index = Breaking length × 0.009
1
IS 6615 : 2021
4.4.2 Specific Requirements c) Mass in kg per ream of 500 sheets including

wrapping paper; and
4.4.2.1 The paper and paper boards packaging materials/
d) Lot number.
packages shall be manufactured from the following raw
materials:- 5.2.2 BIS Certification Marking
a) 100 percent waste paper or agricultural/industrial The product(s) conforming to the requirements of
wastes; this standard may be certified as per the conformity
OR assessment schemes under the provisions of the
b) A minimum of 60 percent by mass of pulp made Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 2016 and the Rules
from materials other than bamboo, hardwood, and Regulations framed there under, and the products
softwood and reed. may be marked with the Standard Mark.
4.4.2.2 The material if used for the packaging of food 5.2.3 Additional Requirements for ECO Mark
materials, shall be manufactured from virgin pulp For ECO Mark, following additional information may
and shall be free from dioxins. Printed surfaces of the also be suitably marked on the container/package:
paper shall not come into contact with the food and the a) The criteria base on which the packing/wrapping
maximum amounts of contaminants in paper intended paper has been labelled as environment friendly a
to come into contact with food shall not exceed the with ECO Mark.
limits prescribed in Table 2 when tested according to
the methods given in Annex B. b) The packing/wrapping paper shall be sold along
with instructions for proper use and mode of safe
5 PACKING AND MARKING disposal so as to maximize its performance and
minimize wastage.
5.1 Packing c) It shall be marked that the ECO-Mark is applicable
to the packing/wrapping paper if content is not
5.1.1 A ream of 500 sheets shall be the measure of
separately covered under the ECO Mark scheme.
quantity for wrapping paper in sheets. Packages shall
NOTE — It may be stated that the ECO Mark is applicable to
contain 500 or 250 or 125 sheets according to the size
the product or packaging material or both.
and mass of the paper and packed as agreed to between
the purchaser and the supplier 6 SAMPLING
5.1.2 Wrapping paper in rolls, shall be rolled on a core Representative samples for the test shall be drawn as
of 76 mm inside diameter and in length corresponding prescribed in 3 of IS 1060 (Part 1)
to the width of paper, with a wooden plug at each end
extending to a minimum of 75 mm into the core. 7 TEST METHODS
5.1.3 For ECO Mark, packing/wrapping paper 7.1 Tests shall be conducted in accordance with the
shall be packed in such packages which shall be methods referred to in 4.1, 4.2, Col. 4 of the Table 1
recyclable/reusable or biodegradable. and Annex B.
5.2 Marking 7.2 Quality of Reagents — Unless specified otherwise,
pure chemicals and distilled water (see IS 1070) shall
5.2.1 Each package and roll shall be marked with the be employed.
following information:
NOTE — ‘Pure chemicals’ shall mean chemicals that do not
a) Description and grammage of the material; contain impurities which affect the results of analysis.
b) Size of paper;
2
IS 6615 : 2021
Table 2 Maximum Permissible Limits of Contaminants in Paper

( Clause 4.4.2.2 )
Contaminant Paper Intended to Come Paper Intended to Come into Contact with Paper for
into Contact with Dry Food Wet Food and Food with Fatty Surface Filtration
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Cadmium (Cd) 0.5 0.5
Chromium (Cr 6 +) 0.1 0.1
Lead (Pb) 3.0 3.0
Mercury (Hg) 0.3 0.3
3
IS 6615 : 2021
ANNEX A
( Clause 2 )
LIST OF REFERRED INDIAN STANDARDS
264 : 2005 Nitric acid (third revision) 1060 (Part 3) : 1969 Methods of sampling and test
for paper and allied products:
266 : 1993 Sulphuric Acid (third revision) Part 3
1060 (Part 1) : 1966 Methods of sampling and test 1064 : 1980 Specification for paper sizes
for paper and allied products: (second revision)
Part 1 (revised)
1070 : 1992 Reagent grade water
1060 (Part 2) : 1960 Methods of sampling and test (third revision)
for paper and allied products:
Part 2 4661: 1999 Glossary of terms used in
paper trade and industry
(second revision)
ANNEX B
( Clause 4.4.2.2 and Table 2 )
DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM, LEAD, MERCURY, CADMIUM, PENTACHLOROPHENOL
AND POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS
B-1 DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM B-1.3.4 Diphenylcarbazide Solution — Dissolve 0.25 g

(AS CR 6 +) of diphenylcarbazide in 50 ml acetone. Store in a brown
bottle. Discard when solution becomes discoloured.
B-1.1 Principle — The hexavalent chromium
is determined colorimetrically by reaction with B-1.3.5 Stock Chromium Solution — Dissolve 0.141 g
diphenylcarbazide in acid solution at a wave length of K2Cr2O7 in distilled water and dilute to 100 ml. One ml
550 nm. of this solution contains 500 μg of chromium (as Cr 6 +).
B-1.2 Apparatus B-1.3.6 Intermediate Chromium Solution — Take 10 ml

of stock chromium solution and dilute to 1 000 ml with
B-1.2.1 Spectrophotometer — Any spectrophotometer distilled water. One ml of this solution contains 5.00 μg
suitable for measurement at a wavelength of about of chromium (as Cr 6 +).
550 nm or photoelectric absorption meter fitted with
filters giving maximum transmission near 550 nm. B-1.3.7 Standard Chromium Solution — Take 10 ml of
intermediate chromium solution and dilute to 1 000 ml
B-1.2.2 Shaker — Any shaker suitable for rotating/ with distilled water. One ml of this solution contains
moving at 30 ± 2 revolution/min. 0.05 μg of chromium (as Cr 6 +).
B-1.3 Reagents B-1.3.8 Indicator Paper — Covering the pH range
0.5 to 1.5.
B-1.3.1 Extraction Fluid — Mix 5.7 ml of acetic acid
in distilled water. B-1.4 Procedure
B-1.3.2 Nitric Acid — Concentrated (see IS 266). B-1.4.1 Preparation of Calibration Curve — Into each
of a series of ten 250-ml volumetric flasks, place the
B-1.3.3 Sulphuric Acid — Approximately 0.2 N quantities of standard chromium solution as indicated
(see IS 264). below:
4
IS 6615 : 2021
Standard Chromium Corresponding to Cr 6 + B-1.4.2.4 Photometric measuremen — Carry out

Solution the photometric measurements of the test solution
according to the methods given in B-1.4.1.1.
ml μg
B-1.4.3 Calculation — By means of the calibration
1.0 0.05
curve (see B-1.4.1.3) determine the quantity of
2.0 0.10 chromium present:
3.0 0.15 m× D
Chromium (as Cr 6 + ), ppm =
M
4.0 0.20 where
5.0 0.25 m = mass of chromium determined in the aliquot of
6.0 0.30 the sample solution, μg;
7.0 0.35 M = mass of paper sample taken for testing, g; and
D = ratio of the volume of test solution to the
8.0 0.40
volume of aliquot portion taken for the colour
9.0 0.45 development.
10.0 0.50
B-2 DETERMINATION OF MERCURY
B-1.4.1.1 Add sulphuric acid to adjust the solution (AS HG)
pH to 1.0 ± 0.3 in each flask and dilute to 100 ml. Add
2.0 ml diphenylcarbazide solution, mix thoroughly and B-2.1 Principle
wait for 10 minutes. The flameless atomic absorption procedure is a
physical method based on the absorption of radiation at
B-1.4.1.2 Carry out the measurement on the 253.7 nm by mercury vapour. The mercury is reduced to
spectrophotometer or on a photoelectric colorimeter the elemental state and aerated from solution in a closed
using appropriate filter with a 1 cm cell at a wavelength system. The mercury vapour passes through a cell
of 550 nm. As references use extraction fluid. Correct positioned in the light path of mercury hallow cathode
the absorbance readings of standard solution by lamp of an atomic absorption spectrophotometer.
subtracting absorbance of a reagent blank carried Absorbance (peak height) is measured as a function of
through the above method. mercury concentration and record.
B-1.4.1.3 Construct a calibration curve by plotting B-2.2 Apparatus
corrected absorbance values against chromium content
in microgram per 102 ml. B-2.2.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer (AAS)
and Associated Equipment — Instrument settings
B-1.4.2 Determination recommended by the manufacturer shall be followed.
Instruments designed specifically for the measurement
B-1.4.2.1 Sample preparation — Tear the air dry sample of mercury using the cold vapour technique may be
into pieces of suitable size. Do not use cut or punched substituted for the AAS.
edges or other parts where metallic contamination may
have occurred. B-2.2.2 Mercury Vapour Generation Assembly —
Consists of an absorption cell, peristaltic pump, flow
B-1.4.2.2 Preparation of test solution — Weigh to the meter, aeration tubing and a drying tube containing
nearest 0.01 g about 20 g of paper, leach the paper with magnesium perchlorate.
about 200 ml of extraction fluid for 18 ± 2 h using
shaker rotating/moving at 30 ± 2 rev/min. Filter the B-2.2.3 Mercury Hollow Cathode Lamp
B-2.2.4 Recorder/Printer/Display Meter — Any
size. Add sufficient amount of aluminium sulphate and
multi-range variable recorder that is compatible with
filter if any precipitate appears. Transfer the solution the UV detection system is suitable.
quantitatively to a volumetric flask of suitable capacity,
dilute to the mark and mix well. B-2.3 Reagents
B-1.4.2.3 According to the expected chromium content, B-2.3.1 Sulphuric Acid — Concentrated (see IS 266).
take an aliquot portion of the test solution containing
10 to 100 μg of chromium to a 100-ml volumetric flask. B-2.3.2 Nitric Acid — Concentrated (see IS 264).
Adjust the pH of the solution to 1.0 ± 0.3 by adding B-2.3.3 Stannous Chloride Solution ─ Dissolve 25 g of
0.2 N sulphuric acid. Dilute to 100 ml. Add 2 ml stannous chloride (SnCl2) in water containing 50 ml of
diphenylcarbazide solution, mix thoroughly, and wait concentrated hydrochloric acid and dilute to 250 ml. If
for 10 minutes. a suspension forms, stir reagent ontinuously during use.
5
IS 6615 : 2021
B-2.3.4 Sodium Chloride — Hydroxylamine Sulphate B-2.4.2 Standardization — Transfer 100 ml of each
Solution — Dissolve 12 g of sodium chloride and of the 1.0, 2.0 and 5.0 μg/l standard mercury solution
12 g of hydroxylamine sulphate (NH2OH)2 H2SO4 in and a blank of 100 ml water to 300 ml BOD bottles.
distilled water and dilute to 100 ml. Add 5 ml of concentrated sulphuric acid and 2.5 ml of
concentrated nitric acid to each bottle. Add 15 ml of
B-2.3.5 Potassium Permanganate Solution — Dissolve potassium permanganate solution to each bottle and
5 g of potassium permanganate in distilled water and let stand for at least 15 min. Add 8-ml of potassium
dilute to 100 ml. persulphate (K2S2O8) solution to each bottle and heat
B-2.3.6 Potassium Persulphate Solution — Dissolve for 2 h in a water bath at 95 °C. Cool and add 6 ml
5 g of potassium persulphate in distilled water and of sodium chloride-hydroxylamine sulphate solution to
dilute to 100 ml. reduce the excess permanganate. After decolourization
add 5 ml of stannous chloride solution and attach the
B-2.3.7 Stock Mercury Solution — Dissolve 1.354 g of bottle immediately to the aeration apparatus forming
mercuric chloride in about 700-ml of distilled water. a closed system. As mercury is volatilised and carried
Add 10-ml of concentrated nitric acid and make up to into the absorption cell, absorbance will increase to a
1 000 ml. One millilitre of the solution contains 1 mg maximum within a few seconds. As soon as recorder
of mercury as Hg. returns approximately to the base line, remove stopper
holding the aeration frit from the reaction bottle and
B-2.3.8 Standard Mercury Solution — Prepare a series replace with a bottle containing distilled water. Flush
of standard mercury solutions containing 0 to 5 μg/l by the system for a few seconds and run the next standard
appropriate dilution of stock mercury solution (B-2.3.7) in the same manner. Construct a standard calibration
with water containing 10 ml of concentrated nitric acid curve by plotting absorbance (peak height) versus
per litre. Prepare standards daily. mercury concentration in μg.
NOTE — Use mercury free distilled water for the preparation
of reagents and standards. B-2.4.3 Determination
B-2.4 Procedure B-2.4.3.1 Sample preparation — Tear the air dry sample
into pieces of suitable size. Do not use cut or punched
B-2.4.1 Instrument Operation — Follow the procedure
of the manufacturer’s operating manual. Connect the
have occurred.
mercury vapour generating assembly as shown in
Fig. 1.
Fig.1 Schematic Arrangement of Equipment for Measurement of

Mercury by Cold Vapour Atomic Absorption Technique
6
IS 6615 : 2021
B-2.4.3.2 Preparation of test solution — Weigh to the acid (1 : 499). One milliliter of this solution contains
nearest 0.01 g about 20 g of paper, leach the paper with 0.1 mg of lead (as Pb).
about 200 ml of extraction fluid for 18 ± 2 h using
shaker rotating/moving at 30 ± 2 rev/min. Filter the B-3.4 Procedure
extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron pore B-3.4.1 Sample Preparation — Tear the air dry sample
size. Transfer the solution quantitatively to a volumetric into pieces of suitable size. Do not use cut or punched
flask of suitable capacity, dilute to the mark and mix. edges or other parts where metallic contamination may
B-2.4.3.3 According to the expected mercury content, have occurred.
take an aliquot portion of the test solution containing B-3.4.2 Preparation of Test Solution — Weigh to the
not more than 5 μg/l of mercury to a 300-ml BOD nearest 0.01 g about 20 g of paper, leach the paper with
bottle and treat as in B-2.4.2. about 200-ml of extraction fluid for 18 ± 2 h using
B-2.5 Calculation shaker rotating/ moving at 30 ± 2 rev/min. Filter the
Determine peak height of sample from recorder chart, size.
read mercury value from standard curve and determine
the mercury content of the sample using the following B-3.4.3 Transfer the extract to a 250 ml conical flask.
formula: Add 5 ml concentrate nitric acid and a few boiling chips
C ×V or glass beads. Slowly evaporate on a hot plate to about
M ×1000 10 to 20 ml. Continue heating and adding concentrated
nitric acid until digestion is complete. Wash down
where with water and then filter if necessary. Quantitatively
C = concentration of mercury from the calibration transfer filtrate to a 100 ml volumetric flask, dilute to
curve; the mark and mix thoroughly.
V = volume of test solution prepared, ml; and B-3.4.4 Inject a measured portion of the digested
M = mass of paper sample taken for testing; g. solution into the graphite oven. Dry, char and atomize
B-3 DETERMINATION OF LEAD (AS PB) absorbance.
B-3.1 Principle B-3.4.5 Prepare a reagent blank and sufficient standards
The lead content of the sample is determined by electro containing 5.0, 7.5 and 10.0 mg/l of lead by diluting
thermal atomic absorption spectrometric method. suitable volume of the standard lead solution with nitric
acid (1 : 499) and repeat as above (B-3.4.3). Inject a
B-3.2 Apparatus suitable portion of each standard solution in order
of increasing concentration. Analyze each standard
B-3.2.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer — With solution and measure the absorbances.
graphite oven technique in place of conventional burner
assembly. B-3.4.6 Calculation — Construct a standard calibration
graph by plotting the absorbance versus mg of lead
B-3.2.2 Lead Hollow-Cathode Lamp or Multielement concentration of each standard. Read the concentration
Hollow-Cathode Lamp — For use at 283.3 nm. of the sample from the graph and determine the lead
B-3.2.3 Hot Plate content of the sample from the calibration graph using
the following formula:
B-3.3 Reagents
C × F ×100
Lead (as Pb), ppm =
B-3.3.1 Nitric Acid — Concentrated (see IS 264). M
B-3.3.2 Nitric Acid — 1 : 1. where
C = concentration of lead from the calibration
B-3.3.3 Dilute Nitric Acid — 1 : 499. curve;
B-3.3.4 Stock Lead Solution — Dissolve 1.599 9 g of F = dilution factor; and
Pb(NO3)2 in a mixture of 10 ml of concentrated NO3 M = mass of paper sample taken for testing, g.
and 100 ml of water and dilute to 1 litre. One ml of this
solution contains 1.0 mg of lead (as Pb). B-4 DETERMINATION OF CADMIUM (AS CD)
B-3.3.5 Intermediate Lead Solution B-4.1 Principle — The cadmium content of the sample
is determined by electro thermal atomic absorption
B-3.3.6 Standard Lead Solution — Dilute 100 ml of
intermediate lead solution to 1 litre with dilute nitric
7
IS 6615 : 2021
B-4.2 Apparatus B-4.4.5 Prepare a reagent blank and sufficient standards

containing 5.0, 7.5 and 10.0 mg/l of cadmium by
B-4.2.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer — With diluting suitable volume of the standard cadmium
graphite oven technique in place of conventional burner solution with nitric acid (1 : 499). Inject a suitable
assembly. portion of each standard solution in order of increasing
B-4.2.2 Cadmium Hollow — Cathode Lamp or concentration. Analyze each standard solution and
Multielement Hollow-Cathode Lamp — For use at measure the absorbances.
228.8 nm. B-4.4.6 Calculation — Construct a standard calibration
B-4.2.3 Hot Plate graph by plotting the absorbance versus mg of cadmium
concentration of each standard. Read the concentration
B-4.3 Reagents of the sample from the graph and determine the
cadmium content of the sample from the calibration
B-4.3.1 Nitric Acid — Concentrated (see IS 264). graph using the following formula:
B-4.3.2 Nitric Acid — 1 : 1. C × F ×100
B-4.3.3 Dilute Nitric Acid — 1 : 499. M
where
B-4.3.4 Stock Cadmium Solution ─ Dissolve C = concentration of cadmium from the calibration
1.0 g of pure cadmium metal in minimum quantity
curve;
of concentrated nitric acid and dilute to 1 litre with
distilled water. One millilitre of this solution contains F = dilution factor; and
1 mg of cadmium (as Cd). M = mass of paper sample taken for testing, g.
B-4.3.5 Intermediate Cadmium Solution — Add 1 ml B-5 DETERMINATION OF
of concentrated nitric acid to 50 ml of stock solution PENTACHLOROPHENOL (PCP)
and dilute to 1 litre with distilled water. One ml of this
solution contains 50 μg of cadmium (as Cd). B-5.1 Principle
B-4.3.6 Standard Cadmium Solution — To 10 ml of PCP is extracted with acetone by Soxhlet extraction.
cadmium intermediate solution add 1 ml of concentrated Acetone extract is evaporated to dryness and subjected
nitric acid and dilute to 1 litre with distilled water. One to acetylation. The acetylated PCP is determined
ml of this solution contains 0.5 μg of cadmium (as Cd). quantitatively by Gas Chromatograph-Electron Capture
Detector (GC-ECD).
B-4.4 Procedure
B-5.2 Apparatus
B-4.4.1 Sample Preparation — Tear the air dry sample
into pieces of suitable size. Do not use cut or punched B-5.2.1 Round Bottom Flask — 250 ml.
have occurred.
B-4.4.2 Preparation of Test Solution — Weigh to the B-5.2.3 Water Bath
nearest 0.01 g about 20 g of paper, leach the paper B-5.2.4 Separating Funnels — 60 ml and 100 ml.
with about 200 ml of extraction fluid for 18 ± 2 h using
shaker rotating/moving at 30 ± 2 rev/min. Filter the B-5.2.5 Injection Syringes — 1 μl, 5 μl and 10 μl.
size. B-5.2.6 Gas Chromatograph with ECD — Capillary
columns.
B-4.4.3 Transfer the extract to a 250 ml conical flask.
Add 5 ml concentrate nitric acid and a few boiling chips B-5.2.7 Glass Columns — Length 20 cm, internal
or glass beads. Slowly evaporate on a hot plate to about diameter 12 mm filled with 5 cm of silica gel having
10 to 20 ml. Continue heating and adding concentrated particle size 63 μm × 200 μm.
nitric acid until digestion is complete. Wash down with
B-5.3 Reagents
distilled water and then filter if necessary. Quantitatively
transfer filtrate to a 100 ml volumetric flask, dilute to B-5.3.1 Acetone
B-5.3.2 n-Hexane
B-4.4.4 Inject a measured portion of the digested
solution into the graphite oven. Dry, char and atomize B-5.3.3 Acetic Anhydride
absorbance. B -5.3.4 Sodium Sulphate Anhydrous
8
IS 6615 : 2021
B-5.3.5 PCP Stock Solution — Dissolve 10 mg of B-5.5 Calculation — Determine the PCP content of the
pentachlorophenol in 100 ml of acetone. One millilitre sample from the calibration graph using the following
of this solution contains 0.1 mg of pentachlorophenol. formula:
B-5.3.6 PCP Standard Solution — Dilute 10 ml of PCP content, mg/kg on dry matter =
stock solution with acetone to 100 ml. One millilitre A B Vi 100
of this solution contains 0.01 mg of pentachlorophenol. M C Vt 100 X
B-5.3.7 Internal Standard Stock Solution — Dissolve
1 g of 2, 4 dibromophenol in 1 l of acetone. One where
millilitre of this solution contains 1 mg of A = PCP content in μg from the graph;
dibromophenol. B = total volume of hexane extract before
derivatization, ml;
B-5.3.8 Internal Standard Solution — Dilute
1 ml of the stock solution (B-5.3.7) with acetone to Vi = volume of eluent injected, ml;
100 ml. One millilitre of this solution contains 10 μg of M = mass of the paper sample taken for testing, g;
dibromophenol. C = volume of hexane extract carried through
derivatization, ml;
B-5.4 Procedure
B-5.4.1 Determine the moisture content of the sample X = moisture content, percent by mass.
as given in 9 of IS 1060 (Part 1).
B-6 DETERMINATION OF
B-5.4.2 Weigh accurately about 1 g of the paper POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBS)
sample pieces up to two decimal places and put into
a thimble. Extract with about 150 ml of acetone by B-6.1 Principle
Soxhlet extraction for 6 h. Filter the acetone extract,
PCB is extracted with boiling ethanolic potassium
dry over anhydrous sodium sulphate, and evaporate
hydroxide solution. An aliquot of the extract is mixed
under vacuum to a small volume approximately to
with distilled water and subjected to extraction with
5 ml and cool.
hexane. The PCB content is determined quantitatively
B-5.4.3 Clean Up — Transfer the extract (B-5.4.2) to by GC-ECD by comparing the pattern of the peaks with
the silica gel packed coloumn and elute with about the pattern of a suitable technical PCB.
25 ml of n-hexane at the rate of 2 ml/min. Collect the B-6.2 Apparatus
eluent in a flask. Dry over anhydrous sodium sulphate
and evaporate nearly to dryness. B-6.2.1 Erlenmeyer Flask — 200 ml.
B-5.4.4 Treat the residue (B-5.4.3) with 1 ml of acetic B-6.2.2 Water Bath
anhydride, and heat on a water bath for about 30 min.
Remove the flask from the water bath and cool the B-6.2.3 Separating Funnels — 60 ml and 100 ml.
acetylated product. Transfer the content in a separating B-6.2.4 Injection Syringes — 1 μl, 5 μl and 10 μl.
funnel and add 10 ml of hexane and 5 ml distilled water.
Shake well for 2 min and let the layers be separated. B-6.2.5 Gas Chromatograph with ECD — Capillary
Collect the hexane layer, dry over anhydrous sodium columns.
sulphate and evaporate nearly to dryness. Cool for at
least 10 min, add 1 ml of internal standard solution and B-6.2.6 Glass Columns — Length 20 cm, internal
adjust the volume to 5.0 ml with n-hexane. diameter 12 mm filled with 5 cm of silica gel having
particle size 63 μm × 200 μm.
B-5.4.5 Inject 2 μl of the solution into the Gas
Chromatograph. Record the peak size in area and peak B-6.3 Reagents
height units. If peak response exceeds linear range of B-6.3.1 Ethanolic Potassium Hydroxide Solution —
the system, dilute the concentration of the extract and Prepare 1 N ethanolic potassium hydroxide solution by
reanalyze. dissolving the required amount of potassium hydroxide
B-5.4.6 Calibration — Prepare three calibration in absolute ethanol that has been purified as follows:
standards from the PCP standard solutions. Add 1 ml Dissolve 1.5 g of silver nitrate in 3 ml of water and
of internal standard solution and follow the steps as add it to one litre of alcohol. Dissolve 3 g of potassium
above (B-5.4.3 to B-5.4.5). Tabulate peak height or hydroxide in the smallest amount of hot distilled water,
area responses against calculated equivalent mass of cool, and add it to the silver nitrate solution. Shake
underivatized pentachlorophenol injected. Prepare a thoroughly, allow the solution to stand for at least
calibration curve. 24 h, filter and distill.
9
IS 6615 : 2021
NOTE — Absolute alcohol denatured with 10 percent by vacuum to approximately 5 ml. Take the residue for
volume of methanol may also be used. clean up.
B-6.3.2 n-Hexane
B-6.4.4 Clean Up
B-6.3.3 Sodium Sulphate Anhydrous Transfer the hexane extract (B-6.4.3) to the silica gel
packed column and elute with about 25-ml of n-hexane
B-6.3.4 PCB Stock Solution — Dissolve 10 mg of any
at the rate of 2-ml/min. Collect the eluent in a flask
PCB technical in 100 ml of hexane. One ml of this
and evaporate to a small volume. Add 1 ml of internal
standard solution and made up to 10 ml with hexane.
B-6.3.5 PCB Standard Solution — Dilute 10 ml of
B-6.4.5 Inject 2 μl of the solution to the gas
stock solution with hexane to 100 ml. One ml of this
solution contains 0.01 mg of PCB. chromatograph. From the peaks obtained PCB and
Internal Standard are identified by their retention times
B-6.3.6 Internal Standard Stock Solution — Dissolve as well as relative retention time.
1 g of 2, 4 dibromophenol in 1 litre of n-hexane. One ml
of this solution contains 1 mg of dibromophenol. B-6.4.6 Calibration
Prepare three calibration standards from the PCB
B-6.3.7 Internal Standard Solution — Dilute 1 ml of standard solutions and follow the steps as above
the stock solution (B-6.3.6) with hexane to 100 ml. One (B-6.4.3 to B-6.4.5). Tabulate peak height or area
ml of this solution contains 10 μg of dibromophenol. responses against calculated equivalent mass of
B-6.4 Procedure underivatized pentachlorophenol injected. Prepare a
calibration curve.
B-6.4.1 Determine the moisture content of the sample
as given in 9 of IS 1060 (Part 1). B-6.5 Calculation
Determine the PCB content of the sample from the
B-6.4.2 Weigh accurately about 1 g of the paper
calibration graph using the following formula:
sample pieces up to two decimal places and take into a
200 ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 50 ml of ethanolic A Vi 100
potassium hydroxide solution and heat under reflux PCB content, mg/kg on dry matter =
M Vt (100 X )
condenser for 4 h, filter and dilute to the mark with where
alcohol in a 250 ml volumetric flask. Take an aliquot
portion of the test solution in a separating funnel, add A= PCB content in μg from the graph;
sufficient distilled water and 15 ml hexane. Shake well Vi = volume of eluent injected, ml;
for 5 min and wait for 15 min. Collect the hexane phase. M= mass of the paper sample taken for testing, g;
B-6.4.3 Filter the hexane extract. Dry the filtrate over Vt = volume of total eluent, ml; and
anhydrous sodium sulphate, and evaporate under X= moisture content, percent by mass.
10
IS 6615 : 2021
ANNEX C
( Foreword )
Central Pulp and Paper Research Institute, Saharanpur Dr R. M. Mathur (Chairman)

All India Federation of Master Printers, New Delhi Shri Ranjan Kothari
Shri Subhas hander (Alternate)
Ballarpur Industries Ltd, Yamuna Nagar Shri Shamim Ahmed
Shri V. V. Patharkar (Alternate)
Central Forensic Science Laboratory, New Delhi Dr Rajinder Singh
Shri D. R. Handa (Alternate)
Central Pulp and Paper Research Institute, Saharanpur Dr B. P. Thapliyal
Ms Rita Tandon (Alternate)
Central Revenues Control Laboratory, New Delhi Shri R. P. Singh
Century Pulp and Paper Mills, Dist Nainital Shri Manoj Gupta
Shri H. C. Joshi (Alternate)
Directorate of Printing, Ministry of Urban Shri B. Sahoo
Development, New Delhi
Department of Industrial Policy & Promotion, Shri Nand Lal
Ministry of Commerce & Industry, New Delhi
DGS & D, New Delhi Shri H. M. Rathi
Shri Raman K. Sharma (Alternate)
DGQA (Ministry of Defence), Kanpur Shri K. L. Tripathi
DQA (Met & Explosives) Shri C. Kujur (Alternate)
Federation of Paper Traders’ Associations of India, Shri Satya Pal Gupta
Delhi Shri Narottam Vyas (Alternate)
Federation of Corrugated Box Manufacturers of Shri Sunil Sethi
India, New Delhi Shri Harish Madan (Alternate)
Forest Research Institute, Dehradun Dr Sanjay Naithani
Hindustan Unilever Limited, Bengaluru Shri Prabuddha Dasgupta
Shri Hitesh Shenoy (Alternate)
Hindustan Paper Corporation Ltd, Kolkata Shri M. V. Narasimha Rao
Shri Naba K. Ghosh (Alternate)
Indian Paper Manufacturers Association, New Delhi Shri R. C. Mall
Dr S. V. Subrahmanyam (Alternate)
India Security Press, Nasik Shri Sunil Tiwari
Shri D. C. Raghav (Alternate)
Indian Agro & Recycled Paper Mills Association, Shri P. G. Mukundan
New Delhi Dr M. Patel (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Packaging, Mumbai Dr N. C. Saha
Shri S. K. Sarkar (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Technology, Roorke Dr Satish Kumar
Dr S. P. Singh (Alternate)
Indian Recycled Paper Mills Association, Delhi Shri R. C. Rastogi
11
IS 6615 : 2021
Indian Newsprint Manufacturers Association, Representative

New Delhi
Indian Pulp and Paper Technical Association, Shri M. B. S. Nair
Saharanpur Shri N. K. Garg (Alternate)
J K Paper Ltd, New Delhi Shri S. C. Majumdar
Shri S. K. Chatterjee (Alternate)
Kumarrappa National Handmade Paper Institute, Shri G. Hussain
Jaipur Shri Aswini Sharma (Alternate)
NEPA Ltd, Nepanagar, Madhya Pradesh Shri S. K. Mutreja
Shri Niazi R. A. Khan (Alternate)
North-East Institute of Science & Technology, Jorhat, Dr T. Goswami
Assam Dr Dipul Kalita (Alternate)
Parksons Packaging, Mumbai Shri Ramesh Kejriwal
Shri Ranjan Sinha (Alternate)
Pulp and Paper Research Institute, Orissa Dr J. C. Panigrahi
Shri D. K. Tripathy (Alternate)
Rollatainers Ltd, Haryana Representative
Security Paper Mill, Hoshangabad Shri B. B. Dash
Shri D. R. Rohilla (Alternate)
Security Printing Press, Hyderabad Shri A. K. Srivaystava
Shri D. D. Mathur (Alternate)
Seshasayee Paper and Boards Ltd, Erode Shri A. K. Mehrotra
Dr P. Marimuthu (Alternate)
Stationery Office, Govt of India, Kolkata Shri Atanu Bandopadhyay
The Mysore Paper Mills Ltd, Bengaluru Shri P. K. Garg, IAS
Shri N. P. Prabhu (Alternate)
TCPL Packaging Limited, Mumbai Shri Saket Kanoria
VOICE, New Delhi Shri M. A. U. Khan
Shri H. Wadhwa (Alternate)
Whale Stationary Products Ltd, New Delhi Shri Mukesh Gupta
Shri Gaurav Goel (Alternate)
BIS Directorate General Shri E. Devendar, Scientist F and Head (CHD)
Member Secretary
Shri K. K. Paul
Scientist ‘E’ (CHD), BIS
12
Copyright


Headquarters:
NEW DELHI 110002 { 2323 7617
2323 3841
KOLKATA 700054 { 2337 8499, 2337 8561
2337 8626, 2337 9120
CHANDIGARH 160019 { 265 0206
265 0290
{ 2254 1216, 2254 1442
2254 2519, 2254 2315
MUMBAI 400093 { 2832 9295, 2832 7858
2832 7891, 2832 7892
UDC 676.2423
( Second Reprint JUNE 1986)
18:6622-IF
(Reaffirmed 19
Indian Standard
!. I*
;y+_;~ 3 (
SPECIFICATION FOR ,,:,
” I. Scope-Prescribes the requirements and methods of sampling and test for greaseproof paper. It do
3 1not cover the requirements for packing of butter or other allied materials.
x :2. Terminology - For the purpose of this standard, the definitions given in IS : 4661.~1968 ‘Glossary a
t! 1:erm used in paper trade and industry ’ shall apply.
d
*. 21. Requiremtnts
5
-- 31.1 Gcwul-The paper shall be evenly machine finished, It shall be of uniform formation, thicknessan
*
.. 3 ubstance and shall be free from visible specks, greases, cuts, holes, etc. It shall also not have an
:! umpleasant or offensive odour when tested %r accordance with IS:4006 I( Part II) cMethods of test fc
baper and pulp based packaging materials, Part II ’ (under preparation).
= 1.2
;
The paper shall also comply with the requirements given below:
:
E Characteristic Requirement Test Method, Ref to
p-------h---y
E Clause in 1s: Appendix
1060 ( Part I )-
I 1966
,
i
:
Burrt factor, Min 20 12..5 -
Tear factor in any direction, Min 40 12.7 -
1 Breaking length, metrti, Min
I
1 Machine direction -
12.3
, Cross direction 25% >
I
L Oil transudation time, seconds over 1200 - A
1 3.2.1 The above requirements are for paper of grammage 35 g/ms and above.
; 41. Packing ad Marking
i 1L.1 Greaseproof paper shall be packed securely and suitably as agreed to between the purchaser ant
: t he supplier. 500 sheets shall form a ream.
41.2 Each package shall also be marked with the following information:
a) Description and grammage of the material;
b) Size of paper;
c) Mass in kg,per ream of 500 sheets including wrapping paper;
d) Lot number;
e) Month and year of manufacture; and
, f) Manufacturer’s name or recognized trade-mark.
,
4.2.1 ISI CertiJication Marking - Details available from the IndianStandards Institution.
5 . Sampling
5 .I Representative samples of packets for the test shall be drawn from each lot as prescribed in 3 of
IIS : 1060 (Part I )-1966 ‘ Methods of sampling and test for paper and alhed products, Part J (r&cd) ‘.
5.1.1 Number of tests - Each of the packets selected from the lot ( SM 5.1) shall first be examined for the
rdzqpirements agreed under 4.1. Then from each of these packets one sheet shall be taken out at random.
‘I‘hese sheets shall constitute sample. Each of these sheets shall first be examined and tested for the general
r(equirements given under 3.1 and then one test piece shall be cut for various requirements mentioned
ir r 3.2. Tests for these characteristics shall be conducted individually on each ofthe sample sheets. A sheet
n ot meeting the requirements for any one or more characteristics shall be considered as a defective.
Adopted 4 August 1972 ’ @ November 1972, ISI Gr 1

I
INDIAN STANDARDS INSTlTUTlON
IIANAK WAVAN, 9 BAHADUK SHAH LAfAK WRG
YEW DELHI lloooa
IS16622- I972
53.2 &t&on for conform@ -A lot shall be declared as conforming to all ‘t& requirements of this
specification if the number of defective sheets found does not exceed the acceptance number. This
acceptance number shall de nd upon the size of the sample (s&e 5.1) and shall be equal to 0 if the sample
size is less than 13. It shal $ be equal to 1 if the sample size is greater than or equal to 13.
APPENDIX’ A
( &use 3.2 )
GIL.TRANSUDATION TRST FOR DETERMINATION OF GRE,ASR RESISTANCE OF PAPER
A-O. Ocneral- This method gives an accelerated comparison of the relative rates at which oils:or greases,
such as commonly found in foodstuffs, may be expected to penetrate papers, such as uncoated or
unimpregnated greaseproof, glassine and vegetable parchment.
A-l.1 Tubs-Of any rigid material, 25 mm ID and at least 25 mm in height, the ends of which have been
smoothened.
A-I.2 Pipctb or Me&&~ Dropbcr - Calibrated to deliver 1.1 ml. /
A-L3 Timing Dsvics - Stopwatch or laboratory timer.
A-2. Reagent
A-2.1 Tur&tinc, Water-Fret and Colourtd -To 100 mlof pure gum spirit turpentine, relative density O-851 to
0366 at 27”C, add 5 grams of anhydrous calcium chloride and 1.0 gram ofan oil-soluble red dye. Stopper
the container, shake well, and let stand for at least 10 hours, shaking occasionally. Then filter through a
dry filter paper at. a temperature of approximately 27°C and. store in an airtight bottle,’
A-2.2 Standard Sand-Standard sand [ $8~IS: 650-1966 Specification for standard sand for testing of cement
(Jirst revision) ] screened to pass 850 micron sieve but to be retained on 600 micron sieve.
A& Test Specimens

A-3.1 Prepare at least ten 10 cm square specimens from representative samples taken in accordance
with 5.1.
‘A-4. Procedure
A-4.1 Condition and test the specimens as specified in 5 of IS : 1060( PartI)-1966
A.4.2 Make an equal number of tests on each side of the sample. If possible note those made on the felt
side and on the wire side separately.
AI&3 place each specimen on a sheet of white coated and calendered book paper of grammage 100 to
105 g/ms resting on a smooth flat surface. Place an end of the tube on the specimen and put 5 grams of
sand in the tube. Since the purpose of the tube is solely to ensure a uniform area of the sand pile, remove
it immediately after the addition of the sand. Using the pipette or medicine dropper, add 1.1 ml of
the coloured turpentine to the sand, and start the timing device.
AA.4 Move the test specimens undergoing test to unsoiled positions on the coated paper and examine the
uncovered areas for staining every 30 seconds for the first 2 minutes, every minute for the next 8 minutes
and every ,three minutes thereafter. As soon as the first red stain appears on the coated paper, note
the time. Record ‘the: time elapsed, in seconds, between. the application of the turpentine and the
appearance of the first definitely red stain as transudation time. If any test period extends over 20 min,
record it merely as 1200+.
Note- It~ij advisable to make a few preliminary tests if the approximate period is not known.
A-5. Report-Report the average, maximum and minimum test results in seconds to three significant
figures, and if possible, for both wire side up and felt side up. When a test exceeding 1200 seconds
is included in an average, report the calculated average followed by a @USsign. The following is an example
of the recommended form:
Oil Transudation Time Top Side Wire Side
Seconds 0 w
Maximum 120047 1150
Minimum 900 800
Average of 15 tests 1150+ 1000
Grand average .1080+
AMENDMENT NO. 1 JANUARY 1998
TO
IS 6622 : 1972 SPECIFICATION FOR GREASEPROOF
PAPER
(Page1, clause ~1)- Insert the following matter before 1:
‘A scheme for labelling environment friendly products to be known as EC0 Mark
has been introduced at the instance of the Ministry of Environment and Forests
(MEF). The EC0 Mark shall be administered by the Bureau of Indian Standards
(BIS) under the BIS Act, 1986 as per the Resolution No. 7 1 dated 20 February 199 1,
published in the Gazette of the Government of India. For a product to be eligible for
EC0 Mark it shall also carry Standard Mark of BIS for quality, in addition to the
compliance with the optional environment friendly (EF) requirements. For this
purpose, the Standard Mark of BIS would be a single mark being a combination of
the IS1 Mark and the EC0 logo. Requirements to be satisfied for a product to qualify
for~the BIS Standard Mark for EC0 friendliness, will be included in the relevant
published Indian Standard through an amendment. These requirements will be
optional; manufacturing units will be free to opt for the IS1 Mark alone also.
1995 for packaging material/package (Part I Paper Board and Plastics Excluding
Laminates) as environment friendly products, published in the Gazette of India.This
amendment is, therefore, being issued to this standard to include EF requirements
for greaseproof paper.’
(Page 1, clause 3.2.1) - Insert the following new clauses after 3.2.1 :
‘3.3 Additional Requirements for EC0 Mark
3.3.1.1 The product shall conform to the requirements for quality and performance
prescribed under 3.1 to 3.2.1.
3.3.1.2 The manufacturer shall produce to BIS, the environmental consent

clearance from the concerned State Pollution Control Board as per the provisions of
Price Group 1 1
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 1972
Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 land Air (Prevention and
Control of Pollution) Act, 198 1 alongwith the authorization, if required under the
Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and the Rules made thereunder, while applying
for EC0 Mark. Additionally the manufacturers shall also comply with the provisions
under Prevention of Food Adulteration Act, 1954 ahd the Rules made thereunder
wherever necessary.
a) Type A -Manufactured from pulp containing not less than 60 percent by mass
of pulp made from materials other than bamboo, hardwood, softwood and reed.
b) Type B - Manufactured from pulp made from 100 percent waste paper or
agricultural/industr’ial waste.
manufactured from virgin pulp and shall be free from dioxins. Printed surfaces of
the paper shall not come into contact with the food and the maximum amounts of
contaminants in paper intended to come into contact with food shall not exceed the
limits prescribed in Table 1 when tested according to the methods given in
Appendix B

Come into Contact Come into Contact
with Dry Food with Wet Food and
Food with Fatty Surface
(m&g of paper) (n&g of paper) (mg/kg of paper)
Cadmium (Cd) - 0.5 0.5

Chromium (C?’ ) 0.1 0.1,
Lead (Pb) - 3.0 3.0
Mercury (Hg) - 0.3 0.3
2
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 1flL
(Page 1, clause 4.2.1)~Insert the following new clauses after 4.2.1:

‘4.3 Additional Requirements for EC0 Mark
4.3.1 For EC0 Mark, greaseproof paper shall be packed in such packages which
4.33 The greaseproof paper may display in brief the criteria based on which the
4.3.3 The greaseproof paper shall be sold along with instruction for proper use and
4.3.4 It shall be suitably marked that EC0 Mark label is applicable only to the
greaseproof paper if content is not separately covered under the EC0 Mark scheme.
NOTE - It may be stated that the EC0 Mark is applicable to the product or packaging material or
both.’
(Page 2, Appendix A) - Insert the following after Appendix A:
APPENDIX B
(Clause 3.3.2.2)
PENTACHLOROPHENOL AND POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS
B-l DETERMINATION OF CHROMIUM (as Cr6’)
B-l.1 Principle
The hexavalent chromium is determined calorimetrically by reaction with

B-l.2 Apparatus
Any spectrophotometer suitable for measurement at a wavelength of about 550 nm

orphotoelectric absorptiometer fitted with filters giving maximum transmission near
550 nm.
3
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 1qZ
B-1.2.2 Shaker
Any shaker suitable for rotating/moving at 30 + 2 rev/min.
B-l.3 Reagents
B-1.3.1 Extraction Fluid - Mix 5.7 ml of acetic acid in distilled water.
B-1.3.2 Nitric Acid - Concentrated.
B-1.3.3 Sulphuric acid - Approximately 0.2 N.
B-1.3.4 DiphenJlcarbazide Solution
Dissolve 0.25 g of diphenylcarbazide in 50 ml acetone. Store in a brown bottle.

Dissolve 0.141 g ,K$r207 in distilled water and dilute to 100 ml. One millilitre of
this solution contains 500 pg of chromium (as C?).
Take 10 ml of stock chromium solution and dilute to 1 000 ml with distilled water.
One millilitre of this solution contains 5.00 pg of chromium (as C?+).
Take 10 ml of intermediate chromium solution and dilute to 1 000 ml with distilled

water. One millilitre of this solution contains 0.05 pg of chromium (as Cr6+).
B-1.3.8 Indicator Paper - Covering the pH range 0.5 to 1.5.
B-l.4 Procedure
Into each of a series of ten 250-m] volumetric flasks, place the quantities of standard
chromium solution as indicated below:
4
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : l!IQ
Starrdard Chromium Corresporlding to Cr6+

Solutiorr
ml PE
I .o 0.05
2.0 0.10
3.0 0.15
4.0 0.20
5.0 0.25
6.0 0.30
7.0 0.35
8.0 0.40
9.0 0.45
10.0 0.50
B-1.4.1.1 Add sulphuric acid to adjust the solution pH to I .of 0.3 in each flask and
dilute to 100 ml Add 2.0 ml diphenylcarbazide solution, mix thoroughly and wait
for IO minutes.
B-1.4.1.2 Carry out the measurement on the spectrophotometer or on a photoelectric

calorimeter using appropriate filter with a l-cm cell at a wavelength of 550 nm. As
references use extraction fluid. Correct the absorbance readings of standard solution
by subtracting absorbance of a reagent blank carried through the above method.

against chromium content in microgram per 102 ml.
ml of -extraction fluid for I8 I?Z2 h using shaker rotating/moving at 30 f 2
rev/min. Filter the extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron pore size. Add
5
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 19$!Z
sufficient amount of aluminium sulphate and filter if any precipitate appears.

Transfer the solution quantitatively to a volumetric flask of suitable capacity, dilute
to the mark and mix.
B-1.4.2.3 According to the expected chromium content, take an aliquot portion of

the test solution containing 10 to 100 pg of chromium to a lOO-ml volumetric flask.
Adjust the pH of the solution to 1.Of 0.3 by adding 0.2 N sulphuric acid. Dilute to
100 ml. Add 2 ml diphenylcarbazide solution, mix thoroughly, and wait for 10
minutes.
B-1.4.3 Calculation
By means of the calibration curve (see B-1.4.1.3) determine the quantity of

chromium present:
mxD
Chromium (as CP), ppm = M
where
m = mass in pg of chromium determined in the aliquot of the sample
solution,
M = mass in g of the test sample, and
D = ratio of the volume of test solution to the volume of aliquot portion
taken for the colour development.
B-2.1 Principle

absorption of radiation at 253.7 nm by mercury vapour. The mercury is reduced to
the elemental state and aerated from solution in a closed system. The mercury vapour
passes through a cell positioned in the light path of mercury hallow cathode lamp of
an atomic absorption spectrophotometer. Absorbance (peak height) is measured as
a function of mercury concentration and record.
6
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 1972
B-2.2 Apparatus

Instruments designed specifically for the measurement of mercury using the cold
vapour technique may be substituted for the AAS.
Consists of an absorption cell, peristaltic pump, flow meter, aeration tubing and a
drying tube containing magnesium perchlorate.
Any multi-range variable recorder that is compatible with the UV detection system
is suitable.
B-2.3 Reagents
B-2.3.1 Sulphuric Acid - Concentrated.
Dissolve 25 g of stannous chloride (SnCl2) in water containing 50 ml of concentrated

hydrochloric acid and dilute to 250 ml. If a suspension forms, stir reagent
continuously during use.
B-2.3.4 Sodium Chloride - Hydroxylamine Sulphate Solution

Dissolve 12 g of sodium chloride and 12 g of hydroxylamine sulphate (NHzOH)~
HzS04 in distilled water and dilute to 100 ml.
Dissolve 5 g of potassium permanganate in distilled water and dilute to 100 ml.
B-2.3.6 Patassium Persulphate Solution
Dissolve 5 g of potassium persulphate in distilled water and dilute to 100 ml.
7
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 1972

Dissolve 1.354 g of mercuric chloride in about 700 ml of distilled water. Add 10 ml
of concentrated nitric acid and make up to 1 000 ml. One millilitre of the solution
contains 1 mg of mercury as Hg.
Prepare a series of standard mercury solutions containing 0 to 5 pg/l by appropriate
dilution of stock mercury solution (B-2.3.7) with water containing 10 ml of
concentrated nitric acid per litre. Prepare standards daily.
NOTE - Use mercuryfreedistilledwaterfor thepreparation
of reagentsandstandards.
B-2.4 Procedure
Follow the procedure of the manufacturer’s operating manual. Connect the mercury
n
vapour generating assembly as shown in Fig. 1.
w
DIR PUMP
RECORDER
CATHODE LAMP
SAMPLE SOLUTION SCRUBBER CON-TAINING A

IN BOD BDTrLE MERCURY ABSORB\NC UEDLA
FIG. 1 SCHEMATIC ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT FOR MEASUREMENT OF

MERCURY BY COLD VAPOUR ATOMIC ABSORPTION TECHNIQUE
8
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : lW2
Transfer 100 ml of each of the 1.O, 2.0 and 5.0 l.tg/l standard mercury solution and
a blank of 100 ml water to 300 ml BOD bottles. Add 5 ml of concentrated sulphuric
acid and 2.5 ml of concentrated nitric acid to each bottle. Add 15 ml of potassium
permanganate solution to each bottle and let stand for at least 15 minutes. Add 8 ml
of potassium persulphate (K$$Os) solution to each bottle and heat for 2 hours in a
water bath at 95°C. Cool and add 6 ml of sodium chloride-hydroxylamine sulphate
solution to reduce the excess permanganate. After decolourization add 5 ml of
stannous chloride solution and attach the bottle immediately to the aeration apparatus
forming a closed system, As mercury is volatilised and carried into the absorption
cell, absorbance will increase to a maximum within a few seconds. As soon as
recorder returns approximately to the base line, remove stopper holding the aeration
frit from the reaction bottle and replace with a bottle containing distilled water. Flush
the system for a few seconds and run the next standard in the same manner. Construct
a standard calibration curve by plotting absorbance (peak height) versus mercury
concentration in pg.
ml of extraction fluid for 18 * 2 h using shaker rotating/moving at 30 + 2
rev/min. Filter the extract through glass fibre filter with 0.45 micron pore size.
Transfer the solution quantitatively to a volumetric flask of suitable capacity, dilute
to the mark and mix.
B-2.4.3.3 According to the expected mercury content, take an aliquot portion of the
test solution containing not more than 5 pg/l of mercury to a 300 ml BOD bottle and
treat as in B-2.4.2.
9
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 1972
B-2.5 Calculation
Determine peak height of sample from recorder chart and read mercury value from
standard curve and determine the mercury content of the sample using the following
formula:
Mercury (as Hg), ppm = Mz y k
where
B-3.1 Principle
The lead content of the sample is determined by electrothermal atomic absorption
B-3.2 Apparatus
B-3.2.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer - with graphite oven technique in place
B-3.2.2 Lead HollobCathode Lamp or Multielement Hollow-Cathode Lump -

B-3.2.3 Hot Plate
B-3.3 Reagents
B-3.3.1 Nitric Acid - concentrated.
B-3.3.2 Nitric Acid - 1 : 1.
B-3.3.3 Dilute Nitric Acid - 1 : 499

Dissolve 1 S99 9 g of Pb(NO3)z in a mixture of 10 ml of concentrated HN03 and
100 ml of water and dilute to 1 litre. One millilitre of this solution contains 1.O mg
of lead (as Pb).
10
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 19’7Z
Dilute 100 ml of intermediate lead solution to 1 litre with dilute nitric acid (1 : 499).
One millilitre of this solution contains 0.1 mg of lead (as Pb).
B-3.4 Procedure
Weigh to the nearest 0.01 g about 20 g of paper, leach the paper with about 200 ml
of extraction fluid for 18 f 2.h using shaker rotating/ moving at 30 f 2 rev/min. Filter
the extract through glass tibre filter with 0.45 micron pore size.
B-3.4.3 Transfer the extract to a 250-m] conical flask. Add 5 ml concentrate nitric
10 to 20 ml. Continue heating and adding concentrated nitric acid until digestion is
complete. Wash down with water and then filter if necessary. Quantitatively transfer
filtrate to a IOO-ml volumetric flask, dilute to the mark and mix thoroughly.
B-3.4.4 In,ject a measured portion of the digested solution into the graphite oven.
B-3.4.5 Prepare areagent blank and sufficient standards containing 5.0,7.5 and 10.0
mg/l of lead by diluting suitable \ Jlume of the standard lead solution with nitric acid
(1 : 499) and repeat as above (B-3.4.3). Inject a suitable portion of each standard
solution in order of increasing concentration. Analyse each standard solution and
B-3.4.6 Calculation
Construct a standard calibration graph by plotting the absorbance versus mg of lead

concentration of each standard. Read the concentration of the sample from the graph
using the following formula.
11
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 1972
CXFX 100
Lead (as Pb), ppm = M
where
c = concentration of lead from the calibration curve;
B-4.1 Principle

B-4.2 Apparatus
B-4.2.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer - with graphite oven technique in place
8-4.2.2 Cadmium Hollow - Cathode Lump orblultielement Hollow Cathode Lamp

-for use at 228.8 nm.
B-4.2.3 Hot Plate
B-4.3 Reagents
B-4.3.2 Nitric Acid - 1 : 1.
B-4.3.3 Dilute Nitric Acid - 1 : 499.
B-4.3.4 Srock Cadmium Solution
Dissolve 1.O g of pure cadmium metal in minimum quantity of concentrated nitric
acid and dilute to 1 litre with distilled water. One millilitre of this solution contains
1 mg of cadmium (as Cd).
Add 1 ml of concentrated nitric acid to 50 ml of stock solution and dilute to 1 titre
with distilled water. One millilitre of this solution contains 50 j.tg of cadmium
(as Cd).
12
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 1972
To 10 ml of cadmium intermediate solution add 1 ml of concentrated nitric acid and

dilute to I litre with distilled water. One millilitre of this solution contains 0.5 pg
of cadmium (as Cd).
B-4.4 Procedure
B-4.4.2 Preparatiorl of Test Sohtion
Weigh to the nearest 0.01 g about 20 g of paper, leach the paper with about 200 ml
of extraction fluid for 18 f 2 h using shaker rotating/ moving at 30 + 2 rev/min. Filter
B-4.4.3 Transfer the-extract to a 250-ml conical flask. Add 5 ml concentrate nitric

10 to 20 ml. Continue heating and adding concentrated nitric acid untildigestion is
complete. Wash~down with distilled water and then filter if necessary. Quantitatively
transfer filtrate to a lOO-ml volumetric flask, dilute to the mark and mix thoroughly.
B-4.4.5 Prepare a reagent blank and sufficient standards containing 5.0,7.5 and 10.0
mg/l of cadmium by diluting suitable volume of the standard cadmium solution with
nitric acid (1 : 499). Inject a suitable portion of each standard solution in order of
increasing concentration. Analyse each standard solution and measure the
absorbances.
B-4.4.6 Calculation

cadmium concentration of each standard. Read the concentration of the sample from
the graph using the following formula:
13
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 1972
CXFX loo
Cadmium (as Cd);ppm = M
where
M = mass of paper samplelaken for testing, g.
-B-5 DETERMINATION OF PENTACHLOROPHENOL (PCP)
B-5.1 Principle
PCP is extracted with acetone by Soxhlet extraction. Acetone extract is evaporated

to dryness and subjected to acetylation. The acetylated PCP is determined
quantitatively by Gas Chromatograph-Electron Capture Detector (GC-ECD).
B-S.2 Apparatus
B-5.2.1 Round Bottom Flask - 250 ml.
B-5.2.3 Water Bath
B-5.2.4 Separating Funnels - 60 ml and 100 ml.
B-5.2.5 Injection Syringes - 1 ~1, 5 ~1 and 10 ~1.
B-52.6 Gas Chromatograph with ECD - Capillary columns.
B-5.2.7 Glass Columns - Length 20 cm, internal diameter 12 mm filled with 5 cm

of silica gel having particle size 63 pm x 200 pm.
B-5.3 Reagents
B-5.3.1 Acetone
B-5.3.2 n-Hexane
14
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 197.
Dissolve 10 mg of pentachlorophenol in 100 ml of acetone. One millilitre of this

Dilute 10 ml of stock solution with acetone to 100 ml. One millilitre of this solution
contains 0.01 mg of pentachlorophenol.
Dissolve 1 g of 2,4 dibromophenol in 1 1 of acetone. One millilitre of this solution

Dilute 1 ml of the stock solution (B-5.3.7) with acetone to 100 ml. One millilitre of
this solution contains 10 pg of dibromophenol.
B-5.4 Procedure
B-5.4.1 Determine the .moisture content of the sample as given in 9 of IS 1060

(Part 1) : 1966.
B-5.4.2 Weigh accurately about I g of the paper sample pieces up to two decimal
places and put into a thimble. Extract with about 150 ml of acetone by Soxhlet
extraction for 6 h. Filter the acetone extract, dry over anhydrous sodium sulphate,
and evaporate under vacuum to a small volume approximately to 5 ml and cool.
B-5.4.3 Clean Up
-Transfer the extract (B-5.4.2) to the silica gel packed column and elute with about
25 ml of n-hexane at the rate of 2 ml/min. Collect the eluent in a flask. Dry over
anhydrous sodium sulphate and evaporte nearly to dryness.
B-5.4.4 Treat the residue (B-5.4.3) with 1 ml of acetic anhydride, and heat on a
water bath for about 30 min. Remove the flask from the water bath and cool the
acetylated product. Transfer the content in a separating funnel and add 10 ml of
hexane and 5 ml distilled water. Shake well for 2 minutes and let the layers be
15
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 19Q
separated. Collect the hexane layer, dry over anhydrous sodium sulphate and
evaporate nearly to dryness. Cool for at least 10 minutes, add 1 ml of internal standard
solution and adjust the volume to 5.0 ml with n-hexane.
B-5.4.5 Inject 2 pl of the solution into the Gas Chromatograph. Record the peak
size in area and peak height units. If peak response exceeds linear range of the system,
dilute the concentration of the extract and reanalyze.
8-5.4.6 Calibration
Prepare three calibration standards from the PCP standard solutions. Add 1 ml of
internal standard solution and follow the steps as above (B-5.4.3 to B-5.4.5).
B-5.5 -Calculation
following formula:
AxBxV~X 100
MxCxVtx(100-X)
where
A = PCP content in pg from the graph;
vt = volume of total eluent, ml;
C = volume of hexane extract carried through derivatization, ml; and
x = moisture content, percent by mass.
B-6.1 Principle
PCB is extracted with boiling ethanolic potassium hydroxide solution. An aliquot of
theextract is mixed with distilled water and subjected to extraction with hexane. The
PCB content is determined quantitatively by GC-ECD by comparing the pattern of
.the peaks with the pattern of a suitable technical PCB.
16
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 19s
B-4.2 Apparatus
B-6.2.1 Erlenmeyer Flask - 200 ml.
B-6.2.2 Water Bath
B-6.2.3 Separating Funnels - 60 ml and 100 ml.
B-6.2.4 Injection Syringes - 1 pl, 5 pl and 10 pl.
B-6.2.5 Gas Chromatograph with ECD - Capillary columns.
B-6.2.6 Glass Columns-Length 20 cm, internal diameter 12 mm filled with 5 cm

of silica gel having particle size 63 pm x 200 urn.
B-6.3 Reagents

amount of potassium hydroxide in absolute ethanol that has been purified as follows
Dissolve 1.5 g of silver nitrate in 3 ml of water and add it to one litre of alcohol.
Dissolve 3 goof potassium hydroxide in the smallest amount of hot distilled water,
cool, and add it to the silver nitrate solution. Shake thoroughly, allow the solution
to stand for at least 24 h, filter and distill.
NOTE - Absolute alcohol denatured with 10 percent by volume of methanol may also be used.
B-6.3.2 n-Hexane
Dissolve 10 mg of any PCB technical in 100 ml of hexane. One millilitre of this

B-6.3.5 PCB Standard Solution
Dilute 10 ml of stock solution with hexane to 100 ml. One millilitre of this solution
contains 0.01 mg of PCB.
17
Amend No. Ito IS 6622-: 1972

Dissolve 1 g of 2,4 dibromophenol in 1 1 of n-hexane. One millilitre of~this solution
B-6.3.7 Internal Standard Solution .
Dilute 1 ml of the stock solution (B-6.3.6) with hexane to 100 ml. One millilitre of
this solution contains 10 pg of dibromophenol.
B-6.4 Procedure

(Part 1) : 1966.
places and take into a 200-ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 50 ml of ethanolic potassium
hydroxide solution and heat under ref’lux condenser for 4 h, filter and dilute to the
mark with alcohol in a 250-m volumetric flask. Take an aliquot portion of the test
solution in aseparating funne ), add sufficient distilled water and 15 ml hexane. Shake
well for 5 minutes and wait for 15 minutes. Collect the hexane phase.
B-6.4.3 Filter the hexane extract. Dry the filtrate over anhydrous sodium sulphate,
and evaporate under vacuum to approximately 5 ml. Take the residue for clean up.
B-6.4.4 Clean Up -
Transfer the hexane extract (B-6.4.3) to the silica gel packed column and elute with
about 25 ml of n-hexane at the rate of 2 ml/min. Collect the eluent in a flask and
evaporate to a small volume. Add 1 ml of internal standard solution and made up to
10 ml with hexane.
B-6.4.5 Inject 2 j.tl of the solution to the Gas chromatograph. From the peaks
obtained PCB and Internal Standard are identified by their retention times as well as
relative retention time.
B-6.4.6 Calibration
Prepare three calibration standards from the PCB standard solutions and follow the
steps as above (B-6.4.3 to B-6.4.5). Tabulate peak height or area responses against
18
Amend No. 1 to IS 6622 : 19%
calculated equivalent mass of underivatized pentachlorophenol injected. Prepare a

calibration curve.
B-6.5 Calculation
following formula:
AXViXlOO
PCB content, me/kg on dry matter =
Mx V,x(lOO-x)
where
A = PCB content in pg from the graph;
V, = volume of total eluent, ml; and
(CHD 1~6)
Printed at Simco Printing Press, Delhi: India
19
( Reaffirmed 1996 )
lndian Standard zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIH

ALUMINTUMFOILLAMINATEFOR
PACKAGING - SPECIFICATION
(First Revision ) zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLK
UDC 676-264-2 : [ 669.71.416 ] : 621-798.156 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONM
@ BlS 1991 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA

MANAK RHAVAN. 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPO
MARG
SEW DELHI 110002
Se pte m b e r 199 I zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA Price Group 2

Paper and Pulp Based Packaging Sectional Committee, CHD 016
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard ( First Revision ) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft
finalized bv the PaDer and Pulp Based Packaging Sectional Committee had been approved by the Chemi-
cal Divisidn Couniil.
Paper-aluminium foil laminates arc used generally for packaging of cigarettes, soaps, food, pharmaceuti-
cals and presentation articles. Aluminium foil and aluminium foil laminates arc susceptible to corro-
sion. Consequently these should be kept dry and temperature fluctuations leading to condensation of
moisture ( which causes corrosion ) should be avoided. The moisture content of the paper used in lami-
nation should be below 7 percent to avoid danger of corrosion.
Water vapour permeability is an important requirement of packaging materials which will, however,
vary with the item to be packed. Consequently, its value is left to be as agreed to between the
purchaser and the supplier.
The material used in making laminates should be such as not to introduce into the product packed any
substance which has a deleterious effect on its quality or acceptability.
‘I’his zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
lndia n Slandard and 1s 8971 ‘Paper - aluminium foil laminates for general pdchaging’ wcrc first
published in 1978. Keeping in view the operational difficulties the concerned Sectional Committee
decided to amalgamate the two standards and issue a revised version. This revison is the amalgamation
of the two standards.
accordance with 1s 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
offnumerical values ( zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJ
revised)'. The number of sign]-
ficant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this
standard.
8970 : 1991 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihg
IS zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWV
Indian Standard zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHG
ALUMINIUMFOILLAMINATE
FORPACKAGING-SPECIFICATION
(First Revision )
1 SCOPE 4.2 Adhesive
This standard prescribes requirements, methods The adhesive used shall be based on substances,
of sampling and test for paper - aluminium foil such as starch, dextrin, sodium silicate, casein
laminates used for general packaging including rubber, vinyl, polyethylene, wax or bitumen, as
food and pharmaceuticals. specifically agreed to between the purchaser
and the supplier. The choice of the adhesive
2 REFERENCES shall be governed by the end-use.
4.3 .dluminium Foil
The following Indian Standards are necessary
adjuncts to this standard: The aluminium foil used shall be plain or prin-
ted, soft or hard annealed and 0.006 mm to
IS zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
No. Title
0.15 mm thick as specified by the purchaser. It
737 : 1986 Wrought aluminium and alu- shall also comply with the requirements of
minium alloy sheet and strip chemical compositton to 19 000 or 40 800 grades
for general engineering pur- of IS 737 : 1986. The surface of the aluminium
poses foil shall be smooth so as to permit satisfactor!
adhesion to the paper. The variation in thick-
1060 Methods of sampling and test ness of all the reels making up a consignment
( Part 1 ) : 1966 for paper and allied products, when determined in accordance with the
Part 1 method given in Annex A shall not exceed
f 8 percent on the nominal agreed thickness.
1060 Methods of sampling and test
( Part 2 ) : 1960 for naner and allied products, NOTE - Samples of aluminium foil used for lamina-
Pari i tion shall be made available to the purchaser, if
requested by him.
4006 Methods of test for paper
4.4 Paper
( Part 2 ) : 1960 and pulp based packaging
materials, Part 2 4.4.1 The paper used for laminating shall be as
agreed between the purchaser and the suppliet
4006 Methods of test for paper and shall also comply with the requirement<
( Part 3 ) : 1985 and pulp based packaging given in the corresponding Indian Standards.
materials, Part 3
4.4.2 The paper shall be of uniform formation.
4261 : 1967 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
Glossary of terms relating to evenly finished and generally free from specks.
paper and pulp based packa- holes and other blemishes.
ging materials
4.4.3 Tolerance on Substance
3 TERMINOLOGY A tolerance of k 5 percent shall be permitted
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions on the nominal substance. However, where
5 percent is less than 1.5, the tolerance shall be
given in IS 4261 : 1967 shall apply.
* I.5 g/me.
4 REQUIREMENTS NOTE - Samples of paper used for lamination shali
be made available to the purchaser if requested b!
him.
4.1 Description
4.5 Laminate
The laminate shall c,Jnsist of aluminium foil
laminated to paper with adhesive. The adhesive 4.5.1 The laminate shall be plain, printed OI
application shall be continuous or of even inter- finished with surface coating according to the
mittent pattern as specified by the purchaser requirement of the purchaser. The laminate
such that the laminates do not delaminate while shall be supplied in roll or sheet form in dimen-
being used. sions a3 agreed to between the purchaser an<:
1
IS 8970:1991
the supplier. When in roll form, the laminate d) Indication of the source of manufacture;
shall be supplied on cardboard, plastics or metal e) Batch number in code or otherwise to
cores withinternal diameter of 58, 70 or 76 mm. enable the lot of manufacture to be
A tolerance off O-5 mm shall be allowed on the traced back from records; and
width of the roll. Overall diameter of the roll
shall be within f 10 mm of the value agreed to f) Month and year of manufacture.
between the purchaser and the supplier. When
in sheet form, the tolerance on length and 6 SAMPLING
width shall be * 1.5 mm.
6.1 Representative samples of packets or rolls
4.5.2 When measured according to 14 of IS 1060 of the laminate shall be selected from each lot
( Part 2 ) : 1960, the water vapour permeability as prescribed in 3 of 1S 1060 ( Part 1 ) : 1966.
of the laminate shall be as agreed to between
the purchaser and the supplier.
6.2 Number zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFE
of Tests and Criteria for Conformity
4.5.3 The laminates used for packaging of food
and pharmaceuticals shall also comply with the 6.2.1 From each of the packets or rolls selected
following requirements. from the lot ( see 6.1 ) one sheet shall be taken
out at random. These sheets along with any
4.5.3.1 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
Odour sample of paper and aluminium foil obtained
( see Notes under 4.3 and 4.4.4 ) shall constitute
The laminate when tested in accordance with 7 the sample.
of IS 4006 ( Fart 2 ) : 1972 shall not impart any
objectionable odour or taint. 6.2.2 Each sheet of laminate, constituting the
4.5.3.2 The laminate shall also comply with the sample, shall be examined for the requirements
requirements given in Table 1 when tested laid down in 4.1, 4.2 and 4.5.1. These require-
according to the test methods given in co1 4 ments shall be considered to have been satisfied
and 5 of Table 1. if there are no defectives.
5 PACKING AND MARKING 6.2.3 Samples of aluminium foil and paper,

obtained from the supplier or from the samples
5.1 Packing of laminate ( see 6.2.1 ) shall be tested indivi-
dually for the requirements laid down in 4.3
The packing of the material shall be done as and 4.4 respectively. For other characteristics
agreed to between the purchaser and the supp-
given in 4.5 the selected rolls or sheets
lier taking care to minimize atmospheric and ( see 6.2.1 ) shall be tested. These requirements
handling hazards. shall be considered to have been satisfied if
5.2 Marking the number of defectives does not exceed the
acceptance number. This acceptance number
Each packet or roll shall be marked with the shall depend upon the size of the sample and
following information: shall be equal to 0 if the sample size is less
than 13. It shall be equal to 1 if the sample size
a) Description of the laminate;
is greater than or equal to 13.
b) Size and number of laminate sheets in
the packet, or length and width of roll; 6.2.4 The lot shall be declared as conforming to
c) Net and gross mass in kg of the packet or the requirements of this specification if 6.2.2
roll; and 6.2.3 are satisfied.
Table 1 Requirements for Paper - Alumiuium Foil Laminates for Food zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSR
and Pharmaceuticals
( Clause 4.5.3.2 )
Sl Characteristic Requirement Method of Test, Ref to Cl No. in

r--------- h___-____ --,
No.
IS 1060 IS 1060
( Pzrt 1 ) : 1966 ( Part 2 ) : I(‘(, 7
(1) (2) (3) i1) (5)
i) Arsenic content, ppm, zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
Max 7 6
ii) Total copper, ppm, Max 30 _ 7
iii) Water soluble copper, ppm, Max I0 - ‘1
-,\
8<I - s
iv) Total iron, ppm, Max
U) Water soluble iron, ppm, M ns I5 IO
:i: I6 -
vi) Lead, ppm, Max _--.--
2
IS 8970 : 1991 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcb
ANNEX A
( Clause 4.3 ) zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF ALUMINIUM FOIL
A-l PROCEDURE A-2 CALCULATION

Prepare samples of laminate of known area of Calculate the thickness of the foil as t’otlows:
approximately 500 cm% from flat uncreased
sheets by cutting round a metal template with Thickness of the foil, in cm = -mP
<l 2: 0 X h
bevelled-edges by-means of a sharp k&fe. Clean M,here
the sample with a suitable solvent to remove all
coatings, inks, traces of impurities on foil and
112= mass in g of the sample of zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWV
foil,
wash in appropriate medium to separate paper 11 = density of aluminium ( 2.71 g/cm:j 1.
and adhesive from the foil. Dry the sample of a = length in cm of foil test piece, ant!
foil to constant mass at 105” C. 11 = width in cm of the foil test piece.
3
Standard Mark
The use of the Standard Mark is governed by the provisions of the Br~eau Q/” zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQ
Ztuliurl
Stmtlurtls Act, lY86 and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The Standard Mark on
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised by RIS and operated by the
131s is a statutory institution established under the Bureau of zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCB

Indian S~ar~durds AC/, 1986 to promote
Copyright
BIS has the copyright NO part of these publications may be reproduced

of all its publications. zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA in any
form without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free USC, in the course of
implementing the standard, of necessary details, such as symbols and sizes, type or grade designations.
Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director ( Publications ), BIS.
Indian Standards are reviewed periodically and revised, when necessary and amendments, if any, are
issued from time to time. Users of Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in possession zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedc
o f the
latest amendments or edition. Comments on this Indian Standard may be sent to BTS giving the
Dot : No. CHD 16 ( 0051 )
Headquarter :
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002 Telegrams : Manaksanstha
Telephones : 331 01 31, 331 13 75 ( Common to all Offices )
Regional Offices ; Telephone
Central : Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg t 331 01

13 75
31
NEW DELHI 110002
Eastern : l/14 C. I. T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Maniktola 87 86 62

CALCUTTA 700054
Northern : SC0 445-446, Sector 35-C, CHANDIGARH 160036 53 38 43
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600113 235 02 16
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri ( East) 632 92 95

BOMBAY 400093
Branches : AIIMADADAD. BANGALORE. BFIOPAL. BHURANESHWAR.

COIM BATORE. FAK IDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GIJWAHATI.
HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR. PATNA. THIRUVANANTHAPllRAM.
IS 8970:1991 ALUMIN%I FOIL LAMINATE FOR

PACKAGING — SPECIFICATION
( First Reviswn )
( Page 1, clause 4.4.3 ) — Substitute the following for the existing clause
alongwith ‘NOTE’:
‘4.4.3 Grammage and Tolerance on Grammage
The nominal grammage shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the
supplier. However, when tested as per 6 of IS 1060 (Part 1), no single test result
shall vary by more than f6 percent from the nominal grammage. Further, the
mean of 10 test results shall not vary from the nominal by more than *4 percent.’
(CHD 15)
. ..-
AMENDMENT NO.
2 FEBRUARY 2005
TO
IS 8970:1991 ALUMINIUM FOIL LAMINATE FOR
PACKAGING — SPECIFICATION
( First Revision)
( Pa<ge 1, clause 4.4.2) — Insert the following at the end:

‘pH of paper shall be within 5.5 to 7.0.’
(cHD 15)
ReprographyUnit, BIS, New Delhi, India
IS: 9493· 1980
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR 2609
CARTONS FOR NON-SOAPY DETERGENTS
DDC 621·798'143:661·185
© Copyright 1981
INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTION
MANAK BHAVAN. 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG
NEW DELHI 110002
January 1981
IS : 9493 - 1980
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
Paper and Flexible Packaging Sectional Committee, MCPD 14
Chairman Representing
SHRI K. VISWANATHAN Metal Box India Ltd, Calcutta
Members
SHRI K. R. NARASIMHAN ( Alternate to
Shri K. Viswanathan )
DR S. R. AGARWAL Glaxo Laboratories ( India) Ltd, Bombay
SHRI S. M. KHAN ( Alternate)
SHRI A. B. AJMERA Card Board Box Manufacturing Company, Calcutta
SHRI C. B. AJMERA ( Alternate)
DR R. P. ANEJA National Dairy Development Board, Anand
SHRI G. K. BHAIA Indian Plastics Federation, Calcutta
SHRI VIDYA CHARAN BHARGAVA Directorate of Plant Protection Quarantine &
Storage ( Ministry of Agriculture ), Faridabad
SHRI L. N. BURMAN Indian Paper Makers Association, Calcutta
SHRI P. L. BURMAN Indian Papef Mills Association, Calcutta
SHRI D. S. CHADHA Directorate General of Health Services (Central
Committee for Food Standards), New Delhi
SHRIMATI DEBI MUKHERJEE ( Alternate)
DR S. S. CHADHA Pesticides Association of India, New Delhi
SHRt S. K. RAMAN ( Alternate)
SHRI S. CHAKRABORTI Hindustan Lever Limited, Bombay
SHRI ADIRAJ SARIN ( Alternate)
SHRI B. D. CHATTERJEE Indian Petrochemicals Corporation Ltd, Vadodara
SHRI P. R. SESHAN ( Alternate)
SHRt T. GANGADHARAN Indian Explosives Limited, Calcutta
SHRI R. KRISHNAN (Alternate )
SHRI P. S. HARIHARAKRISHNAN The Travancore Rayons Limited, Kerala
SHRI BHAGVAN BALAJI SINGH
( Alternate)
DR R. JAYARAM Federation of Biscuit Manufacturer's of India,
Delhi
SHRI S. K. KESHAVA India Tobacco Company Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI Y. C. DEVESHWAR ( Alternate)
SHRI A. J. KOTHARI Larsen & Toubro Limited, Bombay
SHRI R. P. SOOCHAK ( Alternate)
© Copyright 1981
reproduction in whole or in part by any means except with written permission of
the publisher shall be deemed to be an infringement of copyright under the said Act.
IS : 9493 • 1980
( Continued from page 1 )
SHRIJ.S. ~ATHARU Directorate General of Technical Development,
New Delhi
SHRI V. B. SAXENA ( Alternate)
SHRI A. L. ~UTHIAH India Packaging Products Pvt Ltd, Bangalore
SHRI A. I. ANNAMALAI ( Alternate )
SHRI P. V. NARAYANAN Indian Institute of Packaging, Bombay
SHRI A. K. SENGUPTA ( Alternate)
DR A. N. NAYAR Packaging and Wood Products Consultancy Service,
New Delhi
SHRI SANJAY K. NAYAR ( Alternate )
DR S. Y. PANDIT Bayer ( India) Limited, Bombay
DR P. V. RAIKAR ( Alternate )
SHRI M. K. RAMASAMI Jayant Packaging Pvt Ltd, Madras
SHRI R. ~UTHIAH ( Alternate)
SHRI M. K. RAMASAMI Federation of Corrugated Box Manufacturers of
India, Bombay
SHRI S. S. KAJRIWAL ( Alternate)
SHRI C. V. N. RAO Office of the Development Commissioner, New
Delhi
SHRI G. V. RAO Directorate of Standardization (Ministry of
Defence ), New Delhi
SHRI O. P. SRIVASTAVA ( Alternate)
SHRI R. N. SAXENA Railway Board ( Ministry of Railways ), New Delhi
SHRI J. C. SHAH Federation of Association of Small Industries of
India, New Delhi
SHRI D. CHADHA ( Alternate)
SHRI PRAFULL J. SHETH Solid Containers Ltd, Bombay
SHRI V. S. JOSHI ( Alternate)
SHRI M. K. LAHERI ( Alternate)
SHRI S. SUNDER India Foils Limited, Calcutta
SHRI S. P. CHATTERJEE ( Alternate )
SHRI R. C. TANDON Forest Research Institute & Colleges, Dehra Dun
SHRI D. V. VARMA Directorate General of Inspection (Ministry of
Defence), New Delhi
SHRI NIRMAL SINGH ( Alternate)
SHRI P. S. DAs, Director General, lSI (Ex-officio Member)
Director ( MCPD)
Secretary
SHRI A. R. GULATI
Deputy Director ( ~CPD ), lSI
Cartons Subcommittee, MCPD 14: 1
Convener
SHRI T. V. S. ~ANIAN India Coated Cartons Pvt Ltd, Bangalore
Members
SHRI R. M. ~UTHIAH ( Alternate to
Shri T. V. S. Manian )
2
IS : 9493 - 1980
( Continued/rom page 2 )
DR S. R. AGARWAL Glaxo Laboratories (India) Ltd, Bombay
SHRI S. M. KHAN ( Alternate)
DR R. P. ANEJA National Dairy Development Board, Anand
SHRI V. K. BHANDARI Union Carbide India Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI K. S. BHARGAVA Rohtas Industries Ltd, Dalmianagar
SHRI S. S. MANDA ( Alternate)
SHRI S. CHAKRABARTI Hindustan Lever Ltd, Bombay
SHRI P. K. BOSE ( Alternate)
SHRI J. M. DATTA The Britannia Biscuit Co Ltd, Bombay
SHRI T. GANGADHARAN Indian Explosives Limited, Calcutta
SHRI R. KRISHNAN ( Alternate)
SHRI R. KRISHNAMOORTHY Rollatainers Limited, Faridabad
SHRI A. S. NARAYANAN ( Alternate)
SHRI F. J. MCMELIAN Coats of India Limited, Calcutta
DR P. K. DUTT ( Alternate)
SHRI T. R. MEHTA Colour Cartons Limited, Bombay
SHRI C. T. THADANI ( Alternate)
SHRI T. R. RAJAGOPALAN Metal Box India Limited, Calcutta
REPRESENTATIVE ITC Limited, Calcutta
SHRI R. C. SHAH Baker & Co Pvt Ltd, Bombay
SHRI J. C. SHAH ( Alternate)
SHRI V. C. SOOD Indian Tea Association, Calcutta
SHRI S. S. THAKUR Orient Paper Mills Ltd, Sambalpur ( Orissa)
SHRI T. R. SAHUNJA ( Alternate)
SHRI A. R. VIJAYANDRA RAO Central Food Technological Research Institute,
Mysore
AMENDMENT NQ. 1 MARCH 1997
TO
IS 9493 : 1980 SPECIFICATION FOR CARTONS FOR
NON-SOAPY DETERGENTS
( Page 3, clause 0.2 ) - Insert the following new clause after 0.2 and
renumber the subsequent clauses:
'0.3 A scheme for labelling environment friendly products known as ECO Mark
has been introduced at the instance of the Ministry Of Environment and Forests
(MEF), Government of India. The ECO Mark would be administered by the
Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) under the HIS Act, 1986 as per the Resolutions
No. 71 dated 21 February 1991 and No. 425 dated 28 October 1992 published in
the Gazette of the Government of India. For a product to be eligible for marking
with ECO logo, it shall also carry the lSI Mark of BISbesides meeting additional
environment friendly requirements. For this purpose, the Standard Mark of BIS
would be a single mark being a combination of the lSI Mark and the ECO logo.
Requirements to be satisfied for a product to qualify for the BIS Standard Mark
for ECO friendliness, will be included in the relevant published Indian Standards
through an amendment. These requirements will be optional, manufacturing
units will be free to opt for the lSI Mark alone also.
1995 for packaging material/package (Part I Paper Board and Plastics excluding
laminates) as environment friendly products, published in the Gazette of India.
This amendment is, therefore, being issued to this standard to include
environment friendly requirements for cartons for non-soapy detergents.'
( Page 7, clause 5.5 ) - Insert the following new clauses after 5.5 and
renumber the subsequent clauses:
'6 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ECO 1\.fARK
6.1 GeneralRequirements
6.1.1 The product shall conform to the requirements for quality and performance
prescribed under 3 to 5.
6.1.2 The paper and paper boards used for the manufacture of packaging
materials/packages shall comply with the relevant Indian Standards.
1
Amend No.1 to IS 9493 : 1980
6.1.3 The manufacturer shall produce to BIS, the environmental consent
clearance from the concerned State Pollution Control Board as per the provisions
of Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and Air ( Prevention
and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 alongwith the authorization, if required,
under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and the Rules made thereunder,
while applying for ECO Mark.
6.2 Specific Requirements
6.2.1 The material shall be of the following two types depending on the raw
a) Type A - Manufactured from pulp made from 100 percent waste paper
or agricultural/industrial waste.
b) Type B - Manufactured from pulp containing not less than 60 percent
by mass of pulp made from materials other than bamboo, hardwood,
softwood and reed.
NOTE - The manufacturer shall provide documentary evidence by way of certificate or
declaration to this effect to SIS while applying for ECO mark for requirements under (a)
and (b) above:
[ Page 7, clause 6.1 ( renumbered as 7.1 ) ]- Insert the following new

claase after 7.1:
'7.2 The ECO marked packaging material/package may be sold alongwith
instructions for proper use and mode of safe disposal so as to maximise its
performance and minimise wastage.'
[Page 7, clause 7.1.1 (renumbered as 8.1.1) ] - Insert the following new
clauses after 8.1.1:
'8.1.2 Additional Requirementsfor.ECO Mark
•
8.1.2.1 Each carton may display in brief the criteria for which the product has
been labelled as environment friendly.
8~1.2.2 It shall be suitably marked on each sack that ECO Mark label is
applicable only to the packaging material/package if content is not separately
covered under the ECO Mark scheme.
NOTE - It may be stated that the ECO Mark is applicable to the product or packaging
material or both.'
(CHD 16)
Reprography Unit, SIS, New Delhi, India
2
IS : 9493 - 1980
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
O. FOR E W 0 R D
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution
on 25 April 1980, after the draft finalized by the Paper & Flexible
Packaging Sectional Committee had been approved by the Marine, Cargo
Movement & Packaging Division Council.
0.2 With the coming into force of the recent Weights and Measures Act,
the non-soapy detergent powders are to be packed in the quantities of 40 g,
50 g, 100 g, 200 g ( 250 g* ), 500 g, 700 g (750 g* ), 1 kg, 1'5 kg, 2 kg and
thereafter in multiples of 1 kg. The packaging materials commonly used for
the above packs in the market, include polyethylene bags, polycoated paper
sachets and fibreboard cartons. For larger pack sizes, that is, 1'5 kg, 2'0 kg,
etc, fluted cartons or suitable fibre board cartons having corrugated board
liners inside are being used, but these have not been covered in this
specification. In view of different specific gravities of the product manufac-
tured by various manufacturers in the country, it is not feasible to
standardize on the finished dimensions of the cartons and only tolerances
on the agreed dimensions have been given in this standard.
0.3 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this
standard is ' complied with, the final value, observed or calculated,
expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS: 2-1960t. The number of significant places retained in the rounded
off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard specifies the requirements of the cartons for packing
non-soapy detergent powders packed in quantities of 40 g, 50 g, 100 g,
200 g ( 250 g* ), 500 g, 700 g ( 750 g*) and 1 kg.
2. DIMENSIONS
2.1 Dimensions of the cartons shall be as agreed between the purchaser
and the supplier.
*Figures given in parentheses are permitted only up to September 1981.
[Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised).
3
IS : 9493 • 1980
2.2 Tolerances on each of the inside dimensions, length ( L ), width ( W )

and height ( H) of the cartons shall be ± 1'0 mm where as tolerance on
overall blank dimensions 'A' and 'B' (see Fig. 1) shall be ±2'0 mm.
,.,1---------
I I
--- - - - - - - - - --
I I
I 1
I I
I I :r
I I rn
I I
I
I I
I I
I I
<, ---------,--- -------- --- I - - -
L W L W
A
FIG. 1 DETERGENT CARTONS
2.2.1 Before measuring, the carton shall be conditioned at a tempe-

rature of 27 ± 2°C and RH 65 ± 2 percent until equilibrium is reached,
approaching such equilibrium from dry side [see IS: 1060 (Part 1)-1966*].
2.2.2 For cartons, internal dimensions shall be measured as distances
between the respective centre of creasing/scoring lines.
3. MATERIAL
3.1 The cartons shall be made from pulp board or duplex board, bitumen
or polyethylene laminated to the kraft paper on the inside to provide the
desired strength and moisture protection. The pulp board or duplex board
shall conform to IS: 1776-1961 t; the kraft paper shall conform to grade 1
of IS: 1397-1967t and may be machine-glazed; the white printing paper
shall conform to IS: 1848-1971 §.
*Methods of sampling and test for paper and allied products: Part I ( revised ).
tSpecification for folding box board, uncoated.
:::Specification for kraft paper (first revision ).
§Specification for writing and printing papers (first revision ).
4
IS : 9493 • 1980
3.1.1 Bitumen Laminated Board - The final carton board is made up by

sandwitching white duplex board or pulpboard and plain/ribbed kraft
paper with the help of blown grade bitumen. The details of substance and
bursting strength for various board combinations shall be as given in
Table 1
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMEN LAMINATED BOARD
CARTON SIZE SUBSTANCE SUBSTANCE SUBSTANCE TOTAL MINIMUM BURS-

OF DUPLEXI OF BITUMEN OF KRAFT SUBSTANCE TlNG STRENGTH
PULP BOARD PAPER OF LAMINATED
gsm gsrn gsm gsm BOARD
kg/em'
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
100 g & below 190 70 ± 20 60 320 ± 30 3'5
200 g (250 g) 250 do 80 400 ± 30 5'0
500 g 300 do 100 470 ± 35 6'5
700 g ( 750 g ) 325 do 120 515 ± 35 7'0
1 kg 325 do 150 545 ± 40 7'5
3.1.2 Polyethylene Laminated Board - The final carton board is made up

by sandwitching white maplitho paper over regenerated pulp greyboard or
unbleached duplex board with the help of extrusion coated polyethylene.
The details of substance and bursting strength for various board combina-
tion shall be as given in Table 2.
TABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYETHYLENE

LAMINATED BOARD
CARTON SIZE SUBSTANCE SUBSTANCE SUBSTANCE TOTAL MIN BURS- AVERAGE

OF PAPER OF POLY- OF GREY SUBSTANCE TlNG STRE- STIFFNESS
ETHYLENE BOARD NGTH OF VALUE
COATING LAMINATED KENLEY
BOARD*
gsm gsm gsm gsm kg/em' CD MD
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
100 g & below 60 25 ±5 200 280± 15 3'5
200 g (250 g) 80 25 ± 5 250 354 ± 18 5'0 15 35
500 g 80 25 ± 5 325 429 ± 20 6'0
700 g (750 g) 80 25 ± 5 350 454 ± 20 6'5
1 kg 80 25 ± 5 400 504 ± 25 7'0 50 90
*Calculated to attain a burst factor of average 13'5 approximately.
5
IS : 9493 - 1980
4. CONSTRUCTION, WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH

4.1 The grain direction of the board shall be across the height of the
carton, that is, parallel to the base to facilitate good creasing/scoring.
4.2 The outside surface of the laminated board shall be of smooth finish to
facilitate printing using suitable printing inks.
4.3 The cartons shall be sufficiently and properly scored/creased for easy
formation/erection into final shape from flat folded condition. This may
require machine prefolding for uniformity and consistent quality. The body
seam at the side shall not project out when the carton is formed. The side
seam shall be sealed securely so that it does not give way while forming or
in machine filling/sealing operation. The carton shall be glued square.
4.4 In case of bitumen laminated carton, the inner surface of kraft paper
( that is, surface for glueing in filling/sealing operation) shall be of rough
finish or ribbed along the width of the carton. The kraft paper surface
shall not show any bitumen penetration.
4.5 In case of polyethylene laminated carton, the inner side of greyboard
shall have rough finish to facilitate easy glueing. The smooth side of
greyboard shall be polyethylene laminated to rough side of top paper while
the glazed side of paper shall form the outermost side of carton board for
good printing.
4.6 Serrations on the board surface at the flaps (to be glued) shall be
provided to facilitate good glue adhesion. A minimum of three serrations
shall be equally spaced across the entire flap width each consisting of about
1 to 2 mm of individual length. The serrations shall be deep enough but
shall not perforate the laminated board.
4.7 Other requirements of the carton shall be as follows:
4.7.1 The stiffness of the carton board shall be uniform.
4.7.2 The finished carton board shall not show any cracks while forming.
4.7.3 The flaps shall be cut square and proper.
4.7.4 The water vapour transmission rate of the cartons tested on the
uncreased board with print on the top when checked at 38°C and 90 percent
RH as per method given in 14 of IS: 1060 (Part II)-1960* shall be as follows:
a) For bitumen laminated cartons: 25 g/sq.m/24 h average with the
maximum individual value not exceeding 30 g/sq.m/24 h.
b) For polyethylene laminated cartons: 21 g/sq.m/24 h average with
the maximum individual value not exceeding 27 g/sq.m/24 h.
4.7.5 Bleeding Resistance - The bitumen laminated board shall not show
any sign of stain on the immitation art paper or on the exposed surface of the
test piece itself when tested as per the method 11 of IS : 1060 (Part II )-1960*.
*Methods of sampling and test for paper and allied products: Part II.
6
IS : 9493 a 1980
5. PRINTING
5.1 The quality of the print ( including register and design) and the shades
of the colour shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.
5.2 The printing shall be free from feathering, smudges, misses and fade
outs. The interior of the carton shall be free from any set-off glue.
5.3 Light Stability - Both the carton board and the printing inks ( includ-
ing any lacquer employed) shall be fast to light when tested as per the
method given in 4 of IS: 6931-1972*.
5.4 Resistance to Soap - The sample when tested in accordance with the
procedure given under 4.13.8 of IS: 6931-1972* shall not show any bleed,
discolouration, or loss of key of the ink and no bleed from or discoloura-
tion of the carton board surface shall be observed. If a carton board
having a clay coated surface is used, there shall be no separation of the
coating from the base carton board.
5.5 Resistance to Rubbing - The printed surfaces of the carton shall be
tested for any smudging or transfer of inks by subjecting the printed
surfaces of two cartons placed in contact with each other to 20 rubs as per
the method detailed in 4.14 of IS:6931-1972*. The extent of scuffing
permitted at the end of 20 rubs shall be as agreed to between the purchaser
and the supplier.
6. PACKING
6.1 The exact number, quantity, mode of packing, etc, shall be as agreed
between the purchaser and the supplier.
7. MARKING
7.1 The cartons shall be marked with: (a) the name, trade-mark or code
No. of manufacturer; and (b) any other markings desired by the purchaser.
7.1.1 The carton may also be marked with the lSI Certification Mark].
NOTE - The use of the lSI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions
of the Indian Standards Institution (Certification Marks) Act and the Rules
and Regulations made thereunder. The lSI Mark on products covered by an
Indian Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced to comply
with the requirements of that standard under a well-defined system of inspection,
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised by lSI and operated
by the producer. lSI marked products are also continuously checked by lSI for
conformity to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under
which a licence for the use of the lSI Certification Mark may be granted to
manufacturers or processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.
*Methods of test for printing inks.

tThe carton if covered under the lSI Certification Mark shall be marked in such a
way that the lSI marking on the carton is not construed as covering the contents of the
filled container.
7
PUBLICATIONS OF INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTION
INDIAN STANDARDS
Over 10 000 Indian Standards covering various subjects have been issued
so far. Of these, the standards belonging to the Marine, Cargo Movement
and Packaging Group fall under the following categories:
MARINE CARGO MOVEMENT
Cargo marking, handling and
Anchors and anchor cables stowing
Diesel engines Freight contal ners
Distress signals Industrial trucks, tractors nd
Fire safety trailers
Inland vessels Lifting chains, associated fittings
Life saving equipment & acces- and components
sories Non-powered materials handling
equipment
Magnetic compasses Pallets
Mooring equipment Transport tractors and trailers
Navigational lights PACKAGING
Piping systems, valves & acces-
sories Glass containers
Metal containers
Shi ps' derricks and accessories
Paper and flexible packaging
Ships' side scuttles & windows Plastics containers
Ventilation Woo'd and wood products
Miscellaneous containers
OTHER PUBLICATIONS
lSI Bulletin (Published Every Month)
Single Copy Rs 4'00
Annual Subskription Rs 36'~
Standards: Monthly Additions
Single Copy Re O·~
Annual Subscription Rs 3.00
Annual Reports (from 1948-49 Onwards) Rs 2·00 to 7.00
lSI Handbook, 1980 Rs 100·00·
INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTiON

Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, NEW DELHI 110002
Telephones: 266021, 2701 31 Telegrams: Manaksanstha
Western: Novelty Chambers, Grant Road BOMBAY 400007 379729
Eastern : 5 Chowringhee Approach CALCUTTA 700072 275090
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, Adyar MADRAs 600020 412442
Branch Offices:
• Pushpak', NurmohamedShaikh Marg, Khanpur AHMADABAD 380001 20391
'F' Block, Unity Bldg, Narasimharaja Square BANGALORE 560002 27649
Gangotri Complex, Bhadbhada Road, T. T. Nagar BHOPAL 462003 62716
22E Kalpana Area BHUBANESHWAR 751014 53627
Ahlmsa Bldg, SCC 82-83. Sector 17C CHANDIGARH 160017 28320
5-8-56C L. N. Gupta Marg HYDERABAO 500001 22 1083
0-277 Todarmal Marg, Banipark JAIPUR 302006 69832
117{418 B Sarvodaya Nagar KANPUR 208005 81272
Patliputra Industrial Estate PATNA 800013 62808
Hantex Bldg ( 2nd Floor ), Rly Station Road TRIVANDRUM 695001 3227
Printed at Britannia Calendar MIg Co, Calcutta, India
1s : 10176- 1982
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
FIBREBOARD BOXES FOR PACKING OF SOAPS
Chairman Z&resenting
SHRI K. VI~WANATJXAN Metal Box India Ltd, Calcutta
Members
SHBI K. R. NARASIXEAX ( Altmatc to
Shri K. Viswanathan 1
DE S. R. AQARWAL Glaxo Laboratories ( India ) Ltd, Bombay
SERI S. M. KHAN (Alternate)
SHEI A. B. AJMERA Card Board Box Manufacturing Co, Calcutta
SERI C. B. AJ~ERA (Alternate)
DE R. P. ANEJA National Dairy Development Board, Anand
SHRI G. K. BHAIA Indian Plastics Federation, Calcutta
SEBI VIDYA CHARAN BHARQAVA Ministry of Agriculture, Directorate of Plant
Protection, Quarantine & Storage, Faridabad
SHRI S. K. GHOSH ( Alternate)
SERI L. N. BURMAN Indian Paper Makers Association, Calcutta
SARI P. L. BURMAN Indian Paper Mills Association, Calcutta
SERI D. S. CHADEA Directorate General of Health Services ( Central
Committee for Food Standards ), New Delhi
&UT DEBI MUKHERJEE (Alternate )
SHRI S. CEAKKABARTI Hindustan Lever Ltd, Bombay
SHRI V. DHAWAN ( Alternate )
S~EI B. D. CHATTE~JEE Indian Petrochemicals Corporation Ltd, Vadodara
SHRI P. R. SESHAN ( Alternate )
SHRI T. GANQADHARAN Indian Explosives Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI R. KRISHNAN ( Alternate 1
Sa~r P. S. HARIHARAKR~S~N~N The Travancore Rayons Ltd, Rayonpuram
SH~I BHAQVAN BALAJI SINQH ( Alternate )
Da R. JAYARAM Federation of Biscuit Manufacturers of India,
Delhi
JOINT DIRECTOR ( T R A B B I o Railway Board, Ministry of Railways
COMMEBCIALRATES )
SERI S. K. KE~FIAVA I. T. C. Ltd, Calcutta
SHBI Y. C. DEVESEWAR ( Alternate )
SHRI A. J. KOTHARI Larsen & Toubro Ltd, Bombay
SHRI R. P. SOOCHAK( Alternate )
@ CopVright 1982
This publication is protected under the Indian Coprright Act ( XIV of 1957) and
reproduction in whole or in part by any means except with written permission of the
publisher shall be deemed to be an infringement of convrieht under the said Act.
ISt10176-1982
( Continnedfrompaga1 )
SHRI J. S. MATHARU Directorate General of Technical Development,
New Delhi
SHRI V. B. SAXEHA ( Alternate )
SHRI A. L. MUTHIAH India Packaging Products Pvt Ltd, Bangalore
SHRI A. L. AHHAEXALA~I Alternate 1
SHRI M. S. NAIK Pesticides Association of India, New Delhi
SHRI P. V. NAHAYANAN Indian Institute of Packaging,
- -- Bombay
SHRI A. K. SENQUPTA ( Alterwte )
Da A. N. NAYER Packaging ana Wooa Pro?iucts Consultancy
Service, New Delhi
SERI SANJAY K. NAYEH ( Alternate )
DR S. Y. PANDIT Bayer ( India ) Ltd, Bombay
DR P. V. RAIKAR (Alternate )
SHRI R. MTJTHIAE ( Altemate)
SHRI M. K. RAMASAMI Federation of Corrugated Box Manufacturers of
India. Bombav
SHRI S. S. KEJRIWAL ( Alternate )
SHRI C. V. N. RAO Office of the Development Commissioner,
New Delhi
SHRI G. V. RAO Directorate of Standardization. Ministrv of
Defence ( R & D )
SHRI 0. P. SRIVASTAVA ( Alternate )
SHRI J. C. SHAH Federation of Associations of Small Industries of
India, New Delhi
SHRI D. CHADHA ( Alternate)
SHRI PRAFULL J. SHETH Solid Containers Ltd, Bombay
SHRI V. S. JOSHI ( Alternate )
SHRI M. K. LAHERI ( Alternate )
SHE1 S. SUNDHR India Foils Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI S. P. CHATTERSEE ( Alternate )
SHRI D. V. VARMA Ministry of Defence ( DGI)
SHRI NIRMAL SINGE ( Alternate )
SHRI P. S. DAS, Director General, IS1 ( Ex-oflcio Member )
Director ( MCPD )
Secretary
SHRI A. R. GULATI
Deputy Director ( MCPD ), IS1
Boxes, Drums and Containers Subcommittee, MCPD 14 : 2
Convener
SHRI A. B. AJMEBA Card Board Box Manufacturing Co, Calcutta
Members
SHRI C. B. AJMERA ( Alternate to
Shri A. B. Aj mera )
SHRI J. BANERJEE Directorate of Standardization ( Ministry of
Defence 1
SHRI U. B. KANCHAN ( Alternate )
( Continued on @age9 )
2
IS : 10176- 1982
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
FIBREBOARD BOXES FOR PACKING OF SOAPS
0. FOREWORD
on 30 April 1982, after the draft finalized by the Paper and Flexible
Movement and Packaging Division Council.
0.2 Fibreboard boxes are largly used for the packaging of soaps. Solid
fibreboard boxes are usually used for laundry soaps with low TFM, where-
as corrugated fibreboard boxes are recommended for toilet soaps with
high TFM. General requirements for corrugated fibreboard and solid
fibreboard boxes have been covered in IS : 2771 ( Part I )-1977* and
IS: 2771 ( Part II )-19751_ respectively. Keeping in view the nature of
the product being packed, requirements like puncture resistance, water
absorption ( Cobb test ) and the compression strength of the boxes have
been covered specifically in this standard.
standard is complied with, the final value, observed or calculated, expres-
sing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance
with IS : 2-1960:. The number of significant places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this
standard.
I. SCOPE
1.1 This standard covers the requirements of corrugated fibreboard and
solid fibreboard boxes for packaging of soaps.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this standard the definitions given in IS : 4261-
19675, IS : 7186-197311 and IS : 2771 ( Part I )-1977* shall apply.
*Specification for fibreboard boxes: Part I Corrugated fibreboard boxes (Jirst revision ).
tSpecification for fibreboard boxes: Part II Solid fibreboard boxes ( jirstrevision ).
$Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised ).
§Glossary of terms relating to paper and pulp based packaging materials.
IjGlossary of terms relating to paper and flexible packaging.
3
IS : 10176 - 1962
3. IDENTIFICATION OF BOX FACES

3.1 Container Having a Preferred Position for Transport - The
container shall be placed in the preferred position for transport so that the
manufacturer’s joint forms the vertical edge of the face towards the
observer. The faces shall then be numbered as in Fig. 1.
3
Fro. 1 IDENTIFICATION OF CONTAINERFACES
3.1.1 Edges shall be identified by numbers on the two faces adjacent
to the edges, for example, 2-5 means the vertical edge formed by faces 2
and 5.
3.1.2 Corners shall be identified by numbers on the three faces adjacent
to the corners for example, l-2-5 means the.right hand top corner formed
by the faces 1, 2 and 5.
4. MATERIAL
4.1 The following material shall be used for the manufacture of boxes.
4.1.1 Corrugated Fibreboard - The corrugated fibreboard for the container
shall be single face or 3-ply board using the liners and fluting medium
made from kraft. The fluting shall be of Type B ( narrow fluting ).
4.1.2 Adhesive - Any suitable adhesive capable of firmly holding the
various plies together shall be used. Sodium silicate or any other highly
alkaline adhesive shall not be used. The adhesive shall contain a mould
inhibitor in sufficient quantity to provide protection from mould growth.
Following mould inhibitors and their percentage by weight of the fibre-
board are recommended for the purpose:
9 Sodium salycil anilide ( SSA ) - 0.1 percent
ii) Sodium pentachlorophenate ( Santobrite ) - 0.5 percent
iii) TBZ ( Metosol TK - 100 ) - O*1 percent
iv) Copper oxyne - 0’5 percent.
4
IS t 10176 - 1962
4.1.3 Solid Fibrcboard - It shall be a laminated millboard with the

outermost layer of kraft paper. The kraft paper shall be laminated to the
millboard using dextrine base adhesive. The millboard layer may be
laminated with silicate adhesive. The total grammage shall be 950 f 50 g.
The kraft paper layer is specified to obtain a printable surface on the box.
The grammage of the kraft paper may be as agreed to between the
urchaser and the supplier. Sufficient quantity of a mould inhibitor shall
Ke incorporated in the dextrine adhesive to provide protection from mould
growth ( see 4.1.2 ).
4.1.4 Stables - Mild steel, galvanised 0.625 mm thick x 13 mm crown
x 3 mm wide staples shall be used for stapling the manufacturer’s joint.
5. MANUFACTURE, WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH

5.1 The boxes shall be manufactured from one piece of fibreboard, scored
and slotted to form a body piece having four flaps for closing each of the
opposite ends. The flaps along the longer edge shall be the outer flaps
and those along the shorter edge shall be the inner flaps. All flaps shall
be of equal length and the outer flaps shall meet when closed ( see Style
201 and 202 of IS : 6481-1971* ).
5.2 The blank shall be properly creased and slotted so that when the box
is assembled, there shall be no holes at the corners. The flaps of the box
shall be capable of being folded through 180” along the line of creasing
without showing any sign of fracture of the board on facings.
5.3 The body joint shall be lapped and the lapping shall not be less than
30 mm. The lapped joint shall be secured using rust-free, non-protruding
but angled staples.
5.3.1 The spacing between the stitches shall not be more than 60 mm.
The distance between the outer staples and the end joints shall not exceed
25 mm.
6. DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

6.1 The internal dimensions of the assembled box shall be as agreed to
between the purchaser and the supplier.
6.2 A tolerance off 3 mm shall be permissible on the ordered dimensions.
7. SAMPLING, CONDITIONING AND TESTING

7.1 Sampling - A consignment shall be sampled within seven days of
the receipt by the purchaser. The sampling and test schedule shall be
as given in Appendix A.
*Guide for principal uses and styles of fibreboard containers.
5
IS t 10176 - 1982
7.2 Conditioning - The sample of boxes so selected shall be deemed to

represent the whole consignment of boxes and shall be conditioned for
testing by the method prescribed in 5 of IS : 1060( Part I )-1966*.
8. FIBREBOARD REQUIREMENTS
8.1 The requirements for the material of construction of the box as well
as the methods of tests for evaluating these requirements shall be as given
in Table 1.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF FIBREBOARD
SL TEST REQUIREMENT METHOD OBTEST,

No. r_-h---y REF TO CLAUSE No.
Corrugated Solid
Board Board
1. Bursting strength 6.5 9.0 12-5 of IS: 1060
kg/cm% ( Min ) ( Part II )-1960’
2. Puncture resistance, 120 150 9 of IS: 4006
beach units ( Min ) ( Part II )-1972t
3. Water absorption, g/ma 120 120 6 of IS: 4006$
( Cobb/JO minutes ) ( Part I )-1966
*Methods of sampling and test for paper and allied products, Part II.
*Methods of test for paper and pulp based packaging materials, Part II.
$Methods of test for paper and pulp based packaging materials, Part I.
8.2 Compression Strength - When tested as per the method given in

IS : 7028 ( Part VI )-1973.F conditioned at a temperature of 27 & 2°C
and 65 f 2 percent RH, the compression strength of the empty box at the
maximum deflection of 20 mm shall be not less than l-1 kg/cm of the
perimeter of the box.
8.3 Printability - The nature of the outer surface of the box shall
permit marking by stamping stencilling or printing.
8.4 Resistance to Mould Growth - The fibreboard when tested by the
method given in Appendix B shall not show any fungus or mould growth.
9. PACKING AND MARKING

9.1 The boxes shall be marked, printed, packed and supplied as agreed
to between the purchaser and the supplier.
9.1.1 The fibreboard boxes conforming to this standard may also be
marked with the IS1 Certification mark.
*Methods of sampling and test for paper and allied products, Part I ( revised ).
tperformance tests for complete, filled transport packages: Part VI Compression test.
6
IS t 10176 - 1982
NOTE 1 - The use of the IS1 Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of
the Indian Standards Institution ( Certification Marks) Act and the Rules and
Regulations made thereunder. The IS1 Mark on products covered by an Indian
Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced to comply with the
requirements of that standard under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and
quality control which is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by the
producer. IS1 marked products are also continuously checked by IS1 for conformity
to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence
for the use of the IS1 Certification Mark may be granted to manufacturers or
processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.
NOTE 2 - The boxes if covered under the IS1 Mark scheme shall be marked in
such a way that the marking for the boxes is not in any way construed for the
marking on the contents packed into them.
APPENDIX A
( Clause7.1 )
SAMPLING AND TEST SCHEDULE
A-l. SAMPLING
A-l.1 From each consignment of 10 000 containers or part thereof a sample
consisting of 20 complete containers shall be chosen as follows:
a) Bundles - 20 bundles shall be chosen from the consignment at
random and from each of these bundles one complete container
shall be chosen at random.
b) Loose deliveries - 20 complete containers shall be chosen at
random.
From the sample so chosen, the number of containers to be selected
for testing, and the number of tests to be carried out on each selected
container shall be in accordance with the requirements of Table 2.
TABLE 2 SCHEDULE OF TESTS
TEST CL REF No. OF CONTAINERS No. OBTESTS TO BE
TO BE TESTED CARRIED OUT ON
EACH CONTAIXVER
Grammage 4.1.3 3 1
Bursting strength 8.1 3 10
Puncture resistance 8.1 3 1
Water absorption 8.1 3 ( 1 on outer surface
( Cobb test ) only )
Flap bend 5.2 3 2
Compression strength 8.2 3 ( container including 1
stacking collar )
NOTE - A container selected to provide test pieces for one test ( for example
the flap bend test ) may be used if necessary to provide test pieces for other tests.
7
1s 8 10176- 1982
A-2. ACCEPTANCE
A-2.1 A consignment of containers shall be deemed to comply with this

standard if all of the containers tested give test results which are within
specified limits.
If only one of the test containers fails to satisfy one or more of the
test requirements, the provisions of A-3 shall apply.
A-3. RETESTING
A-3.1 For retesting purposes, twice the number of complete containers
originally tested shall be chosen at random from the same consignment all
of which shall satisfy the requirements of the standard for the test
requirements.
APPENDIX B
( Clause 8.4 )
MOULD GROWTH TEST
B-l. TEST SAMPLES

B-l.1 Six samples ( 50 x 50 mm ) shall be cut at random from the
material under test. Six similar samples shall also be taken from the basic
untreated material to serve as control. All the samples shall be suitably
marked.
B-2. INCUBATION
B-2.1 The samples prepared at B-l shall then be suspended/exposed in a
suitable chamber having a humidity of 90 to 95 percent RH and temper-
ature of 30 f 1°C for a period of seven days.
B-3. OBSERVATIONS
B-3.1 After the incubation period all the 12 test pieces shall be examined
under a magnifying lens. The control samples shall show moderate to
heavy fungus growth, but the test samples shall not show any fungus
growth.
8
IS : 10176 - 1982
Mem hers Representing

SH~I M. P. BAYA Punalur Paper Mills Ltd, Punalur
SHRI B. BEATTACHEBJEE Corrugating & Paper Processing Co Pvt Ltd,
Calcutta
SHBI S. MITRA ( Alternate)
SHRI L. N. BURYAN Indian Paper Makers Association, Calcutta
SHRI S. CEAKRABARTI Hindustan Lever Ltd, Bombay
SEBI V. DHAWAN ( Alternate)
DEPUTY DIRECTOR Ministry of Railways ( Railway Board )
SHRI B. K. DOSHI Swastic Paper Industries, Bombay
SHRI S. B. DOSHI ( Alternate)
SHBI T. GAN~ADE~RAN Indian Explosives Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI R. KRISHNAN ( Alternate )
SHRI S. N. HARIAIKA Federation of Corrugated Box Manufacturers of
India, Bombay
SHRI M. K. MEHTA ( Alternate )
SHRI G. C. JAIN Ashok Paper Mills Ltd. Calcutta
SERI S. K. KESIXAVA I. T. C. Ltd. Calcutta
SHRI K. S. KRI~HNAMACHARI Seshasayee Paper and Boards Ltd. Erode
SHRI V. R. KRISHNAMOORTHY Glaxo Laboratories (India) Ltd, Bombay
SHRI KAMAL MEATTLE Unisystem Pvt Ltd, Faridabad
SHRI M. M. MENON The Andhra Pradesh Paper Mills Ltd,
Rajahmundry
SHRI A. L. MUTHIAH India Packaging Products Pvt Ltd, Bangalore
SHRI A. L. ANNAMALAI ( Alternate )
SHRI NITIN J. NANAVATY Apurva Containers Pvt Ltd, Abmadabad
SHRI V. B. SHAH ( Alternate )
DR A. N. NAYER Packaging & Wood Products Consultancy
Service, New Delhi
SHRI B. A. SHAH Saurashtra Packaeina
- ._. Pvt Ltd. BombavI
SHRI M. K. MEHTA ( Altemak )
SHRI N-. V. SHETH Solid Containers Ltd, Bombay
SHRI L. N. SHETTY ( Al&mate )
SHRI H. D. SREENATH Laxmi Board and Paper Mills Pvt Ltd. Kalvan
DR RAVI TALWAR The Paper Product Lid, Bombay ’
SHRI P. VEERRAJU Central Food Technological Research Institute
( CSIR ), Mysore
SHRI E. R. VICCAJEE Warden & Co Pvt Ltd, Thane
INTERNATIOAL SYSTEM OF UNITS ( SI UNITS)
Base Units
Quantity Unit Symbol

Length met re m
Mass kilogram kg
Time second S

temperature
Amount of substance mol mole
Supplementary Units
Quantity Unit Symbol

Derived Units
Quantity Unit Symbol Definition

Force newton N 1 N = 1 kg.m/G
Flux weber Wb 1 Wb = 1 V.s
Flux density tesla T 1 T = 1 Wb/ms
Frequency hertz HZ 1 Hz = 1 c/s (s-1)
Electric conductance siemens S 1 S = 1 A/V
Pressure, stress Pascal Pa 1 Pa = 1 N/ms
IS 3303 : 1997
( Reaffirmed 2008 )
Indian Standard
MATCH PAPER FOR MATCH BOX — SPECIFICATION
( Second Revision )
ICS 85.060
© BIS 1997
NEW DELHI 110002
Price Group 2
July 1997
Paper and Its Products (Excluding Packaging Materials) Sectional Committee, CHD 015
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard (Second Revision) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized
by the Paper and Its Products (Excluding Packaging Materials) Sectional Committee had been approved by the
Chemical Division Council.
This standard has been formulated in order to define the quality of match paper to provide guidance to manufacturers.
and to assure supply of proper quality of such paper to the consumers. The use of deep colour in the manufacture
of match paper should be avoided.
This standard was first published in 1965 and subsequently revised in 1986. In this revision the requirement
for grammage (substance) has been modified and a tolerance has been given on the average value of 10 sheets.
The requirement for one minute cobb value has also been modified. The marking clause has been suitably
amended.
A scheme for labelling environment friendly products known as ECO Mark has been introduced at the instance
of the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MEF). Government of India. The ECO Mark would be administered
by the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) under the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1986 as per the Resolutions
No. 71 dated 21 February 1991 and No. 425 dated 28 October 1992 published in the Gazette of the Government
of India. For a product to be eligible for marking with ECO logo, it shall also carry the ISI Mark of BIS besides
meeting additional environment friendly requirements. For this purpose, the Standard Mark of BIS would be a
single mark being a combination of the ISI Mark and the ECO logo. Requirements to be satisfied for match paper
for match box to qualify for the BIS Standard Mark for ECO friendliness has been incorporated in this revision
based on the Gazette Notification No. 455 dated 13 November 1992 for paper as environment friendly products
published in the Gazette of India. These requirements will be optional: manufacturing units will be free to opt
for the ISI Mark alone also.
The Committee responsible for formulation of this standard is given in Annex A.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final value,
observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with
IS 2 'Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised )'. The number of significant places retained in the
IS 3303 : 1997
Indian Standard
MATCH PAPER FOR MATCH BOX — SPECIFICATION
( Second Revision )
1 SCOPE 4.3 Additional Requirements for ECO Mark
This standard prescribes requirements and methods 4.3.1 General Requirements
of sampling and test for match paper for match box. 4.3.1.1 The product shall conform to the requirements
2 REFERENCES for quality and performance prescribed under 3.1.
The Indian Standards listed below contain provisions Tablet Requirements for Match Paper
which through reference in this text, constitute ( Clauses 4.2 and 7.2 )
provisions of this Indian Standard. At the time of
publication, the editions indicated were valid. All Sl Characteristic Require- Method of Test
standards are subject to revisions, and parties to No. ment [Ref to Cl No.
agreements based on this Indian Standard are IS 1060 (Part 1)]
encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying (1) (2) (3) (4)
the most recent editions of the Indian Standards
i) Tear index, mN, m2/g, 12.7
indicated below. Min
a) Machine direction 4.5
IS No. Title b) Cross direction 5.5
1060 Methods of sampling and test ii) Tensile index, N.m/g, 12.3
(Part 1) : 1966 for paper and allied products, Min
Part 1 ( revised ) a) Machine direction 39.0
b) Cross direction 20.0
4661 : 1986 Glossary of terms used in paper
iii) One minute cobb test, 25 13.2.2
trade and industry ( first
Max
revision )
Tear index = Tear factor × 0.098.
3 TERMINOLOGY Tensile index = Breaking length × 0.009 8
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions given
in IS 4661 shall apply. 4.3.1.2 The manufacturer shall produce to BIS, the
4 REQUIREMENTS State Pollution Control Board as per the provisions of
4.1 The grammage (substance) of the match paper Water ( Prevention and Control of Pollution ) Act,
shall be 40 g/m2, Min. For determining grammage, select 1974 and Air ( Prevention and Control of Pollution )
10 sheets at random and cut from each sheet a test Act, 1981 alongwith the authorization, if required, under
piece of size 25 cm × 25 cm (or 25 cm × 20 cm or the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and the rules
25 cm × 40 cm). Proceed as prescribed in 6 of IS 1060 made thereunder, while applying for ECO Mark.
( Part 1 ).
4.1.1 The mean of 10 test results shall not vary by 4.3.2.1 The material shall be of the following two types
more than ± 5 percent from the declared nominal value depending on the raw material used in the manufacture:
for grammage and in any case it shall not be below
40 g/m2. a) Type 1 — Manufactured from pulp containing
not less than 60 percent by mass
4.2 The match paper shall also comply with the of pulp made from materials other
requirements prescribed in Table 1 when tested than bamboo, hard woods, soft
according to the methods given in col 4 of Table 1. woods and reed.
1
IS 3303 : 1997
b) Type 2 — Manufactured from pulp made from 5.2.2.1 The use of the Standard Mark is governed by
100 percent waste paper. the provisions of Bureau of Indian Standards Act,
1986 and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder.
5 PACKING AND MARKING
The details of conditions under which the licence for
5.1 Packing the use of Standard Mark may be granted to
5.1.1 The paper shall be packed securely and suitably manufacturers or producers may be obtained from the
as agreed to between the buyer and the supplier. Bureau of Indian Standards.
5.1.2 For ECO Mark, the product shall be packed in 5.2.3 For ECO Mark, following additional informa-
such packages which shall be recyclable/reusable or tion may also be marked on the container/package:
biodegradable.
"The criteria for which the product has been labelled
5.2 Marking with ECO Mark."
5.2.1 Each package shall be marked with the following 6 SAMPLING
information:
a) Description of the material; The paper shall be sampled in accordance with 3 of
IS 1060 (Part 1).
b) Grammage, in g/m2;
c) Number of sheets (in the package) and net 7 CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY
mass of the contents;
7.1 Number of Tests
d) Batch number;
e) Month and year of manufacture; and The test shall be conducted as given in IS 1060
( Part 1 ).
f) Indication of the source of manufacture.
7.2 The lot shall be declared as conforming to the
5.2.2 BIS Certification Marking requirements of this standard if all the test results
The packages may also be marked with the Standard meet the relevant requirements prescribed in 4 and
Mark. Table 1.
2
IS 3303 : 1997
ANNEX A
(Foreword)
Paper and Its Products ( Excluding Packaging Materials ) Sectional Committee, CHD 015
DR A. R. K. RAO The Mysore Paper Mills Ltd, Bhadravati

Members
SHRI V. C. ARZARE NEPA Ltd, Nepanagar
DR G. VENKOBA RAO ( Alternate )
SHRI S. C. BAJAJ Directorate General of Technical Development, New Delhi
SHRI B. B. SHARMA ( Alternate )
SHRI S. B. BANADOPADHYAYA Government of India Stationery Office, Calcutta
SHRI V. N. CHABBRA All India Federation of Master Printers, New Delhi
SHRI S. J. MAHIMKAR ( Alternate )
CHIEF CHEMIST Central Revenues Control Laboratory, New Delhi
DEPUTY CHIEF CHEMIST ( Alternate )
SHRI B. MOHAN DAS The Mysore Paper Mills Ltd, Lucknow
SHRI V. V. LAAD ( Alternate )
DR S. P. SINGH DHAKAREY Ministry of Defence ( DGQA ), New Delhi
SHRI P. P. SHARMA ( Alternate )
SHRI S. R. GHOSH Regional Research Laboratory, Jorhat
SHRI D. C. SAKIA ( Alternate )
SHRI MUKESH GUPTA National Alliance of Young Entrepreneurs, New Delhi
SHRI DINESH GUPTA ( Alternate )
SHRI S. C. GUPTA Hindustan Paper Corporation Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI S. K. SENGUPTA ( Alternate )
SHRI ARUN JAIN Federation of Paper Traders Association of India, Mumbai
SHRI BALRAM KUNDU ( Alternate )
DR M. B. JAUHARI Indian Pulp and Paper Technical Association, Saharanpur
DR A. G. KULKARNI ( Alternate )
DR. S. K. KAPOOR Central Pulp and Paper Research Institute, Saharanpur
SHRI Y. V . SOOD ( Alternate )
SHRI K. S. KASIVISWANATHAN Seshasayee Paper and Boards Ltd, Erode
SHRI P. N. RAO ( Alternate )
DR ASHOK KUMAR Institute of Paper Technology, Saharanpur
DR N. J. RAO ( Alternate )
SHRI V. V. LAXMINARAYANAN Security Printing Press, Hyderabad
SHRI H. K. MANIYAR ( Alternate )
DR. N. D. MISRA Indian Paper Mills Association, Calcutta
SHRI R. K. SHARMA ( Alternate )
SHRI S. MITRA India Security Press, Nashik Road, Nashik
SHRI D. M. SHARMA ( Alternate )
SHRI R. RAMASWAMY All India Small Paper Mills Association, Mumbai
SHRI R. N. KHURANA ( Alternate )
SHRI M. V. G. RAO Indian Paper Makers Association, Calcutta
SHRI MANOJ DUTT ( Alternate )
REPRESENTATIVE RDSO, Lucknow

SHRI V. N. SEHGAL Central Forensic Science Laboratory, New Delhi
SHRI T. R. NEHRA ( Alternate )
DR P. P. SINGH ITC Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI B. NARAYANAN ( Alternate )
DR S. V. SINGH Forest Research Institute and Colleges, Dehra Dun
DR K. S. BHANDARI ( Alternate )
3
IS 3303 : 1997
SHRI V. SIVARAMAKRISHNAN Directorate of Printing, Ministry of Urban Development, New Delhi

SHRI G. SIVARAMAN Directorate General of Supplies and Disposals, New Delhi
SHRI V. BALASUBRAMANIAN ( Alternate )
SHRI D. SUBBA RAO Indian Agro Paper Mills Association, New Delhi
SHRI P. G. MUKUNDAN ( Alternate )
SHRI P. K. SURI Straw Products Ltd, Jaykaypur
SHRI S. K. MISRA ( Alternate )
DR R. K. SINGH, Director General, BIS ( Ex-officio Member )
Director (Chemical)
Member Secretary
DR R. K. JHA
Deputy Director ( Chemical ), BIS
Speciality Paper Subcommittee, CHD 015 : 03
Convener
DR M. B. JAUHARI Ballarpur Industries Ltd, New Delhi
Members
SHRI S. C. PARUTHI ( Alternate to Ballarpur Industries Ltd, New Delhi
Dr M. B. Jauhari )
SHRI S. BHATTACHARYA Geological Survey of India, Calcutta
SHRI R. N. DUTTA ( Alternate )
SHRI S. C. BAJAJ Directorate General of Technical Development, New Delhi
SHRI B. B. SHARMA ( Alternate )
SHRI C. T. DATHATHREYA The Sirpur Paper Mills Ltd, Kaghaznagar
SHRI G. D. DHINGRA India Security Press, Nashik Road, Nashik
DR ASHOK KUMAR Institute of Paper Technology, Saharanpur
DR S. P. SINGH ( Alternate )
SHRI R. S. MISHRA Pamwi Speciality Paper Mills, Chandigarh
SHRI N. PADMANABHAN Khadi and Village Industries Commission, Mumbai
SHRI K. D. PUDUMJEE Pudumjee Pulp & Paper Mills Ltd, Pune
DR V. D. KHANOLKAR ( Alternate )
REPRESENTATIVE Central Pulp and Paper Research Institute, Saharanpur
REPRESENTATIVE Survey of India, Dehra Dun
REPRESENTATIVE Tribeni Tissues Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI A. K. RAI ( Alternate )
SHRI G. SIVARAMAN Directorate General of Supplies and Disposals, New Delhi
SHRI V. BALASUBRAMANIAN ( Alternate )
SHRI P. K. SURI Straw Products Ltd, Jaykaypur
SHRI S. BISWAL ( Alternate )
4
Copyright
should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest amendments or edition by referring to the latest issue
of 'BIS Handbook' and 'Standards : Monthly Additions'.
This Indian Standard has been developed from Doc : No. CHD 015 (0480)

Headquarters:
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002 Telegrams: Manaksanstha
Telephones : 323 01 31, 323 94 02, 323 33 75 ( Common to
all offices )
Central: Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg 323 76 17
NEW DELHI 110002 323 38 41
Eastern : 1/14 C. I. T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Maniktola 337 84 99, 337 85 61

CALCUTTA 700054 337 86 26, 337 86 62
Northern : SCO 335-336, Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH 160022 60 38 43
60 20 25
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, CHENNAI 600113 235 02 16, 235 04 42
235 15 19, 235 23 15
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East) 832 92 95,832 78 58
MUMBAI 400093 832 78 91,832 78 92

COIMBATORE. FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR.
KANPUR. LUCKNOW. NAGPUR. PATNA. PUNE. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed at New India Printing Press, Khurja, India

SUBSECTION II
PAPER PACKAGING
FOR FOOD
PRODUCTS
1s : 7149- 1973
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
FlBREBOARD BOXES FOR CANNED SEA FOODS
FOR EXPORT
SHXI K. V~WANAT~~AN Rolls Print Co Private Ltd, Calcutta
Members
SHRI A. B. AJMERA Card Board Box Mfg Company, Calcutta
SHRI C. C. AJMERA ( dltertlule )
SHRIS. BANDOPADHYAY l~evclopn~cnt Commissioner, Small Scale Indus-
tries, New Delhi
SHRI P.L. BURMAN Joint Committee of the Paper Industry, Calcutta
SHRI RAJ K. CHAUHAN Indian Confectionery Manufacturers’ Association,
Calcutta
DEPUTY DIRECTOR Railway Board ( Ministry of Railways )
SHRI B. N. GROSH Federation of Corrugated Box Manufacturers’
Association, Bombay
SHRI HARBEAGWANDAS I’. AI~OXA ( Alternate )
SHRI P. S. HARIHA~AKRISHNAN The Travancorc Rayons Limited, Rayonpuram
( Kerala )
SHRI S. K. KIXS~~AVA India Tobacco Company Limited, Calcutta
SHRI R. C. SARAN ( Alternafe )
SHRI R. L. KHANNA Ministry of Defence ( DGI )
SHRI D. P. GHOSH ( Alternate )
SHRI K. R. KRISHNASWAMI Indian Explosives Limited, Calcutta
SHRI A. E. LADHABROY ( Allernale )
SHRI S. K. MALHOTRA Indian Paper Makers Association, Calcutta
SHRI MAN MOHAN SINGIT Forest Research Institute and Colleges, Debra Dun
SHRI N. B. MI~NESSE Hindustan Lever Limited, Bombay
SHRI P. K. BOSE ( Alternate )
DR H. B. N. MURTT~Y Jardine Henderson Limited, Calcutta
DR A. N. ?;AYAR Packaging & Wood Products, Consultancy Service,
Kanpur
SHRI P. li.PAREIiH Solid Containers Limited, Bombay
SHRI A. N. CHOKSHI (Alternate)
SHRI V. 13. PATHAK Indian Plastics Federation, Calcutta
SHRI J. N. SINGH ( Alternate)
0 Co#yright 1974
.I
IS:l149-1973
( Continued from page 1 ) I
SHRI M. K. RAMASAW Jayant Packaging Private Limited. Madras
SHRI A. N. RAO Directorate General of Technical Development,
New Delhi
DR D. V. S. K. RAO Federation of Biscuit Manufacturers of India,
Delhi
SHRI G. V. RAO Directorate of Standardization ( Ministry of
Defence )
SHRI D. A. REES The Metal Box Company of India Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI P. R. SESHAN ( Alternate )
SHRI J. C.-SHAH Federation of Associations of Small Industries of
India, New Delhi
SHRI SHU~WHERSIN(:H Indian Institute of Packaging, Bombay
SHXI P. V. NARAYANAN ( L~I~lernate)
SHRI S. SUNDER India Foils Limited, Calcutta
SHHI S. P. CHATTERJUJ~( dltcrnate )
SHNI T. PURNANANDAM, Director General, IS1 (Ex-ojicio Mewber)
Deputy Director ( MCPD )
Secretary
SHRI V. K. BANSAL,
Assistant Director ( MCPD ), IS1
Convener
Sanr A. B. AJMERA Card Board Box Mfg Company, Calcutta
Members
SHI~I C. C. AJMERA (Alternate to
Directorate of Standardization ( hlinistry of
Defence )
Joint Committee of tile Paper Industry, Calculta
Railway Board ( hlinistry of Railways )
Swastik Paper Industries, Bombay
c
Corrugating 6r Paper Processing Company l’rivatc
Limited, Calcutta
India Tobacco Company Limited, Calcutta
Indian Explosives Limited, Calcutta
Orient Paper Mills Limited, Brajrajuagar
( Distt Sambalpur )
Ilindustan Lever Limited, Bombay
Jardinc Ilcndcrson Limited, Calcutta

( C,i?nfi~/?wtl
tin/‘“,q< !I )
2
IS : 7149- 1973
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
FTBREBOARD B-OXES FOR CANNED SEA FOODS
FOR EXPORT
0. FOREWORD
on 7 November 1973, after the draft finalized by the Paper and Flexible
0.2 India exports a sizeable quantity of its production of canned sea fbods.
Packaging of canned sea foods in suitable ‘ outers ’ becomes important so as
to cause less damage to the cans which will be sold in retail in the markets
of the importing countries. This standard has been formulated to help the
Indian exporters to provide adequate and functional packaging and improving
the quality of Indian exports.
0.3 Implementation of this standard wilI ensure tighter pack; reduced risk of
dents to cans and damage to labels; prevent bulging of outer boxes in ware-
houses.
0.4 In preparing this standard, considerable assistance has been derived from
the indigenous practices and due weightage is also given to the prevailing
internationa1 practices.
~0.5 For the purpose of deciding, whether a particular requirement of this

standard is complied with, the final value, observed or calculated, expressing
the result of a test, shah be rounded off in accordance with IS : 2-1960*.
The number of significant places retained in the rounded off value, should
he the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard prescribes the requirements for fibreboard transport boxes
for export of canned sea foods. Requirements for the closure of the container
after filling are also speciiicd.
‘Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised).
3
IS: 7149-1973
2: TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this standard the terms given in IS : 426lJ 967” and
IS : 71X-1972t shall apply.
3. BOX
3.1The outer box shall be made from corrugated fibreboard, or solid fibre-
board the external surface of which has been treated with a suitable water
repellent material ( for instance, bitumanized kraft paper, wax, water replent
kraft paper, etc ) .
NOTE - In the case of corrugated fibreboard 3 or 5 ply may be used.
4. STYLE
4.1 The fibreboard box shall conform to the style No. 0204 specified in
IS : 6481-1971$.
5. DIMENSIONS
5.1 Length and Width - The inside length and width of the box shallbe
an exact multiple of the diameter measured over the chimb of the can.
5.1.1 A tolerance of + 3 mm shall be allowed on the internal length and
width of the box.
5.2 Height - The internal height of the transport box shall not exceed an
exact multiple of the height measured over the chimb of the can intended to
be packed into the container.
5.2.1. Whenever partitions and separators are used due tolerance shall be
allowed on the internal dimensions of the box.
5.3 Flaps - The flaps shall meet without binding or overlapping.
6. SAMPLING, CONDITIONING AND TESTING

6.1 Sampling-The boxes shall be sampled and tested within 20 days of
their receipt by the purchaser from each consignment of 10 000 boxes or part
thereof; 20 boxes shall be selected for testing as follows:
a) If the boxes are bundled, 20 bundles shall be selected at random
and from each bundle so selected, one box shall be selected at
random for testing.
b) If the boxes are not bundled, 20 boxes shall be selected at random
from the total consignment.

iGlossary of terms relating to paper and ftexible packaging.
$Guide for principle uses and styles of fibreboard containers.
4
IS : 7149 - 1973
6.2 Conditioning-The sample of 20 boxes selected as in 6.1 shall be

deemed to represent the TVhole consignment of boxes and shall be conditioned
for testing by the method prescribed in 5 of IS : 1060( Part I )-1%6*.
6.3 Testing - The types of test and the selection of boxes for testing shall
be as indicated in Table 1.
TABLE 1 TESTING OF BOXES
( C[atr~cs ti.5,6.4 and 6.5 )
SL TYPE OF TEST NUiwnER OF NUiwBER OF NTJMRER OF TESTS

No. BOXES TO BE TEST SPECI- ON EACH TEST
SELECTED NIENSOBTATN- SPECIIVIEN
FROM SAMPLE ED FROM EACH
FOR TESTING Box
(1) (2) (3) (41 (5)

i) Bursting strength 3 1 6
( 3 each side )
ii) Waterproofness 3 5 1
( Cobb/SO min ) ( on external surface
only )
iii) Substance:
a) for corrugating medium 3 2 1
b) for combined weight of
liners
iv) Puncture resistance of 3 5 I
rombincd hoard
6.3.1 The requirements for the material of construction of the box as

well as the methods of test for evaluating these requirements shall be as
given in Table 2.
6.4 Criteria for Conformity - The consignment of boxes shall be dcemctl
to comply with the test requirements of the specification if. after the specified
number of boxes from the test sample :ts given in Table 1, haq hen tcstd
as required in Table 2,
a) all the boxes pass the test, or
L
bj only one box fails to pass one or more of the tests and on retesting
in accordance with 6.5, no further box fails to pass the test or tests.
6.5 Retests - If only one box from the test sample fails to meet all the
test requirements of the specification, further boxes shall be selected at
random from the consignment of boxes for testing for the defective property
or properties. The number of additional boxes to be tested shall be twice
the number specified in Table 1 for the test or tests in which the box from
the original test sample failed,
‘Methods of sampling and test for paper and allied products: Part I ( revised ).
5
IS : 7149 - 1973
TABLE .2 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF SOLID AND CORRUGATED

FIBREBOARD
( f,‘lactses6.3.1 and S.+)
ST, TVPE or TEST REQITRRZIENTS h’fETllOn OF

NO, C-----------.- *__-_.-__-_7 TEST, Km to
Upto 20 kg i\bove 20-30 kg CL No.
r-_-h--_-7 ___-h___7
SFB CFB SFB CFB
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

i) Bursting strength 12 12 15 15 12.5 of IS : 1060
kg/cm?, A4;,i (Part I )-1966*
ii) Waterproofnrss 120 120 120 120 6 of IS:4006
( Cobb min 30 ), ( Part I )-19667
Max
iii) Substance gIm”, 1400 1 GO0 - 6 of IS: 1060
Mitt : ( Part I )-1966*
a) For corrugating - 170 (3 ply) - 170 (3 ply)
medium - 150(5ply) - 150 (5ply)
1,) For combined - 400 ( 3 ply ) - 450 ( 3 ply )
weight of liners - 450 (5 ply) - 500 ( 5 ply)
~iv) Type of flute 4, B, C or A, B, C or
any combi- any combi-
nation of nation of
these these
v) Puncture resistanre§ 200 175 200 200 9 of IS:4006
beach units, hlin (Part II )-19iz’$
*Methods of sampling and test for paper and allied product, Part I ( r&ted).
iMethods of test for paper and pulp based packaging materials, Part I.
fMethods of test for paper and pulp based packaging materials, Part II.
$Not less than four puncture test shall be made on unscored areas, only one
test may fall below the minimum prescribed, but not more than 10 percent below the
prescribed minimum. One test shall be made in such a manner that the corrugations
of the combined board run in the same plane as the puncture arm and one test with
corrugations at right angles to the first test. Such tests shall be made from both sides
of the board.
7. MANUFACTURERS’ JOINT
7.1 The manufacturers' joint shal1 be stitched, glued, or taped as follows:
a) Stitched Joint
i) ,S’titching lap-The stitching lap shall be not less than 30 mm
wide, and may be inside or outside the box.
ii) @acing of stitches - The centre-to-centre spacing of stitches shall
not exceed 60 mm. The clear distance from a cut edge of the
fibreboard to any stitch shall be not less than 6 mm and not
more than 25 mm. The stitches shall be made at an angle of
45” to the cut edge.
6
IS : 7149 - 1973
b) Glued Joint
i) The glucing lap shall hc not less than 30 mm wide.

ii) The adhesive used for the joint shall be water-resistant type.
iii) The adhesive applied shall be in a strip not less than 25 mm.
iv) The adhesive shall be applied not nearer to a cut edge than 3
mm, and not nearer to a crease at the ends of the lap than
12 mm.
c) Tabed Joint
i) The side and end to bc joined shall meet within 5 mm but

not nearer than I.5 mm.
ii) The tape used for the joint shall be gummed reinforced tape not
less than 50 mm wide.
iii) The tape shall be applied symmetrically about the joint.
iv) The tape shall start and finish within 3 to 6 mm from the crease
at each end of the joint.
8. CLOSURE
8.1 The box when filled shall be securely closed by glueing the outer .flaps
to the innerflaps with a water-resistant type glue.
8.2 The quality of the glue and the amount of glue used for the closure shall
be such that all the flaps wiI1 remain glued together with all normal conditions
OF transport and storage.
8.3 Gum Taping - Suitable gum tape, minimum 50 mm wide, sIral be

used on all seams.
8.4 Strapping- Two nonmetallic straps minimum 12 mm wide shall be

used in suitable directions. I
9. PRINTABILITY OF OUTER SURFACE
9.1 Tile condition of the outer SUY~CC OF the box shall be such as to allow
the marking, stamping or stcncilling of the box with the type of ink normally
used for the purpose.
10.1 Packing - ‘I‘hc 1mxcs shall IJe supplied in the form as agreed to betcveen
th(: purchaser and the vendor.
7
10.2 Marking - Tn addition to the marki?g of the buyer. each box shall
have the following information lcgibty and urdelibly marked on the outside
of the bottom of the box unless marking in any other position is agreed to by
the purchaser:
a) Name or registered trade-mark of the box manufacturer,

bj Words ‘ FOR EXPORT ‘,
c) Gross mass limit of the box, and
d) Bursting strength of the fibreboard.
10.2.1. The box may also be marked with the ISI Certification Mark.
NATE - The use of IS1 Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the
Indian Standards Institution ( Certification Marks ) Act and the Rules and Regulations
made thereunder. The IS1 Mark on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys
thr assurance that they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that
standard under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and quality control which
is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by the producer. IS1 marked products
are also continuously checked by IS1 for conformity to that standard as a further
safeguard. Details of c-onditions under which a licence for the use of IS1 Certification
Mark may be granted to manufacturers or processors, may be obtained from the
Indian Standards Institution.
8
IS : 7149- 1973
( Continuedfrom page -3 )
Members Representiq
SKRI NITIN J. NANAVATY ~purva Contain& Privaic Limited, Ahmedabad
SHliI v. R. SHAH ( .~hYfHZte)
Smr P. R. PAREKH Soild Containers Limited, Bombay
SHRI A. N. CHOKSHI (.Il/~rnntc)
SHRI M K. RA~IASAXI Jayant Packaging Private Ltd, Madras
SHRI Y. K. SH.IRJIA Forest Research Institute and Colleges, Dehra Dun
SHRISHLXSHER SINCH Indian Institute of Packaging, Bombay
SIIltIP. v. 1~ARIY_\N.\N ( .ilierlKZte)
Sari P. V~~ERR.W~ (:cnlral Food technological Research Institute
( CSlR ), Mysore
SHRI E. R. VICCAJEE Warden & Company Private Limited, Thana
INDIAN STANDARDS
ON
PAPER AND FLEXIBLE PACKAGING
IS:
2771-1965 Corrugated fibreboard boxes
6481-1971 Guide for principal uses and styles of fibreboard containers
6715-1972 Alaster cartons for export of frozen sea foods and frog legs
IS : 9 3 1 3 - 1 9 7 9
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR CORRUGATED
FIBREBOARD BOXES FOR THE EXPORT
PACKAGING OF GLASS JARS AND BOTTLES
FILLED WITH PROCESSED FOODS
UDC 621.798.143 : [ 676.273.3 ] : 664.8.036 . 62 : 339.564
© Copyright 1980

NEW DELHI 110002
Gr. 3 November 1980

AMENDMENT NO. 1 DECEMBER 1997
TO
IS 9313:1979 SPECIFICATION FOR CORRUGATED
FIBREBOARD BOXES FOR THE EXPORT PACKAGING
OF GLASS JARS AND BOTTLES FILLED WITH
PROCESSED FOODS
( Page4, clause 2.1, line 2 ) — Substitute '1990' for '1977'.
( Page 4, footnote with '‡' mark ) — Insert '(second revision)' at the end.
( Page 4, clause 3.2, Table 1, Note, line 1 ) — Substitute 'no' for 'the'.
( Page 5, clause 4.1.1, line 4 ) — Substitute '1985' for '1966'.
( Page 5, footnote with '*' mark ) — Insert '( first revision )' at the end.
( Page 5, clause 5.1 ) — Substitute the following for the existing text:
'5.1 The blanks shall be properly creased and slotted so that when the box is
assembled there shall be no hole at the corner.
5.1.1 The flaps of the box shall be capable of being folded through 180° inside
and then 180° outside along the line of creasing without cracking of the board or
facing.'
( Page 7, Table 2 ) — Insert the following new test requirement at the end,
in respective columns:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Flap bend 3 2 — 5.1.1
( Page 7, Table 2, col 5 ) — Substitute 'IS 4006 ( Part 1 ): l985†' for 'IS : 4006
( Part I )] - 1966†'.
( Page 7, Table 2, footnote with '†' mark ) — Insert '( first revision )' at the
end.
( CHD 16 )
IS : 9313 - 1979
Indian Standard
P a p e r a n d Flexible P a c k a g i n g Sectional C o m m i t t e e , M C P D 14
SHRI K. VISWANATHAN M e t a l Box I n d i a L t d , Calcutta
Members
S H R I K . R . N A R A S I M H A N ( Alternate t o
Shri K. V i s w a n a t h a n )
DR S. R. AGARWAL G l a x o Laboratories ( I n d i a ) L t d , Bombay
S H R I S. M . K H A N ( Alternate )
S H R I A. B. A J M E R A Card Board Box Manufacturing Company,
Calcutta
S H R I C. B. A J M E R A ( Alternate )
DR R. P. ANEJA N a t i o n a l D a i r y Development Board, A n a n d
SHRI G. K. BHAIA I n d i a n Plastics Federation, C a l c u t t a
S H R I V I D Y A C H A R A N BHARGAVA D i r e c t o r a t e Plant Protection Q u a r a n t i n e &
Storage ( Ministry of Agriculture ),
Faridabad
SHRI L. N. BURMAN I n d i a n Paper Makers Association, C a l c u t t a
S H R I P. L. BURMAN I n d i a n P a p e r Mills Association, C a l c u t t a
S H R I D . S . CHADHA Directorate General of H e a l t h Services ( C e n t r a l
C o m m i t t e e for Food S t a n d a r d s ), N e w Delhi
S M T D E B I M U K H E R J E E ( Alternate )
D R S . S . CHADHA Plasticides Association of I n d i a , N e w Delhi
S H R I S. K . R A M A N ( Alternate )
S H R I S. CHAKRABORTI H i n d u s t a n Lever Limited, Bombay
S H R I A D I R A J S A R I N (Alternate )
SHRI B. D. C H A T T E R J E E I n d i a n Petrochemicals Corporation L t d , V a d o d a r a
S H R I P . R . S E S H A N ( Alternate )
SHRI T. GANGADHARAN I n d i a n Explosives Limited, C a l c u t t a
S H R I R . K R I S H N A N ( Alternate )
S H R I P. S. H A R I H A R A K R I S H N A N T h e T r a v a n c o r e Rayons Limited, K e r a l a
S H R I BHAGVAN B A L A J I S I N G H
( Alternate )
©Copyright 1980
This publication is protected under the Indian Copyright Act ( X I V of 1957 ) and
IS : 9313 - 1979
DR R. JAYARAM F e d e r a t i o n of Biscuit M a n u f a c t u r e r s ' of I n d i a ,
Delhi
S H R I S. K. KESHAVA India Tobacco Company Ltd, Calcutta
S H R I Y. C. D E V E S H W A R ( Alternate )
SHRI A. J. K O T H A R I Larsen & T o u b r o L i m i t e d , Bombay
S H R I R . P . S O O C H A K ( Alternate )
S H R I J. S. M A T H A R U D i r e c t o r a t e General of T e c h n i c a l Development,
N e w Delhi
S H R I V . B. S A X E N A ( Alternate )
SHRI A. L. M U T H I A H I n d i a Packaging Products Pvt L t d , Bangalore
S H R I A . I . A N N A M A L A I ( Alternate )
S H R I P. V. NARAYANAN Indian Institute of Packaging, Bombay
S H R I A . K . S E N G U P T A ( Alternate)
DR A. N. NAYAR Packaging and Wood Products Consultancy
Service, New Delhi
S H R I S A N J A Y K . N A Y A R ( Alternate )
DR S. Y. PANDIT Bayer ( I n d i a ) L i m i t e d , Bombay
DR P. V. R A I K A R ( Alternate )
SHRI M. K. RAMASAMI J a y a n t Packaging Pvt L t d , M a d r a s
S H R I R . M U T H I A H ( Alternate )
S H R I M. K RAMASAMI Federation of Corrugated Box M a n u f a c t u r e r s of
I n d i a , Bombay
S H R I S. S. K A J R I W A L ( Alternate )
S H R I C. V. N. R A O Office of the D e v e l o p m e n t Commissioner,
New D e l h i
SHRI G. V. R A O D i r e c t o r a t e of S t a n d a r d i z a t i o n ( M i n i s t r y of
S H R I O . P . S R I V A S T A V A ( Alternate )
S H R I R. N. S A X E N A Railway Board ( Ministry of Railways),
New Delhi
SHRI J. C. SHAH F e d e r a t i o n of Association of Small I n d u s t r i e s of
I n d i a , N e w Delhi
S H R I D . C H A D H A ( Alternate )
SHRI PRAFULL J. SHETH Solid Containers L t d , B o m b a y
S H R I V. S. J o s H I ( Alternate )
S H R I M. K. L A H E R I ( Alternate )
SHRI S. SUNDER I n d i a Foils Limited, C a l c u t t a
S H R I S. P . C H A T T E R J E E ( Alternate )
SHRI R. C. TANDON Forest Research I n s t i t u t e & Colleges, Dehra Dun
S H R I D. V. VARMA D i r e c t o r a t e G e n e r a l of Inspection ( Ministry of
Defence ) , N e w Delhi
SHRI NIRMAL SINGH ( Alternate )
S H R I P. S. D A S , Director G e n e r a l , I S I ( Ex-officio Member )
Director ( M C P D )
Secretary
SHRI A. R. G U L A T I
Deputy Director ( M C P D ), ISI
2
IS : 9313 - 1979
Indian Standard
0. FOREWORD
on 30 November 1979, after the draft finalized by the Paper and Flexible
0.2 India exports a sizable quantity of processed foods, CHUTNEYS,
pickles, etc, packed in glass jars and bottles. With the increasing
preference of the overseas buyers for the corrugated fibreboard boxes over
the conventional wooden cases, a need was felt to lay down a specification
on such boxes. It is hoped that the publication of this standard will be
helpful to the processed food industry and the packaging industry in
solving their packaging problem to a great extent.
0.3 Any damage or breaking of the glass packs in transit will not only be
a loss of the product but will also spoil the other unit packs in the
transport pack. This standard, therefore, lays emphasis on the adequate
cushioning and separation of the unit packs from each other, besides the
strength and waterproofness requirements of the boxes.
standard is complied with, the final value, observed or calculated,
expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in
accordance with IS : 2-1960*. T h e number of significant places retained
in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value
in this standard.
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard prescribes the requirements for the corrugated fibre-
board boxes for the export packaging of glass jars and bottles filled with
processed foods.
*Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised ).
3
IS : 9313 - 1979
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this standard the terms given in IS : 4261-1967*,
IS : 7186-1973† and IS : 2771 ( Part I ) -1977‡ shall apply.
3 . B O X DESIGN
3.1 Style — T h e box shall be conforming to style 201 or 204 of
IS : 6481-1971§. In case the height of the bottles or jars is less than
15 cm two-tier packaging may be allowed with a double-wall corrugated
board separator of the same construction as that of the board out of
which the box is made.
3.1.1 T h e box shall be provided with top, bottom and centre liners
( separator ) for cushioning.
3.1.2 Partition — Each glass j a r or bottle shall be separated by
corrugated fibreboard slotted partition of height not less than the height
of the container.
3.2 D i m e n s i o n s — T h e internal dimensions of the box shall be as agreed
to between the purchaser and the supplier. T h e maximum combined
internal dimensions ( L + W + D ) shall correspond to the gross mass
of the contents and shall not exceed the values given in Table 1.
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND BURSTING STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS OF

CORRUGATED BOARD BOXES
T Y P E OF BOARD MAXIMUM M A S S OF MAXIMUM COMBINED MINIMUM BURSTING
CONTENTS INTERNAL STRENGTH
DIMENSIONS
(L + W + D)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
kg mm kgf/cm3
Double wall 15 1 275 10
20 1 525 12
Triple wall 30 1 650 14
N O T E — Boxes shall be made with the single dimension exceeding 50 percent of
the sum of the permitted combined dimension.

†Glossary of terms relating to paper and flexible packaging.
‡Specification for fibreboard boxes: Part I Corrugated fibreboard boxes.
§Guide for principal uses and styles of fibreboard containers.
4
IS : 9313 - 1979
3.2.1 Tolerances — A tolerance of ± 3 mm shall be permitted on the

ordered individual dimensions.
4. MATERIAL
4.1 Corrugated Fibreboard — T h e boxes shall be made from corru-
gated fibreboard of suitable construction meeting with the bursting
strength requirements given in Table 1.
4.1.1 Waterproofing Requirement of the Board — T h e outer layer of the
corrugated fibreboard box shall be rendered waterproof by any suitable
barrier material so that when tested according to the method given
in 6 of IS : 4006 ( Part 1 )-1966*, the increase in mass of the sample due
to water absorption shall not be more than 155 g/m 2 .
4.2 Liner a n d P a r t i t i o n — T h e side, top, bottom liners, centre layers
and slotted partitions shall be made from double wall board of AB or AA
flutting with all plies of minimum grammage of 120 gsm of kraft paper.
4.3 A d h e s i v e — T h e adhesive used for joining different plies of the
corrugated fibreboard shall be starch or dextrine based. Sodium silicate
or any other highly alkaline adhesive shall not be used.
5. C O N S T R U C T I O N
5.1 T h e blanks shall be properly creased and slotted so that when the
box is assembled there shall be no holes at the corners. T h e flaps of
the box shall be capable of being folded 180° along the line of creasing
without cracking of the board or facings.
5.2 Manufacturer's J o i n t — T h e manufacturer's joint may be made
either by a lap or by butting the edges, as agreed to between the purchaser
and the supplier.
5.2.1 Lap joint — T h e joint may either be stitched or glued.
5.2.1.1 Stitches — T h e width of the lap shall not be less than 30 m m .
Wire staples or stitches shall be not more than 60 mm apart in each row
and the first and last not farther than 25 mm from the beginning and the
end of the joint respectively. T h e staples and stitches shall be centrally
located along the lap and may be straight or at an angle of 45°.
5.2.1.2 Glue — T h e width of the lap shall be not less than 30 mm
with an extension to the normal length of the lap of not less than 25 mm
at both ends, unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser and the
*Methods of test for paper and pulp based packaging materials, Part I.
5
IS : 9313 - 1979
supplier. T h e joint shall be firmly glued throughout the entire area of

the joint.
5.2.1.3 Butt joint — When the joint is made by butting the edges,
it shall be secured by the adhesive tape along the complete length of the
joint. T h e tape used shall be not less than 50 mm wide.
6. SAMPLING, CONDITIONING A N D TESTING
6.1 T h e boxes shall be sampled and tested within 20 days of their receipt
by the purchaser. From each consignment of 10 000 boxes or part
thereof, adequate number of boxes shall be selected for testing according
to 6.3:
a) If the boxes arc bundled, the number of bundles to be selected at
random shall be equal to the number of boxes required and from
each bundle so selected one box shall be selected at random for
testing.
b) If the boxes are not bundled the boxes shall be selected at random
from the total consignment.
6.2 Conditioning — T h e sample of boxes so selected shall be deemed to
represent the whole consignment of boxes and shall be conditioned for
testing by the method prescribed in 5 of IS : 1060 ( Part I )-1966*.
6.3 T e s t i n g
6.3.1 T h e types of tests and selection of boxes for testing shall be as
given in Table 2.
6.3.1.1 T h e rcquirtments for the material of construction of the box
as well as method of test for evaluating these requirements shall be as
given in relevant clause in Table 2.
6.4 A c c e p t a n c e and R e t e s t i n g
6.4.1 Acceptance — T h e consignment of boxes shall be deemed to
comply with the test requirements of this specification, if after the
specified number of boxes from the test sample as given in Table 2 have
been tested as required in relevant clauses and all the boxes pass the
tests.
6.4.2 Retesting — If only one box fails to pass one or more of the
tests, retesting shall be done on double the number of boxes given under
*Methods of sampling a n d test for p a p e r a n d allied products, Part I ( revised ).
6
IS : 9313 - 1979
col 2 of Table 2 for that particular test for which the box failed. If no
further box fails in the retest, the consignment shall be accepted as
passing.
TABLE 2 TESTING OF CONTAINERS

( Clauses 6.3.1 and 6.3.1.1 )
T Y P E oF No. OF BOXES No. OF T E S T No. OF T E S T S METHOD OF TEST.
TEST TO BE SELECTED SPECIMENS ON EACH T E S T REF TO CLAUSE
FROM SAMPLES OBTAINED SPECIMEN
FOR TESTING FROM EACH
Box
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Bursting 3 1 10 12.5 of I S : 1060
strength ( 5 each side ) ( P a r t I )-1966*
W a t e r absorp- 3 1 1 6 of IS : 4006
tion cobb/ ( on external ( P a r t I )-1966†
30 Min surface only )
*Methods of sampling and test for paper and allied products, Part I ( revised ).
†Methods of test for paper and pulp based packaging materials, Part I.
7. CLOSURE
7.1 T h e box when filled shall be securely closed by glueing or stitching/
taping.
8. REINFORCEMENT
8.1 T h e filled boxes may be reinforced with minimum of two numbers of
non-metallic straps.
9. PRINTABILITY OF O U T E R SURFACE
9.1 T h e condition of the outer surface of the box shall be such as to
allow the marking, stamping or stencilling of the box with the type of ink
normally used for the purpose.
10. PACKING A N D MARKING

10.1 P a c k i n g — T h e boxes shall be supplied in the collapsed or folded
form as agreed to between the purchaser and the vendor.
10.2 M a r k i n g — In addition to the marking of the buyer, each box shall
have the following information legibly and indelibly marked on the
7
IS : 9313 - 1979
outside of the bottom of the box unless marking in any other position is
agreed to by the purchaser:
a) N a m e or registered trade-mark of the box manufacturer;

b) Gross mass limit of the box; and
c) Bursting strength of the fibreboard.
10.2.1 Corrugated fibreboard boxes conforming to this specification

may also be marked with the ISI Certification M a r k .
NOTE — The use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of
the Indian Standards Institution ( Certification Marks ) Act and the Rules and
Regulations made thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an Indian
quality control which is devised and supervised by ISI and operated by the producer.
ISI marked products are also continuously checked by ISI for conformity to that
standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the
use of the ISI Certification Mark may be granted to manufacturers or processors,
may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.
8
IS : 9313 - 1979

Convener Representing
S H R I A. B. AJMERA C a r d Board Box Mfg C o , Calcutta
Members
S H R I C. C. A J M E R A ( Alternate to
Shri A. B. Ajmera )
SHRI J. BANERJEE Directorate of S t a n d a r d i z a t i o n ( Ministry of
S H R I U. B. KANCHAN ( Alternate )
S H R I M. P. BAYA P u n a l u r Paper Mills Limited, P u n a l u r ( Kerala )
S H R I L. N. BURMAN I n d i a n P a p e r Makers Association, Calcutta
S H R I S. CHAKRABORTI H i n d u s t a n Lever L t d , A h m a d a b a d
S H R I P . K. B O S E ( Alternate )
S H R I S. N. C H A T T E R J E E Ashok Paper Mills L t d , Calcutta
S H R I A . N . CHOKSRI Solid Containers Ltd, Bombay
D R H . B . N . M U R T H Y ( Alternate )
SHRI B. R. D O S H I Swastic P a p e r Industries, Bombay
S H R I S. B. D O S H I (Alternate )
SHRI T. GANGADHARAN I n d i a n Explosives L t d , C a l c u t t a
S H R I R. K R I S H N A N ( Alternate )
SHRI B. N. GHOSH Corrugating & Paper Processing Co Pvt Ltd,
Calcutta
S H R I S. M I T R A ( Alternate )
SHRI P. N. KALRA Ministry of Railways, N e w Delhi
S H R I S. K. KESHAVA I n d i a To b acco C o L t d , C a l c u t t a
S H R I KAMAL M E A T T L E Unisystems Pvt Ltd, F a r i d a b a d
SHRI M. M. MENON The Andhra Pradesh Paper Mills Ltd,
R a j a h m u n d r v ( AP )
SHRI A. L. M U T H I A H I n d i a Packaging Products Pvt L t d , Bangalore
S H R I A. L. A N N A M A L A I ( Alternate )
SHRI N I T I N J. NANAVATY Apurva Containers Pvt L t d , A h m a d a b a d
SHRi V. B. S H A H ( Alternate )
S H R I P. V. NARAYANAN I n d i a n Institute of Packaging, Bombay
DR A. N. NAYER P a c k a g i n g & Wood Products, N e w D e l h i
S H R I M. K. RAMASAMI J a y a n t Packaging P v t L t d , M a d r a s
SHRI H. D. SREENATH L a x m i Board a n d P a p e r Mills Pvt L t d , Kalyan
( Maharashtra )
DR RAVI TALWAR T h e P a p e r Products Ltd, Bombay
S H R I R. C. TANDON Forest Research I n s t i t u t e & Colleges, D e h r a D u n
SHRI P. VEERAJU Central Food Technological Research I n s t i t u t e ,
Mysore
S H R I E. R. VICCAJEE W a r d e n & Co Pvt L t d , T h a n a
9
INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS ( SI UNITS )
Base Units
Length metre m
Mass kilogram kg
Time second s
temperature
Amount of substance mole mol
Supplementary Units

Derived U n i t s
QUANTITY UNIT SYMBOL DEFINITION
Force newton N 1N = 1 kg.m/s 2

Flux weber Wb 1 Wb = 1 V.s
Flux density tesla T 1 T = 1 Wb/m2
Frequency hertz Hz 1 Hz = 1 c/s (s -2 )
Electric conductance siemens S 1S = 1 A/V
Pressure, stress pascal Pa 1 Pa = 1 N/m2
PUBLICATIONS OF INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTION
INDIAN STANDARDS
Over 10 000 Indian Standards covering various subjects have been
issued so far. Of these, the standards belonging to the Marine, Cargo
Movement and Packaging Group fall under the following categories:
MARINE CARGO MOVEMENT
Anchors and anchor cables C a r g o marking, h a n d l i n g a n d s t o w i n g
Diesel e n g i n e s Freight c o n t a i n e r s
Distress s i g n a l s Industrial t r u c k s , t r a c t o r s a n d trailers
Lifting c h a i n s , a s s o c i a t e d fittings a n d
Fire s a f e t y components
Inland vessels Non-powered materials handling
Life s a v i n g e q u i p m e n t & a c c e s s o r i e s equipment
Magnetic compasses Pallets
T r a n s p o r t t r a c t o r s a n d trailers
Mooring equipment
Navigational lights PACKAGING
Piping s y s t e m s , v a l v e s a n d a c c e s s o r i e s
Ships derricks and accessories Glass containers
Ships' side scuttles & w i n d o w s Metal c o n t a i n e r s
P a p e r a n d flexible p a c k a g i n g
Ventilation Plastics containers
Miscellanceous Wood and wood products containers
OTHER PUBLICATIONS
ISI Bulletin ( P u b l i s h e d Every M o n t h )
S i n g l e Copy Rs 4 . 0 0
Annual S u b s c r i p t i o n Rs 36.00
Standards : Monthly Additions
S i n g l e Copy Re 0.30
Annual S u b s c r i p t i o n Rs 3 00
Annual R e p o r t s ( f r o m 1 9 4 8 4 9 O n w a r d s ) Rs 2 00 to 6 00
ISI H a n d b o o k 1980 Rs 1 0 0 . 0 0
INDIAN S T A N D A R D S INSTITUTION
M a n a k Bhavan, 9 B a h a d u r S h a h Zafar Marg, NEW DELHI 1 1 0 0 0 2
T e l e p h o n e s : 26 60 2 1 , 27 01 31 Telegrams : Manaksanstha
Regional Offices Telephone
Western : N o v e l t y C h a m b e r s , Grant Road BOMBAY 4 0 0 0 0 7 37 97 29
Eastern : 5 Chowringhee Approach CALCUTTA 7 0 0 0 7 2 27 50 90
Southern : C. I T. C a m p u s , Adyar MADRAS 6 0 0 0 2 0 41 2 4 4 2
Branch Offices.
' P u s h p a k ' , N u r m o h a m e d Shaikh Marg Khanpur AHMADABAD 3 8 0 0 0 1 2 0 3 91
' F ' B l o c k , Unity Bldg N a r a s i m h a r a j a S q u a r e BANGALORE 5 6 0 0 0 2 2 76 49
G a n g o t r i C o m p l e x , B h a d b h a d a R o a d , T.T. N a g a r BHOPAL 4 6 2 0 0 3 6 2 7 16
22E Kalpana Area BHUBANESHWAR 7 5 1 0 1 4 5 3 6 2 7
A h i m s a B l d g , S C O 8 2 - 8 3 , S e c t o r 17C CHANDIGARH 1 6 0 0 1 7 2 83 20
5-8-56C L N Gupta Marg HYDERABAD 5 0 0 0 0 1 22 10 8 3
D - 2 7 7 T o d a r m a l M a r g , Banipark JAIPUR 3 0 2 0 0 6 6 98 32
1 1 7 / 4 1 8 B S a v o d a y a Nagar KANPUR 2 0 8 0 0 5 8 12 7 2
P a t l i p u t r a I n d u s t r i a l Estate PATNA 8 0 0 0 1 3 6 28 08
H a n t e x B l d g ( 2 n d F l o o r ) , Rly S t a t i o n R o a d TRIVANDRUM 6 9 5 0 0 1 32 27
Printed at Bela Pack n Print, New Delhi, India
AMENDMENT NO. 1 OCTOBER 1997
TO
IS 12212 : 1987 SPECIFICATION FOR CORRUGATED
FIBREBOARD BOXES FOR TRANSPORT PACKAGING
OF BUTTER PACKED IN PRIMARY CARTONS
( Page 1, clause 2 ) — Substitute the following for the existing matter.
" 2 . Terminology — For the purpose of this standard, the terms and definitions
given in IS 7186 : 1973 'Glossary of terms relating to paper and flexible
packaging' and IS 2771 ( Part 1 ) : 1990 'Corrugated Gbreboaid boxes: Part 1
General requirements ( second revision )' shall apply."
( Page 1, clause 5.2 ) — Delete the last sentence.
( Page 2, clause 8.2 ) — Substitute the following for the existing matter:
'8.2 Flap Bend Test — The flaps of the box shall be capable of being folded
through 180° inside and then 180° outside along the line of creasing without
cracking of the board or facing.'
( CHD 016 )

UDC 621.798.12 [ 676.273.3 ] : 637.2 IS : 12212 - 1987 IS : 12212 - 1987
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
CORRUGATED FIBREBOARD BOXES FOR TRANSPORT PACKAGING OF
BUTTER PACKED IN PRIMARY CARTONS
Paper and Flexible Packaging Sectional Committee, MCPD 14; Fibreboard Containers Subcommittee, MCPD 14 : 2 [ Ref : Doc : MCPD 14 ( 105 ) ]
1. Scope — Prescribes the requirements of corrugated fibreboard boxes for transport packaging of
table butter packed in primary cartons.
Note — No box shall contain a mass exceeding 25 kg.
1.1 This standard does not cover the transport packaging of table butter packed in tins.
2. Terminology — For the purpose of this standard, the terms and definitions given in IS : 7186-
1973 'Glossary of terms relating to paper and flexible packaging' and IS : 2771 ( Part 1 )-1977
'Fibreboard boxes : Part 1 Corrugated fibreboard boxes ( first revision )' shall apply.
3. Style – The boxes shall conform to Style 201 or 204 of IS : 6481-1971 'Guide for principal uses
and styles of fibreboard containers'.
4. Materials
4.1 Corrugated Fibreboard — Double-wall ( 5-ply ) corrugated fibreboard, manufactured from kraft
paper/linear of burst factor not less than 20 and borated starch or dextrine base type adhesive,
meeting with the requirements given in Table 1.
4.2 Staples — Mild steel, galvanized wire of 0.52 mm thickness, 2.65 mm width and 15 mm crown.
5. Manufacture, Workmanship and Finish
5.1 The box shall be manufactured from one-piece of fibreboard, scored and slotted to form a ???
piece having four flaps for closing each of the opposite ends. The flaps along the longer edge shall
be the outer flaps and those along the shorter edge shall be the inner flaps.
5.2 The blank shall be properly creased and slotted so that when the box is assembled, there shall
be no holes at the corners. The flutes shall be aligned vertically when the box is assembled.
5.3 The body joint shall be lapped on the inside and the lapping shall be not less than 35 mm. The
lapped joint shall be secured using two rows of staples. The spacing between the two staples shall
not be more than 50 mm in each row; and the first and the last staple not farther than 20 mm from
the beginning and the end of the joint, respectively. The staples shall be centrally located along the
lap and shall be at an angle of 45° ( diagonally stapled ).
5.4 The general workmanship and finish shall be good.
6. Dimensions and Tolerances
6.1 The dimensions shall be the internal dimensions of the assembled box in the sequence of length,
width and depth. The boxes shall conform to the dimensions 'as ordered'.
6.2 A tolerance of ±3 mm shall be permissible on the individual ordered dimensions of the
assembled box.
7. Corrugated Fibreboard Requirements — The corrugated fibreboard shall meet with the
requirements as given in Table 1.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF CORRUGATED FIBREBOARD
Sl Characteristics Requirement Methods of Test
No. Ref t o Cl No.
i) Type of flute Type 'B' ( narrow ) 50 to 56 corrugations per
liner 30 cm
ii) Height of flutes 2.1 to 2.8 mm, —
exclusive of liners
iii) Water absorption 155 g/m 2 6 of IS : 4006 ( Part 1 )-
( 30 minutes Cobb 1985 Methods of test for
test ), Max paper and pulp based
packaging materials,
Part 1 ( first revision )
iv) Puncture resis- 200 beech units 8 of IS : 4006 ( Part 2 )-
tance, Min 1985 Methods of test for
paper and pulp based
packaging materials,
Part 2 ( first revision )
Adopted 20 October 1987 © April 1988, BIS Gr 2
BUREAU OF INDIAN S T A N D A R D S
NEW DELHI 110002
IS : 12212 - 1987
8. Performance Requirements
8.1 Compression Strength of the Box — The empty box, conditioned at a temperature of 27 ± 2°C
and 65 ± 2 percent relative humidity, shall be tested for compression strength in accordance with
the method given in IS : 7028 ( Part 6 )-1987 'Performance tests for complete, filled transport packages:
Part 6 Compression test ( first revision )'. The average compression strength of the box ( top to
bottom direction on the largest face as base ) at a deflection of not more than 20 mm shall be not
less than the equivalent of load of 15 N/cm of the running perimeter of the base.
8.2 Flap Bend Test – The box flaps shall first be bent about the line of creasing of the flaps to touch
the inside surface of the box, and then bent through 360° to touch the outside surface of the box.
They shall then be bent again through 360° to touch the inside surface of the box. At the conclusion
of the test, there shall be no rupture of the surface of the fibreboard along the line of creasing of
the flaps.
9. Sampling, Conditioning and Testing of Boxes
9.1 The boxes shall be sampled and tested within 20 days of their receipt by the purchaser. From
each consignment of 10 000 boxes or part thereof, 20 boxes shall be selected for testing as follows:
a) If the boxes are bundled, 20 bundles shall be selected at random and from each bundle so
selected, one box shall be selected at random for testing.
b) If the boxes are not bundled, 20 boxes shall be selected at random from the total
consignment.
9.2 Conditioning — The sample of 20 boxes so selected shall be deemed to represent the whole
consignment or boxes and shall be conditioned for testing by the method prescribed in 5 of IS : 1060
( Part 1 )-1966 'Methods of sampling and test for paper and allied products, Part 1 ( revised )'.
9.3 Testing — The types of tests and selection of boxes and test specimen for each test shall be as
given in Table 2.
TABLE 2 TYPES OF TESTS AND TESTING OF BOXES
SI Type of Test No. of Boxes to No. of Test No. of Tests Methods of Test,
No. be S e l e c t e d from Specimens on Each Ref t o Cl N o .
Sample for Obtained Specimen
Testing from Each
Box
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Water absorprion 3 1 1 6 of IS : 4006
( 30 minutes ( Part 1 )-1985
Cobb test ) Methods of test
( 7.1, Table 1 ) for paper and
pulp based pack-
aging materials,
Part 1 ( first
revision )
ii) Puncture 3 4 1 8 of IS : 4006
resistance ( 2 each for ( Part 2 )-1986
( 7.1, Table 1 ) CD and MD ) Methods of test
for paper and
pulp based packa-
ging mate rials,
Part 2 ( first
revision )
iii) Compression 5 1 1 IS : 7028 ( Part 6 )-
strength 1987 Specification
( 8.1 ) for performance
tests for com-
plete, filled
transport pack-
ages: Part 6
Compression test
( first revision )
iv) Flap bend 3 2 1 8.2
( 8.2 )
2
IS : 12212 - 1987
9.4 Acceptance and Retesting
9.4.1 Acceptance — The consignment of boxes shall be deemed to comply with the test require-
ments of this specification, if after the specified number of boxes from the test sample as given in
Table 2 have been tested as required in relevant clauses and all the boxes pass the tests.
9.4.2 If only one box from the test sample fails in one or more tests, retesting shall be done on
double the number of boxes given under col 3 of Table 2 for that particular test for which the box
failed. If no further box fails in the retest, the consignment shall be deemed to comply with the test
requirements of this specification.
10. Marking
10.1 Each box shall be legibly and indelibly marked on the outer surface of the bottom of the box
with the following particulars:
a) Manufacturer's name or initials or recognized trade-mark;
b) Gross packing mass limit;
c) Batch or lot number; and
d) Any other markings required by the purchaser.
10.2 Certification Marking — Details available with the Bureau of Indian Standards.
1 1 . Packing — The boxes shall be packed in bundles of 20 each, unless otherwise specified by the
purchaser. Before packing, it shall be the responsibility of the supplier to ensure that the boxes are
dry, clean and free from any signs of fungal or insect attack, as these boxes are to be used for packing
food products.
EXPLANATORY NOTE
Table butter in cakes is normally available in packs of 100, 200 and 500 g. Such cakes,
wrapped in vegetable parchment or greaseproof paper/aluminium foil laminates are encased in
primary cartons. A number of such packs are further packed in corrugated fibreboard boxes for
their safe handling, transportation and storage. In preparing this standard, the prevailing trade
practices in the dairy industry of the country have been taken into consideration.
3
Printed at Swatantra Bharat Press, Delhi, India
SUBSECTION III
PAPER PACKAGING
FOR INDUSTRIAL
PRODUCTS
IS 11761:1997 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXW
( Reaffirmed 2002 )
Indian Stcthdard
MULTI-WALL PAPER SACKS FOR CEMENT -
SPECIFICATION
( First Revision zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFED
~cs 55.080; 9l.loo.io zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
0 BIS 1997

NEW DELHI 110002 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHG
January 1997 Price Group 3

FOREWORD
This Indian Standard (First Revision) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft
finalized by the Paper and Pulp Based Packaging Sectional Committee had been approved by the Chemical
Division Council.
Paper sacks are good substitute for the conventional jute bags since they are free from seepage and give
better protection from moisture and air. However, care has to be taken for handling them during filling,
storage, and transportation because the use of hooks is strictly prohibited in this case. Pelletization of
filled paper sacks during their handling and transportation gives them an added advantage over the jute
bags.
This standard was first published in 19S6. At that time the cement industrywas at experimental stage with
these sacks and only valved-sewn-gussetted type paper sacks were of use in the country. Over the years
technology has been devclopcd and other type of sacks also now manufactured in the country for packing
cement. In this revision requirements for sacks with pasted end have been included. Depending on the
development invarious fields requirements of materials, adhesives and drop test have also been modified
in this revision.
A scheme for labelling environment friendly products known as EC0 Mark has been introduced at the
instance of the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MEF), Government of India. The EC0 Mark would
be administered by the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) under the zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFED
BISAct, 1986 as per the Resolutions
No. 71 dated 21 February 1991 and No. 425 dated 28 October 1992 published in the Gazette of the
Government of India. For a product to be eligible for marking with EC0 logo, it shall also carry the IS1
Mark of BIS besides meeting additional environment friendly requirements. For this purpose, the
Standard Mark of BIS would be a single mark being a combination of the IS1 Mark and the EC0 logo.
Requirements to be satisfiicd for a product to qualify for the BIS Standard Mark for EC0 friendliness, has
been included in this revision based on the Gazette Notirication No. 364 dated 7 September 1995 for
packaging material/package (Part I Paper Board and Plastics zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFED
e xc luding laminates) as environment friendly
products published in the Gazette of India.These requirements will be optional; manufacturing units will
be free to opt for the IS1 mark alone also.
The Committee responsible for formulation of this standard is given in Annex B.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall he rounded off in accordance
with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values (,rlV.~ed)‘. The number of significant places
rctaincd in the rounded off value should bc the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
IS 11761: 199’7 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfed
Indian Standard zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLK

M ULTI-W ALL PAPER SACKS FOR CEM ENT -
SPECIFICATION
( First Revision )
1 SCOPE 5.3 Adhesive
This standard specifies requirements for valved- Adhesive used shall be treated suitably to resist
sewn-gussetted, and valved-pasted ends multi-wall microbial growth as are necessary.
paper sacks intended for the packing of 50 kg of
cement. 5.4 Sewing Tape
2 REFERENCES The sewing tape used shall be of extensible kraft or

crepe tape of width 50-55 mm and shall be glued to
The Indian Standards listed in Annex A contain the outer ply along with a filler cord of the same
provisions which through reference in this text, material of at least 8 mm width on either side.
constitute provisions of this Indian Standard. At
the time of publication, the editions indicated were 6 CONSTRUCTION
valid. All standards are subject to revisions, and
parties to agreements based on this Indian Stand- 6.1 The sack shall be made of three or more well-
nested plies of the type of paper as specified in 5.1
ard are encouraged to investigate the possibility of
applying the most recent editions of the Indian and 5.1.1, the combination of the papers in the sack
Standards indicated in Annex ,I giving a total minimum tensile energy absorption
(TEA) value of 548 J/m2 along machine direction
3 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
TYPES (MD) and 274 J/m* along cross direction (CD).
Each individual ply shall be tested for its tensile
Multi-wall paper sacks shall be of following two strength and stretch in the cross and machine direc-
types: tions by the method detailed in 12.3 of IS 1060
a) zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
Type l- Valved-sewn-gussetted , and (Part 1) : 1966. The values of TEA thus obtained
b) Ty pe2- Valved-pasted ends. for each ply shall be added to obtain the total TEA
for complying with the minimum requirement.
4 TERMINOLOGY
6.1.1 The other properties of the kraft paper shall
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions be as under:
given in IS 9 028 : 1978 and IS 9042 : 1978 Sl Property Value M ethod of Test
shall apply. No.
5 MATERIAL i) Elongation at MD - 2.5 12.3 of IS 1060
5.1 Material of construction shall be either sack break, percent, (Part 1) : 1966
kraft paper or extensible kraft or crimped paper or M in CD - 4.5 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQ
d0
a combination of these. However, combination of ii) Tear factor, MD - 100 12.7 of IS 1060
sack kraft and extensible kraft paper is not recom- M in (Part 1 ) :1966
mended.
CD - 120 Cl0
51.1 The outer ply shall have a reduced slippage
characteristic for the ease of stacking of filled iii) Porosity, Sec/lOO ml 2.5 Appendix A of
cement bags. (Gurley), M ax IS 3413 : 1977
5.2 Sewing Thread 6.2 Shape and Dimensions

The thread used for sewing the sack shall be made The sack shall be of either the valved-sewn-gus-
of natural or synthetic fibre or a combination of setted type or valved-pasted ends type and of
these. The minimum breaking load of the thread dimensions as shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 respective-
shall be 68.5 N. ly. The length of the sack may vary and shall be
1
1s:3 STITCH LINE
110
—
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I /
I I
I
I
1
I I
i
I
/
I
\ 38s3
419t5
GUSSET
—
L4025
FIG. I N4LJLTI-W&L PAPER SACK FOR PACKING 50 kg CEMENT (VAIVED-SEW&-GUSSE~D TYPEJ
I
I
I
I
I
?r
:[
-:
I
500 I 5
+
All dimensions in mi!lil]]etres.
FIG. 2 Mu1,TI-WALL PAi>ER SACK 50 kg CEMENT (VALVEII-PWTEDEND TYPE)
FOR P.4CKING
2
IS 11761: 1997
specified by the purchaser depending on the failure in bursting leading to seepage, the lot shall
temperature of filling and the density of the cement be considered failing.
to be filled by him. The top and bottom width in
9 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EC0
pasted end type sacks may also vary and shall be
MARK
specified by the purchaser. The sack shall be suitab-
ly perforated for escape of air. There shall be 9 to 9.1 General Requirements
12 stitches per 10 cm length of stitching in valved-
9.1.1 The product shall conform to the require-
sewn-gussetted sacks.
ments for quality and performance prescribed
6.3 Ends under 3 to 8.
6.3.1 Both ends of valved-sewn-gussetted sacks 9.1.2 The paper and paper boards used for the
shall be attached with glued crepe or extensible manufacture of packaging materials/packages shall
paper tape and then sewn with the sewing thread comply with the relevant Indian Standards.
with the reinforcing filler cord.
9.1.3 The manufacturer shall produce to BIS, the
6.3.2 Both ends of valved-pasted ends sacks shall environmental consent clearance from the con-
be pasted with adhesive as specified in 5.3. cerned State Pollution Control Board as per the
7 WORKMANSIIIP provisions of zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFED
Water (Prevention and Control of Pol-
lution) Act 1974 and Air (Prevention and Control of
The plies shall be properly but not excessively Pollution) Act 1981 along with the authorization, if
creased. In the construction of the sack tube, the required, under the Environment (Protection) Act
outer ply fit shall be such that at the point of 1986 and the rules made thereunder, while applying
manufacture, each ply shall be smaller in circum- for EC0 Mark.
ference than the next outer ply within the elonga-
tion limits of the material in order to ensure; even 9.2 Specific Requirements
load distribution between the plies. Care shall be 9.2.1 The material shall be of the following two
taken to ensure adequate longitudinal overlap, types depending on the raw material used in the
equal gusset formation and spot gluing quantity manufacture:
and line of gluing.
a) Type A- Manufactured from pulp contain-
8 TESTING ing not less than 60 percent by mass of pulp
8.1 Sampling shall be as per procedure laid down made from materials other than bamboo,
in IS 10528 : 1983. hardwood, softwood and reed.
b) Type B - Manufactured from pulp made
8.2 Conditioning
from 100 percent waste paper or agricul-
The paper sack samples from the lot for testing tural/industrial waste.
shall be conditioned as per IS 1060 (Part 1) : 1966. NOTE - The manufacturer shall provide documentary
evidence by way of certificate or declaration to this effect to
8.3 Drolr Test BIS while applyq for EC0 mark for requirements under (a)
and (11) above.
Ten sacks shall be taken from a lot of sacks offered
for testing. The sacks shall be conditioned and 10 MARKING AND PACKING
filled as per the details given in IS 11052 : 1984.
Each sack shall then be subjected to the following 10.1 Paper sacks shall be bundled and suitably
sequential drops: packed in waterproof material or as agreed upon
One drop each on front side, back side, right between the purchaser and the supplier, for supply.
side, left side, bottom and top. The drop height 10.2 The EC0 marked packaging material/pack-
shall be 0.85 m for the first two drops (that is, age may be sold along with instructions for proper
front and back sides) and 0.3 m for drops on the use and mode of safe disposal so as to maximise its
remaining sides. performance and minimize wastage.
8.3.1 The sacks shall be examined for bursting 10.3 Each sack shall be marked with the following
leading to seepage of the contents at the end of information printed on it:
each drop. The lot shall be considered passing if not
a) Relevant product details along with the
more than one sack shows failure in bursting lead-
name of the product manufacturer;
ing to seepage. The lot shall be considered failing if
more than two sacks shows failure in bursting lead- b) Net mass of the contents; and
ing to seepage. However, if two sacks shows failure c) ‘Do not use hooks’, preferably showing the
in bursting, a second set of 5 sacks from the same corresponding pictorial illustration as per
lot shall be tested and if more than one shows zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
1s 1260 (Part 2) : 1979.
3
IS 11761: 1997
10.3.1 The sacks may also be marked with the under. The details of conditions under which the
following information: licence for the use of Standard Mark may be granted
a) ‘Do not drop’, preferably showing the pic- to manufacturers or producers may be obtained
torial illustration as per IS 1260 (Part 2) : from the Bureau of Indian Standards.
1979.
10.3.3 Additional Requirements for EC0 M ark
b) ‘Do not drop on edges, corners and ends’,
preferably showing the corresponding pic- 10.3.3.1 Each sack may display in brief the criteria
torial illustration as per IS 1260 (Part 2) : for which the product has been labelled as environ-
1979. ment friendly.
10.3.2 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
BIS Certitication Mm-king
10.3.3.2 It shall be suitably marked on each sack
The product may also be marked with the Standard that EC0 Mark label is applicable only to the
Mark. packaging material/package if content is not
10.3.2.1 The use of the Standard Mark is governed separately covered under the EC0 Mark scheme.
NOTE - It may be stated that the EC0 Mark is applicable
by the provisions of zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
Bureau of Indian Standards Act,
to the product or packaging material or both. zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZ
1986 and the Rules and Regulations made there-
ANNEX zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
A
(Clause 2)
1060 Methods of sampling and test for 9028 ’ lg7’ Glossary of terms relating to
paper sacks
(Part 1) : 1966 paper and allied products: Part 1 9042. 1g78
(revised) Method of measurement and
expression of the dimensions of
1260 Pictorial marking for handling paper sacks
(Part 2) : 1979 and labelling of goods: Part 2 10528 : 1983 Method of sampling for empty
General goods (second revision) paper sack for testing
3413 : 1977 Base paper for carbon paper (Jlrst 1 1o52 : lgs4 Methods of test for vertical im-
revision) pact drop test on paper sack
IS 11761: 1997 zyxwvutsrqponmlkji
ANNEX B zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIH
(Foreword)
SHRI P. V. NARAKA~W Indian Institute of Packaging, Mumbai
M embers
SHR~K. B. C&PTA(Alternate to
Shri P.V. Narayanan)
SHRIANILAGGARWAL Ministry of Defence (DGQA), New Delhi
SHRIS. N. SRIVAZXAVA (Altemare)
SHFU A. B. A.t~~t7-4 Card Board Box Manufacturing, Calcutta
SHRIS. B. AMERA (Alternate)
SHRIS. N. BHADKE Tata Oil Mills Ltd, Mumbai
SHRtV. SrvARAMAN(Alternate)
SHRIAMBRISHBHARGAVA AI1India Small Paper Mills Association, Mumbai
SHRISANJAYVERMA(Alternate)
SH~UV. C. BHARGAVA Directorate of Plant Protection Quarantine & Storage, Faridabad
SHRIS. K. GHOSH (Alternate)
SHRID. K. BORAL India Foils Ltd,Calcutta
SHR~B. zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
BOSE(Akrnate)
SHRI K. S.CHAWAN Glaxo India Ltd, Mumbai
SHRIMA-II E LOBO(Alternate)
SHRID. C. DAS Directorate General of Supplies & Disposals, New Delhi
SHRIR. C. SHARMA(Alternate)
SHRIT. B. DEB ITC Ltd, Calcutta
DR K. L. GABA Federation of Biscuit Manufacturers, New Delhi
SHRIK. C. GUAVA(Alternate)
SHRISUMANGHOSH B & A Sacks Ltd, Calcutta
SHRISUDIPSEN(Alternate)
DR M. B. JAUHARI Indian Pulp & Paper Technical Association, Saharanpur
DR A. G. KLJLKARNI (Altemate)
SHRIU. B. KANCHAN Ministry of Defence (R & D), New Delhi
SHRIRAVINDERKUMAR(Akrnafe)
SHRIS. K. KAPOOR Central Pulp & Paper Research Institute, Saharanpur
SHRI Y. V. Soot (Alternate)
SHRIP. R. KOTHARI L&T Ltd, Mumbai
SHRIR. P. SOOCHAK(Alternate)
SHRI J. S. MATHAKU Indian Agro Paper Mills Association, New Delhi
SHRI P. V. MEHTA Department of Industrial Policy and Promotion, New Delhi
SHRI A. K. CHA~RJEE (Alternate)
SHRIA. S. NARAYANAN All India Paper and Allied Products Manufacturers Association, Mumbai
DR A. N. NAYER Skan Packaging Consultants, New Delhi
SHRISANJAYNAYER(AJtemare)
DR S. N. PANDEY Jute Technological Research Lab, Calcutta
DR A. DEY (Alternate)
SHRIM. V. G. RAO India Paper Makers Association, Calcutta
SHRI MANOJDU?T (Alternate)
REPRESENTATIVE Indian Paper Mills Association, Calcutta
REPRESENTATIVE Railway Board, New Delhi.
SHRIA. ROY Brooke Bond Lipton India Ltd, Bangalore
SHRIRAJIV SAH Central Pulp Mills, Songad
SHRIN. K. AGARWAL(Alternate)
SHR~ P. D. SHAH Federation of Corrugated Box Manufacturers Association, Mumbai
C~pr N. K. DAWAR(Alternate)
SHRIG. M. MATHUR(Alternate)
SHRIV. K SOOD Nestle India Ltd, New Delhi
SHRIV. K GERA (Alternate)
DR R. S. RAJAGOPALAN, Director General, BIS (Ex- officio M ember)
Director (Chem)
M ember-Secretary
SHR~N. K. PAL
Joint Director (Chem), BIS
(Continued on page 6)
IS 11761: 1997 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
(Continuedporn page 5) Paper Sacks Subcommittee, CHD 1605
convener Representing
GHOSH zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
B & A Sacks Ltd. Calcutta
SHRISWAN zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
M embers
SHRID. J. BAPOOJI Assam Co Ltd, Calcutta
SHRIAKDAS Tea Research Association, Jorhat
SHRIB. G. MAHAJAN Narmada Cement Co Ltd, Mumbai
SHRIP. R. SEN(Afremafe)
SHRIP. V. NARAYANAN Indian Institute of Packaging, Mumbai
SHRIM. C. DORDI(A&rnute)
REPRESENTA-WE Central Paper and Pulp Mills Ltd, Pune
REPRESEIWATIVE Shalimar Tar ProductsCalcutta
REPRESENTATWE Cement Manufacturers Association, New Delhi
SHRIN. A SWKH National Dairy Development Board,Anand
SHRIA. SON1 India Foils Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI B. ~~ALLIK (Alternate)
SHRI A. C. TANWA Ballarpur Industries Ltd, Ballarpur
SHRI S. SHARMA(Al&mate)
SHFUY. K. VOHRA Indian Tea Association, Calcutta
SHRIM. DASGUP~A(Alternate)
6
lhreau of Indian Standards
BIS is a statutory institution established under the zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA

Bureau oflndiun Standmfs Act, 1986 to promote
Copyright
BIS has the copyright of all its publications. No part of these publications may be reproduced in any form
without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in the course of
Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director (Publications), BIS.
Amcndmcnts are issued to standards as the need arises on the basis of comments. Standards are also
reviewed periodically; a standard along with amendments is reaffirmed when such review indicates that
no changes are needed; if the review indicates that changes are needed, it is taken up for revision. Users
of Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest amendments or edition by
referring to the latest issue of ‘BIS Handbook’ and ‘Standards Monthly Additions’.
This Indian Standard has been developed from Dot : No. CHD 16 ( 758 ).
Headquarters:
Telephones : 323 0131,323 83 75,323 94 02 (Common to all offices)

NEW DELHI 110002 323 38 41
Eastern : l/14 C. LT. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Maniktola 337 84 99,337 85 61

CALCUTTA 700054 337 86 26,337 9120
Northern : SC0 335-336, Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH 160022 - 60 38 43

( 60 20 25
\ Southern : C. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600113 235 02 16,235 04 42

{ 235 15 19,235 23 15
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East) 832 92 95,832 78 58

MUMBAI 400093 { 832 78 91,832 78 92

COIMBATORE. FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD.
JAIPUR. KANPUR. LUCKNOW. PATNA. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed at Dee Kay Printers, New Delhi-l 10015, India.

SECTION II
INDIAN STANDARDS
FROM TEXTILES
DEPARTMENT
Hkkjrh; ekud IS 16186 : 2014
Indian Standard
oL=kkfn — 50 fdxzk [kk|kÂ iSd djus

osQ fy;s gYosQ Hkkj okys iVlu osQ
cksjs — fof'kf"V
Textiles — Light Weight Jute

Sacking Bags for Packing 50 kg
Foodgrains — Specification
ICS 55.080; 59.060; 67.060
© BIS 2014
Hkkjrh; ekud C;wjks

ekud Hkou] 9 cgknqj'kkg T+kiQj ekxZ] ubZ fnYyh&110002
NEW DELHI-110002
www.bis.org.in www.standardsbis.in
March 2014 Price Group 3

Jute and Jute Products Sectional Committee, TXD 03
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized by the Jute and Jute
Products Sectional Committee had been approved by the Textile Division Council.
The types of bags specified in this standard have been developed after extensive trials keeping in view the
guidelines provided by the International Labour Organization (ILO) for not permitting manual carriage of weight
exceeding 50 kg by the workers and consumers for their safety.
observed or calculated expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960
‘Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised)’. The number of significant places retained in the rounded off
value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
IS 16186 : 2014
Indian Standard
TEXTILES — LIGHT WEIGHT JUTE SACKING BAGS FOR
PACKING 50 kg FOODGRAINS — SPECIFICATION
1 SCOPE specified in IS 9113. The number of stitches per
decimetre shall be 10 ± 1.
This standard prescribes constructional details and
other requirements of light weight jute sacking bags 4.3 Safety Stitch
for packing 50 kg foodgrains.
If agreed to between the buyer and the seller, a line of
2 REFERENCES safety union stitch shall be provided at the inner edges
The following standards contain provisions which, of the herakle stitches (see IS 9113). The number of
through reference in this text, constitute provisions of safety union stitches per decimetre shall be 10 ± 1.
this standard. At the time of publication, the editions
4.4 Hemming at the Mouth
indicated were valid. All standards are subject to
revision and parties to agreements based on this Provisions of IS 9113 shall apply.
standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility
of applying the most recent editions of the standards 4.5 Freedom from Defects
indicated below. The bags shall meet the requirement of freedom from
IS No. Title major defects as given in Annex A.
2873 : 1991 Textiles — Packaging of jute products
5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
in bales — Specification (second
revision) 5.1 The bags shall conform to the requirements
5476 : 1986 Glossary of term relating to jute (first specified in Table 1.
revision)
9113 : 1993 Textiles — Jute sacking — General 5.2 The bales containing the bags shall also conform
requirements (first revision) to the requirements specified in Table 2.
5.3 The contract moisture regain shall be 20 percent.
3 TERMINOLOGY
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions given 5.4 Additional Requirements for Labelling as
in IS 5476 shall apply. Environment Friendly Products
5.4.1 General Requirement
4 MANUFACTURE
4.1 The bags shall be made from single piece of twill 5.4.1.1 The bags shall confirm to the requirements for
weave jute sacking of uniform construction as given quality and performance prescribed under 5.1 to 5.3.
below with warp running along the length of the bag: 5.4.1.2 The manufacturers shall produce to BIS,
Type A — Single warp, double weft woven on environmental consent clearance from the concerned
modern shuttleless loom. State Pollution Control Board as per the provisions of
Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974
Type B — Double warp, single weft woven on and Air (Preventions and Control of Pollution) Act,
conventional shuttle loom. 1981 alongwith the authorization, if required under the
There shall be a single blue stripe, or stripes woven Environment (Products) Act, 1986 and the Rules made
along the length of the bag or the bag shall be without thereunder, while applying for ECO-Mark.
stripe as agreed to between the buyer and the seller. Additionally, the manufacturer shall produce
The constructional particulars of sacking used in the documentary evidence on compliance of the provisions
fabrication of the bags shall be such that the bags meet related to noise level and occupational health under
the requirements specified in Table 1. the provisions of Factory Act, 1948 and Rules made
thereunder.
4.2 Seam
5.4.1.3 The product packaging may display in brief
The two sides of the bags shall be sewn with herakle the criteria based on which the product has been
stitches on selvedge through two layers of sacking as labelled environment friendly.
1
IS 16186 : 2014
Table 1 Requirements of Jute Bags

(CIauses 4.1 and 5.1)
Sl Characteristic Requirement Tolerance Method of Test,
No. Ref to Cl of
IS 9113
Type A Type B
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Dimensions (see Note 1) : 8.3.2
+ 4 cm
a) Outside length, cm 94 94 –0
+ 4 cm
b) Outside width, cm 57 57 –0
+4
ii) Ends/dm 46 64 –3 8.4.2
+2
iii) Picks/dm 50 28 –2 8.4.2
+ 8.0 Percent
iv) Corrected mass/bag, g (see Note 2) 580 580 – 6.0 Percent 8.5.2
v) Average breaking strength of sacking (ravelled-
strip method,10 cm × 20 cm), Min, N (kgf): 8.6.2
a) Warpway 1 570 (160) 1 570 (160)
b) Weftway 1 420 (145) 1 420 (145)
vi) Average seam strength (5 cm × 20 cm ravelled 490 (50) 490 (50) 8.7
strip), Min N (kgf)
vii) Moisture regain, percent, Max 22 22 8.2
viii) Oil content on dry de-oiled material, Max 3 3 8.8
NOTES
1 The bags of specified dimensions are suitable for packing of wheat, rice and similar coarse grains. For packing of other materials,
the buyer and the seller may agree to the dimensions other than those specified above. The mass of such bags may be calculated by the
method given in 5.3 of 1S 9113. However, tolerances specified in this table for dimension and on the mass shall be permissible.
2 Average moisture regain shall be maximum 22 percent. However, 10 percent of the individual value of moisture regain percent may
be above 22 percent with an upper limit of 26 percent.
Table 2 Requirements of Packed Bales

(Clause 5.2)
Sl Characteristic Requirement Method of Test, Ref to
No. Cl of IS 9113
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Total number of bags per bale (see Note 1) 500 8.9
ii) Number of bags per bundle 25 —
iii) Contract mass of a bale, kg (see Note 2) 290 —
iv) Corrected net mass of a bale, kg Not less than 8.1
contract mass
v) Number of joined bags per bundle of 25 bags 1 Visual
NOTES
1 The number of bags per bale shall be 500 or as specified in an agreement between the buyer and the seller.
2 Contract mass of a bale is calculated as follows:
Contract mass of a bale = nominal mass of bag × specified number of bags per bale.
5.4.1.4 The material used for product packaging shall 5.4.2 Specific Requirements
be reusable or made from recyclable or biodegradable 5.4.2.1 The bags shall conform to the requirements
materials. given in Table 3.
5.4.1.5 Fatty alcohol based non-ionics as emulsifier 6 PACKING
should be used wherever required.
The bags shall be packed in bales as prescribed in
5.4.1.6 Polyhalogenated based phenolic fire retardants IS 2873 or as specified in the agreement between the
shall not be used. buyer and the seller.
2
IS 16186 : 2014
Table 3 Specific Requirements for ECO-Mark 8 SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR

(Clause 5.4.2.1) CONFORMITY
Sl Parameter1) Maximum Limit, 8.1 Lot
No. Hessians and Sackings
mg/kg (ppm) All bales of jute bags of same size produced under
(1) (2) (3)
similar conditions of production and delivered to a
i) Non-halogenated hydrocarbons 3 percent buyer against one dispatch note shall constitute a lot.
ii) Pesticides (Sum parameter)2) 1 .0
Banned Pesticides Nil
(Below detectable limit)
8.2 Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity
iii) pH of aqueous extract 6.0-7.0 For assessing the conformity of lot to the requirements
iv) Coupled aminess from azo-dyes 50.0
(Sum parameters)3) (Detectable limit using of this standard, bales shall be first selected from each
GC-MS) lot at random in accordance with the col 2 and 3 of
1)
The methods of tests for ECO-parameters are being developed
Table 4. All the bales so selected in the sample shall
by BIS and Textiles Committee. Till the methods of tests are be tested for ‘Gross mass of bales’, ‘Tare mass of
standardized, the manufacturer shall declare conformance bailing hoops and other packing materials’ and
taking into consideration the chemicals, auxiliaries and dyes ‘Number of bundles per bale’. Two bundles of bags
used.
2)
selected at random from each bale selected in the
The list of pesticides used on jute, banned restricted or
withdrawn is appended as Annex B.
sample shall be tested for total number of bags per
3)
The list of coupled amines released from azo-dyes is appended bundle. The lot shall be considered as conforming to
as Annex C. the requirements of this standard if all the following
conditions are satisfied:
7 MARKING
a) Total corrected net mass of all the bales in
7.1 The bales shall be marked as prescribed the sample is not less than the total mass of
in IS 2873. Additional markings shall be made as all the bales.
stipulated by the buyer or required by regulation or b) Total number of bags in each bale selected as
law in force. per 8.2 meet the relevant requirement.
7.2 BIS Certification Marking 8.3 Sample Size for Bags
The bales may also be marked with the Standard Mark. For freedom from defects, length, width, ends/dm,
7.2.1 The use of the Standard Mark is governed by picks/dm, number of stitch/dm, mass per bag and
the provisions of the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, moisture regain, 16 bags shall be selected at random
1986 and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. from each of the bales selected as per 8.2. The total
The details of conditions under which the licence for number of bags to be tested from each lot for these
the use of the Standard Mark may be granted to requirements is given in col 5 of Table 4.
manufacturers or producers may be obtained from the 8.4 Criteria for Conformity
Bureau of Indian Standards.
8.4.1 Criteria for Conformity for Freedom from Defects
7.3 The bales may also be marked with ECO-Mark in
addition to Standard Mark if the requirements specified Each bag selected in the sample shall be tested for
in 5.4 are also satisfied. freedom from defects. A bag shall be termed as
defective, if it contains two or more major defects (see
Table 4 Sample Size and Acceptance Numbers

(Clauses 8.2, 8.3, 8.4.1 and 8.4.2)
Sl No. of Bales No. of Bales For Length, Width, Number of Stitches/dm, Ends/dm,
No. in the Lot in the Sample Picks/dm, Moisture Regain
No. of Bags from Total Number of Acceptance
Each Bale Bags in Sample Number
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Up to 25 5 16 80 5
ii) 26 to 90 8 16 128 7
iii) 91 to 300 13 16 208 10
iv) 301 to 500 20 16 320 14
NOTE — If the number of bales in a consignment exceeds 500, the same shall be split into number of lots each comprising maximum
of 500 bales. Joined bags shall also be drawn during sampling of bags for visual inspection and breaking strength test.
3
IS 16186 : 2014
Annex A). A lot shall be considered conforming to this 8.5 Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity for
requirement, if the number of defective is less than or Breaking Strength Requirement
equal to the acceptance number given in col 6 of
Table 4. Acceptance number given in Table 4 is on The lot, which meets the above requirements shall then
the basis of an AQL of 2.5 percent. be tested for breaking strength requirements. For this
purpose, one bag shall be selected at random from each
8.4.2 Criteria for Conformity for Length, Width, bale selected in the sample. Suitable test specimens
Ends/dm, Picks/dm, Number of Stitches/dm and shall be taken from these bags and tested for warpway,
Moisture Regain weftway and seam strength. The lot shall be declared
The lot which meets the requirements of 8.4.1 shall be as conforming to these requirements if :
tested for length, width, ends/dm, picks/dm, number
of stitches/dm and moisture regain as per the plan. A a) Average values of warpway, weftway and
bag shall be termed as defective, if it fails to meet any seam breaking strengths respectively, as
one or more of these requirements. The lot shall be obtained for all test specimens are not less
considered as conforming to the requirements of length, than the corresponding values specified, and
width, ends/dm, picks/dm, stitches/dm and moisture b) None of the individual value is less than 20
regain, if the total number of defective found in the percent below the specified value.
sample is less than or equal to the corresponding
acceptance number given in col 6 of Table 4. 8.6 Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity for
Oil Content
8.4.3 Criteria for Conformity for Mass per Bag
The lot which meets the above requirements, shall then The lot, which meets the above requirements, shall then
be tested for mass of bag. The lot shall be declared as be tested for oil content. For this purpose two bags
conforming to this requirement if: shall be selected out of two different bales selected as
per 8.2. The lot shall be declared as conforming to this
a) Average value of mass per bag, as obtained
requirement, if both the bags meet the requirement of
for sampled bags is not less than the nominal
oil content.
value specified, and
b) Not more than 10 percent of the individual 8.7 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the
values of mass of bags is below the lower requirements of this standard, if 8.2 and 8.4 to 8.6 are
specified value. satisfied.
4
IS 16186 : 2014
ANNEX A
(Clauses 4.5 and 8.4.1)
CLASSIFICATION OF DEFECTS
Type of Defect Description Major Minor
GAW > 1.5 cm x

0.5 cm to 1.5 cm X
Multiple Two or more contiguous, regardless of length x
broken/missing warp
(end)
Multiple broken weft Two or more contiguous, regardless of length x
(pick) One pick, full width X
Cut, hole, tear or Two or more warp or filling threads ruptured at adjoining x
patch points
Float A place in the fabric where > 2 cm2 x
warp and weft yarns escape 0.5 cm2 to 2 cm2 X
the required interlacement
Gap stitching Stitches missing > 1.5 cm x
0.5 cm to 1.5 cm X
Corner Gap Corner of the bag not > 1.5 cm x
properly stitched resulting in 0.5 cm to 1.5 cm X
formation of hole
Mildew Staining of fabric due to fungal or bacterial growth visible to x
naked eye
NOTES
1 x — Major defects.
X — Minor defects.
2 Two minor defects shall be counted as one major defect.
ANNEX B
(Table 3)
LIST OF PESTICIDES USED ON JUTE — BANNED,
RESTRICTED OR WITHDRAWN
B-1 PESTICIDES REGISTERED FOR USE ON B-2.2 Pesticides Restricted for Use
JUTE IN INDIA
Use of DDT in agriculture is banned. In very special
HERBICIDES : Dalapon circumstances warranting the use of DDT for plant
FUNGICIDES : Carbendazim protection, the State or Central Government may
purchase it directly from M/s Hindustan Insecticides
INSECTICIDES : Carbaryl, Carbofuran, Ltd, to be used under expert Government supervision.
Endosulfan, Lindane, Use of DDT for public health programme up to
Phosalone, Quinalphos 10 000 MT per annum, except in case of any major
outbreak, is restricted.
B-2 EXTRACT FROM LIST OF PESTICIDES
NOT APPROVED, RESTRICTED USE, Use of Diedrin shall be restricted for Locust Control
WITHDRAWN OR BANNED IN THE COUNTRY in desert areas by Plant Protection Advisor to the
AS ON 10.04.1992 Government of India.
B-2.1 Pesticides not Approved for Use B-2.3 Pesticides Banned/Withdrawn
2, 4, 5-T Pentachlorophenol, Toxaphene and Aldrin.
5
IS 16186 : 2014
ANNEX C
(Table 3)
LIST OF COUPLED AMINES RELEASED FROM AZO — DYES
i) 4-Aminodiphenyl xii) 3,3’ — Dimethylbenzidine

ii) 2-Amino-4-nitrotouene xiii) 3,3’ — Dimethyl-4,4’ diaminodiphenylmethane
iii) 13enzidine xiv) p-kresidin (2-Methoxy 5-methylaniline)
iv) 4-Chloro-o-toluidine xv) 4,4’ Methylene-bis-(2-chloraniline)
v) 2-Naphy Iamine xvi) 4,4’ Oxydianiline
vi) o-Alminoazotolune xvii) 4,4’ Thiodianiline
vii) p-Chloraniline xviii) o-Toluidine
viii) 2,4-Diaminoanisole xix) 2,4, — Toluylenediamine
ix) 4,4’ — Diaminodiphenylmethane xx) 2,4,5 — Trimethylaniline
x) 3,3’ — Dimethoxybenzidine xxi) p-Amino-azobezene
xi) 3,3’ — Dimethoxybenzidine xxii) 2-Methoxyaniline
6
Copyright
‘BIS Catalogue’ and ‘Standards : Monthly Additions’.
This Indian Standard has been developed from Doc No.: TXD 03 (1055).

Headquarters:
Telephones : 2323 0131, 2323 3375, 2323 9402 Website: www.bis.org.in

NEW DELHI 110002 { 2323 7617
2323 3841
Eastern : 1/14 C.I.T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Kankurgachi
KOLKATA 700054 { 2337 8499, 2337 8561
2337 8626, 2337 9120
Northern : SCO 335-336, Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH 160022
{ 260 3843
260 9285
{ 2254 1216, 2254 1442
2254 2519, 2254 2315
MUMBAI 400093 { 2832 9295, 2832 7858
2832 7891, 2832 7892
Branches: AHMEDABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE. DEHRADUN.
FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR. KOCHI.
LUCKNOW. NAGPUR. PARWANOO. PATNA. PUNE. RAJKOT. VISAKHAPATNAM.

TO
IS 16186 : 2014 TEXTILES — LIGHT WEIGHT JUTE SACKING BAGS FOR
PACKING 50 kg FOODGRAINS — SPECIFICATION
(Page 1, clause 4.1) — Substitute the following for the existing clause:
‘4.1 The bags shall be made from single piece of 2/1 twill weave sacking of uniform construction as given
below having nominal mass of 504 g/m2 with warp running along length of bag:
a) Type A — Single warp, double weft woven on modern shuttleless loom.

b) Type B — Double warp, single weft woven on conventional shuttle loom.
There shall be a single blue stripe, or stripes woven along the length of the bag or the bag shall be without stripe
as agreed to between the buyer and the seller. The constructional particulars of sacking used in the fabrication of
the bags shall be such that the bags meet the requirements specified in Table 1.’
[Page 2, Table 1, Sl No. (ii), (v) and (vi)] — Substitute the following for the existing:

Sl No. Characteristic Requirement Tolerance Method of Test, Ref
to Clause of 1S 9113
Type A Type B
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
ii) Ends/dm 46 64 Type A ±2 8.4.2
Type B +4 - 3
v) Average breaking strength of
sacking (ravelled-strip method,
10 cm × 20 cm), Min, N (kgf): 8.6.2
a) Warpway 1 225(125) 1 225(125)
b) Weftway 1 225(125) 1 225(125)
vi) Average seam strength 431(44) 431(44) 8.7
(5 cm × 20 cm ravelled
strip), Min, N (kgf)
(Page 3, clauses 8.3, 8.4, 8.4.1, 8.4.2 and 8.4.3) — Substitute the following for the existing clauses:
‘8.3 Sample Size for Bags
For freedom from defects, length, width, ends/dm, picks/dm, number of stitch/dm, mass per bag and moisture
regain, 7 bags shall be selected at random from each of the bales selected as per 8.2. The total number of bags to
be tested from each lot for these requirements is given in col 5 of Table 4.
8.4 Criteria for Conformity
8.4.1 Criteria for Conformity for Freedom from Defects
Each bag selected in the sample shall be tested for freedom from defects. A bag shall be termed as defective, if it
contains two or more major defects (see Annex A). A lot shall be considered conforming to this requirement, if
the number of defectives is less than or equal to the acceptance number given in col 6 of Table 4. Acceptance
numbers given in Table 4 are on the basis of an AQL of 4.0 percent.
8.4.1.1 Criteria for conformity for length and width
The dimension of at least 90 percent of the bags under test shall be in accordance with the requirement
specified. Out of the remaining bags (10 percent, Max), dimension of not a single bag is below the specified
nominal value by more than 2.0 cm and 1.0 cm in case of length and width, respectively.
1
Amendment No. 1 to IS 16186 : 2014
8.4.2 Criteria for Conformity for Ends/dm, Picks/dm, Number of Stitches/dm and Moisture Regain
The lot which meets the requirements of 8.4.l and 8.4.1.1 shall be tested for ends/dm, picks/dm, number of
stitches/dm and moisture regain as per the plan. A bag shall be termed as defective, if it fails to meet any one or
more of these requirements. The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of ends/dm,
picks/dm, number of stitches/dm and moisture regain, if the total number of defective found in the sample is less
than or equal to the corresponding acceptance number given in col 6 of Table 4.
8.4.3 Criteria for Conformity for Mass per Bag
The lot, which meets the above requirements, shall then be tested for mass of bag. The lot shall be declared as
conforming to this requirement, if
a) the average corrected value of mass per bag as obtained for sampled bags under test is not less
than nominal value specified.
b) the corrected mass of at least 80 percent of bags under test is in accordance with requirement
specified.
c) out of remaining bags (20 percent, Max), all bags may have corrected mass above the
specified limit, but corrected mass of not more than 10 percent of sampled bags under test is
below the specified value by more than 12 percent of specified nominal value.’
(Page 3, Table 4) — Substitute the following for the existing table:

[Clauses 8.2, 8.3, 8.4.1, 8.4.1.1 and 8.4.2]
Sl No. No. of Bales No. of Bales in For Number of Stitches/dm, Ends/dm, Picks/dm, Moisture Regain
in the Lot the Sample
No. of Bags from Total Number of Acceptance Number
Each Bale Bags in Sample
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Up to 25 5 7 35 5
ii) 26 to 90 8 7 56 6
iii) 91 to 300 12 7 84 8
iv) 301 to 500 18 7 126 10
NOTE — If the number of bales in a consignment exceeds 500, the same shall be split into number of lots each comprising maximum of
500 bales. Joined bags shall also be drawn during sampling of bags for visual inspection and breaking strength test.
(TXD 03)
Publication Unit, BIS, New Delhi, India
2
AMENDMENT NO. 2 JULY 2019
TO
IS 16186 : 2014 TEXTILES — LIGHT WEIGHT JUTE
SACKING BAGS FOR PACKING 50 KG FOODGRAINS —
SPECIFICATION
(Page 1, clause 4.1, Type B) — Substitute the following for the existing:
‘Type B — Double warp, single weft woven on conventional shuttle loom or

modern shuttle less loom.’
(Page 3, clauses 7.2 and 7.2.1) — Substitute the following for the existing
clauses:
‘7.2 BIS Certification Marking
The bales and jute bags may also be marked with the Standard Mark.
7.2.1 The product(s) conforming to the requirements of this standard may be

certified as per the conformity assessment schemes under the provisions of the
Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 2016 and the Rules and Regulations framed
thereunder, and the products may be marked with the standard mark.’
(TXD 03)
IS 1943 : 1995
( Reaffirmed 2006 )
Indian Standard
TEXTILES – A-TWILL JUTE BAGS —
SPECIFICATION
( Second Revision )
First Reprint APRIL 1999
( Incorporating Amendment No. 1 )
UDC 621.798.151 [ 677.13 ]
© BIS 1999

NEW DELHI 110002
April 1995 Price Group 1

TO
IS 1943:1995 TEXTILES — A-TWILL JUTE BAGS —
SPECIFICATION
( Second Revision )
(Page 1, clause 4.1) — Insert the following note at the end of paragraph:
'NOTE— Mass of fabric in g/m2 is given for guidance only.'
( TX 03 )

TO
IS 1943:1995 TEXTILES — AT WILL JUTE BAGS—
SPECIFICATION
( Second Revision )
( Page 1, clause 1 ) — Substitute the following for the existing:
'1 SCOPE
1.1 This standard prescribes constructional details and other requirements of
A-Twill Jute bags.
1.2 The bags specified in the standard shall not be manually handled after
packing material.'
( TX 03 )

AMENDMENT NO. 3 NOVEMBER 2002
TO
IS 1943 : 1995 TEXTILES — A-TWILL
JUTE BAGS — SPECIFICATION
( Second Revision )
( Pages 1 and 2 ) — Substitute 'IS 9113:1993' for 'IS 9113:1992' wherever

exists.
( Page 2, Table 1, Note ) — Designate the existing Note as Note 1 and insert
Note 2 as under:
NOTE 2 — In case of bags having herakle stitching with safety stitch, the corrected
mass per bag shall be 1 200 g instead of 1 190 g.
[ Page 2, Table 2, Sl No. (iii), column 2 ] — Substitute 'Contract mass of a bale,
kg' for 'Contract mass of a bale'.
[ Page 2, Table 2, Sl No. (iii), column 3 ] — Substitute '480' for '476'.
[ Page 2, Table 2, Sl No. (iv), column 3 ] — Substitute 'Not less than the contract
mass' for 'Not less than contract'.
( TX 03 )

AMENDMENT NO. 2 MAY 2002
TO
IS 1943:1995 TEXTILES — A-TWILL JUTE BAGS —
SPECIFICATION
( Second Revision )
[ Page 2, Table 2, Sl No. (vi), column 3 ] — Substitute '3' for '8.0'
( TX 03 )

Jute and Jute Products Sectional Committee, TX 03
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard ( Second Revision ) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards after the
draft finalized by the Jute and Jute Products Sectional Committee had been approved by the Textile
Division Council.
This standard was first published in 1961 and it was subsequently revised in 1964. This standard has
been revised again so as to ensure compatibility regarding general requirements of A-twill jute bags
with those specified in IS 9113: 1992 'Textiles — Jute sacking — General requirements ( first
revision )'.
accordance with IS 2 : 1960 'Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised )'. The number of
significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in
this standard.
IS 1943 : 1995
Indian Standard
TEXTILES — A-TWILL JUTE BAGS -
SPECIFICATION
( Second Revision )
1 SCOPE constructional particulars of sacking used in the
fabrication of the bags shall be such that the
This standard prescribes constructional d e t a i l s bag meets the requirement specified in Table 1.
and other requirements of A-twill jute bags.
4.2 Seam
2 REFERENCES
The sides of the bags shall be sewn with over-
The following Indian Standards are necessary head or herakle stitches on selvedge through
adjuncts to this standard: two layers of sacking as specified in IS 9113 :
IS No. Title 1993. The number of stitches per 10 cm shall be
between 9 and 11.
1963 : 1981 Method for determination of
threads per unit length in woven 4.3 Safety Stitch
fabrics ( second revision ) ( Reaffir-
med April 1993 ) A line of safety union stitch shall be provided at
the inner edges of the overhead or herakle
1969 : 1985 Methods for determination of stitches ( see IS 9113 : 1993 ). The number of
breaking load and elongation of safety union stitches per 10 cm shall be between
woven textile fabrics ( second 9 and 11.
revision ) ( Reaffirmed April 1993 ) 4.4 Hemming at the Mouth
2873 : 1991 Textiles — Packaging of jute pro-
ducts in bales — Specification Provisions of IS 9113 : 1993 shall apply.
( second revision ) 4.5 Joined Bag
2969 : 1974 Method for determination of oil Provisions of IS 9113 : 1993 shall apply.
content of jute yarn and fabrics
( first revision ) ( Reaffirmed 4.6 Freedom from Defects
March 1993 ) The bags shall be generally free from weaving
5476 : 1986 Glossary of terms relating to jute and sewing defects such as missing picks, holes,
( first revision ) cuts, tears, floats, crushed selvedges, spots,
stains, gap stitches, loose ends and frayed ends
9030 : 1979 Method for determination of which effect the performance of the bag.
seam strength of jute fabrics in-
cluding their laminates ( Reaffir- 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
med March 1992 ) 5.1 The bags shall conform to the requirements
9113 : 1993 Textiles — Jute sacking—General specified in Table 1.
requirements ( first revision ) 5.2 The bales containing the bags shall conform
3 TERMINOLOGY to the requirements specified in Table 2.
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions 5.3 The contract moisture regain shall be 20
given in IS 5476 : 1986 shall apply. percent.
4 MANUFACTURE 6 PACKING
The bags shall be packed in bales as prescribed
4.1 Sacking in IS 2873 : 1991 or as specified in the agree-
The bags shall be made from single piece of ment between the buyer and the seller.
double warp, 2/1 twill weave jute sacking of 7 MARKING
uniform construction having nominal mass of
750 g/m2 with warp running along the length of 7.1 The bales shall be marked as prescribed in
the bag. There shall be three blue stripes, or IS 2873 : 1991. Additional marking shall be
stripes as agreed to between the buyer and the made as stipulated by the buyer or required by
seller, woven along the length of the bag. The the regulation or law in force.
1
IS 1943 : 1995
Table 1 Particulars of Bags

SL Characteristic Requirement Tolerance Method of Test

No.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Dimensions, cm ( see Note ):
a) Outside length 112 + 4 Clause 8.3.2 of
b) Outside width 67.5 – 0 IS 9113 : 1993
ii) Corrected mass 1 190 + 120 Clause 8.5.2 of
per bag, g - 90 IS 9113 : 1993
iii) Ends per dm 102 ± 6 IS 1963 : 1981
iv) Picks per dm 35 ± 2 IS 1963 : 1981
v) Average breaking load of sacking I S 1969 : 1985
[ revelled strip method. 10 cm × 20 cm ]
Min, N ( kgf ):
Warpway 2 000 ( 204 )
Weftway 1 765 ( 180 )
vi) Average breaking load of seam 657 ( 67 ) IS 9030: 1979
[ revelled strip method, 10 cm × 20 cm ]
Min, N ( kgf )
NOTE — The buyer and the seller may agree to the dimensions other than those specified above. The
tolerance of cm shall apply on the dimensions.
The mass of such bag may be calculated by the method given in 5.3 of IS 9113 : 1992. However, a tolerance
of percent on the bag mass shall be permissible.

( Clause 5.2 )
SL Characteristic Requirement Methods of Test

No.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Total number of bags per bale 400 Clause 8.9 of IS 9113 : 1993
( see N o t e )
ii) Number of joined bags per 1 do
bundle of 25 bags
iii) Contract mass of a bale 476 —
iv) Corrected net mass of a bale Not less than contract Clause 8.1 of IS 9113 : 1993
v) Moisture regain, percent, Max 22 Clause 8.2 of IS 9113 : 1993
vi) Oil content on dry deoiled 8.0 IS 2969 : 1974
material basis, percent, Max
NOTE — The number of bags per bale shall be 400 or as specified in an agreement between the buyer and the
seller.
7.2 BIS Certification Marking may be granted to manufacturers or producers

may be obtained from the Bureau of Indian
The bales may also be marked with the Standard Standards.
Mark.
8 SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR
7.2.1 The use of the Standard Mark is governed
CONFORMITY
by the provisions of Bureau of Indian Standards
Act, 1986 and the Rules and Regulations made The sampling procedure and criteria for confor-
thereunder. The details of conditions under mity as specified in IS 9113:1993 shall be
which the licence for the use of Standard Mark followed.
2
harmonious development of the activities of standardization, marking and quality certification of goods and
attending to connected matters in the country.
Copyright
Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director (Publication), BIS.
should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest amendments or edition by referring to the latest issue
of 'BIS Handbook' and 'Standards Monthly Additions'.
This Indian Standard has been developed from Doc: No. TX 03 (0084).

Headquarters:
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002 Telegrams: Manaksanstha
Telephones: 323 01 31, 323 33 75, 323 94 02 (Common to all offices)
Central : Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg 323 76 17, 323 38 41
NEW DELHI 110002
Eastern : 1/14 C.I.T. Scheme VII M, V.I.P. Road, Maniktola 337 84 99, 337 85 61
CALCUTTA 700054 337 86 26, 337 91 20
Northern : SCO 335-336, Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH 160022 60 38 43
60 20 25
Southern : C.I.T. Campus, IV Cross Road, CHENNAI 600113 235 02 16, 235 04 42
235 15 19, 235 23 15
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East) 832 92 95, 832 78 58
MUMBAI 400093 832 78 91, 832 78 92
COIMBATORE. FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI.
HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR. LUCKNOW. NAGPUR.
PATNA. PUNE. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed by Reprography Unit, BIS, New Delhi
IS 2566 : 1993
Reaffirmed Feb 2006
Indian Standard
TEXTILES — B-TWILL JUTE BAGS FOR
PACKING FOODGRAINS – SPECIFICATION
( Third Revision )
First Reprint JUNE 1993
UDC 621.798.151 : 677.13.074.162.5 : 633.1
© BIS 1993

NEW DELHI 110002
February 1993 Price Group 2

FOREWORD
This Indian Standard ( Third Revision ) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the
Division Council.
This standard was first published in 1963 and revised in 1965 and 1984. This revision has been prepared
to upgrade the performance of jute bags, at the request of Food Corporation of India to minimize
wastage of foodgrains. The following are the major changes incorporated in this revision:
a) Tolerances presently specified for ends and picks per dm will have been tightened.
b) General requirements and criteria for conformity have been laid down in IS 9113 : 1993.
The mass of bags of different sizes at various moisture regains are given in Annex B for information.
accordance with IS 2 : 1960 'Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised )'. The number of signifi-
cant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this
standard.
TO
IS 2566 : 1993 TEXTILES — B-TWILL JUTE BAGS FOR
PACKING FOODGRAINS — SPECIFICATION
( Third Revision )

'1 SCOPE
1.1 This standard prescribes constructional details and other requirements of jute
bags for packing 100, 93 and 75 kg foodgrains.
packing foodgrains.'
( TX 03 )
AMENDMENT NO. 1 MAY 2002
TO
IS 2566 : 1993 TEXTILES — B-TWILL JUTE BAGS FOR
PACKING FOODGRAINS — SPECIFICATION
( Third Revision )
[Page 3, Table 2, Sl No. (vi), col 4 ] — Substitute '3' for '8.0'.
( TX 03 )
IS 2566 : 1993
Indian Standard
TEXTILES — B-TWILL JUTE BAGS FOR
PACKING FOODGRAINS – SPECIFICATION
( Third Revision )
1 SCOPE of the fabric ( see Fig. 2 ). The bottom of the
bag shall be stiched at selvedge through two
This standard prescribes constructional details layers of the fabric with overhead or herakle
and other requirements of jute bags for packing stitch as the case may be ( see also IS 9113 :
100, 93 and 75 kg foodgrains. 1993 ).
NOTE — Jute bags for packing 50 kg of foodgrains 4.4 Joined Bag
are covered by IS 12650 : 1989 'Specification for jute Provisions of IS 9113 : 1993 shall apply.
bags for packing foodgrains 50 kg'.
4.5 Freedom from Defects
2 REFERENCES
The bags should be generally free from weaving
The Indian Standards listed in Annex A are and sewing defects which effect the performance
necessary adjuncts to this standard. of the bag, such as holes, cuts, tears, floats,
crushed selvedges, soots, stains, gap stitches,
3 TERMINOLOGY loose ends and frayed ends.
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
given in IS 5476 : 1986 shall apply.
5.1 The bag shall conform to the requirements
4 MANUFACTURE specified in Table 1.
5.2 The bales containing the bags shall conform
4.1 The bags shall be made from cloth confor- to the requirements as laid down in Table 2.
ming to IS 3667 : 1993. It shall be made from a
single piece of cloth preferably the warp 5.3 The contract moisture regain shall be
running along the length of the bag. 20 percent.
There shall be a single blue stripe ( or stripes ) 6 PACKING AND MARKING
of single or double warp as agreed to between
the buyer and the seller, woven along the length 6.1 Packing
of the bag. Additional woven identification
mark may be provided if required by the buyer. The bags shall be packed in bales as laid down in
IS 2873 : 1991 or as specified in an agreement
4.2 Hemming at the Month between the buyer and the seller.
Provisions of IS 9113 : 1993 shall apply. 6.2 Marking

The bales shall be marked as laid down in
4.3 Seam IS 2873 : 1991. Additional marking shall be
4.3.1 For bags with hemming at the mouth, the made as stipulated by the buyer or required by
sides of the bags shall be sewn with overhead the regulation or law in force.
or herakles stitches on selvedge through two 6.2.1 The bales may also be marked with the
layers of fabric ( see Fig. 1 ). The stitching shall Standard Mark.
be of even tension throughout with all the loose
ends securely fastened. The number of stitches 7 SAMPLING
per 10 cm at the sides shall be between 9 and 11
( see also IS 9113 : 1993 ). 7.1 The sampling shall be as laid down in
IS 9113 : 1993.
4.3.1 For bags with selvedge at the mouth, the
stitching of the raw edges of the bag shall be 7.2 A lot shall be considered as conforming to
done after turning to a depth of 38 mm, with the requirements of the standard if the condi-
overhead or herakle stitches through four layers tions as laid down in IS 9113 : 1993 are satisfied.
1
IS 2566 : 1993
FIG. 1 B-TWILL JUTE BAG
All dimensions in centimetres.

FIG. 2 CONSTRUCTION OF A TYPICAL SELVEDGED BAG ( BAG LENGTH = CLOTH WIDTH )
2
IS 2566 : 1993
Table 1 Requirements of B-TwilI Jute Bags for Foodgrains
( Clause 5.1 )
Sl Characteristic Sizes Method of Test

No.
100 kg 93 kg 75 kg
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Dimensions ( see Note ):
a) Outside length, cm 122 112 106.5 IS 1954 : 1990
b) Outside width, cm 67.5 67.5 61
Tolerance, cm + 4
- 0
ii) Corrected mass per bag, g: 8.5.2 of
IS 9113 : 1993
a) Overhead stitch 1110 1020 880
b) Herakle stitch 1115 1025 885
Tolerance, percent + 10
- 7.5
iii) Ends per dm 76 IS 1963 : 1981
Tolerance + 4
- 3
iv) Picks per dm 31 IS 1963 : 1981
Tolerance + 2
- 1
v) Breaking load of cloth ( Min ) IS 1969 : 1985
( revelled strip method.
10 × 20 cm ):
a) Warpway : Average 1570 ( 160 )
b) Weftway : Average 1620 ( 165 )
vi) Scam breaking load ( Min ) IS 9030 : 1979
( revelled strip method,
5 × 20 cm ) N ( kgf )
Average 608 ( 62 )
NOTE — These are recommended sizes for packing of different mass of wheat, rice and similar coarse grains.
For other materials packed and if desired by the buyer and the seller dimensions other than those specified
above may be adopted. In that case, tolerance of cm shall apply.
Table 2 Requirements of Packed Bales of B-Twill Jute Bags

( Clause 5.2 )
Sl Characteristic Sizes Method of Test

No.
100 kg 93 kg 75 kg
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Total number of bags per bale 300 300 300 8.9 of
IS 9113 : 1993
ii) Number of joined bags per 1 1 1 —do—
bundle of 25 bags
iii) Contract mass of a bale, kg:
a) Overhead stitch 333 306 264
b) Herakle stitch 334.5 307.5 265.5
iv) Correct net mass of a bale Not less than the contract mass 8.1 of
IS 9113 : 1993
v) Moisture regain percent, Max 22 8.2 of
IS 9113 : 1993
vi) Oil content on dry deoiled 8.0 IS 2969 : 1974
3
IS 2566 : 1993
ANNEX A
( Clause 2.1 )
1954 : 1990 Methods for determination of 2969 : 1974 Method for determination of oil
length and width of fabric ( second content of jute yarn and fabrics
revision ) ( first revision )
1963 : 1981 Methods for determination of 3667 : 1993 Textiles — B-twill jute cloth —
threads per unit length in woven Specification ( second revision )
fabrics ( second revision ) 5476 : 1986 Glossary of terms pertaining to
1969 : 1985 Methods for determination of jute ( first revision )
breaking load and elongation of
woven textile fabrics ( second 9030 : 1979 Method for determination of seam
revision ) strength of jute fabrics including
2873 : 1991 Textiles — Packaging of jute pro- their laminates
ducts in bales — Specification 9113 : 1993 Textile — Jute sacking — General
( first revision ) requirements ( first revision )
ANNEX B
( Foreword )
MASS OF B-TWILL JUTE BAGS AT DIFFERENT MOISTURE REGAIN VALUES
Moisture Mass, in g, for Size of Bag
Regain
Percent 100 kg 93 kg 75 kg
Over- Herakle Over- Herakle Over- Herakle
head head head
22 1 130 1 135 1 037 1 042 894 900
20 1 110 1 115 1 020 1 025 880 885
18 1 092 1 097 1 003 1 008 865 870
16 1 074 1 079 986 991 851 856
14 1 055 1 060 969 974 836 841
12 1 037 1 042 952 957 821 826
10 1 018 1 023 935 940 807 811
8 1 000 1 004 918 922 792 796
7 991 995 910 914 785 789
6 981 986 901 905 777 782
4
Standard Mark
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised by BIS and operated by the pro-
ducer. Standard marked products are also continuously checked by BIS for conformity to
that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use
of the Standard Mark may be granted to manufacturers or producers may be obtained from
the Bureau of Indian Standards.
BIS is a statutory institution established under the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1986 to
promote harmonious development of the activities of standardization, marking and quality
certification of goods and attending to connected matters in the country.
Copyright
BIS has the copyright of all its publications. No part of these publications may be reproduced
in any form without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use,
in the course of implementing the standard, of necessary details, such as symbols and sizes, type
or grade designations. Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director
( Publications ), BIS.
Indian Standards are reviewed periodically and revised, when necessary and amendments, if
any, are issued from time to time. Users of Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in
possession of the latest amendments or edition. Comments on this Indian Standard may be
sent to BIS giving the following reference:
Doc : No. TX 03 (0026)

Headquarters:
NEW DELHI 110002 331 13 75
CALCUTTA 700054 37 86 26, 37 86 62
53 38 43, 53 16 40
Northern : SCO 445-446, Sector 35-C, CHANDIGARH 160036 53 23 84
235 02 16, 235 04 42,
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600113
235 15 19, 235 23 15
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri ( East ) 632 92 95, 632 78 58
BOMBAY 400093 .632 78 91, 632 78 92
Branches : AHMADABAD, BANGALORE, BHOPAL, BHUBANESHWAR, COIMBATORE
FARIDABAD, GHAZIABAD, GUWAHATI, HYDERABAD, JAIPUR, KANPUR
LUCKNOW, PATNA, THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed at Dee Kay Printers, New Delhi, India

[Amalgamating IS 2818 (Parts 1 to 6)]
Indian Standard
oL=kkfn — gsfl;u — fof'kf"V

( rhljk iqujh{k.k )
Textiles — Hessian — Specification

( Third Revision )
ICS 55.080;59.060.10;67.060
© BIS 2015
Hkkjrh; ekud C;wjks

NEW DELHI-110002
November 2015 Price Group 3

FOREWORD
This Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized by Jute and Jute
IS 2818 : 2015
Indian Standard
TEXTILES — HESSIAN — SPECIFICATION
( Third Revision )
1 SCOPE 3.6 Short Piece — A length of continuously woven

jute fabric measuring 18 m or more but less than 37 m.
This standard specifies terminology, constructional
details, packing, marking, sampling, inspection and 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
criteria for conformity of the following types of hessian
made of jute and allied fibres, packed in bales and rolls: The hessian shall be woven with single warp yarn in
plain weave. The hessian shall be generally of uniform
a) Type I - 213 g/m2 construction. Selvedges shall be firm, leno or tucked-
b) Type II - 229 g/m2 in (as agreed to between the buyer and the seller),
c) Type III - 245 g/m2 straight and may contain cotton/man-made selvedge
d) Type IV - 270 g/m2 yarn.
e) Type V - 298 g/m2 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
f) Type VI - 305 g/m2
5.1 The hessian shall conform to the requirements laid
2 REFERENCES down in Table 1.
The standards listed in Annex A contain provisions, 5.2 The packed bales or rolls shall conform to the
which through reference in this text, constitute provisions laid down in Table 2.
provisions of this standard. At the time of publication,
the editions indicated were valid. All standards are 5.3 Contract Regain
subject to revision and parties to agreements based on The contract moisture regain shall be 16 percent.
this standard are encouraged to investigate the
possibility of applying the most recent editions of the 6 PACKING AND MARKING
standards indicated in Annex A.
The hessian shall be packed in bales or rolls as required.
3 TERMINOLOGY The packing and marking shall conform to that given
in the contract.
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions
prevailing in the jute industry, and the following shall 7 SAMPLING, TESTING AND INSPECTION
apply.
Unless otherwise agreed to between the buyer and the
3.1 Bale — A rectangular or square shaped seller, the procedure for sampling shall be as given in
compressed rigid package containing jute fabric or bags Annex B and the procedure for testing and inspection
wrapped with bale covering outer layer stitched and shall be as given in Annex C.
bound by suitable binder straps.
8 CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY
3.2 Cut (Full Cut) — A length of continuously woven
jute fabric measuring 82 m or more. 8.1 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the
requirements of this standard, if the following
3.3 Lot — The quantity of hessian of one definite type, conditions are satisfied.
width, packed in bales or rolls containing one definite
length and delivered to buyer against one despatch 8.1.1 For Hessian Packed in Bales
note. a) The total of the corrected net mass of the bales
3.4 Medium Cut — A length of continuously woven under test is not less than the total contract
jute fabric measuring 37 m or more but less than 82 m. mass of the bales.
b) The total length of hessian (cuts) in each bale
3.5 Roll — The cylindrical rigid package containing conforms to the specified requirement.
one type of hessian wrapped on suitable core or coreless
c) The number of short pieces (cuts) in each bale
and covered with roll covering with outer layer stitched
under test does not exceed the specified
properly.
numbers.
1
IS 2818 : 2015
d) The average moisture regain percent of the reading shall fall below the specified nominal
test samples does not exceed the specified value by more than 0.5 percent subject to a
percentage. minimum of 0.5 cm.
e) The average oil content percent of the test 2) Construction ( 38 X 31 ) — The average
samples does not exceed the specified values of width are in accordance with
percentage. the requirements specified, but no
f) The average warpway and weftway breaking individual reading shall fall below the
strength values of the test samples either by specified nominal value by more than 1
ravelled strip test method or grab test method cm.
are not less than the corresponding breaking 8.1.2 For Hessian Packed in Rolls
strength specified.
a) The total of the corrected net mass of the rolls
g) The average value of (1) mass per square
metre, (2) ends per decimetre, and (3) picks under test is within +8 percent of the contract
−2
per decimetre for the test samples are in
accordance with the requirements specified. mass.
h) 1) Construction above ( 38 X 31 ) — Not b) Observed length of the rolls is within +1
more than 20 percent of the width readings percent of the marked length of the rolls.
of the cuts under test are outside the specified c) For moisture regain, oil content, breaking
tolerances and not more than half of these strength, mass, ends and picks, and width
readings ( 10 percent ) are below the specified conditions given in 8.1.1(d), (e), (f), (g) and
nominal value. However, no in-dividual (h), respectively are satisfied.
Table 1 Requirements of Hessian

(CIause 5.1)
Sl Characteristic Requirement Method
No. of Test,
Ref to
Type I Type II Type III Type IV Type V Type VI
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
i) Weight per square metre, g 213 229 245 270 298 305
Tolerance (+ 8 percent) +17 +18.3 +19 +21.6 +24 +24.4 C-6
( 2 percent) 4.3 4.6 5 5.4 6 6.1
ii) Ends/dm 38 38 38 47 47 47
Tolerance +2 +2 ±2 ±2 ±2 ±2
1 1 C-7
iii) Picks/dm 31 35 39 47 47 47
Tolerance +2 +2 ±2 ±2 ±2 ±2
1 1
iv) Width, cm ¬102 (or as agreed)® C-5
Tolerance +3 +3 +3 +3 +3 +3
0 0 -0 0 0 0
v) Average breaking strength :
a) Ravelled-strip method,
10 cm × 20 cm), Min, N(kgf) :
1) Warpway 882(90) 902 (92) 902 (92) 1 078 (110) 1 098(112) 1 098 (112) C-8
2) Weftway 588(60) 764 (78) 813 (83) 931 (95) 1 078(110) 1 176 (120)
b) Grab method,
2.5 cm × 7.6 cm), Min, N(kgf) :
1) Warpway 284(29) 284 (29) 284 (29) 348 (35.5) 348 (35.5) 353 (36) C-8
2) Weftway 186(19) 245 (25) 265 (27) 299 (30.5) 343 (35.0) 382 (39)
2
IS 2818 : 2015
Table 2 Requirements of Packed Bales or Rolls

(CIause 5.2)
Sl No. Characteristic Requirement for all Types Method of Test, Ref to

(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Moisture regain, percent, Max 17 C-2

ii) Contract weight of a bale, kg Calculated on the basis of formula given in Note 1
iii) Contract weight of a roll, kg Calculated on the basis of formula given in Note 1
iv) Corrected net weight of a bale or roll Not less than contract weight
(see Note 2)
v) Length of hessian per bale, m, Min 1 829 C-3
(see Note 3)
vi) Length of hessian per roll As specified in an agreement between the buyer and the seller C-3
vii) Permissible number of short pieces per 3 medium cuts or 2 medium cuts and 1 short piece C-4
bale, Max
viii) Number of joints in a roll and number of As agreed to between the buyer and the seller
such joined rolls in a consignment
(see Note 4)
ix) Oil content on dry de-oiled material, 3 C-9
percent, Max
NOTES
1 Contract weight of a bale or roll is calculated as follows:
2
Contract weight of a = Nominal width (cm) × Marked length (m) × Weight (g/m )
bale or roll, in kg 100 1 000
2 Corrected net weight of a bale or roll is calculated as follows:
Corrected net weight = Net weight × (100 + Contact regain percent

of a bale or roll 100 + Average moisture regain percent
3 Length of hessian per bale shall be 1 829 m or as specified in an agreement to between the buyer and the seller.
4 The seller shall indicate on the roll(s) the number of joints, if any.
3
IS 2818 : 2015
ANNEX A
( Clause 2.1 )

1954 : 1990 Determination of length and /ISO 13934-1 : 1999 of fabrics — Determination of
width of woven fabrics — maximum force and elongation
Methods (second revision) at maximum force Strip
1963 : 1981 Methods for determination of method
threads per unit length in woven 1969 Grab method (third revision)
fabrics (second revision) (Part 2) : 2010/
1969 ISO 13934-1 : 1999
(Part 1) : 2009 Textiles — Tensile properties
ANNEX B
( Clause 7.1 )
SAMPLING
B-1 SAMPLING PROCEDURE NOTE — If the number of bales/rolls in a lot exceeds 150, the
same shall be taken as a separate lot comprising of bales/rolls
B-1.1 For assessing the conformity of bales or in maximum up to 150.
the rolls to the requirements of this specification, the B-1.2 From the bales/rolls selected as per B-1.1, the
test sample of bales/rolls shall be selected from the lot test sample shall be drawn as follows:
at random as follows:
No. of Bales/Rolls No. of Bales/Rolls
in the Lot to be Drawn and
Opened for Inspection
up to 15 2
16 to 50 3
51 to 150 5
Sl Tests Test Sample

No. Bales Rolls
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Gross mass and tare mass (baling All the bales selected as in B-1.1 All the rolls selected as in B-1.1
hoops or cores and all packing
materials)
ii) Length of hessian per bale/roll 10 percent of the cuts in the bales All the rolls selected as in B-1.1
selected as in B-1.1, subject to a
minimum of 3
iii) Number of short pieces per bale All the bales selected as in B-1.1
iv) Moisture regain, percent
v) Mass, in g/m2 Ten cuts shall be drawn covering
All the rolls selected as in B-1.1
vi) Ends and picks per dm all the bales selected as in B-1.1
vii) Width
viii) Breaking strength One metre from each bale selected One metre from each roll selected
(see B-1.1) subject to a minimum (see B-1.1) subject to a minimum
of 3 m from 3 different cuts of 3 m from 3 different rolls
ix) Oil content, percent Two sample pieces from two cuts Two sample pieces from two
selected from two different bales different rolls
4
IS 2818 : 2015
ANNEX C
( Clause 7.1 )
TESTING AND INSPECTION
C-0 TESTING AND INSPECTION PROCEDURE with moisture content in the material. The specimen (jute
product) is placed under the electrode gun having two poles of
C-0.1 Testing and inspection of the lot as laid down specially designed spring-loaded electrodes. The small amount
in C-1 to C-9 shall be carried out on the samples drawn of current passing through the electrodes is amplified and
recorded on’the meter calibrated against the actual moisture
in accordance with Annex B. regain, based on oven-dry method of the material. A separate
chart, calibrating the readings of the actual moisture regain
C-1 MASS OF BALES/ROLLS based on oven-dry method of the material may also be used.
The instrument shall be operated according to the
C-1.1 Determine the total gross mass ( Wg ) of the manufacturer’s instructions.
bales or rolls in the test sample (see B-1.1) from the Mention of the name of the specific instrument is not intended
gross mass of each bale or roll taken up to nearest to promote or give preference to the use of that instrument over
kilogram. others not mentioned.
C-1.2 Remove all packing materials including baling C-3 LENGTH

hoops or cores from the bales/rolls selected in B-1.1
and weigh them together up to nearest kilogram, C-3.1 Bale
determine the total tare mass (Wt ) of the bales/rolls Determine the total length of the hessian in the cuts
weighed (see C-1.1 ). selected in each bale (see B-1.1) by adding up the
C-1.3 The total net mass ( Wn) of the bales/rolls under length of the cuts in the respective bales, measured
test shall be as under: correct to a decimetre in accordance with IS 1954 after
conditioning at the prevailing atmosphere. If the total
Wn = (Wg– Wt) measured length is less than the total marked length
C-1.4 Determine the total corrected net mass ( Wi ) of on the cuts, repeat the test in all the cuts in the bales
the bales/rolls under test by the following formula: selected.
C-3.2 Rolls
Wn × (100 + Contract regain, percent)
Wi =
100 + average moisture regain, percent Determine the length of hessian in each roll in the test
sample (see B-1.1 ) correct to a decimetre in accordance
C-2 MOISTURE REGAIN with IS 1954 after conditioning at the prevailing
atmosphere.
C-2.1 Bales
C-4 NUMBER OF SHORT PIECES (FOR BALE
C-2.1.1 Determine the moisture regain in each cut ONLY )
(see B-1.2) on opening the bales (see B-1.1 ) by the
use of a suitable moisture meter. After opening the Determine the number of short pieces of hessian in
bales, sufficient time ( not less than 10 min) shall be each bale by measuring the length of the cuts correct
allowed to lapse before measuring moisture regain to to a decimetre by using either ‘measuring table’ or
enable the fabric to attain conditions for the normal ‘measuring scale’ method
use of the moisture meter. Take four readings for each
cut. C-5 WIDTH
C-2.2 Roll C-5.1 Bale
C-2.2.1 Determine the moisture regain in each roll Determine the width of cuts (see B-1.2) correct to
(see B-1.2 ) after opening the rolls (see B-1.1 ), by the 0.5 cm in accordance with IS 1954 after conditioning
use of a suitable moisture meter. Take 10 readings for the same in prevailing atmosphere. Take 3 width
each roll. readings for each cut.
NOTES C-5.2 Roll

1 The mathematical average of all the readings is the average
moisture regain percent of the bales. Determine the width of hessian in rolls (see B-1.2)
2 IJIRA (Indian Jute Industries Research Association) Moisture correct to 0.5 cm in accordance with IS 1954 after
Meter may be used for the purpose. This meter works on the conditioning in the prevailing atmosphere. Take five
principle of measuring the electrical resistance which changes readings from each roll at interval of approximately
5
IS 2818 : 2015
one-fifth of roll length leaving about 10 m from the specimens, 5 in the warp and 5 in weft directions and
ends. determine the breaking strength by following either
ravelled strip method or grab method as under:
C-6 MASS IN GRAMS PER SQUARE METRE
a) Ravelled strip method — Carry out tests on
C-6.1 Bale 100 mm wide ravelled strip and 200 mm
between grips [see IS 1969 (Part 1)] in a fabric
Weigh the cuts (see B-1.2) up to nearest 0.1 kg after
strength tester with a rate of traverse 460 mm
measurement of moisture regain (see C-2) and
per min.
determine the mass in grams per square metre of fabric
at contract regain percent for each cut separately from b) Grab Method — Carry out tests on 120 × 180
the corresponding percentage regain (see C-2), mm test specimens on a fabric strength tester
measured length (see C-3) and nominal width of cuts. [see IS 1969 (Part 2)] of such a capacity that
the observed values would be between 10
C-6.2 Roll percent and 90 percent of the full scale load
of the tester. The strength tester shall have,
Weigh the rolls (see B-1.2) up to the nearest kg after
1) a rate of traverse of 500 mm per min, and
measuring moisture regain (see C-2) and determine
the mass in grams per square metre of hessian at 2) clamps with jaw faces measuring 25.4 ×
contract regain percent for each roll separately from 25.4 mm for holding the specimen.
the corresponding percentage regain (see C-2), NOTES
measured length (see C-3) and nominal width of roll. 1 To convert strip test value into grab test value or vice versa,
use the following formula:
C-7 ENDS AND PICKS Strip test value
Grab test value =
3.1
C-7.1 Bale
2 The tests may be carried out in the prevailing atmospheric
Count the ends and picks from each cut (see B-1.2 ) in conditions with relative humidity between 40 and 90 percent.
one and two places respectively in accordance with
IS 1963. C-9 OIL CONTENT
C-9.1 From each cut or roll (see B-1.2) take one
C-7.2 Roll
representative strip, together weighing approximately
Count the ends and picks from each roll (see B-1.2) as 20 g and determine the oil content on dry de-oiled
follows: material basis as per the procedure given at C-9.2.
Minimum two tests shall be carried out.
a) Ends — Two readings from each roll in
accordance with IS 1963. C-9.2 A known amount of the sample is extracted with
b) Picks — One reading from every 100 m or a trichloroethylene or light petroleum or n-hexane in
part thereof subject to a minimum of two Soxhlet apparatus. The solvent is removed by
readings per roll in accordance with IS 1963. distillation and the extract is weighed. The mass of the
extract is expressed as a percentage of the oven dry
C-8 BREAKING STRENGTH mass of the extracted specimen or conditioned mass
From each cut or roll (see B-1.2 ) prepare 10 test of test specimen before extraction.
6
Copyright

Headquarters:

NEW DELHI 110002 { 2323 7617
2323 3841
KOLKATA 700054 { 2337 8499, 2337 8561
2337 8626, 2337 9120
{ 260 3843
260 9285
{ 2254 1216, 2254 1442
2254 2519, 2254 2315
MUMBAI 400093 { 2832 9295, 2832 7858
2832 7891, 2832 7892
Branches: AHMEDABAD. BENGALURU. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE. DEHRADUN.
FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KOCHI. LUCKNOW.
NAGPUR. PARWANOO. PATNA. PUNE. RAJKOT. VISAKHAPATNAM.

IS 2074 : 1993 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfe
( Reaffirmed 2006 )
Indian Standard zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLK

TEXTILES - -HEAVY CEE JUTE BAGS -
SPECIFICATION
( First Revision )
UDC 621’798’15 : [ 677’13 ]
@ BIS 1993 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA

NEW DELHI 110002
August 1993 Price Group d

jute and jute Products Sectional Committee, TX 03
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard ( First Revision ) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards after
the draft finalized by the Jute and Jute Products Sectional Committee has been approved by the
Textile Division Council.
This standard was first published in 1964 and is being revised so as to align the general:
requirements and criteria of conformity with those specified in IS 9113 : 1992 Textiles - Jute
sacking - General requirements (Jirst zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
revision ).
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with,
the final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded
off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised )‘. The number
of significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified
value in this standard.
TO
IS 2874 : 1993 TEXTILES — HEAVY CEE JUTE BAGS —
SPECIFICATION
(First Revision)
[Page 2, Table 2, Sl No. (vi), Under 'Requirement'] — Substitute '3' for '8.0'.
( T X 03 )

IS 2074 : 1993 zyxwvutsrqponmlkj
Indian Standard zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONM

TEXTILES - HEAVY’CEE JUTE BAGS -
SPECIFICATION
( First Revision )
.1 SCOPE requirements laid down in IS 3751 : 1992 and the
warp running along the length of the bags.
This standard prescribes constructional details
.and other requirements of heavy tee jute bags. 4.2 Seam
2 REFERENCES The sides of the bags shall be sewn with

overhead or herakle stitches on selvedge
The following Indian Standards are necessary through two layers of sacking as specified in IS
badjuncts to this standard : zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
9113 : 1993 using two strands of 3 ply jute
twine of 380 tex zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLK
x 3. The number of stitches per
IS zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
No. Title decimetre at the sides sball be between 9 and 11.
1954 : 1969 Methods for determination of
width of fabrics 4.3 Safety Stitch
length and
(first revision )
A line of safety union stitch shall be provided
‘1963 : 1981 Method for determination of at the inner edges of the overhead stitches using
threads per unit length in woven jute twine of 310 tex X 2 ( see also IS
fabrics ( second revision ) 9113 : 1993 1. The number of safety union
stitches per decimetre shall be between 9 and 11.
11969 : 1985 Methods for determination of
breaking load and elongation of 4.4 Hemming at the Mouth
woven textile fabrics ( second
revision ) Provision of IS 9113 : 1993 shall apply.
2873 : 1991 Textiles - Packaging of jute
products in bales - Specifica- 4.5 Joined Bag
tion (first revision )
Provision of IS 9113 : 1993 shall apply.
2969 : 1974 Method for determination of oil
content of jute yarn and fabrics 4.6 Freedom from Defects
(first revision )
Specification for heavy tee cloth The cloth used for the bags should be generally
3751 : 1992 free from weaving and sewing defects which
(first revision )
effect the performance of the bag, such as
5476 : 1986 Glossary of terms relating to missing picks, holes, cuts, tears, floats, crushed
jute (first revision ) selvedges, spots, stains, gap stitches, loose ends
and frayed ends.
9030 : 1979 Method for determination of
seam strength of jute fabrics
including their laminates 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
Textiles jute sacking - General

9113 : 1993 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
5.1 The bag shall conform to the requirements
requirements (first revision ) specified in Table 1.
5.2 The bales containing the bags shall conform

3 TERMINOLOGY to the requirements specified in Table 2.
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions
given in IS 5476 : 1986 shall apply. 5.3 The contract moisture regain shall be 20
percent.
4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6 PACKING
4.1 Sacking
The bags shall be packed in bales as prescribed
The bags shall be made from single pieces of in IS 2873 : 1991 or as specified in an agreement
.heavy tee jute cloth conforming to the between the buyer and the seller.
1
IS 2874 : zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
1993
Table 1 Particolars of Heavy Cee Jute Bag

( Clause 5.1 )
S1 Characteristic Requirement Tolerance Method of Test ’
No.
i) Dimension of a bag :
a) Outside length 101-S cm +4cm IS 1954 : 1990
b) Outside width 71-O cm -0cm
ii) Corrected weight per bag 1 a20 g + 102g Clause 8.5.2 of
IS 9113 : 1993 - 76g
iii) Ends per dm 68 IS 1963 : 1981 *4
iv) Picks per dm 35 *2 IS 1963 : 1981
v) Average breaking load of IS 1969 : 198.5
sacking ( zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
M in ) ( revelled
strip method, 10 x 20 cm )
Warpway 160 kg .-
Weftway 180 kg -
vi) Average breaking load of seam 67 kg - IS 9030 : 1979
NOTE - The buyer and the seller may agree to the dimensions other than those specified above. In that case,
tolerance of _+ zcm shall apply; the weight of bags shall be proportional to the weight of standard
bag ( 1 190 g, 112 x 67.5 cm ) with a tolerance of + 10 percent on bag weight. The weight of the bag may be
- 7.5
calculated by the method given in 5.3 of IS 9113 : 1993.
w

( Clause 5.2 )
Characteristic Reqoiremeot Method of Test
i%.
8 Total number of bags per bale 400 Clause 8.9 of
IS 9113 : 1993
ii) Number of joined bags per bundle 1 do
of 25 bags
iii) Contract weight of a bale 408 kg -
iv) Corrected net weight of a bale Not less than Clause 8.1 of
contract weight IS 9113 : 1993
v) Moisture regain 22 percent, M ax Clause 8.2 of
IS 9113 : 1993
vi) Oil content on dry deoiled 8.0 percent, M UX IS 2969 : 1974
material basis
NOTE - The number of bags per bale shall be 400 or as specified in an agreement between the buyer and
the seller.
7 MARKING 8 SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR

CONFORMITY
The bales shall be marked as prescribed in IS
2873 : 1991. Additional markings shall be made The sampling procedure and criteria for con-
as stipulated by the buyer or required by the formity as specified in IS 9113 : 1993 shall be
regulation or law in force. folio wed.
Standard Mark
The use of the Standard Mark is governed by the provisions of the zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSR
Bureau of Indian
that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a I icence for the use
IS 3790 : 1991
Reaffirmed 2001
Indian Standard
TEXTILES – HESSIAN BAGS –
SPECIFICATION
( Second Revision )
First Reprint JUNE 1993
UDC 621.798.15 : 677.13
© BIS 1991
NEW DELHI 110002
September 1991 Price Group 3

FOREWORD
This Indian Standard ( Second Revision ) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the
Division Council.
This standard was first published in 1966 and subsequently revised in 1971. This standard has
been again revised in order to harmonize it with the specification issued by the Export Inspection
Council and the norms formulated by Indian Jute Mills Association. In the present revision,
changes have been made in the sampling, inspection and criteria for conformity.
the final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded
off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960 'Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised ) ' . The
number of significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the
specified value in this standard.
TO
IS 3790 : 1991 TEXTILES — HESSIAN BAGS —
SPECIFICATION
( Second Revision )
[ Page 1, Table 1, Sl No. (viii), col 3 and 4 ] — Substitute '3' for '8'.
( Page 1, clauses 4.3 and 4.3.1 ) — Insert the following note at the end of
each clause:
'NOTE — The count of twine is given for guidance only'
( Page 2, clause 4.4 ) — Insert the following note at the end of paragraph:
'NOTE — The count of hemming twine is given for guidance only.'
( TX 03 )
TO
IS 3790 : 1991 TEXTILES — HESSIAN BAGS —
SPECIFICATION
( Second Revision )
'1 SCOPE
1.1 This standard specifies requirements for two types of hessian bags fabricated
from Type i and Type 2 hessian cloths conforming to IS 2818 (Part 2) : 1971.
packing material more than 50 kg.'
( TX 03 )
IS 3790 : 1991
Indian Standard
TEXTILES - HESSIAN BAGS -
SPECIFICATION
( Second Revision )
1 SCOPE Table 1 Requirements of Hessian Bags
( Clauses 4.2.2, 5.1 and 8.1 )
This standard specifics requirements for two
types of hessian bags fabricated from Type 1 and SI Characteristic Requirement Method
No. of
Type 2 hessian cloths conforming to IS 2818 * i
Bags from Bags from Test
( P a r t 2 ) : 1971. Typel Type 2
Hessian Hessian
2 REFERENCES (1) (2) (3) (4) . (5)
i) Corrected net mass Not less Not less C-l
The Indian Standards listed in Annex A are of a bale than cont- than cont-
necessary adjuncts to this standard. ract mass ract mass
ii) Tolerance on nomi- C-5
nal outside dimen-
3 TERMINOLOGY sions of a bag:
3.0 For the purpose of this standard, the defini- a) For dimensions, + 4 +4
up to 137 cm, in – 0 – 0
tions given in IS 5476 : 1986 and the following cm
shall apply. b) For dimensions + 4 + 4
above 137 cm. – 0 – 0
3.1 Hemmed Bag in cm
iii) Tolerance on nominal C-3
mass of a bag ( speci-
A bag with raw edges hemmed forming the fied or calculated),
mouth of the bag. percent:
a) Average + 8 + 8
3.2 Selvedged Bag – 2 – 2
b) Individual ± 10 ± 10
A bag with selvedge forming the mouth of the iv) Ends per dm 47 ± 2 38 + 2 C-7
bag. –1
v) Picks per dm 47 ± 2 +2 C-7
35 –1
3.3 Joined Bag vi) Moisture regain, 17 17 C-2
A bag made from not more than two pieces of percent, Max
vii) Contract regain, 16 16
hessian cloth. The joining shall be done in such percent
a manner so that warp and weft shall run in the viii) Oil content, percent 8 8 C-8
same direction. on dry de-oiled
material basis, Max
4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4.3 Seam
4.1 Hessian Cloth The bag shall be sewn with overhead or herakle
stitches. The sewing shall be done through two
The bags of Type 1 and Type 2 shall be made thicknesses of the cloth if both the edges to be
from single pieces of plain weave hessian cloth sewn are selvedges. In case of raw edge( s ),
conforming to the requirements of Type 1 and turning shall be done to a depth of at least 4.0
Type 2 as prescribed in IS 2818 ( Part 2 ) : 1971. cm before sewing. The stitching shall be of
even tension throughout with all the loose ends
4.2 Hessian Bags secured so that the stitch does not open up.
The number of stitches per decimetre shall be
4.2.1 The bags shall be either hemmed or selved- from 9 to 11. For overhead or herakle stitches,
ged as agreed to between the buyer and the two strands or jute twine of count 310 tex × 3
seller. ( 9 grist × 3 ) shall be used.
4.2.2 The outside dimensions of the bag shall 4.3.1 Safety Stitch
be as agreed to between the buyer and the seller.
However, tolerances given in Table 1 shall be A line of safety union stitch may be provided
applicable. at the inner edges of the overhead and herakle
1
IS 3790 : 1991
stitches using 2 ply jute twine of 310 tex × 2 5.4 Number of Bags and Joined Bags per Bale
( 9 grist × 2 ) if agreed to between the buyer
and the seller. The number of safety union The number of bags in a bale shall be 500 for
stitches per decimetre shall be from 9 to 11. bags made from Type 1 hessian and 1 000 for
bags made from Type 2 hessian or as agreed to
4.4 Hemming at the Mouth between the buyer and the seller.
In the case of hemmed bags the raw edges at the 5.4.1 Joined bags shall not be more than one
mouth of the bags shall be turned over first to per bundle of 25 bags. In case the bundle
a depth of about 1.5 cm and then to a depth of contains more than 25 bags as agreed to between
about 2.5 cm. The three thicknesses of hessian the buyer and the seller, the number of joined
thus formed shall be hemmed. The number bags in a bale shall not exceed 4 percent of the
of stitches per decimetre in the hem shall be total bags in a bale.
from 9 to 11. The count of the hemming twine
shall be 310 tex ( 9 grist ). 5.4.2 The number of bags and joined bags per
bale shall be determined by the method prescri-
4.5 Joined Bag bed in Annex B.
The seam used to join the two pieces of hessian 6 PACKING AND MARKING
in a joined bag shall have strength not less than
the breaking strength of the seam as specified 6.1 Packing
in Table 2 and shall be sufficiently tight to
prevent shifting or leakage of the content of The hessian bags shall be packed in bales as per
the bag. the procedure specified in IS 2873 : 1991 or as
agreed to between the buyer and the seller.
5.1 The hessian bags shall conform to the 6.2 Marking
requirements specified in Table 1 and Table 2 The bales shall be marked as specified in
unless specifically agreed to between the buyer IS 2873 : 1991. Additional markings shall be
and the seller. made if required by the buyer or by the regulations
or law in force.
5.2 Bag Mass
When the contract is on the basis of cloth cons- 6.2.1 Bales may also be marked with the Standard
truction, the mass of the bag shall include the Mark.
mass of the constituent cloth the total area
including the area required for folding and 7 SAMPLING AND INSPECTION
hemming ( see 4.3 and 4.4 ) plus mass of the
twine from its grist and length calculated on the 7.1 Unless otherwise agreed to between the
following basis: buyer and the seller, the sampling shall be done
as given in Annex B and the procedure for
Sl No. Type of Stitch Length of Twine testing and inspection as given in Annex C.
as Multiple of
Sewn Length 8 CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY
(1) (2) (3)
i) Hemming 4 8.1 The lot shall be considered as conforming
to the requirements of this standard if the
ii) Overhead 5 following conditions are satisfied:
iii) Herakle 8
iv) Union 4 a) The total of the corrected net mass of the
bales under test is not less than the con-
5.3 Breaking Strength tract mass of the bales.
b) The dimensions of at least 80 percent of
5.3.1 When the contract is on the basis of cloth the bags under test are in accordance with
construction, the breaking strength values of the the requirements specified in Table 1. Out
cloth and seam shall be as given in Table 2. of the remaining bags ( 20 percent maxi-
5.3.2 When the contract is on the basis of bag mum ) the dimensions of not more than
mass and if the nominal mass of cloth derived 10 percent of the bags under test is below
from such 'mass of bag' is less than 2305 g/m2 the specified value, and no bag has
in case of Type 1 and less than 229 g/m in case dimensions less than 1.5 cm below the
of Type 2, but without considering the mass of specified values.
twine, the mass of cloth satisfies the require-
ments of each type, the breaking strength values c) The corrected mass of at least 80 percent
of the cloth and seam shall be as given in of the bags under test are in accordance
Table 2. with the requirements specified in Table 1.
Out of the remaining bags ( 20 percent
5.3.3 Breaking strength shall be calculated on maximum ) the corrected mass of not
the basis of five specimens in each warpway and more than 10 percent of the bags under
weftway directions taken from each bag selected. test is below the lower specified limit. The
2
IS 3790 : 1991
average corrected mass of the bags under accordance with the requirements speci-
test conforms to the requirement specified fied in Table 1.
in Table 1.
d) The total number of bags in each bale g) The average values of ( a ) warpway and
under test and the number of joined bags weftway breaking strength of the cloth
in each bundle of bags under test meet the and ( b ) warpway and weftway breaking
relevant requirement. strength of the seam of the bags under
test conform to the requirements specified
e) The average moisture regain percent for in Table 2.
the bags under test is not more than the
requirement specified in Table 1. h) The average oil content percent of the
f) The average values of ends and picks per bags under test not more than the specified
decimetre of the bags under test are in requirement ( see Table 1 ).
Table 2 Requirements for Breaking Strength and Seam Strength of Bags
( Clauses 4.5, 5.1, 5.3.1 and 5.3.2 )
Sl Characteristic When the Contract is on the Basis of When the Contract is on the Method of Tets
No. Cloth Construction Basis of Bag Mass
Strip Method Grap Method Strip Method Grap Method
Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2

bags bags bags bags bags bags bags bags
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
1 Cloth breaking C-6 of IS 2818
strength on ( Part 1 ) : 1990
10 cm × 20 cm
strip, N (kgf)
a) Warpway 1 098 (112) 902 (92) 353 (36) 284 (29) 1 078 (110) 882 (90) 343 (35) 284 (29)
b) Weftway 1 176 (120) 764 (78) 382 (39) 245 (25) 1 127 (115) 735 (75) 363 (37) 235 (24)
2 Seam strength C-8 of IS 2818
on 5 cm × 20 cm ( P a r t 1 ): 1990
strip
a) Warpway 333 (34) 245 (25) — — 333 (34) 176 (18) — —
b) Weftway 353 (36) 206 (21) — — 333 (34) 176 (18) — —
ANNEX A
( Clause 2 )
1963 : 1981 Methods for determination products in bales — Specifi-
of threads per unit length in cation ( second revision )
woven fabrics ( second
revision ) 2969 : 1974 Method for determination of
oil content of jute yarn and
2818 Indian hessian: Part 1 Gene- fabrics ( first revision )
( Part 1 ) : 1990 ral ( second revision ) 5476 : 1986 Glossary of terms relating to
2818 Indian hessian: Part 2 305 jute ( first revision )
( Part 2 ) : 1971 and 229 g/m2 at 16 percent
contract regain ( first revi- 9030 : 1979 Method for determination
sion ) of seam strength of jute
fabrics including their
2873 : 1991 Textiles — Packaging of jute laminates
3
IS 3790 : 1991
ANNEX B
( Clauses 5.4.2 and 7.1 )
SAMPLING
B-1 SAMPLING PROCEDURE Sl Test Test Sample

No.
B-1.1 Lot iii) Total number of
bags per bale Two bundles of
All the bales of hessian bags of same type and bags from each
quality delivered to a buyer against one despatch bale selected as in
note. iv) Number of joined B-1.2
bags per bale
B-1.2 For assessing the conformity of the bales v) Moisture regain,
to the requirements of this specification, the percent
test sample of bales shall be selected from the 30 bags ( selec-
lot at random as follows: ting equal number
vi) Length and width of bags from each
No. of Bales No. of Bales to be Drawn bale selected in
in the Lot and Opened for vii) Ends and picks
per dm B-1.2
Inspection
Up to 15 2 viii) Mass per bag
16 to 50 3 ix) Breaking strength of Five bags selected
51 to 150 5 cloth and seam out of the bales
selected in B-1.2
NOTE — If the number of bales in a lot exceeds subject to a mini-
150, the same shall be taken as a separate lot com- mum of one bag
prising of bales a maximum of 150. from each bale
B-1.3 From the bales selected as above, the test x) Oil content, percent Two bags selected
sample shall be drawn as follows: out of two diffe-
rent bales as selec-
Sl Test Test Sample ted in B-1.2
No.
NOTES
i) Gross mass of bales 1 Joined bags shall not be selected for the purpose
of tests at ( v ) to ( ix ) above.
ii) Tare mass ( of baling The bales selected 2 In case the bundle contains less than 25 bags,
hoops and all other as in B-1.2
five bundles shall be selected for determining the
packing materials ) number of joined bags per bale.
4
IS 3790 : 1991
ANNEX C
( Table 1, Clauses 5.1, 5.3.1 and 5 3.2 )
C-0 TESTING AND INSPECTION against the actual moisture regain, based on oven-
PROCEDURE dry method of the material. A separate chart,
calibrating the readings of the actual moisture
regain based on oven-dry method of the material
C-0.1 Testing and inspection of the lot as laid may also be used. The instrument shall be operated
down below shall be carried out as given below. according to the manufacturer's instruction.
C-1 MASS OF BALES C-3 MASS PER BAG

C-1.1 Determine the average gross mass ( Wg ) C-3.1 Weigh each bag to the nearest 5 g after
of the bales in the test sample from the gross tests for C-1 and C-2. Weighing may be carried
mass of each bale to nearest kilogram. out in prevailing atmospheric condition. Correct
the observed mass of each bag for the observed
C-1.2 Remove the baling hoops and all other moisture regain ( see C-2.1 ) as follows:
packing materials of the bales selected as in B-1.2
and weigh them together to the nearest kilogram.
Calculate the average tare mass of bale by
dividing the number of bales weighed ( Wt ).
C-1.3 The average net mass of bale under test, C-4 NUMBER OF BAGS AND JOINED
Wn = Wq – Wt BAGS PER BALE
C-1.4 Determine the average corrected net mass C-4.1 Count the number of bundles of bags in
W of bales under test by the following formula: each bale and number of bags and joined bags
in each bundle. From the above, determine the
total number of bags in each bale under test.
C-5 LENGTH AND WIDTH
C-2 MOISTURE REGAIN C-5.1 Lay each bag flat on a table free from
creases and wrinkles and measure the outside
C-2.1 Determine the moisture regain in each length and outside width about the centre to
bag after opening the bales by the use of a the nearest 0.5 cm.
suitable moisture meter. After opening the
bales, sufficient time ( not less than 10 minutes ) C-6 BREAKING STRENGTH OF SEAM
shall be allowed to lapse before measuring the C-6.1 Take two test specimens for breaking
moisture regain to enable the cloth to attain strength of seam, one from each side, or one
conditions for the normal use of moisture meter. from the side and the other from the bottom of
Take at least one reading for each sample bag. the bags as the case may be. Test the breaking
strength of each specimen taking 200 mm bet-
NOTES ween grips of a strength tester having a constant
1 The mathematical average of all the readings is rate of traverse of 460 mm ( or 18 cm ) per
the average moisture regain percent of the fabric. minute in accordance with IS 9030 : 1979.
2 IJIRA ( Indian Jute Industries Research Associa- C-7 ENDS AND PICKS
tion ) Moisture Meter* may be used for the purpose.
The meter works on the principle of measuring the
electrical resistance which changes with moisture C-7.1 Count the ends and picks from each bag
content in the material. The specimen ( jute in one and two places respectively with a suita-
product ) is placed under the electrode gun having ble gauge. Determine the average ends and
two poles of specially designed spring-loaded picks per decimetre of the bags under test in
electrodes. The small amount of current passing
through the gun having two poles of specially accordance with 7 of IS 1963 : 1981.
designed spring-loaded electrodes. The small
amount of current passing through the electrodes C-8 OIL CONTENT
is amplified and recorded on the meter calibrated
C-8.1 From each bag, take one representative
*Mention of the name of the specific instrument is not strip and determine oil content on dry deoiled
intended to promote or give preference to the use of material basis as per method given in IS 2969 :
that instrument over others not mentioned. 1974.
5
Standard Mark
that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use
Copyright
Indian Standards are reviewed periodically and revised, when necessary and amendments, if
any, are issued from time to time. Users of Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in
possession of the latest amendments or edition. Comments on this Indian Standard may be
sent to BIS giving the following reference:
Doc : No. TXD 3 (2652)
Amendments Issued Since Publications

BUREAU OP INDIAN STANDARDS

Headquarters:
(Common to all Offices)
NEW DELHI 110002 331 13 75
CALCUTTA 700054 37 86 26, 37 86 62
53 38 43, 53 16 40
Northern: SCO 445-446, Sector 35-C, CHANDIGARH 160036 53 23 84
235 02 16, 235 04 42,
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600113 235 15 19, 235 23 15
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri ( East ) 632 92 95, 632 73 58,
BOMBAY 400093 632 78 91, 632 78 92
Branches : AHMADABAD, BANGALORE, BHOPAL, BHUBANESHWAR, COIMBATORE
FARIDABAD, GHAZIABAD, GUWAHATI, HYDERABAD, JAIPUR, KANPUR
LUCKNOW, PATNA, THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed at Dee Kay Printers, New Delhi, India

IS 3984 : 2002
Indian Standard
TEXTILES — DW FLOUR BAGS —
SPECIFICATION
( First Revision )
ICS 5.080; 59.08.01
© BIS 2002

NEW DELHI 110002

FOREWORD
This Indian Standard (First Revision) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized
by the Jute and Jute Products Sectional committee had been approved by the Textile Division Council.
This standard First published in 1967 has been revised to align with the similar Indian Standards on jute bags.
Accordingly, changes have been made in the requirements of seam, hemming at the mouth provisions of joined
bags, sampling and criteria for conformity.
The composition of the Committee responsible for formulation of this standard is given in Annex A.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the Final value.
IS 2:1960 'Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised)'. The number of significant places retained in
the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
TO
18 3984 : 2002 TEXTILES — DW FLOUR BAGS —
SPECIFICATION
( First Revision )

'1 SCOPE
1.1 This standard prescribes the constructional details and other requirements of
DW (double wrap) flour bags made of jute.
packing flour more than 50 kg'.
( TX 03 )
IS 3984 : 2002
Indian Standard
TEXTILES — DW FLOUR BAGS —
SPECIFICATION
( First Revision )
1 SCOPE 4.4 Joined Bag
This standard prescribes the constructional details and Provisions of IS 9113 shall apply.
other requirements of DW (double warp) Hour bags
made of jute. 4.5 Freedom from Defects
2 REFERENCES The bags should be generally free from weaving and

sewing defects which effect the performance of the
The following Indian Standards contain provisions bag, such as missing picks, holes, cuts, tears, floats,
which through reference in this text, constitute
crushed selvedges, spots, stains, gap stitches, loose
provision of this standard. At the time of publication,
ends and frayed ends.
the editions indicated were valid. All standards are
subject to revision and parties to agreements based on 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
possibility of applying the most recent editions of the 5.1 The bags shall conform to the requirements
standards indicated below: specified in Table 1.
IS No. Title 5.2 The bales containing the bags shall conform to
2873 : 1991 Textiles – Packaging of jute the requirements specified in Table 2.
products in bales – Specification
(second revision) 5.3 The contract moisture regain shall be 20 percent.
3966 : 1967 DW Flour jute cloth
6 PACKING
5476 : 1986 Glossary of terms relating to jute
( first revision ) The bags shall be packed in bales as prescribed in
9113 : 1993 Textiles – Jute sacking – General IS 2873 or as specified in the agreement between the
requirements (first revision) buyer and the seller.
3 TERMINOLOGY
7 MARKING
in IS 5476 shall apply. 7.1 The bales shall be marked as prescribed in IS 2873.
Additional markings shall be made as stipulated by
4 MANUFACTURE the buyer or required by the regulation or law in force.
4.1 Sacking 7.2 BIS Certification Marking
The bags shall be made from single piece of double The bales may also be marked with the Standard Mark.
warp, plain weave jute sacking of uniform construction
conforming to IS 3966 with warp running along the 7.2.1 The use of the Standard Mark is governed by
length of the bag. The cloth shall be without stripes the provisions of Bureau of Indian Sdmdards Act, 1986
or shall have stripes as agreed to between the buyer and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The
and the seller, woven along the length of the bag. details of conditions under which the licence for the
use of Standard Mark may be granted to manufacturers
4.2 Seam
or producers may be obtained from the Bureau of
The sides of the bags shall be sewn with overhead or Indian Standards.
herakles stitches on selvedge through two layers of
sacking as specified in IS 9113. The number of stitches 8 SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR
per 10 cm shall be 10 ± 1. CONFORMITY
4.3 Hemming at the Mouth The sampling procedure and criteria for conformity
as specified m IS 9113 shall be followed.
Provisions of IS 9113 shall apply.
1
IS 3984 : 2002

( Clause 5.1 )
Sl Characteristic Requirement Tolerance Method of Test, Ref

No. to CI No. of ISO 9113
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

i) Dimensions, cm ( see Note ):
a) Outside length 142 +4 832
b) Outside width 71 0
ii) Corrected mass per bag. g 1 143 + 10 percent
8 5.2
–75
iii) Finds per dm 68 +4
8.4 2
-2
iv) Picks per dm 31 +2
–1
v) Average breaking load of sacking, [ravelled 8.6.2
strip method, 10 cm ' 20 cm] Min, N (kgf):
Warpway 1 570(160)
Weftway 1 402(143)
vi) Average breaking load of scam, [ ravelled 530(54) 8.7
strip method, 10 cm ' 20 cm] Min. N (kgf):
NOTE — The buyer and the seller may agree to the dimensions other than those specified above. The tolerance of cm shall
apply on the dimensions The mass of such bag may be calculated by the method given in 5.3 of IS 9113 However, a tolerance
of percent on the bag mass shall apply

( Clauses 5.2 )
SI Characteristic Requirement Method of Test,
No. Ref to CL No. of IS 9113
(1) (2) (3) (4)

i) Total number of bags per bale ( see Note ) 300 8.9
ii) Number of joined bags per bundle of 25 bags 1 do
iii) Contract mass of a bale, kg 342.9
iv) Corrected net mass of a bale Not less than the 81
contract mass
v) Moisture regain, percent, Mux 22 8.2
vi) Oil content on dry deoiled material basis, percent, Max 3.0 8.8
NOTE; – The number of bags per bale shall be 300 or as specified in an agreement between the buyer and the seller.
2
IS 3984 : 2002
ANNEX A
(Foreword)
Organisation Representative(s)
Office of the Jute Commissioner, Kolkata SHRI S. MAJUMDAR (Chairman)
Directorate General of Supplies & Disposals ( Quality SHRI A K. SINGAL.

Assurance Wing ), New Delhi SHRI M M . DUBEY ( Alternate )
Eskaps ( India ) Pvt Ltd, Kolkata SHRI SEKHAR GUHA

SHRI AKABINDA KAK ( Alternate )
Export Inspection Council of India, New Delhi SHRI K. J SRIVASTAVA

SHRI K. P RAHA ( Alternate)
Food Corporation of India, New Delhi SHRI S. B. SAROYA

SHRI C. SHIVANNA ( Alternate )
Indian Jute Industries' Research Association, Kolkata DR K JAYACHANDRAN
DR D SUR ( Alternate )
Indian Jute Mills Association, Kolkata CHAIRMAN

SHRI M N. GHOSH (Alternate I)
SHRI V. K. SHARMA (Alternate II)
SHRI ARUN MITRA (Alternate III)
Institute of Jute Technology. Kolkata DR PRABIR RAY

SHRI S K SEN (Altenntte)
Jute Manufacturers Development Council, Kolkata SHRI D. K. SARKAK
National Institute of Research on Jute & Allied Fibres ( NIRJAFT ). DIRECTOR

Kolkata
National Jute Manufacturers Corporation Ltd. Kolkata SHRI A GHOSH

SHRI K. K. BOSE (Alternate)
The Fertilizer Association of India, New Delhi DR S K. SAXENA
MIS Directorate General SHRI M. S VERMA,. Director & Head (TXD)

[ Representing Dircetor General (Ex Officio)]
Member-Secretary
SHRI M . S . VERMA
Director and Head ( Textiles )
3
Copyright
should ascertain that they arc in possession of the latest amendments or edition by referring to the latest issue of
'BIS Catalogue' and 'Standards: Monthly Additions'.
This Indian Standard has been developed from Doc : No. TX 03 (0464).

Headquarters :
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110 002 Telegrams : Manaksanstha
Telephones : 323 01 31, 323 33 75, 323 94 02 (Common to all offices)

NEW DELHI 110 002 323 38 41
Eastern : 1/14 C.I.T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Kankurgachi 337 84 99, 337 85 61
KOLKATA 700 054 337 86 26, 337 91 20
Northern : SCO 335-336, Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH 160 022 60 38 43
60 20 25
Southern : C.I.T. Campus, IV Cross Road, CHENNAI 600 113 254 12 16, 254 14 42
254 25 19, 254 13 15
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East) 832 92 95, 832 78 58
MUMBAI 400 093 832 78 91, 832 78 92
Branches AHMEDABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE.
FARIDABAD. GHAZ1ABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR.
LUCKNOW. NAGPUR. NALAGARH. PATNA. PUNE. RAJKOT. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed at Prabhat Offset Press. New Delhi-2

c
1989 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfed
IS 4436 : zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZ
( Reaffirmed 2006 )
Indian Standard zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJ
JUTE BAGGING FOR W RAPPING COTTON
BALES - SPECIFICATION zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIH
( First Revision )
UDC 621’798*151 [ 677’13 ] : 677.21.023’275.3
@ BIS 1990 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFED

M ANAK BHAVAN, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR M ARG
NEW DELHI 110002
Juwry 1990 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA

Price Group 2
Jute and Jute Products Sectional Committee, TDC 3
FOREWORD
This Indian Standard ( First Revision ) was adopted by the Eureau of Indian Standards on 6 April
1989, after the draft finalized by the Jute and Jute Products Sectional Committee had been approved
by the Textile Division Council.
This standard, first published in 1967, has been revised to take cognizance of the experience gained
and the developments that have taken place in the use of jute bagging for wrapping cotton bales in
USA. In this revision, the requirements for length, width, mass ( g/m ) at 16 percent moisture regain,
ends per dm, picks per dm and tex ( grist ) of warp and weft have been modified.
Jute bagging for wrapping cotton bales covered by this standard is mainly used by some importing
countries for wrapping cotton bales and such baggings are not used within the country for packing
cotton bales where hessian fabric conforming to Type 2 of IS 2818 ( Part 3 ) : 1971 ‘Specification for
Indian Hessian : Part 3 213 and 270 g/m2 at 16 percent contract regain zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTS
ijirst zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUT
revision )’ has been
prescribed.
accordance with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised )‘. The number of
significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value
in this standard.
IS 4436 : 1989 zyxwvutsrqponmlkji
Indian Standard zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONM
JUTE BAGGING FOR W RAPPING’ COTTON

BALES - SPECIFICATION
( First Revision )
1 SCOPE Table 1 Physical Requirements of Jute Bagging
( C&uses 5.1, 8.1 and B-2.2 )
1.1 This standard prescribes constructional details
and other particulars of jute bagging generally Method
Characteristic Requirement
used in the wrapping of cotton bales. z:. of Test
2 REFERENCES i) Length 2440 cm, zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSR
Mitt A-2
2540 cm, MUX
‘Glossary
2.1 The Indian Standard IS 5476 : 1986 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
254.0% Min
of terms relating to jute (Jirst revision )’ is a 264-O cm: Max
necessary adjunct to this standard.
ii) Width 122.0 cm, Min A-3
132.0 cm, MUX
3 TERMINOLOGY
iii) Mass at 16 per- 600 f 75 g A-4
,3,1 For the purpose of this standard, the definitions cent moisture
given in IS 5476 : 1986 shall be made applicable. regain, g/m
iv) Ends/305 cm 96, Min A-5.1
4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Picks/30*5 cm 48, Min
v) A-5.2
4.1 The jute bagging manufactured specifically vi) Texl ( Grist’ ) of :
for cotton bale covering shall be plain woven, not a) Warp 1138 tex (33 grist), A-6.1
containing any hard fibre, such as, sisal, any kind Min
of salt, or other corrosive or hygroscopic material. b) Weft 690 tex (20 grist ), A-6.2
Min
5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NOTE - The ends and picks per unit length are also
known as ‘warp yarn count’ and ‘weft yarn count’
5.1 The jute bagging shall conform to the physical respectively in some countries. particularly in USA.
requirements as laid down in Table 1.
1) Tex = mass in grams of 1 000 m of yarn.
- 6 PACKING 2) Grist = mass in pounds of 1 spyndle ( 14 400 yd )
of yarn.
6.1 The jute bagging shall be packed as agreed
to between the buyer and the seller.
7 SAMPLING
8.1 The lot shall be considered as conforming to
7.1 Unless otherwise agreed to between the buyer the requirements of the standard if all the test
and the seller, the procedure for sampling shall samples of jute bagging for wrapping cotton bales
be as given in Annex B. satisfy the requirements as laid down in Table 1. zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfe
ANNEX A
( Table I )
METHODS OF TEST
A-l GENERAL A-2 LENGTH
A-l.1 All tests may be carried out in the prevail- A-2.1 Lay the sample flat on a smooth horizontal
ing atmospheric conditions with relative humidity surface. Remove the creases and wrinkles
between 40 and 90 percent. from the sample but without stretching it.
1
Is: 4636 : l&9
Measure the length of the sample directly along A-6 ‘IEX ( GRIST ) OF YARN
both the selvedges using a measuring stick, steel
tape or other suitable graduated device. The A-6.1 Tex of Warp Yarn zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTS
average df the two measure-FiIehts rbui%led t&the R&IQV~ 10 wa$ yarns sp$ced iequally across the
nearest centimetre shall be taken as the lertgth width of the sample. Measure and cut each to
of the sample. a l”ehgfh of 1’4 ni: an@ collect a total length of
A-3 WIDTH 14 m. Weigh the 14 m of warp yarns in gram.
Determine the average moisture regain in the
A-3.1 Lay the sample flat on a smooth honzotital sample. Calculate the tex of warp yarn by the
surface. Remove the creases and wiinkles, if fc%llovtIhgfofmtila: zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQ
any, from the sample but without stretching it.
Measure the width perpendicular from s&edge T=Wx- 116 x71.4
to selvedge at. three places, using a measuring lOOSA
stick, steel tape or other suitable graduated where
device. Make one measurenient at the centfe of T = tex of fiarp‘ yarn at 16 percent
the sample and the other two‘ measurements at moistute reghin,
approximately 30’5 cm from each end of the
sample. The average of the three measurements, W = mass in gram of 14 m warp yarn in
rounded to the nearest cetitimetre, shall be ta!:en the sample, and
as the width of the sample. M = average moisture regain percent. zyxwvutsrqponmlkj
A-4 MASS NOTES
A-4.1 Determine the mass in gram, length in centi- 1 For calculating the grist of warp yarn IBI%OW 10
warp yarns spaced equally across the width of the
metre and the average moist.ure regain of the sample.. Measure and cut each to a length of l-5 yd
sample by the use of a suitable moisture meter. and collect a total length of I5 yd of warp yarns.
Calculate the mass in gram per metre of the wefgh the 15 yd warp’yartis in otince. DiUermine m
bagging at 16 percent moisture regain by the average moisture regain in the sample. Calculate
the grist of warp yaln &y the forloWing fermW
following formula:
w- ~~116~ &_ G=!?_‘x ~60
100$-M
1OOfM 1 where
where G = grist of warp yarn at 16 percent moisture
regain, zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONML
W = mass in gram per metre of jute W = mass in ounce of 15 yd of warp yarn in
bagging at 18 percent moi&re the sample, and
regain, M = average moisture regain percent.
( 1 yd = O*9.l44 m or 914.4 mm;
w= mass of the sample in gram, 1 02 = 28.349 5 g )
M= average moisture regain percent, 2 Additional tests shall be made, when necessary,
to obtain values for the tex ( grist ) of warp yarn,
k= 100 for calculating mass in gram per which are reptesentattve of the sample.
me&e, and
A-6.2 Tex of Weft
I= length of the sampIe in centimetre. zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
Remove slightly more than 14 m of unbroken
A-5 ENDS AND PICKS weft from the sample which may be obtained by
winding on a measuring reel avoiding any over-
A-5.1 Ends per 30’5 cm lapping. Weigh the 14 m of weft in gram. Deter-
Count the number of warp ends in the width of mine the average moisture regain of the sample.
the sample including the selvedges at each end of Calculate the tex of weft by the following formula.
the sample. Divide the average of the two Tswx x 71’4
measuremeets by the width in centimetre as 100SM
determined above and this multiplied by 30’5 cm
shall be the number of ends per 30’5 cm. where
T = tex of weft at 16 percent moisture
A-S.2 Picks per 30’5 cm
regain,
Count on each sample, the number of weft yarns W = mass in gram of 14 m of weft in
over a measured leg& of 91’5 cm. The number the sample, and
so obtaihed divided by 3 shall be the picks per
30’5 cm. M = average moisture regain percent.
2
IS 4436 : zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcba
1989
NOTES where
1 For calculating the grist of weft, remove slightly G = grist of weft at 16 percent moisture
more than 15 yd of unbroken weft from the sample regain,
which may be obtained by winding on a measuring
reel avoiding any overlapping. Weigh the 15 yd of W =a:~ in oz of 15 yd of weft in the sample,
weft in ounce. Determine the average moisture
regain in the sample. Calculate the grist of weft
by the following formula: M = average moisture regain percent.
2 Additional tests shall be made, when necessary,
GJyX-.--x60
116 to obtain values for the tex ( grist ) of weft yarn,
lOO+M zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
which are representative of the sample.
ANNEX B
( Clause 7.1 )
SAMPLING
B-l LOT No. of Bales in No. of Bales to be Drawn

the Lot and Openedfor Inspection
B-l.1 All the bales of jute bagging for wrapping
up to 15 2
cotton bales purporting to be of specified dimen-
sions and quality and containing definite number
:!! :: I$ ;
of pieces delivered to one buyer against one
despatch note shall constitute a lot. NOTE - If the number of bales in a lot exceeds 150,
the same shall be taken as a separate lot comprising
of bales maximum up to 150.
B-2 SAMPLING PROCEDURE
B-2.2 Sampling of Bagging Pieces ( or Cuts )
B-2.1 Sampling of Bales
The number of bagging pieces (cuts ) to be selected
For assessing the conformity of the bales to the out of the bales selected in B-2.1 for testing
requirements of this specification, the number of against the characteristics as laid down in Table 1
bales to be selected from the lot shall be as &all be 10. The pieces ( cuts ) selected shall
follows. zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
cover all the bales selected.
3
Standard Mark
The use of the Standard Mark is governed by the provisions of the zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPON
Bureau of Indian
testing and quality control which is devised and supervised by BIS and operated by the
-
of Indian
BIS is a statutory institution established under the &Jrea zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIH
Standarda Act, 1986 zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZY
zyxwvutsrqponmlkjihgfedcbaZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFE
to promote
Copyright
BIS has the copyright of all its publications. NO part of these publications may be reproduced in
any form without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in the
course of implementing the standard, of necessary details, such as symbols and sizes, type or grade
designations. Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director ( Publications ), BIS.
Indian Standards are reviewed periodically and revised, when necessary and amendments, lf any, are
issued from time to time. Users of Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in possession of
the latest amendments or edition. Comments on this Indian Standard may be sent to BIS giving the
Doc:No. TDC3 (2481)

Headquarters :
Manak Bhavan. 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110002


NEW DELHI 110002 { 331 13 75
Eastern : l/14 C. I. T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Maniktola
CA.LCUTTA 700054 36 24 99
Northern : SC0 445-446, Sector 35-C. CHANDIGARH 160036 2 1843
i 3 1641
Southern : C. 1. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600113 41 24 42
41 25 19
1 41 29 16
BOMBAY 400093 6 32 92 95
GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR. PATNA.
TRIVANDRUM.
Printed at Printwoll Printers, Delhi, India

IS 9685:2002
W’1’dkTmi’m
?w-l-R- i-vl-@r*r?P@R-mlR
(m77 pftm)
Indian Standard
TEXTILES — SAND BAGS — SPECIFICATION
(First Revision)
ICS 55.080; 59.080.40
0 BIS 2002

NEW DELHI 110002

FOREWORD
This Indian Standard (First Revision) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized
by the Jute and Jute Products Sectional Committee had been approved by the Textile Division Council.
This standard first published in 1981 has been revised to align with the latest specifications lND/TC/
2060( e) ’Specification for sand bags, unproofed’ and lND/TC/2059(h) ‘Specification for sand bags,
cuprammonium – Proofed’, issued by the Ministry of Defence, Government of India. However, instead of
cuprammonium proofing as given in Defence specification, rot proofing has been specified by copper naphthenate
process which is normally followed in the industry.
The composition of the Committee responsible for formulation of this standard is given in Annex A.
IS 2:1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values (revise@)’. The number of significant places retained in
---
.
—
IS 9685:2002
Indian Standard
TEXTILES
H — SAND BAGS — SPECIFICATION
(First Revision )
1 SCOPE and a knot applied over the point of attachment to

prevent detachment. The knot applied over the point
of attachment to prevent detachment. The two free
other requirements of sand bags used as temporary
ends of the tying cord shall be knotted to prevent
barricades after filling with sand.
unraveling.
2 REFERENCES
4.3 Seam
The following Indian Standards contain provisions
The sides of the bags shall be sewn with overhead or
herakles stitches on selvedge through two layers of
provision of this standard. At the time of publication,
sacking as specified in 5.1.4 of IS 9113. The number
the editions indicated were valid. All standards are
of stitches per 10 cm shall be 12 + 1.
subject to revision and parties to agreements based on
this standard are encouraged to investigate the 4.4 The finished bag shall have either a hem or
possibility of applying the most recent editions of the selvedge at the mouth. For hemming the provisions
standards indicated below: of 5.1.3 of IS 9113 shall apply.
IS No. Title 4.5 Joined Bag

2818 Indian hessian : Part 2 305 and
(Part 2): 1971 229 g/m2 at 16 percent contract Provisions ofIS9113 shall apply.
regain (@st revision)
2873:1991 Textiles — Packaging of jute
products in bales — Specification The bags shall be generally free from weaving and
(second revision) sewing defects such as missing picks, holes, cuts, tears,
5476:1986 Glossary of terms relating to jute floats, crushed selvedges, spots, stains, gap stitches,
(jirst revision) loose ends and frayed ends which affect the
9112:1984 Country jute twine (second revision) performance of the bag.
9113:1993 Textiles — Jute sacking — General
requirements (@t revision) 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
11662:1986 Specification for preservative 5.1 The bags shall conform to the requirements
treatments of textiles specified in Table 1.
3 TERMINOLOGY
5.2 Rot-Proofing
in [S 5476 shall apply. If required by the buyer, the sand bags shall be rot-
proofed by copper naphthenate process as per 4.2 of
4 MANUFACTURE IS 11662.
4.1 Sacking 5.3 The bales containing the bags shall conform to
the requirements specified in Table 2.
The bags shall be made from one continuous piece of
229 g/m2 hessian conforming to IS 2818 (Part 2). Each 5.4 The contract moisture regain shall be 16 percent.
piece may be folded widthwise or lengthwise, but the
6 PACKING
bag length shall be in the direction of warp.
The bags shall be packed in bales as prescribed in
4.2 The bag shall have a vent of 8 + 1 cm at the mouth
IS 2873 or as specified in the agreement between the
along the side seam. The ends of the machine sewing
buyer and seller.
shall be cross-stitched by hand to prevent any extension
of vent. A tying cord, 60 + 1 cm long, preferably 7 MARKING
con fomling to variety No. 2ofIS9112 shall be secured
from its middle to the bag immediately below the vent 7.1 The bales shall be marked as prescribed in IS 2873.
1
-
IS 9685:2002
Additional markings shall be made as stipulated by details of conditions under which the licence for the
the buyer or required by the regulation or law in force. use of Standard Mark maybe granted to manufacturers
or producers may be obtained from the Bureau of
7.2 BIS Certification Marking Indian Standards. .
The bales may also be marked with the Standard Mark.

7.2.1 The use of the Standard Mark is governed by CONFORMITY
the provisions o~Bureau ofIndian Standards Act, 1986
The sampling procedure and criteria for conformity
and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The
as specified in IS 9113 shall be followed.

(Clause 5.1)
SI Characteristic Requirement Tolerance Method of Test, Ref to
No. Cl No. of IS 9113
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

i) Dimensions, cm ( see Note):
a) Outside length 84 +3
8.3.2
b) Outside width 36 } -o
ii) Corrected mass per bag, g:
a) Unproofed 160 +1 O percent
8.5.2
b) Proofed 180 } -5
iii) Average breaking load of seam [ ravened strip method, 8.7
[5 cm x 20 cm] A4irr,N ( kgf):
W arpway 215 (22)
Weftway 215 (22)
NOTE --- The buyer and the seller may agree to the dimensions other than those specified above. The tolerance of ~j cm shall apply on the
dlmcnsions, The mass of such bag maybe calculated by the method given in 5.3 of IS 9113. However a tolerance of+ 10 percent on the bag
mass shall be permissible

(Clause 5,3)
SI Characteristic Requirement Method of Test,
No. Ref to Cl No. of 1S 9113
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Total number of bags per bale ( see Note) 250 8.9
ii) Number of joined bags per bundle of 25 bags 1 do
iii) Corrected net mass ofa bale Not less than the 8.1
contract mass
iv) Moisture regain, percent, Max 17 8.2
v) Oil content on dry deoiled material basis, percent, A4ax 3.0 8.8
NOTE – The number of bags per bale shall be 250 or as specified in an agreement between the buyer and tbe seller.
2
IS 9685:2002
ANNEX A
(Foreword)
Organisation Representative(s)
Office of the Jute Commissioner, Kolkata SHRIS. MAIUMDAR (Chairman)
Directorate General of Supplies& Disposals SHRJA. K. SEHGAL
(Quality Assurance Wing), New Delhi SHru M. M. DuaEy (Afterrrafe)
Eskaps ( India ) Pvt Ltd, Kolkata SHRJSEKHARGUHA
SHRIARABINDA KAit (Mfernate)
Export Inspection Council of India, New Delhi SHRJK. J. SRIVASTAVA
SHRJK. P. RAHA(Ahernate)
Food Corporation of India, New Delhi SHRIS. B. SAROYA
SHRIC. SHWANNA (Alternate)
Indian Jute Industries’ Research Association, Kolkata DR K. JAYACHANDRAN
DR D. SUR(Alternate)
Indian lute Mills Association, Kolkata CHARMAN
SHRIH. N. GHOSH(Ahernafe 1)
SHRJV. K. SHARMA(Alternate 11)
SHRJARJJ]TMITRA(Alternate III)
Institute of Jute Technology, Kolkata DR PRABIRRAY
SHRIS. K. SET-T(Afferna/e)
Jute Manufacturers Development Council, Kolkata SHRJD. K. SARXAR
National Institute of Research on Jute & Allied Fibres (NIRJAFT), DMECTOR
Kolkata National Jute Manufacturers Corporation Ltd, Kolkata SHRtA. GHOSH
SHRJK. K. BOSE(Alternate)
The Fertilizer Association of India, New Delhi DR S. K. SAXENA
BIS Directorate General SHRIM. S. VERMA,Director & Head (TXD)
[Representing Director General (Er-ojlcio)]
Member-Secretaty
SHRIM. S. VERMA
Director and Head ( Textiles)
----
3
BIS is a statutory institution established under the Bureau of Zndian Standards Act, 1986 to promote
Copyright
This Indian Standard has been developed from Doc : No. TX 03 (0465).
Headquarters :
Telephones :3230131,3233375,323 9402 (Common to all offices)
Central : Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg 3237617

NEW DELHJ 110002 { 3233841
Eastern : .1/14 C.I.T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Kankurgachi 13378499,3378561
KOLKATA 700054 [337 8626,3379120
Northern : SCO 335-336, Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH 160022 603843

{ 602025
Southern : C.1.T. Campus, IV Cross Road, CHENNAI 600113 2541216,2541442
{ 2542519,2541315
Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East) ~83292 95,8327858
MUMBAi 400093 ~8327891,8327892
Branches : AHMEDABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE.

FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR.
LUCKNOW. NAGPUR. NALAGARH. PATNA. PUNE. RAJKOT. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed at Prabhat Offset Press, New Delhi-2

IS : 11193- 1984
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
JUTE CANVAS POSTAL BAGS
SHRI S. P. MALLIK Jute Commissioner, Calcutta
Members
AGRICULTURAL COM~~I~SIONER Ministry of Agriculture
SHRI U. S. BAID Pesticides Association of India, New Delhi
SH~I S. CHATTERJEE ( Alternate )
SHRI A. T. BASAIt Inspection Wing, Directorate General of Supplies
& Disposals, New Delhi
SHRI S. K. BWATTACHARYA Jute Corporation of India Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI A. N. SANYAL ( Alternate )
CHAIRMAN Indian Jute Mills Association, Calcutta
SHXI G. M. BHANDARI ( Alternate I )
SHRI S. N. MUNDRA ( Alternate II )
SHRI K. K. CHATTERJEE National Jute Manufactures Corporation Ltd,
Calcutta
SHI<I UJ,JAL SINGH DUI)IIO!:IA Calcutta Baled Jute Association, Calcutta
SHltI D . K . DUY.T Office of the Jute Commissioner, Calcutta
SHRI S. N. Grios~r Jute Technological Research Laboratories
( ICAR ), Calcutta
SHRI N. K. SIL ( Alternate )

SHICI SEKHAR GuHua Eskaps ( India ) Private Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI KAJAI, SBN ( Alternate )
SHHI D. GUPTA Jute Manufactures Development Council,
Calcutta
SHRI G. SIVAR.\;MAN ( Alternate )
SHRI P. J. JANUS Cement Manufacturers’ Association, Bombay
SHRI A. C. MATHUH Ministry of Defence ( R & D )
SHRI M. L. PAL ( Alternate )
SHRI C. K. MEHR~T~A Export Inspection Council of India, Calcutta
SRRI G. MITI~A ( Alternate )
SHHI S. N. MUNDIEA Calcutta Jute Fabrics Shippers Association,
Calcutta
SHRI L. SWAMINATHAN ( Alternate )
SWRI S. PATANKAR Rashtriya Chemicals & Fertilizers Ltd, Bombay
@ CoPyright 1985
publisher shall be deemed to be an infringement of copvright under the said Act. I
IS : 11193- 1984

Members Refiresentirzg
DR S. R. RaNc3_mAv~~~~ Indian Jute Industries’ Research Association,
Calcutta
DR U. MERH~PADHYAY ( Allernate)
SRRI AMWAVA SANYAL Indian Institute of Packaging, Bombay
SHM T. K. ROY CHOWDHURY New Central Jute Mills Co Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI J. N. SARID Food Corporation of India, New Delhi
SHRI JA~BIR SIN~H ( Alternate )
DR R. K. SARKAR Ministry of Defence ( DGI )
SHKI S. P. CRAKRABORTY ( Alternate )
SHRI G. K. SOHBTI Fertilizer Association of India, New Delhi
SHRI R. I. MIDHA, Director General, IS1 ( Ex-oficio Member )
( Director ( Tex )
Secretary
SHRI D. R. K~HLI
Senior Deputy Director ( Tex ), ISI
2
IS : 1119.3 - 1984
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
JUTE CANVAS POSTAL BAGS
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institu-
tion on 15 December 1984, after the draft finalized by the Jute and Jute
Products Sectional Committee had been approved by the Textile Division
Counci 1.
0.2 While preparing this standard, assistance has been derived from Spe-
cification No. G/TexlJ-22 H Revised 1977 Specification for Jute Canvas
Mail Bags (Proofed and Unproofed), formulated by the Directorate Gene-
ral of Supplies & Disposals (DGS&D).
standard is complied with, the final value, observed or calculated, express-
ing the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS : 2-
1960*. The number of significant places retained in the rounded off value
should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
14 SCOPE
1.1 This standard prescribes the constructional details and other require-
ments of four sizes ofjute canvas postal bags, proofed and unproofed.
2. MANUFACTURE
2.1 Fabric - The bags shall be made out of jute canvas, proofed or un-
proofed, conforming to IS : 10036 (Part 2)-19827.
~2.1.1 Cotton Sewing Thread - Cotton sewing thread used for stitching
shall be 27 x 9 tex and shall conform to the variety No. 35 of IS : 1720-
1978$. Alternatively, flax threads of 165 x 3 tex having a minimum
breaking load of 8 kgf when tested as per IS : 1670-197C$ shall be used.
*Rules for rounding off numerical values ( rev&d ).

tspecification for jute canvas: Part 2 Fine 660 g/m!&
fspecification for cotton sewing threads ( second reuision ).
@Jethod for determination .of breaking load. elongation at break and tenacity of *
yarns ( first revision ).
3
IS :11193 - 1984
2.1.2 Rim Cord - Jute cord of about 22 mm circumference made of 4

strands, each strand of minimium 2 ply, should be used for the rim cord.
2.1.3 Iron Loo@ - Iron loops of 3.7 f 0.1 mm dia galvanized iron wire
shall be used. The details ofthe dimensions and the make up shall be as
shown in Fig. 1. The ends of the iron loops shall be butt jointed and
welded. Lap joints with minimum overlapping of 15 mm and welded at
both the cut edges soldered on the entire overlapped portion may also be
used. For lap-jointed iron loops, the cut edges shall be properly finished to
avoid cutting actions.
2.1.4 Tabsfor Fixing Iron Loops - The tabs shall be made from jute
canvas proofed/unproofed fabric as has been used for the fabrication of the
bags. The tabs shall be made of two folds of canvas length with a turn-in
of 15 mm at both sides and having a finished width of 35 mm. The posi-
tion and the finished length of the tabs at each side of the bags shall be as
shown in Fig. 1 and shall be 90 mm, Min.
2.1.5 Whig Cord -- Whip cord of 5 ply cotton twine I 000 x 5 d tex
conforming to variety No. 26 of IS : 1720-1978* shall be used.
2.2 Construction
2.2.1 Shape and Construction - The shape and construction of the bags
shall be as shown in Fig. 1.
2.2.2 Bags of size No. 1 and 2 shall be made of three pieces of canvas,
two for the sides and the other one for the bottom. The bottom piece shall
be of square or rectangular shape. The perimeter of the base of bags of
both the sizes shall bc 172 cm, Min. In both the sizes, the length of the
bags ‘B’ ( that is, the height ), shall be in the warp direction of the fabric.
2.2.3 Bags of sizes No. 3 and 4 shall also be made of two pieces of can-
vas, one for the sides and the other for the bottom, which shall be of square
shape. The perimeter of the base of the fabric of both the sizes shall be 142
cm, Min. In both the sizes, the length of the bags, that is, the height ‘B’
of the bag may be in warp or weft direction of the fabric.
2.2.4 Fixing of Bottom Piece - The bottom piece for all the sizes of bags
shall be joined with the sides and the inside of the bags to prevent fraying.
The two pieces shall be jointed with two rows of stitches. The first row of
stitches shall not be visible from outside the bags after joining. The second
row of the stitches shall be put at a distance of not less than 25 mm away
from the first row of stitches, over a turn of 13 mm, Min of the side pieces.
The bottom piece shall remain up to the edge of the turn-in so that the
second row of stitches falls over 4 layers of canvas, for example, two lay-
ers of bottom piece, one layer of side piece and the turn-in of the side
piece. All the four corners of the bottom piece shall be stitched in continua-
tion of the second row of stitches as shown in Fig. 1.
*Specification for cotton sewing threads ( second revision ).
4
GI WIRE LOOP
BOI IOM
SECTION Y Y
BfG WlrH THREE
PIECES
ALTERNATE C,
WlRE LOOP
SECTION 4 A
SrlrCHlNG A 2o
DETAILAT SEAY
WITH 0
‘3-
SEAM'- RAWE-E TURNED ua
.*
All dimensions in millimetres. =:
FIG. 1 JUTE CANVAS MAIL BAG G
w
1s t 11193 - 1984
2.23 Fixing of Rim Cord - The jute rim cord as specified in 2.1.2 is to
be fixed inside the top hemming. It shall be in one length only. The rim
cord shall be neatly tied with an overlap of 50 mm of the two ends and
whipped properly with cord as specified in 2.1.5 before being placed inside
the rim. Alternatively, the ends may be whipped and then stitched with
the body of the bag with minimum three rows of stitches.
2.2.6 Fixing of Iron Loops - Four iron loops according to 2.1.3 shall be
fixed with tabs. The ends of the tab shall be turned-in to a depth of
13 mm, Min and sewn with the sides with the position of the loops oppo-
site to each other as shown in Fig. 1.
2.2.7 Seam - The sides of the postal bags shall be machine stitched
with an overlapping of 25 mm, Min and with two rows of stitches, appro-
ximately 20 mm apart. In case of any raw edge, the same shall be turned to
a depth of 13 mm, Min and then stitched with an overlapping of 25 mm,
Min. The stitches should be of uniform tension throughout with all the
loose ends securely fastened. The number of stitches per dm shall be not
less than 24.
2.2.8 Hemming - The top of the bags shall be hemmed to a depth
of 25 mm, Min with a turning on the outside of the bag and the raw
edge, if any, are to be initially turned into a depth of 13 mm, Min.
The stitches shall not be less than 3 mm away from the edge of the
turning.
2.2.9 Siitches other than Seam - The stitching shall be done by machine.
The stitches should be of uniform tension throughout with all the loose
ends securely fastened. The number of stitches per dm shall be not
less than 24.
3. REQUIREMENTS
3.1 The bags shall conform to the manufacturing particulars given in 2.
3.2 The dimensions and tolerances of the bags shall be as given in
Table 1.
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES OF POSTAL BAGS
( Clauses 2.2.2, 2.2.3, 3.2 and Fig. 1 )
SIZE HEIQHT ‘B’ BASE
No. -- _-_--h----_-~
Min Length ‘C’ Width ‘C’
mm mm mm
(1) (2) (3) (4)
1 1 220 430 or 430
385 480
2 1 070 430 or 430
385 480
3 810 355 355
4 710 355 355
Tolerance f10mm f 10mm
6
IS : 11193 - 1984
3.3 The bags should be free irorn sewing and other fabrication defects.
4. MARKING
4.1 The marking on the bags shall be as required by the buyer and it
shall be done neatly by using indelible ink on both the sides of the bags.
4.2 Each bag shall also be marked on the inner side using indelible
ink with the manufacturer’s name or trade-mark together with the year
of manufacture.
4.2.1 Each bag may also be marked with the IS1 Certification Mark.
NOTE - The use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of
the Indian Standards Institution ( Certification Marks ) Act and the Rules and
Regulations made thereunder. The IS1 Mark on products covered by an Indian
quality control which is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by the
producer. ISI marked products arealso continuously checked by ISI for conformity
to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions, under which a licence
for the use of the IS1 Certification Mark may be granted to manufacturers or
processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.
5. PACKING
5.1 The bags shall be packed as agreed to between the buyer and the
seller.
6. SAMPLING
6.1 The ~quantity of postal bags of same designation delivered to a buyer
against a despatch note shall constitute a lot.
6.2 The conformity of the lot shall be determined on the basis of the
tests carried out on the samples selected from it.
6.3 Unless otherwise agreed to between the buyer and the seller, the
number of bags to be selected from a lot shall be according to co1 1 and 2
of Table 2.
TABLE 2 SAMPLE SIZE AND PERMISSIBLE NUMBER OF
NON-CONFORMING BAGS
LOT SIZE SAMPLE SIZE PERMISSIBLE No. or
NON-CONFORMINU B~oa
(1) (2) (3)
up to 100 13 1
101,’ 158 20 2
151,, 300 32 3
301 ,, 500 50 5
501 ,, 1 000 80 7
1 001 ,, 3 000 125 10
3 001 and above 200 14
7
fSr11193 -1984
6.4 The number of bags selected according to 6.3 shall be examined for all
the manufacturing details as per 2 and also the requirements as given
under 3.
6.5 Criteria for Conformity- The lot shall be declared as conforming

to the requirements of the specification if the following condition is
satisfied:
The number of bags found not in conformity with the require-

ments for anyone or more of the characteristics mentioned in
6.4 is less than or equal to the corresponding number given in
co1 3 of Table 2.
s
IS : 12174 - 1987
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
JUTE SYNTHETIC UNION BAGS
FOR PACKING CEMENT
( First Reprint OCTOBER 1991 )
UDC 621.798.15l [677-13'494.742.2.064-489] : 666.94
© Copyright 1987

NEW DELHI 110002
Gr 3
December 1987
TO
IS 12174 : 1987 SPECIFICATION FOR JUTE SYNTHETIC
UNION BAGS FOR PACKING CEMENT
( Page 4, clause 3.3 ) — Insert the following note at the end of clause:
'NOTE — The count of twine is given for guidance only.'
( Page 4, clause 3.3.1, Note ) — Add the following in the given note:
'The count of twine is given for guidance only.'
[ Page 8, Table 2, Sl No. (v), Under 'Requirement' ] — Substitute '3' for

'8'.
( TX 03 )

IS : 12174 - 1987
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
FOR PACKING CEMENT
SHRI B. R. BASU Jute Commissioner, Calcutta
Members
SHRI U. S. BAID Pesticides Association of India, New Delhi
SHRI S. CHATTERJEE ( Alternate )
SHRI J. D. BAPAT National Council for Cement and Building Mate-
rials, Ballabhgarh
SHRI A. T. BASAK Directorate General of Supplies & Disposals
( Inspection Wing ), New Delhi
SHRI S. K. BHATTACHARYA Jute Corporation of India Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI A. N. SANYAL ( Alternate )
SHRI A. C. BISWAS National Jute Manufacturers Corporation Ltd,
Calcutta
SHRI RATICHAND BOTHRA Calcutta Baled Jute Association, Calcutta
CHAIRMAN Indian Jute Mills Association, Calcutta
SHRI G. M. BHANDARI ( Alternate I )
SHRI S. N. MUNDRA ( Alternate II )
DR C. R. DEBNATH Jute Technological Research Laboratories (ICAk),
Calcutta
SHRI O. P. DHAMIJA Export Inspection Council of India, New Delhi
SHRI G. MITRA ( Alternate )
SHRI D. K. DUTTA Office of the Jute Commissioner, Calcutta
SHRI SEKHAR GUHA Eskaps ( India ) Pvt Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI KAJAL SEN ( Alternate )
SHRI D. GUPTA Jute Manufacturers Development Council,
Calcutta
SHRI G. SIVARAMAN ( Alternate )
SHRI D. GUPTA New Central Jute Mills Co Ltd, Calcutta
SHRI P. K. MUKHERJEE ( Alternate )
SHRI JASBIR SINGH Food Corporation of India, New Delhi
SHRI S. R. RAMNANEY ( Alternate )
LT-COL P. N. MALHOTRA Ministry of Defence ( DGI )
SHRI A. N. MUSHRAN ( Alternate )
© Copyright 1987
IS : 12174 - 1987
SHRI A. C. MATHUR Ministry of Defence (R&D)
SHRI M. L. PAL ( Alternate )
SHRI S. N. MUNDRA Calcutta Jute Fabrics Shippers Association,
Calcutta
SHRI L. SWAMINATHAN ( Alternate )
DR V. PACHAIYAPAN Fertilizer Association of India, New Delhi
SHRI S. K. PATANKAR Rashtriya Chemicals & Fertilizers Ltd, Bombay
DR S. R. RANGANATHAN Indian Jute Industries' Research Association,
Calcutta
DR U. MUKHOPADAHAY ( Alternate )
SHRI AMITAVA SANYAL Indian Institute of Packaging, Bombay
SHRI A. A. JOSHI ( Alternate )
SHRI A. R. SHENOY Cement Manufacturers' Association, New Delhi
SHRI A. N. SINGH Ministry of Agriculture
SHRI R. I. MIDHA, Director General, BIS ( Ex-officio Member )
Director ( Tex )
Secretary
SHRI A. R. BANERJEE
Joint Director ( Tex ), BIS
2
IS : 12174 - 1987
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
FOR PACKING CEMENT
0. FOREWORD
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards
on 29 September 1987, after the draft finalized by the Jute and Jute
Products Sectional Committee had been approved by the Textile Division
Council.
0.2 The work for development of alternative tags in place of conventional
jute bags for packing cement with a view to reducing the wastage of
cement as well as cost of packing was taken up by the National Council
for Cement and Building Materials ( NCB ), New Delhi, at the instance of
Ministry of Industrial Development, Government of India. NCB with the
help of Indian Jute Mills Association and cement industry evaluated a
number of bags, made out of different fabric constructions, in their labora-
tory and in actual field trials for performance. The Sectional Committee,
acknowledging the work done by NCB in the development of these bags,
decided to cover the requirements based on their work in this standard.
The performance of these bags is comparable to the traditional jute bags
for packing cement ( see IS : 2580-1982* ).
standard is complied with, the final value, observed or calculated,
expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accor-
dance with IS : 2-1960†. The number of significant places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this
standard.
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard prescribes the constructional details and other particu-
lars of jute synthetic union bags of dimensions 71 × 48 cm for packing
50 kg of cement.
*Jute sacking bags for packing cement ( second revision ).
†Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised ).
3
IS : 12174 - 1987
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this standard, the definitions given in IS : 5476-
1966* shall apply.
3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Fabric — The fabric used in the manufacture of bags shall be woven
in plain weave with jute double warp ends and HDPE tapes in the ratio
of 1 : 1 and jute yarn in the weft. The count of jute warp yarn should be
380 tex ( 11 grist ) end weft yarn 895 tex ( 26 grist ). The HDPE tape for
warp yarn should have 3 mm width and 90 tex ( 800 denier ) fineness.
The mass per square metre of the fabric shall be 535 g percent.
3.2 Bags — The bags shall be made from single pieces of fabric, uniform
in construction and 71 cm width, with the weft running along the length
of bags. The valve of the bag shall be made from same fabric as used in
the bags.
3.3 Seam — The bottom of the bag shall be left open or stitched as
agreed to between the buyer and the seller. The stitching of the top and
bottom of the bag shall be on selvedge with overhead or herakle stitches
through two layers of fabric using 2 strands of 3 ply jute twine of 380 tex
× 3 for overhead stitching and 300 tex × 3 for herakle stitching. The
stitching shall be of even tension throughout with all the loose ends
securely fastened. The number of stitches per decimetre shall be between
9 to 11.
3.3.1 At the side of the bag the raw edges shall be turned to a depth of
38 mm and sewn with either overhead or herakle stitches through four
layers of fabric ( see Fig. 1 ) using 2 strands of 3 ply jute twine of
380 tex × 3 for overhead stitching and 300 tex × 3 for herakle stitching.
The stitching shall be of even tension throughout with all the loose ends
securely fastened. The number of stitches per decimetre at the sides shall
be 9 to 11.
NOTE — It is recommended that the depth of stitching from the edge of the bag
should be minimum 10 mm.
4. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
4.1 The fabric and the bags made out of it shall conform to the require-
ments laid down in Table 1.
4.2 The bales containing the bags shall conform to the requirements laid
down in Table 2.
4.3 Contract Regain — The contract moisture regain shall be 20 percent.
*Glossary of terms relating to jute ( first revision ).
4
IS : 12174 - 1987
The valve opening shall be at side corner or at top corner as agreed to between
the buyer and the seller.
FIG. 1 JUTE SYNTHETIC UNION BAG FOR PACKING CEMENT
( WITH VALUE OPENING AT SIDE CORNER )
5
IS : 12174 - 1987
TABLE 1 PARTICULARS OF JUTE SYNTHETIC UNION BAGS FOR

PACKING CEMENT
( Clause 4.1 and 7.1 )
SL CHARACTERSTIC REQUIRE- TOLERANCE METHOD OF TEST,

No. MENT REF TO
Indi- Ave-
vidual rage Clause Appen-
No. of dix of
IS : 9113- this stan-
dard
1979‡
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
i) Jute-synthetic union fabric
a) Ends/dm* 52 ±4 — 14.4 —
b) Picks/dm† 39 ±2 +2 14.4 —
—1
ii) Dimensions ( see Note 1 ):
a) Outside length of bag, cm 71.0 +4 — 14.3.2
–0 —
b) Outside width of bag, cm 48.0 +4 — 14.3.2 —
–0
c) Valve ( see Note 2 ):
( see Fig. 2 )
1) Effective size, cm +3 — — A-l
10×9.5
–1
2) Size of valve flap, cm 16.5×12 +3 — — A-1
–1
iii) Mass per bag, g ( see Note 3 ) +40 — 14.5.2 —
420
–20
iv) Breaking strength of sacking
( ravelled strip method
10 × 20 cm ), N(kgf)§,
Average
a) Warpway 1 175(120) — — 14.6.2 —
b) Weftway 1 615(165) — — 14.6.2 —
v) Breaking strength of team
( strip size : 5 × 20 cm ),
N(kgf)‡, Min
a)Side 440(45) – — – A-2
b) Top (or top and bottom) 610(62) – — — A-2
*Jute yarn and HDPE tape as warp shall be in the ratio 2 : 1.
†Only jute yarn shall be as weft.
‡Specification for jute sacking : General requirements.
§ 1 kgf = 9.8 N approx.
( Continued )
6
IS : 12174 - 1987
TABLE 1 PARTICULARS OF JUTE SYNTHETIC UNION BAGS FOR

PACKING CEMENT — Contd
NOTE 1 — The length and width of bags may be at agreed to between the buyer
and the teller, subject to a tolerance of :m.
NOTE 2 — The position of valve opening shall be at the side corner or top corner
as agreed to between the buyer and the seller.
NOTE 3 — Mass of bags of other dimensions shall be proportional to the
standard bag 420 g, 71 × 48 cm and calculated on the basis of the area of the fabric
including the seam, valve and flap with a tolerance of percent of bag mass.
NOTE:
a) The size and shape of the flap before folding and stitching is shown by
ABCDE.
b) The size and shape of the valve as in the bag is shown by XYZE.
c) A' B' shows the side AB of the flap after folding.
d) C' D' shows the side CD of the flap after folding.
FIG. 2 METHOD OF MAKING THE VALVE
7
IS : 12174 : 1987
TABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS OF PACKED BALES

SL CHARACTERISTICS REQUIREMENT METHOD OF TEST

( REF TO CLAUSE NO.
No. OF IS : 9113 - 1979* )
i) Total number of bags per bale 800 14.8
ii) Contract mass of a bale, kg ( see 336 —
Note 2 )
iii) Corrected net mass of a bale Not less than 14.1
contract mass
iv) Moisture regain, Max 22 percent 14.2
v) Oil content on dry deoiled mate- 8 percent 14.7
rial basis, Max ( see Note 3 )
*Specification for jute tacking : General requirements.
NOTE 1 — The number of bags per bale shall be 800 or as specified in an agree-
ment between the buyer and the seller. The number of bags per bundle shall be
25 or 50 as agreed to between the buyer and the seller. There shall be no joint bag
in any bale.
NOTE 2 — Contract mass of a bale is calculated as follows:
Contract mass of a bale = nominal mass of a bag × specified number
of bags per bale
( Contracted mass of a bale specified in the table is on the basis of
420 g per bag and 800 bags per bale )
NOTE 3 — The specified oil content value of 8 percent corresponds to about
7 percent when determined on dry deoiled material plus 20 percent regain basis.

5.1 Packing — The bags shall be packed in bales as laid down in
IS : 2873-1979* or as specified in an agreement between the buyer and
the seller.
5.2 Marking — The bales shall be marked as laid down in IS : 2873-
1969*. Additional markings shall be made as stipulated by the buyer or
as required by the regulations law in force.
5.2.1 The bales may also be marked with the Standard Mark.
NOTE — The use of the Standard Mark is governed by the provisions of the
Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1986 and the Rules and Regulations made there-
under. The Standard Mark on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys
the assurance that they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that
standard under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and quality control which
is devised and supervised by BIS and operated by the producer. Standard marked
products are also continuously checked by BIS for conformity to that standard as a
further safeguard. Details of conditions, under which a licence for the use of the
Standard Mark may be granted to manufacturers or producers, may be obtained
*Specification for packaging of jute products in bales ( first revision ).
8
IS : 12174 : 1987
6. SAMPLING AND INSPECTION

6.1 Unless otherwise agreed to between the buyer and the seller, the
procedure for sampling shall be as given in Appendix B of IS : 9113-1979*
and the procedure for measurement of valve as given in Appendix A.
7. CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY
7.1 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of the
standard, if the following conditions are satisfied:
a) The total of the corrected net mass of the bales under test is not
less than the total contract mass of the bales ( see Table 2 ).
b) The number of bags in each bale under test is not less than the
specified number ( see Table 2 ).
c) The average moisture regain percent of the bags under test is not
more than the specified percentage ( see Table 2 ).
d) The average oil content of the bags under test is not more than
the specified percentage ( see Table 2 ).
e) The dimensions of at least 90 percent of the bags under test are
in accordance with the requirements specified ( see Table 1 ). In
the remaining bags, no bag shall have dimensions less than 1.5
cm below the specified values.
f) All the values of length and width of valve and flap are in accor-
dance with the specified requirements ( see Table 1 ).
g) The mass of at least 90 percent of the bags under test is in accor-
dance with the requirements specified (see Table 1 ). In the
remaining bags, no bag shall have mass less than 7.5 percent
below the specified value.
h) The individual ends per decimetre of the bags under test and the
ratio of jute yarn and HDPE tape are in accordance with the
requirement specified ( see Table 1 ).
j) The average and individual picks per decimetre of the bags
under test are in accordance with the requirement specified ( see
Table 1 ).
k) The average breaking strength values of the bags under test for
both warp and weft directions are not less than the requirements
specified ( see Table 1 ).
m) The average breaking strength values of seam for side and top
( or top and bottom ) of the bags under test are not less than the
requirements specified ( see Table 1 ).
*Specification for jute saking: General requirements.
IS : 12174 : 1987
APPENDIX A
( Table 1 and Clause 6.1 )
A-0. ATMOSPHERIC CONDITION OF TESTING
A-0.1 All tests may be carried out in the prevailing atmospheric conditions
with relative humidity between 40 and 90 percent.
A-1. SIZE OF VALVE AND FLAP
A-1.1 From each sample bag, remove the stitches at the top of the bag
near the valve. Lay the bag flat on the table, turn the upper layer of the
bag, render the bag free from creases and wrinkles and measure the size
of the valve to the nearest 0.2 cm.
A-1.2 Remove the stitches and separate from each bag the flap used for
manufacturing the valve. Measure the size of the flap to the nearest
0.2 cm.
A-2. BREAKING STRENGTH OF SEAM
A-2.1 Test two specimens each from the side and top (or top and bottom)
of each of the sample bags taking 200 mm between grips with the seam
near about the centre, using a constant rate-of-traverse machine operating
at 460 mm per minute in accordance with IS : 9030-1979*. Prepare the
test specimens in the form of a double 'T' with 100 mm of seam and 50
mm width of fabric as shown in Fig. 3.
*Method 'for determination of seam strength of jute fabrics including their

laminates.
10
IS : 12174 : 1987
All dimensions in millimetres.

FIG. 3 SIZE AND SHAPE OF TEST SPECIMEN FOR SEAM STRENGTH
11
B U R E A U O F I N D I A N S T A N D A R D S
Headquarters:
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, NEW DELHI 1 1 0 0 0 2
Telephones: 331 01 31, 331 13 75 Telegrams : Manaksanstha
Central Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, 331 01 31
NEW DELHI 110002 331 13 7 5
*Eastern : 1/14 C. I. T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, 36 24 99
Maniktola, CALCUTTA 7 0 0 0 5 4
Northern : SCO 445-446, Sector 35-C, 2 18 4 3
CHANDIGARH 160036 3 16 41
41 2 4 42
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, MADRAS 6 0 0 1 1 3 41 2 5 19
41 2 9 16
†Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri ( East ), 6 3 2 92 9 5
BOMBAY 4 0 0 0 9 3
Branch Offices:
Pushpak', Nurmohamed Shaikh Marg, Khanpur, 2 63 48
AHMADABAD 380001 2 63 49
‡Peenya Industrial Area 1st Stage, Bangalore Tumkur Road 3 8 4 9 55
BANGALORE 5 6 0 0 5 8 38 49 56
Gangotri Complex, 5th Floor, Bhadbhada Road, T. T. Nagar, 6 67 16
BHOPAL 4 6 2 0 0 3
Plot No. 8 2 / 8 3 , Lewis Road, BHUBANESHWAR 7 6 1 0 0 2 5 36 27
53/5, Ward No. 29, R.G. Barua Road, 5th Byelane, 3 31 77
GUWAHATI 7 8 1 0 0 3
5-8-66C L. N. Gupta Marg ( Nampally Station Road ), 23 10 83
HYDERABAD 500001 6 3 4 71
R14 Yudhister Marg, C Scheme, JAIPUR 3 0 2 0 0 5 6 9 8 32
117/418 B Sarvodaya Nagar, KANPUR 2 0 8 0 0 5 21 68 76
21 8 2 92
Patliputra Industrial Estate, PATNA 8 0 0 0 1 3 6 2 3 05
T.C. No. 14/1421, University P.O., Palayam 6 21 04
TRIVANDRUM 695035 6 21 17
Inspection Offices ( With Sale Point ):
Pushpanjali, First Floor, 205-A West High Court Road,
Shankar Nagar Square, NAGPUR 4 4 0 0 1 0 2 51 71
Institution of Engineers (India ) Building, 1 3 3 2 Shivaji Nagar,
PUNE 4 1 1 0 0 5 5 2 4 35
*Sales Office in Calcutta is at 5 Chowringhee Approch, P. O. Princep 27 68 00
Street, Calcutta 700072
†Sales Office in Bombay is at Novelty Chambers, Grant Road, 89 65 28
Bombay 400007
‡Sales Office in Bangalore is at Unity Building, Narasimharaja Square, 22 36 71
Bangalore 56002
Indian Standard
oL=kkfn — 50 fd xzk [kk|kUu iSd

djus osQ fy, iVlu osQ cksjs —
fof'kf"V
( rhljk iqujh{k.k )
Textiles — Jute Bags for Packing

50 kg Foodgrains — Specification
( Third Revision )
ICS 55.080, 59.080.30
© BIS 2018
Hkkjrh; ekud C;wjks

NEW DELHI-110002

FOREWORD
This Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards,after the draft finalized by the Jute and Jute
Products Sectional Committee has been approved by the Textile Division Council.
The types of bags specified in this standard have been developed after extensive trials keeping in view the guidelines
provided by the International Labour Organization (ILO) for not permitting manual carriage of weight exceeding
50 kg by the workers and consumers for their safety.
This standard was originally published in 1989 and subsequently revised in 1997 and 2003. The present revision
has been made in the light of experience gained since its last revision and to incorporate the following major
changes:
a) 30 kg woven bags have been excluded from the scope of standard.
b) Tolerances on ends/dm of Type A bags have been modified for improved structure and serviceability.
c) Sampling and criteria for conformity have been modified.
d) All the amendments issued have been incorporated.
A scheme for labelling environment friendly products known as ECO-Mark has been introduced at the instance
of the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MEF), Government of India. The ECO-Mark would be administered
by The Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) under the BIS Act, 2016. For a product to be eligible for ECO Marking,
it shall also carry the Standard Mark of BIS besides meeting the additional environment friendly requirements
as applicable. However, these requirements shall be optional and manufacturing units shall be free to opt for
Standard Mark alone also. The environment friendly requirements applicable to jute based products on Gazette
Notification No. 457 dated 21 February 1991 published in the Gazette of India have been retained in this revision.
There is no 1SO Standard on the subject. This standard has been formulated based on indigenous data/practices
prevalent in the field in India.
IS 12650 : 2018
Indian Standard
TEXTILES — JUTE BAGS FOR PACKING 50 KG
FOODGRAINS — SPECIFICATION
( Third Revision )
1 SCOPE 4.2 The sides of the bags shall be sewn with overhead
or herakle stitches on selvedge through two layers of
sacking as specified in IS 9113. The number of stitches
other requirements of jute bags for packing 50 kg
per decimeter shall be 10 ±1.
foodgrains.
4.3 Safety Stitch
2 REFERENCES
If agreed to between the buyer and the seller, a line of
The following standards contain provisions which,
safety union stitch shall be provided at the inner edges
through reference in this text, constitute provisions of
of the herakle stitches (see IS 9113). The number of
safety union stitches per decimetre shall be10 ± 1.
revision and parties to agreements based on this 4.4 Hemming at the Mouth
of applying the most recent editions of the standards Provisions of IS 9113 shall apply.
indicated below.
IS No. Title
The bags shall meet the requirement of freedom from
2873 : 1991 Textiles — Packaging of jute
major defects as given in Annex A.
products in bales — Specification
(second revision) 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
5476 : 1986 Glossary of term relating to jute
(first revision) 5.1 The bags shall conform to the requirements
9113 : 2012 Textiles — Jute sacking — specified in Table 1.
General requirements (second 5.2 The bales containing the bags shall also conform
revision) to the requirements specified in Table 2.
3 TERMINOLOGY 5.3 The contract moisture regain shall be 20 percent.
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions given 5.4 Additional Requirements for Labelling as
in IS 5476 shall apply. Environment Friendly Products
4 MANUFACTURE 5.4.1 General Requirement
4.1 The bags shall be made from single piece of twill 5.4.1.1 The bags shall conform to the requirements for
weave jute sacking of uniform construction having quality and performance prescribed under 5.1 to 5.3.
nominal mass of 579 g/m2 as given below with warp
running along the length of the bag: 5.4.1.2 The manufacturers shall produce to BIS,
a) Type A — Single warp, double weft woven on State Pollution Control Board as per the provisions of
modern shuttle less loom; and Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974
b) Type B — Double warp, single weft woven and Air (Preventions and Control of Pollution) Act,
on conventional shuttle loom. 1981 along with the authorization, if required under
the Environment (Products) Act, 2016 and the Rules
There shall be a single blue stripe, or stripes woven
made thereunder, while applying for ECO-Mark.
along the length of the bag or the bag shall be without
Additionally, the manufacturer shall produce
stripe as agreed to between the buyer and the seller.
documentary evidence on compliance of the provisions
The constructional particulars of sacking used in the
related to noise level and occupational health under
fabrication of the bags shall be such that the bags meet
the provisions of Factory Act, 1948 and Rules made
the requirements specified in Table 1.
thereunder.
1
IS 12650 : 2018

(Clauses 4.1 and 5.1)
Sl Characteristic Requirement Tolerance Method of Test,
No. Ref to Clause of
Type A Type B IS 9113
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Dimensions (see Note 1): 8.3.2
a) Outside length, cm 94 94 +4
cm
–0
b) Outside width, cm 57 57 +4
cm
–0
ii) Ends/dm 46 76 Type A ± 2 8.4.2

+4
Type B + –3
iii) Picks/dm 50 (2 × 25) 28 ±2 8.4.2

iv) Corrected mass/bag, g 665 665 + 8.0
percent 8.5.2
– 6.0
(see Note 2)
v) Average breaking strength of sacking (ravelled-strip 8.6.2
method, 10 cm × 20 cm), Min, N (kgf):
a) Warpway 1 570 (160) 1 570 (160)
b) Weftway 1420 (145) 1420 (145)
vi) Average side seam strength 490 (50) 490 (50) 8.7
(5 cm ×20 cm raveled strip), Min, N (kgf)
vii) Moisture regain, percent, Max (see Note 3) 22 22 8.2
viii) Oil content on dry de-oiled material, Max 3 3 8.8
NOTES
1 The bags of specified dimensions are suitable for packing of 50 kg wheat, rice and similar coarse grains. For packing of other
quantities/materials, the buyer and the seller may agree to the dimensions other than those specified above. The mass of such bags may
be calculated by the method given in 5.2 of 1S 9113. However, tolerances specified in this table for dimension and on the mass shall
be permissible.
3 Moisture regain shall not be measured on the branding. It shall be measured at least 10 cm away from the branding.
5.4.1.3 The product packaging may display in brief the stipulated by the buyer or required by regulation or
criteria based on which the product has been labelled law in force.
environment friendly.
7.2 BIS Certification Marking
5.4.1.4 The material used for product packaging shall
be reusable or made from recyclable or biodegradable The bales may also be marked with the Standard Mark.
materials. 7.2.1 The use of the Standard Mark is governed by the
5.4.1.5 Fatty alcohol based non-ionics as emulsifier provisions of the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 2016
should be used, wherever required. and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The
details of conditions under which the licence for the
5.4.1.6 Polyhalogenated based phenolic fire retardants use of the Standard Mark may be granted to
shall not be used. manufacturers or producers may be obtained from the
5.4.2 Specific Requirements Bureau of Indian Standards.
5.4.2.1 The bags shall confirm to the requirements given 7.3 The bales may also be marked with ECO-Mark in
in Table 3. addition to Standard Mark, if the requirements specified
in 5.4 are also satisfied.
6 PACKING
The bags shall be packed in bales as prescribed in CONFORMITY
IS 2873 or as specified in the agreement between the
buyer and the seller. 8.1 Lot
7 MARKING All bales of jute bags of same size produced under

similar conditions of production and delivered to abuyer
7.1 The bales shall be marked as prescribed in against one dispatch note shall constitute a lot.
IS 2873. Additional markings shall be made as
2
IS 12650 : 2018

(Clause 5.2)
Sl Characteristic Requirement Method of Test,
IS 9113
(1) (2) (3) (4)
iii) Contract mass of a bale, kg (see Note 2) 332.5 —
contract mass
NOTES
Contract mass of a bale = Nominal mass of bag × Specified number of bags per bale
8.2 Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity moisture regain, 7 bags shall be selected at random from
each of the bales selected as per 8.2. The total number
For assessing the conformity of lot to the requirements
of bags to be tested from each lot for these requirements
of this standard, bales shall be first selected from each
is given in col 5 of Table 4.
lot at random in accordance with the col 2 and col 3 of
Table 4. All the bales so selected in the sample shall be 8.4 Criteria for Conformity
tested for ‘Gross mass of bales’, ‘Tare mass of bailing
hoops and other packing materials’ and ‘Number of 8.4.1 Criteria for Conformity for Freedom from Defects
bundles per bale’. Two bundles of bags selected at Each bag selected in the sample shall be tested for
random from each bale selected in the sample shall be freedom from defects. A bag shall be termed as
tested for total number of bags per bundle. The lot shall defective, if it contains two or more major defects
be considered as conforming to the requirements of (see Annex A). A lot shall be considered conforming
this standard, if all the following conditions are to this requirement, if the number of defectives is less
satisfied: than or equal to the acceptance number given in col 6
of Table 4. Acceptance numbers given in Table 4 are
a) Total corrected net mass of all the bales in the
on the basis of an AQL of 4.0 percent.
sample is not less than the total mass of all
the bales. 8.4.2 Criteria for Conformity for Length and Width
b) Total number of bags in each bale selected as The dimension of at least 90 percent of the bags under
per 8.2 meet the relevant requirement. test shall be in accordance with the requirement
specified. Out of the remaining bags (10 percent, Max),
8.3 Sample Size for Bags dimension of not a single bag is below the specified
For freedom from defects, length, width, ends/dm, nominal value by more than 2.0 cm and 1.0 cm in case
picks/dm, number of stitch/dm, mass per bag and of length and width respectively.
Table 3 Specific Requirements for ECO-Mark

(Clause 5.4.2.1)
Sl Parameter1) Maximum Limit, Hessians and Sackings
No. mg/kg (ppm)
(1) (2) (3)
i) Non-halogenated hydrocarbons 3 percent

ii) a) Pesticides (Sum parameter)2) 1.0
b) Banned Pesticides Nil
iii) pH of aqueous extract 6.0-7.0
iv) Coupled aminess from azo-dyes (Sum parameters)3) 50.0
(Detectable limit using GC-MS)
1)
The methods of tests for ECO-parameters are being developed by BIS and Textiles Committee. Till the methods of tests are
standardized, the manufacturer shall declare conformance taking into consideration the chemicals, auxiliaries and dyes used.
2)
The list of pesticides used on jute, banned restricted or withdrawn is appended as Annex B.
3)
The list of coupled amines released from azo-dyes is appended as Annex C.
3
IS 12650 : 2018
8.4.3 Criteria for Conformity for Ends/dm, Picks/dm, 8.5 Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity for
Number of Stitches/dm and Moisture Regain Breaking Strength Requirement
The lot which meets the requirements of 8.4.l and 8.4.2 The lot, which meets the above requirements shall
shall be tested for ends/dm, picks/dm, number of then be tested for breaking strength requirements.
stitches/dm and moisture regain as per the plan. A bag For this purpose, one bag shall be selected at random
shall be termed as defective, if it fails to meet any one from each bale selected in the sample. Suitable test
or more of these requirements. The lot shall be specimens shall be taken from these bags and tested
considered as conforming to the requirements of ends/ for warpway, weftway and seam strength. The lot
dm, picks/dm, number of stitches/dm and moisture shall be declared as conforming to these
regain, if the total number of defective found in the requirements, if
sample is less than or equal to the corresponding
acceptance number given in col 6 of Table 4. a) average values of warp way, weftway and
seam breaking strengths respectively, as
8.4.4 Criteria for Conformity for Mass per Bag obtained for all test specimens are not less than
The lot, which meets the above requirements, shall then the corresponding values specified, and
be tested for mass of bag. The lot shall be declared as b) none of the individual value is less than 20
conforming to this requirement, if percent below the specified value.
a) the average corrected value of mass per bag 8.6 Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity for
as obtained for sampled bags under test is not Oil Content
less than nominal value specified.
The lot, which meets the above requirements, shall then
b) the corrected mass of at least 80 percent of
be tested for oil content. For this purpose two bags shall
bags under test is in accordance with
be selected out of two different bales selected as per 8.2.
requirement specified.
The lot shall be declared as conforming to this
c) out of remaining bags (20 percent, Max), all
bags may have corrected mass above the
oil content.
specified limit, but corrected mass of not more
than 10 percent of sampled bags under test is 8.7 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the
below the specified value by more than 12 requirements of this standard, if 8.2 and 8.4 to 8.6 are
percent of specified nominal value.’ satisfied.

(Clauses 8.2, 8.3, 8.4.1 and 8.4.3)
Sl No. of Bales No. of Bales in For Number of Stitches/dm, Ends/dm, Picks/dm, Moisture Regain
No. in the Lot the Sample
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Up to 25 5 7 35 5
ii) 26 to 90 8 7 56 6
iii) 91 to 300 12 7 84 8
iv) 301 to 500 18 7 126 10
4
IS 12650 : 2018
ANNEX A

GAW Portion over the whole width of > 1.5 cm x
the fabric completely unwoven 0.5 cm to 1.5 cm X
with weft
Multiple broken/missing Two or more contiguous, regardless of length x
warp (end)
Cut, hole, tear or patch Two or more warp or filling threads ruptured at adjoining x
points
Float A place in the fabric where warp > 2 cm2 x
and weft yarns escape the 0.5 cm2 to 2 cm2 X
required interlacement
0.5 cm to 1.5 cm X
Corner gap Corner of the bag not properly > 1.5 cm x
stitched resulting in formation of 0.5 cm to 1.5 cm X
hole
Mildew Staining of fabric due to fungal or bacterial growth visible to x
naked eye
NOTES
1 x – Major defects.
X – Minor defects.
ANNEX B
(Table 3)
LIST OF PESTICIDES USED ON JUTE - BANNED, RESTRICTED OR WITHDRAWN
B-1 PESTICIDES REGISTERED FOR USE ON AS ON 10.04.1992

JUTE IN INDIA
B-2.1 Pesticides not Approved for Use
a) Herbicides : Dalapon
2,4, 5-Trimethylaniline
b) Fungicides : Carbendazim
c) Insecticides: Carbaryl, Carbofuran, B-2.2 Pesticides Restricted for Use
Endosulfan, Lindane,
Phosalone, Quinalphos circumstances warranting the use of DDT for plant
B-2 EXTRACT FROM LIST OF PESTICIDES protection, the State or Central Government may
NOT APPROVED, RESTRICTED USE, purchase it directly from M/s Hindustan Insecticides
WITHDRAWN OR BANNED IN THE COUNTRY Ltd, to be used under expert Government supervision.
5
IS 12650 : 2018
Use of DDT for public health programme up desert areas by Plant Protection Advisor to the
to10 000 MT per annum, except in case of any major Government of India.
B-2.3 Pesticides Banned/Withdrawn
Use of Diedrin shall be restricted for Locust Control in
Pentachlorophenol, Toxaphene and Aldrin.
ANNEX C
(Table 3)
LIST OF COUPLED AMINES RELEASED FROM AZO-DYES
a) 4-Aminodiphenyl n) 3,3’ – Dimethylbenzidine

b) 2-Amino-4 -nitrotoluene p) 3,3’ – Dimethyl-4,4’ diaminodiphenylmethane
c) Benzidine q) p-kresidin (2-Methoxy 5-methylaniline)
d) 4-Chloro-o-toluidine r) 4,4’ Methylene-bis-(2 -chloraniline)
e) 2-Naphylamine s) 4,4’ Oxydianiline
f) o-Aminoazotoluene t) 4,4’ Thiodianiline
g) p-Chloraniline u) o-Toluidine
h) 2,4-Diaminoanisole v) 2,4, – Toluylenediamine
j) 4,4’ – Diaminodiphenylmethane w) 2,4,5 – Trimethylaniline
k) 3,3’ – Dichlorobenzidine y) p-Amino-azobezene
m) 3,3’ – Dimethoxybenzidine z) 2-Methoxyaniline
6
Copyright

Headquarters:

NEW DELHI 110002 { 2323 7617
2323 3841
KOLKATA 700054 { 2337 8499, 2337 8561
2337 8626, 2337 9120
Northern : Plot No. 4-A, Sector 27-B, Madhya Marg, CHANDIGARH 160019
{ 26 50206
265 0290
{ 2254 1216, 2254 1442
2254 2519, 2254 2315
MUMBAI 400093 { 2832 9295, 2832 7858
2832 7891, 2832 7892
Branches: A H M E D A B A D . B E N G A L U R U . B H O PA L . B H U B A N E S H WA R . C O I M B ATO R E .
D E H R A D U N . D U R G A P U R . FA R I D A B A D . G H A Z I A B A D . G U WA H AT I .
HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. JAMMU. JAMSHEDPUR. KOCHI. LUCKNOW. NAGPUR.
PA RWA N O O . PAT N A . P U N E . R A I P U R . R A J K O T. V I S A K H A PAT N A M .
IS 13649 : 1993
Indian Standard
TEXTILES – POLYETHYLENE LINED JUTE
BAGS FOR PACKING TEA – SPECIFICATION
UDC 621.798.151 : 677.13 : 678.742.2 : 663.95
© BIS 1993

NEW DELHI 110002
March 1993 Price Group 3

FOREWORD
This Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized by
the Jute and Jute Products Sectional Committee had been approved by the Textile Division
Council.
This standard has been formulated keeping in view considerable use of polyethylene lined jute
bags for packing tea within the country. It is based on the 'Recommended Specification of
polyethylene lined jute bags suitable for bulk packaging of 28 kg to 30 kg of tea' issued by Tea
Board, Calcutta.
the final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be
rounded off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960 'Rules for rounding off numerical values ( revised )'.
The number of significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of
the specified value in this standard.
TO
IS 13649 : 1993 TEXTILES — POLYETHYLENE
LINED JUTE BAGS FOR PACKING TEA —
SPECIFICATION
( Page 1 clause 4.1 ) — Insert the following note at the end of paragraph:
'NOTE — The mass of fabric in g/m2 is given for guidance only.'
( TX 03 )

AMENDMENT NO. 1 JUNE 1993
TO
IS 13649 : 1993 TEXTILES — POLYETHYLENE LINED
JUTE BAGS FOR PACKING TEA — SPECIFICATION
a) Clause 7.1 — Read 'Annex' for 'Appendix' in lines 2 and 4.
b) Annex A — In the title of IS 10146 : 1982, read 'safe' for 'sale'
c) Annex B — In the informal table under B-2.1, read '251 to 300' for
'301 to 350'.
( TX 03 )
IS 13649 : 1993
Indian Standard
TEXTILES — POLYETHYLENE LINED JUTE
BAGS FOR PACKING TEA — SPECIFICATION
1 SCOPE 4.1.1 Handle
1.1 This standard prescribes the requirements Each bag shall be provided with a pair of
of polyethylene lined jute bags suitable for suitable handles at the mouth with loop length
packing 30 kg tea. of 30 cm ( see Fig. 1 ).
2 REFERENCE 4.2 Liner Bag
2.1 The Indian Standards listed at Annex A are The liner bag shall be made out of high mole-
necessary adjuncts to this standard. cular high density polyethylene ( HMHDPE )
3 TERMINOLOGY film ( see IS 10889 : 1984 ) of such thickness
that corresponds to its mass of 34.5 g/m2 ± 10
3.1 For the purpose of this standard, the percent ( 37.5 microns or 150 gauge ).
definitions as given in IS 5476 : 1986 along with
the following definition shall apply. 4.2.1 The liner shall be of food grade ( see
IS 10146 : 1982 ) odourless and made from virgin
3.1.1 Gusset material only. The liner bag shall be made by
A fold inserted in the edge of a sack. heat sealing the edge of the liner and same
shall be placed loosely inside the jute bag.
4 MANUFACTURE
4.1 Jute Bag 4.3 Seam
The bag shall be made out of fabric woven from One side the bottom of the bag shall be stitched
jute yarn in double warp and single weft, 2plain with two rows of lock or chain stitches sepa-
weave and having construction 475 g/m ; 47 rated from each other by about 5 mm with the
( double ) ends/dm × 55 picks/dm. The bag outer row of stitching approximately 10 mm
shall be made from single piece of cloth in from the edge of the bag. The stitching should
which the warp is running along the width of be done with a fold over seam to a depth of
the bag and the mouth of the bag is formed by about 25 mm so that the stitches pass through
the selvedge. all the four layers of the fabric.
FIG. 1 SKETCH OF A TYPICAL JUTE BAG FOR PACKING TEA
1
IS 13649 : 1993
4.3.1 The twine used for stitching shall be 6.2 Marking

rayon cord, 2 ply. The tex ( denier ) of the
cord shall be of minimum 128 ( 1150 ). Unless otherwise specified, the following infor-
mation shall be marked on the trusses:
4.3.2 The number of stitches per decimetre
should be between 11 and 13. a) Name of the manufacturer;
4.4 Gusset b) Description of material;
The bag shall have gusset at the bottom of the c) Number of bags per truss;
bag and the same shall lie folded within the bag d) Lot number of the truss; and
after the side is stitched. e) Any other particulars required by the
4.5 Freedom from Defects buyer or by the law in force.
4.5.1 The film used for manufacturing liner bag 6.2.1 Each truss may also be marked with the
shall be free from pinholes, patches, tears, Standard Mark.
blisters and any other visible defects.
4.5.2 The jute fabric used for manufacturing 7 SAMPLING AND INSPECTION
bag shall be free from mildew, oil stains and 7.1 Unless otherwise specified, the procedure
any odour. The fabric shall also be generally for sampling shall be as given in Appedix B and
free from weft bars, multiple broken yarns in the procedure for testing and inspection shall be
warp and weft, holes, smash and floats. as given in Appendix C.
5 REQUIREMENTS
5.1 Liner Bag
8.1 The lot shall be considered as conforming
The dimensions of each of the inner polyethy- to the requirements of the standard, if the
lene liner bag shall conform to the following following conditions are satisfied:
requirements:
a) The total of the corrected net mass of the
Sl No. Characteristic Require- Method trusses under test is not less than the total
ment of Test contract mass of the trusses.
(1) (2) (3) (4) b) The number of bags in each truss under
92 + 3
test is not less than the declared number.
i) Outside length, cm C-4
– 0 c) The dimensions of at least 90 percent of
Outside width, cm 82 + 3 C-4
the bags under test are in accordance
ii) with the requirements specified in Table 1.
– 0
In the remaining bags, no bag shall have
NOTE — The dimensions of liner bag correspond dimensions less than 1.5 cm below the
to the dimensions of jute bags specified in Table 1. specified value.
Other dimensions as agreed to between the buyer
and the seller may be used depending upon the size d) The mass of at least 90 percent of the
of jute bags. bags under test is within ± 10 percent of
5.2 Jute Bag the nominal mass specified ( see Table 1 )
and the average mass of the bags under
The jute bags shall conform to the require- test conforms to the requirements
ments as given in Table 1. specified ( see Table 1 ).
5.3 Contract Regain of Jute Bag e) The dimensions of all the liner bags tested
are within the specified tolerances, and
The contract moisture regain of jute bag shall thickness ( or mass in g/m2 ) of the liner
be 16 percent. used conforms to the requirements
prescribed in 4.2.
6 PACKING AND MARKING
f) The average values of (a) breaking
6.1 Packing strength of the fabric and seam, (b) ends
The bags shall be packed in trusses. and picks per dm, (c) moisture regain,
and (d) oil content of the bags under test,
6.1.1 The number of bags per truss shall be as conform to the requirements specified in
specified in the contract. Table 1.
2
IS 13649 : 1993

( Clauses 5.1, 5.2, and 8.1 )
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Outside length, cm 69+3 C-3
—0
ii) Outside width, cm 54 + 3 C-3
—0
iii) Width of gusset at bottom, cm 26 + 3 C-3
—1
iv) Breaking strength of fabric on C-6
10 × 20 cm strip, N ( kgf* ), Min ( Revelled strip
test method )
a) Warpway 1080 (110)
b) Weftway 1370 ( 140 )
v) Breaking strength of seam on C-7
10 × 20 cm strip, N ( kgf* ), Min
a) Side seam 490 ( 50 )
b) Bottom scam 390 ( 40 )
vi) Ends per dm 47 ± 2 C-5
( 2 ends working on one )
vii) Picks per dm 55 ± 2 C-5
viii) Mass per bag, g 670 + 8 percent C-2
–2
ix) Moisture regain percent, Max 17 C-1
x) Oil content on dry de-oiled material 2 C-8
basis, Max
xi) Corrected net mass of the trusses Not less than the contract C-9
mass of the trusses
NOTES
1 The dimensions indicated in the table are applicable for packing 30 kg tea of normal bulk density as agreed
to between the buyer and the seller. Since the size of the bag depends upon the bulk density of the tea to be
packed, other sizes/dimensions as agreed to between the buyer and the seller may also be used. However,
the same tolerances as indicated in this Table shall be made applicable for other dimensions.
2 Mass of the bags of other dimensions shall be calculated on the basis of the following parameters:
i) Area of the fabric including the seam used in the bag.
ii) The fabric used for making the handle to be stitched with the bag.
iii) The yarn used for stitching the bag including the handle.
1 N = 0.102 kgf approximately.
ANNEX A
( Clause 2.1 )
1963 : 1981 Methods for determination of 5476 : 1986 Glossary of terms relating to
threads per unit length in jute ( first revision )
woven fabrics ( second revision ) 9030 : 1979 Method for determination of
seam strength of jute fabrics
1969 : 1985 Methods for determination of including their laminates
breaking load and elongation
of woven textile fabrics 10146 : 1982 Polyethylene for its sale use
( second revision ) in contact with foodstuifs,
pharmaceutical and drinking
Methods for determination water
2969 : 1974
of oil content of jute yarn and 10889 : 1984 High density polyethylene
fabric ( first revision ) films
3
IS 13649 : 1993
ANNEX B
( Clause 7.1 )
SAMPLING
B-0 Lot Number of Trusses No. of Trasses to be Drawn
in the Lot and Opened for Inspection
B-0.1 All the trusses of polyethylene lined jute
bags for packing tea of same dimensions 351 to 400 8
supplied to a buyer against one despatch note, 401 to 500 9
shall constitute a lot. 501 and above 10 + 1 for every
B-1 SAMPLING PROCEDURE FOR GROSS 100 trusses or part
MASS thereof above 501
B-1.1 Por evaluating the gross mass of the trusses.
trusses, 10 percent of the trusses, selected from B-2.2 For the trusses selected as above, the
the lot, shall constitute the test sample. test samples shall be drawn as follows:
B-2 SAMPLING PROCEDURE FOR OTHER Sl Tests Test Sample
REQUIREMENTS No.
B-2.1 Por assessing conformity to the require- i) Dimension, ends/dm,
ments other than gross mass of the bale the picks/dm, mass and
following minimum number of trusses shall be moisture regain of jute 110 percent of the
selected at random from the lot: bag and dimensions of bags
liner bag
Number of Trusses No. of Trusses to be Drawn
in the Lot and Opened for Inspection ii) Breaking strength of jute bag
Up to 10 1 a) fabric 2 bags from each
11 to 20 2 truss subject to
21 to 100 3 b) seam a minimum of
five bags
101 to 150 4
151 to 200 5 iii) Oil content percent of 2 bags from each
jute bag truss subject to a
201 to 250 6 minimum of six
301 to 350 7 bags.
ANNEX C
( Clause 7.1 )
C-0 TESTING AND INSPECTION NOTE — Indian Jute Industries' Research Associa-
tion, IJIRA Moisture Meter* may be used for the
PROCEDURE purpose. This meter works on the principle of
measuring the electrical resistance which changes
C-0.1 Testing and inspection of the lot as laid with moisture content in the material. The specimen
down below shall be carried out on the samples ( jute product ) is placed under the electrode gun
drawn in accordance with Annex B. having two poles of specially designed spring-loaded
electrodes. The small amount of current passing
through the electrodes is amplified and recorded by
C-1 MOISTURE REGAIN the meter calibrated against the actual moisture
regain, based on oven-dry method of the material.
A separate chart, calibrating the readings of the
C-1.1 Determine the moisture regain in each actual moisture regain, based on oven-dry method
bag ( B-2.2 ) after opening the trusses ( B-2.1 ) of the material may also be used. The instrument
by the use of a suitable moisture meter. After shall be operated according to the manufacturer's
opening the trusses about 10 minutes time be instructions.
allowed to lapse before measuring moisture to *Mention of the name of the specific instrument is
enable the cloth to attain conditions for the not intended to promote or give preference to the
normal use of moisture meter. use of that instrument over others not mentioned.
4
IS 13649 : 1993
C-2 MASS PER BAG C-8 OIL CONTENT

C-2.1 Weigh each jute bag ( see B-2.2 ) to the
nearest 5 g after determining the moisture regain C-8.1 Take from each bag as selected in B-2.2
of the bag as indicated in C-1.1. Determine one representative strip weighing approximately
the corrected net mass of the bag at contract 20 g and determine the oil content on dry
regain. Weigh the liner bag separately and add de-oiled material basis in accordance with
this mass to the corrected net mass of the jute IS 2969 : 1974.
bag.
C-9 CORRECTED NET MASS OF TRUSSES
C-3 LENGTH, WIDTH AND GUSSET WIDTH
( BOTTOM ) OF JUTE BAG C-9.1 Determine the total gross mass ( Wg ) of
the trusses in a test sample ( B-1.1 ) from the
C-3.1 Lay each bag flat on a table free from gross mass of each truss weighed to the nearest
creases and wrinkles and measure the outside kilogram.
length and width of gusset at the bottom nearest
to 0.5 cm of all the bags under test. The C-9.2 Remove all the packing and binding
measurements shall be taken about the centre. materials of the trusses selected in B-2.2 and
C-4 LENGTH AND WIDTH OF weigh them together up to nearest kilogram.
POLYETHYLENE BAG Calculate the average tare mass of the trusses
and multiply it by the number of trusses weighed
C-4.1 Lay each bag flat on a smooth table and for gross mass ( Wt ).
make it free from creases or fold and then
measure the outside length and width of the C-9.3 The total net mass of the trusses under
bag about the centre to the nearest 0.5 cm. test, Wn = Wg — Wt.
C-5 ENDS AND PICKS C-9.4 Determine the average mass of the liner
C-5.1 Count the ends and picks from each bag bag by weighing the total mass of 10 liner bags
as selected in B-2.2 in one and two places drawn at random out of the bags selected
respectively with a suitable gauge measuring in B-2.2 and dividing it by 10. Multiply the
5 cm. Determine the average number of ends average mass of the liner bag with the total
and picks per dm of the bags under test in number of liner bags within the trusses
accordance with IS 1963 : 1981. selected ( B-1.1 ) to find out the total mass of
the liner bags ( WL ).
C-6 BREAKING STRENGTH OF FABRIC
C-6.1 Test from each bag as selected in B-2.2 C-9.5 The total net mass of the trusses under
two warpway and two weftway test specimens test excluding the polyethylene bags as liner,
for breaking strength with 100 mm wide revelled Wm = Wn — WL.
strips and 200 mm between grips of a strength
tester having a constant rate of traverse of C-9.6 Determine the total corrected net mass,
450 mm per minute according to IS 1969 : 1985. W of the trusses ( B-1.1 ) excluding the polye-
thylene bag as liner by using the following
C-7 BREAKING STRENGTH OF SEAM
formula:
C-7.1 Take two test specimen from each bag
for breaking strength of seam, one from side and
the other from the bottom of the bags ( B-2.2 ).
Test the breaking strength of each test
specimen with 100 mm wide revelled strip
taking 200 mm between the grips of a strength C-9.7 Determine the total corrected net mass
tester having a constant rate of traverse of of the trusses comprising both jute bags and
450 mm per minute in accordance with polyethylene bags, as liner, by adding W
IS 9030 : 1979. and WL.
5
Standard Mark
Standards Act, 1986 and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The Standard Mark
on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance that they have been
produced to comply with the requirements of that standard under a well defined system
of inspection, testing and quality control which is devised and supervised by BIS and
operated by the producer. Standard marked products are also continuously checked by
BIS for conformity to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under
which a licence for the use of the Standard Mark may be granted to manufacturers or
producers may be obtained from the Bureau of Indian Standards.
Copyright

Amendments are issued to standards as the need arises on the basis of comments. Standards
are also reviewed periodically; a standard along with amendments is reaffirmed when such review
indicates that no changes are needed; if the review indicates that changes are needed, it is taken
up for revision. Users of Indian Standards should ascertain that they are in possession of the
latest amendments or edition by referring to the latest issue of 'BIS Handbook and 'Standards
Monthly Additions'. Comments on this Indian Standard may be sent to BIS giving the following
reference:
Doc : No TX 03 ( 2484 )

Headquarters:
NEW DELHI 110002 331 13 75
CALCUTTA 700054 37 86 26, 37 86 62
53 38 43, 53 16 40
Northern : SCO 445-446, Sector 35-C, CHANDIGARH 160036
53 23 84
Southern : C. I. T. Campus, IV Cross Road, MADRAS 600113 235 02 16, 235 04 42

235 15 19, 235 23 15
632 92 9 5 , 632 78 58
BOMBAY 400093 632 78 9 1 , 632 78 92
Branches : AHMADABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE.
FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR.
LUCKNOW. PATNA. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
Printed at Printwell Printers, Aligarh, India

IS 15138 : 2010
Hkkjrh; ekud
oL=kkfn & 50 fdñxzkñ phuh iSd djus
ds fy, iVlu ds cksjs & fof'kf"V
( igyk iqujh{k.k )
Indian Standard
TEXTILES — JUTE BAGS FOR PACKING
50 kg SUGAR — SPECIFICATION
( First Revision )
ICS 55.080; 59.060.10; 67.180.10
© BIS 2010
NEW DELHI 110002

FOREWORD
the Jute and Jute Products Sectional Committee had been approved by the Textile Division Council.
This standard was first published in 2002. This revision has taken place to incorporate the following major changes:
a) Tolerances on length, width and mass of bag have been reduced for improved structure and serviceability;
b) Sampling and criteria for conformity have been modified; and
c) Classified major and minor defects have been incorporated to minimize failures during storage and end
use.
The types of bags specified in this standard have been developed after extensive trials keeping in view the guidelines
provided by the International Labour Organization (ILO) for not permitting manual carriage of weight exceeding
50 kg by the workers and consumers for their safety. In addition, care has been taken to restrict the use of batching
oil in the manufacture of bags to safer limit so as to minimize its adverse impact on the contents. One of the
varieties also specifies a food grade loose liner to be used in order to protect the contents from adverse impact of
oil and moisture.
The composition of the Committee responsible for formulation of this standard is given is Annex C.
observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960
IS 15138 : 2010
Indian Standard
TEXTILES — JUTE BAGS FOR PACKING
50 kg SUGAR — SPECIFICATION
( First Revision )
1 SCOPE 4.3 Hemming at the Mouth
This standard prescribes constructional details and Provisions of 5.1.3 of IS 9113 shall apply.
other requirements of three types of jute bags for
packing 50 kg sugar.
The bags shall meet the requirement of freedom from
2 REFERENCES defects as given in Annex B.
The standards listed in Annex A contain provisions 4.5 Liner
provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, Type C bags shall be provided with minimum 25µm
the editions indicated were valid. All standards are thick loose liner made of food grade virgin HMHDPE
subject to revision and parties to agreements based on conforming to IS 10146.
possibility of applying the most recent editions of the
standards indicated at Annex A. 5.1 The bags shall conform to the requirements
specified in Table 1.
3 TERMINOLOGY
5.2 Tolerance
in IS 5476 shall apply. The following tolerance shall be permitted on outside
length, outside width, ends/dm, picks/dm and corrected
4 MANUFACTURE mass per bag as given in Table 1.
4.1 Fabric Sl Characteristic(s) Tolerance
Type A bags shall be made from single piece of No.
Type A Type B Type C
568 g/m2 double warp, plain weave jute fabric of Bag Bag Bag
uniform construction with warp running along the (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
length of the bag. Type B and Type C bags shall be
made from hessian having mass of 417 g/m2 and 354 i) Outside length and +3
g/m2 respectively. The cloth shall be without stripes or outside width, cm
+4
shall have stripes as agreed to between the buyer and ii) Ends/dm –2 ±2 ±2
the seller, woven along the length of the bag.
+2 +2 +2
iii) Picks/dm –1 –1 –1
NOTE — Mass of fabric is for guidance only.
4.1.1 The jute bags used for packing food items, such iv) Corrected mass per +7.5 +7.5 +7.5
as sugar shall be manufactured from raw jute of Indian bag, percent, Max –6.0 –2.0 –2.0
origin.
5.3 The bales containing the bags shall conform to the
4.2 Seam requirements specified in Table 2.
The sides of Type A bag shall be herakle stitched with 6 PACKING
safety stitch as specified in 5.1.4 of IS 9113. The side
of Type B and Type C bags shall be sewn with herakle The bags shall be packed in bales as prescribed in
stitches on selvedge through two layers and the bottom IS 2873 or as specified in the agreement between the
raw edge shall be folded inside to a depth of at least buyer and the seller.
3.8 cm and then stitched at the mouth as specified
7 MARKING
in 5.1.3 of IS 9113. The number of stitches per 10 cm
shall be between 9 and 11. The bales shall be marked as prescribed in IS 2873.
1
IS 15138 : 2010
Table 1 Requirements of Bags

(Clause 5.1)
(Ref to Cl of
IS 9113)
Type A Type B Type C
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Dimensions, cm (see Note 1) :
a) Outside length 87.5 91.5 91.5 8.3.2
b) Outside width 58.5 56.0 56.0 8.3.2
ii) Ends/dm 68 47 47 8.4.2
iii) Picks/dm 31 55 47 8.4.2
iv) Corrected mass per bag, g 630 475 405 8.5.2
+ 32 liner
v) Average breaking load of sacking (ravelled strip
method, 5.0 cm × 20.0 cm), Min, N (kgf) :
a) Warpway 1 570 (160) 1 470 (150) 1 470 (150)
8.6.2
b) Weftway 1 420 (145) 1 765 (180) 1 420 (145)
vi) Average breaking load of seam (ravelled strip
method, 5.0 cm × 20.0 cm), Min, N (kgf) :
a) Warpway — 490 (50) 490 (50)
8.7.
b) Weftway 440 (45) 685 (70) 490 (50)
vii) Moisture regain :
a) Moisture regain, percent, Max 22 17 17 8.2
.
(see Note 2)
b) Contract moisture regain, percent 20 16 16 —
.
NOTES
1 The bags of specified dimensions are suitable for packing of sugar. However, other dimensions as per agreement between the buyer
and the seller may also be used provided the tolerance on dimensions and bag mass as given in 5.2 is complied with. The mass of such
bags shall be calculated by the method given in 5.3 of IS 9113.
2 Average moisture regain shall be maximum 22 percent. However, 10 percent of the individual value of moisture regain percent may be
above 22 percent with an upper limit of 26 percent.
Table 2 Requirements of Packed Bales and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The
(Clause 5.3) details of conditions under which the licence for the
use of the Standard Mark may be granted to
Sl Characteristic Requirement Method of
No. Test manufacturers or producers may be obtained from the
(Ref to Cl Bureau of Indian Standards.
of IS 9113)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
CONFORMITY
i) Total number of bags per 500 8.9
bale (see Note) 8.1 Lot
ii) Number of joined bags per 4 —
bundle of 25 bags All bales of jute bags of same size produced under
iii) Contract mass of a bale, kg 315 (Type A) similar conditions of production and delivered to a
237.5 (Type B) — buyer against one dispatch note shall constitute a lot.
218.5 (Type C)
iv) Corrected net mass of a bale Not less than 8.1
the contract mass
8.2 Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity
v) Oil content on dry deoiled 3 8.8
of this standard, bales shall be first selected from each
NOTE — The number of bags per bale shall be 500 or as
specified in an agreement between the buyer and the seller. lot at random in accordance with the col 2 and col 3 of
Table 3. All the bales so selected in the sample shall be
Additional markings including the country of origin tested for ‘Gross mass of bales’, ‘Tare mass of bailing
shall be made as stipulated by the buyer or required by hoops and other packing materials’ and ‘Number of
the regulation or law in force. bundles per bale’. Two bundles of bags selected at
random from each bale selected in the sample shall be
7.1 BIS Certification Marking tested for total number of bags per bundle.
The lot shall be considered as conforming to the
7.1.1 The use of the Standard Mark is governed by the requirements of this standard, if all the following
provisions of the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1986 conditions are satisfied:
2
IS 15138 : 2010
a) The total corrected net mass of all the bales 8.4.3 Criteria for Conformity for Mass of Fabric
in the sample is not less than the total contract The lot, which meets the above requirement, shall then
mass of all the bales. be tested for mass of fabric. The lot shall be declared
b) The total number of bags in each bale selected as conforming to this requirement, if
as per 8.2 under test meets the relevant
requirement. a) the average value of mass per bag, as obtained
8.3 Sample Size for Bags value specified; and
For freedom from defects, length, width, ends/dm, b) not more than 10 percent of the individual
picks/dm, number of stitch/dm, mass per bag and values of mass of bags is below the lower
moisture regain, 16 bags shall be selected at random specified value.
from each of the bales selected as per 8.2. The total 8.5 Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity for
number of bags to be tested from each lot for these Breaking Strength Requirement
requirements is given in col 5 of Table 3
The lot, which meets the above requirements, shall then
8.4 Criteria for Conformity be tested for breaking strength requirements. For this
purpose, one bag shall be selected at random from each
8.4.1 Criteria for Conformity for Freedom from Defects bale selected in the sample. Suitable test specimens
Each bag selected in the sample shall be tested for shall be taken from these bags and tested for warpway,
freedom from defects. A bag shall be termed as weftway and seam strength. The lot shall be declared
defective, if it contains two or more major defects (see as confirming to these requirements, if
Annex B). A lot shall be considered conforming to this a) the average values of warpway, weftway and
requirement, if the number of defectives is less than or seam breaking strengths respectively, as
equal to the acceptance number given in col 6 of obtained for all test specimens are not less than
Table 3. Acceptance numbers given in Table 3 are on the corresponding values specified; and
the basis of an AQL of 2.5 percent.
b) none of the individual value is less than 20
8.4.2 Criteria for Conformity for Length, Width, percent below the specified value.
Ends/dm, Picks/dm, Number of Stitches/dm and
Moisture Regain 8.6 Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity for
Oil Content
The lot, which meets requirements of 8.4.1, shall be
tested for length, width, ends/dm, picks/dm, number The lot, which meets the above requirements, shall then
of stitches/dm and moisture regain as per the plan. A be tested for oil content. For this purpose two bags shall
bag shall be termed as defective, if it fails to meet any be selected out of two different bales selected as per 8.2.
one or more of these requirements. The lot shall he The lot shall be declared as conforming to this
considered as conforming to the requirements of length, requirement, if both the bags meet the requirement of
width, ends/dm, picks/dm, stitches/dm and moisture oil content.
regain, if the total number of defectives found in the 8.7 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the
sample is less than or equal to the corresponding requirements of this standard, if 8.2 and 8.4 to 8.6 are
acceptance number given in col 6 of Table 3. satisfied.

(Clauses 8.2, 8.3, 8.4.1 and 8.4.2)
Sl No. of Bales in No. of Bales in For Length, Width, Number of Stitches/dm,
No. the Lot the Sample Ends/dm, Picks/dm, Moisture Regain
No. of Bags Total Number of Acceptance Number

from Each Bale Bags in Sample
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Up to 25 5 16 80 5
ii) 26 to 90 8 16 128 7
iii) 91 to 300 13 16 208 10
iv) 301 to 500 20 16 320 14
NOTES
1 If the number of bales in a consignment exceeds 500, the same shall be split into number of lots each comprising maximum of 500 bales.
2 Joined bags shall also be drawn for visual inspection and breaking strength.
3
IS 15138 : 2010
ANNEX A
(Clause 2)

2873 : 1991 Textiles — Packaging of jute 9113 : 1993 Textiles — Jute sacking — General
products in bales — Specification requirements (first revision)
(second revision) 10146 : 1982 Specification for polyethylene for its
5476 : 1986 Glossary of terms relating to jute (first safe use in contact with foodstuffs,
revision) Pharmaceuticals and drinking water
ANNEX B
(Clauses 4.4 and 8.4.1, and Table 4)
B-1 The detailed classification of defects is given in Table 4.
Table 4 Classification of Defects
Sl No. Type of Defect Description Major Minor
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) GAW Portion over the whole width of >1.5 cm x —

the fabric completely unwoven
with weft
0.5-1.5 cm — X
ii) Multiple broken/missing Two or more contiguous, regardless of length x

warp (End) —
iii) Multiple broken weft Two or more contiguous, regardless of length x —

(Pick)
One pick, full width — X
iv) Cut, hole, tear or patch Two or more warp or filling threads ruptured at adjoining x —
points
v) Float A place in the fabric where > 2 cm2 x —

warp and weft yarns escape the
required interlacement
0.5 cm2 to 2 cm2 — X
vi) Gap stitching Stitches missing > 1.5 cm x —
0.5-1.5 cm — X
vii) Corner gap Corner of the bag not properly > 1.5 cm x —
stitched resulting in formation
of hole 0.5-1.5 cm
— X
viii) Mildew Staining of fabric due to fungal or bacterial growth visible to x —

naked eye.
NOTE — Two minor defects shall be counted as one major defect.
4
IS 15138 : 2010
ANNEX C
(Foreword)
Planning Commission, New Delhi SHRI A. K. KHULLAR (Chairman)
AI Champdany Industries Limited, Kolkatta SHRI S. C. MITTAL
SHRI A. K. NANDI (Alternate)
Directorate General of Supplies & Disposals, Quality Assurance Wing, SHRI A. J. BAJAJ
New Delhi SHRI R. P. SINGH (Alternate)
Eskaps (India) Private Ltd, Kolkatta SHRI S. K. CHATTERJEE
SHRI ARBINDA KAR (Alternate)
Export Inspection Council of India, New Delhi SHRI R. N. DAS
SHRI S. P. BHATTACHARYA (Alternate)
Food Corporation of India, New Delhi SHRI S. S. GREWAL
SHRI I. K. NEGI (Alternate)
Indian Jute Industries’ Research Association, Kolkatta SHRI P. K. CHOUDHURY
SHRI S. K. CHAKRABARTI (Alternate)
Indian Jute Mills Association, Kolkata SHRI S. K. GHOSH
SHRI H. N. GHOSH (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur PROF B. ADHIKARI
Indian Sugar Mills Association, New Delhi SHRI S. L. JAIN
SHRI M. N. RAO (Alternate)
Industrial Toxicological Research Centre, Lucknow DR V. P. SHARMA
Institute of Jute Technology, Kolkatta DR PRABIR RAY
SHRI A. K. CHAKARBORTY (Alternate)
Ludlow Jute Mills, Kolkatta SHRI D. K. BUBNA
SHRI B. M. THAKKAR (Alternate)
Ministry of Consumer Affairs, Food & Public Distribution, New Delhi SHRI R. P. BHAGRIA
SHRI V. K. AGGARWAL (Alternate)
National Federation of Cooperative Sugar Co Ltd, New Delhi SHRI VINAY KUMAR
National Institute of Research on Jute and Allied Fibre Technology, DIRECTOR
Kolkata SHRI GAUTAM BOSE (Alternate)
Office of Jute Commissioner, Kolkata SHRI U. SEN
SHRI R. K. ROY (Alternate)
Punjab State Civil Supplies Corporation Ltd, Chandigarh SHRI ASHOK DADHWAL
BIS Directorate General SHRI P. BHATNAGAR, Director & Head (TXD)
[Representing Director General (Ex-officio)]
Member Secretary
SHRI J. K. GUPTA
Scientist C (TXD), BIS
5
Copyright

Headquarters:

NEW DELHI 110002 { 2323 7617
2323 3841
KOLKATA 700054 { 2337 8499, 2337 8561
2337 8626, 2337 9120
{ 60 3843
60 9285
{ 2254 1216, 2254 1442
2254 2519, 2254 2315
MUMBAI 400093 { 2832 9295, 2832 7858
2832 7891, 2832 7892
Branches: AHMEDABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE. DEHRADUN.
FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR. LUCKNOW.
NAGPUR. PARWANOO. PATNA. PUNE. RAJKOT. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
VISAKHAPATNAM.
Laser Typeset by Sunshine Graphics
Indian Standard
oL=kkfn — 30 fdxzk rd [kk|kUu

iSd djus osQ fy, iVlu osQ
cksjs — fof'kf"V
Textiles — Jute Bags for Packing up

to 30 kg Foodgrains — Specification
ICS 55.080; 59.060.10; 67.060
© BIS 2015
Hkkjrh; ekud C;wjks

NEW DELHI-110002
October 2015 Price Group 3

FOREWORD
This Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized by Jute and Jute
With the enactment of The National Food Security Bill, 2013, there has been an urgent need for packaging
foodgrains in small pack sizes of 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30 kg.
IS 16372 : 2015
Indian Standard
TEXTILES — JUTE BAGS FOR PACKING UP TO 30 kg
FOODGRAINS — SPECIFICATION
1 SCOPE safety union stitch shall be provided at the inner edges
of the herakle stitches (see IS 9113). The number of
safety union stitches per decimetre shall be 10 ± 1.
other requirements of jute bags for packing up to 30
kg foodgrains. 4.4 Hemming at the Mouth
2 REFERENCES Provisions of IS 9113 shall apply.
The following standards contain provisions which, 4.5 Freedom from Defects
this standard. At the time of publication, the editions The bags shall meet the requirement of freedom from
indicated were valid. All standards are subject to major defects as given in Annex A.
revision and parties to agreements based on this
of applying the most recent editions of the standards 5.1 The bags shall conform to the requirements
indicated below. specified in Table 1.
IS No. Title 5.2 The bales containing the bags shall also conform
2873 : 1991 Textiles — Packaging of jute to the requirements specified in Table 2.
products in bales — Specification
5.3 The contract moisture regain shall be 20 percent.
(second revision)
5476 : 1986 Glossary of term relating to jute (first 5.4 Additional Requirements for Labelling as
revision) Environment Friendly Products
9113 : 2012 Textiles — Jute sacking — General
requirements (second revision) 5.4.1 General Requirement
3 TERMINOLOGY 5.4.1.1 The bags shall confirm to the requirements for
quality and performance prescribed under 5.1 to 5.3.
in IS 5476 shall apply. 5.4.1.2 The manufacturers shall produce to BIS,
4 MANUFACTURE State Pollution Control Board as per the provisions of
4.1 The bags shall be made from single piece of plain Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974
woven jute hessian of uniform construction having and Air (Preventions and Control of Pollution) Act,
nominal mass of 267 g/m2. 1981 alongwith the authorization, if required under the
Environment (Products) Act, 1986 and the Rules made
There shall be a single blue stripe, or stripes woven thereunder, while applying for ECO-Mark.
along the length of the bag or the bag shall be without Additionally, the manufacturer shall produce
stripe as agreed to between the buyer and the seller. documentary evidence on compliance of the provisions
The constructional particulars of sacking used in the related to noise level and occupational health under
fabrication of the bags shall be such that the bags meet the provisions of Factory Act, 1948 and Rules made
the requirements specified in Table 1. thereunder.
4.2 Seam 5.4.1.3 The product packaging may display in brief
the criteria based on which the product has been
The side and bottom seams of bags shall be herackle
labelled environment friendly.
stitched (L-type seam profile) along with hemming at
the mouth of bags. The number of stitches per 5.4.1.4 The material used for product packaging shall
decimetre shall be 10 ± 1. be reusable or made from recyclable or biodegradable
materials.
4.3 Safety Stitch
5.4.1.5 Fatty alcohol based nonionics as emulsifier
If agreed to between the buyer and the seller, a line of should be used, wherever required.
1
IS 16372 : 2015

Sl No. Characteristic Requirement Tolerance Method of Test,

Ref to Clause
of 1S 9113
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
i) Capacity, kg 10 15 20 25 30
ii) Dimensions (see Note) : 8.3.2
a) Outside length, cm 56 64 71 74 81 +2
cm
0
b) Outside width, cm 38 43 43 48 51 +2
cm
0
ii) Ends/dm 43 43 43 43 43 +2 8.4.2
2
iii) Picks/dm 39 39 39 39 39 +2 8.4.2
2
iv) Corrected mass/bag, g 137 173 190 219 252 + 4.0 8.5.2
percent
(see Note ) 2.0
v) Average breaking strength of 8.6.2
sacking (ravelled-strip
method, 10 cm × 20 cm),
Min, N(kgf) :
a) Warpway ¬ 1058 (108) with minimum individual value of 902(92) ®
b) Weftway ¬- 813 (83) with mini mum individual value of 696 (71) ®
vi) Average seam strength (5 cm 8.7
× 20 cm ravelled strip), Min
N (kgf)
a) Side ¬ 333 (34) with minimum individual value of 284 (29) ®
b) Bottom ¬ 304 (31) with minimum individual value of 255 (26) ®
vii) Moisture regain, percent, 17 17 17 17 17 8.2
Max
viii) Oil content on dry de-oiled 3 3 3 3 3 8.8
material, Max
NOTES
1 The bags of specified dimensions are suitable for packing of wheat, rice and similar coarse grains. For packing of other materials, the
buyer and the seller may agree to the dimensions other than those specified above. The mass of such bags may be calculated by the
method given in 5.3 of 1S 9113. However, tolerances specified in this table for dimension and on the mass shall be permissible.

(Clause 5.2)
Sl Characteristic Requirement Method of Test,

1S 9113
(1) (2) (3) (4)
iii) Contract mass of a bale, kg (see Note 2) As calculated —
contract mass
NOTES
Contract mass of a bale = Nominal mass of bag × Specified number of bags per bale.
2
IS 16372 : 2015
5.4.1.6 Polyhalogenated based phenolic fire retardants 8.2 Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity
shall not be used.
5.4.2 Specific Requirements of this standard, bales shall be first selected from each
lot at random in accordance with the col 2 and col 3 of
5.4.2.1 The bags shall confirm to the requirements
Table 4. All the bales so selected in the sample shall
given in Table 3.
be tested for a) Gross mass of bales, b) Tare mass of
6 PACKING bailing hoops and other packing materials and
c) Number of bundles per bale. Two bundles of bags
The bags shall be packed in bales as prescribed selected at random from each bale selected in the
in IS 2873 or as specified in the agreement between sample shall be tested for total number of bags per
the buyer and the seller. bundle. The lot shall be considered as conforming to
the requirements of this standard, if all the following
7 MARKING
conditions are satisfied:
7.1 The bales shall be marked as prescribed in IS 2873.
a) Total corrected net mass of all the bales in
Additional markings shall be made as stipulated by
the sample is not less than the total mass of
the buyer or required by regulation or law in force.
all the bales.
7.2 BIS Certification Marking b) Total number of bags in each bale selected as
per 8.2 meet the relevant requirement.
7.2.1 The use of the Standard Mark is governed by the 8.3 Sample Size for Bags
provisions of the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1986 For freedom from defects, length, width, ends/dm,
and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The picks/dm, number of stitch/dm, mass per bag and
details of conditions under which the licence for the moisture regain, 16 bags shall be selected at random
use of the Standard Mark may be granted to from each of the bales selected as per 8.2. The total
manufacturers or producers may be obtained from the number of bags to be tested from each lot for these
Bureau of Indian Standards. requirements is given in col 5 of Table 4.
7.3 The bales may also be marked with ECO-Mark in
8.4 Criteria for Conformity
addition to Standard Mark, if the requirements
specified in 5.4 are also satisfied. 8.4.1 Criteria for Conformity for Freedom from Defects
8 SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR Each bag selected in the sample shall be tested for
CONFORMITY freedom from defects. A bag shall be termed as
defective, if it contains two or more major defects
8.1 Lot (see Annex A). A lot shall be considered conforming
to this requirement, if the number of defective is less
All bales of jute bags of same size produced under
than or equal to the acceptance number given in col 6
similar conditions of production and delivered to a
of Table 4. Acceptance number given in Table 4 is on
buyer against one dispatch note shall constitute a lot.
Table 3 Specific Requirements for ECO-Mark

(Clause 5.4.2.1)
Sl No. Parameter 1) Maximum Limit, Hessians and Sackings

mg/kg (ppm)
(1) (2) (3)
i) Non-halogenated hydrocarbons 3 percent
ii) a) Pesticides (Sum parameter)2) 1.0
b) Banned Pesticides Nil
iii) pH of aqueous extract 6.0 - 7.0
iv) Coupled aminess from azo-dyes 50.0
(Sum parameters)3) (Detectable limit using GC-MS)
1)
The methods of tests for ECO-parameters are being developed. Till the methods of tests are standardized, the manufacturer shall
declare conformance taking into consideration the chemicals, auxiliaries and dyes used.
2)
The list of pesticides used on jute, banned restricted or withdrawn is appended as Annex B.
3)
The list of coupled amines released from azo-dyes is appended as Annex C.
3
IS 16372 : 2015
the basis of an AQL of 4.0 percent. bags, mass of not more than 10 percent of
individual value of mass is below the specified
8.4.2 Criteria for Conformity for Length, Width, Ends/
value by more than 12 percent of the specified
dm, Picks/dm, Number of Stitches/dm and Moisture
nominal value.
Regain
The lot which meets the requirements of 8.4.l shall be 8.5 Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity for
tested for length, width, ends/dm, picks/dm, number Breaking Strength Requirement
of stitches/dm and moisture regain as per the plan. A The lot, which meets the above requirements shall then
bag shall be termed as defective, if it fails to meet any be tested for breaking strength requirements. For this
one or more of these requirements. The lot shall be purpose, one bag shall be selected at random from each
considered as conforming to the requirements of ends/ bale selected in the sample. Suitable test specimens
dm, picks/dm, stitches/dm and moisture regain, if the shall be taken from these bags and tested for warpway,
total number of defective found in the sample is less weftway and seam strength. The lot shall be declared
than or equal lo the corresponding acceptance number as conforming to these requirements if,
given in col 6 of Table 4. The dimension of at least
90 percent of the bags under test should be in a) average values of warpway, weftway and
accordance with the requirement specified. Out of the seam breaking strengths respectively, as
remaining 10 percent bags, dimensions of not a single obtained for all test specimens are not less
bag shall be below specified nominal value by more than the corresponding values specified, and
than 1.5 cm and 1.0 cm in case of length and width, b) none of the individual value is less than 25
respectively. percent below the specified value.
8.4.3 Criteria for Conformity for Mass per Bag 8.6 Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity for
Oil Content
The lot which meets the above requirements, shall then
be tested for mass of bag. The lot shall be declared as The lot, which meets the above requirements, shall then
conforming to this requirement if, be tested for oil content. For this purpose two bags
shall be selected out of two different bales selected as
a) average value of mass per bag, as obtained
per 8.2. The lot shall be declared as conforming to this
value specified, and
oil content.
b) the corrected mass of at least 80 percent of
the bags under test is in accordance with the 8.7 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the
requirements specified. Out of the remaining requirements of this standard, if 8.2 and 8.4 to 8.6 are
satisfied.

(Clauses 8.2, 8.3, 8.4.1 and 8.4.2)
Sl No. of Bales No. of Bales For Length, Width, Number of Stitches/dm, Ends/dm,
No. in the Lot in the Sample Picks/dm, Moisture Regain
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Up to 25 5 7 35 5
ii) 26 to 90 8 7 56 6
iii) 91 to 300 12 7 84 8
iv) 301 to 500 18 7 126 10
4
IS 16372 : 2015
ANNEX A

GAW > 1.5 cm x
0.5 cm to 1.5 cm X
Multiple broken/missing Two or more contiguous, regardless of length x
warp (end)
Cut, hole, tear or patch Two or more warp or filling threads ruptured at adjoining x
points
Float A place in the fabric where warp and > 2 cm2 x
weft yarns escape the required 0.5 cm2 to 2 cm2 X
interlacement
0.5 cm to 1.5 cm X
Corner gap Corner of the bag not properly stitched > 1.5 cm x
resulting in formation of hole 0.5 cm to 1.5 cm X
Mildew Staining of fabric due to fungal or bacterial growth x
visible to naked eye
NOTES
1 x – Major defects.
X – Minor defects.
ANNEX B
(Table 3)
LIST OF PESTICIDES USED ON JUTE – BANNED, RESTRICTED OR WITHDRAWN
B-1 PESTICIDES REGISTERED FOR USE ON B-2.2 Pesticides Restricted for Use
JUTE IN INDIA
a) Herbicides : Dalapon circumstances warranting the use of DDT for plant
b) Fungicides : Carbendazim protection, the State or Central Government may
c) Insecticides : Carbaryl, Carbofuran, purchase it directly from M/s Hindustan Insecticides
Ltd, to be used under expert Government supervision.
Endosulfan, Lindane,
Use of DDT for public health programme up to
Phosalone, Quinalphos 10 000 MT per annum, except in case of any major
B-2 EXTRACT FROM LIST OF PESTICIDES
NOT APPROVED, RESTRICTED USE, Use of Diedrin shall be restricted for Locust Control
WITHDRAWN OR BANNED IN THE COUNTRY in desert areas by Plant Protection Advisor to the
AS ON 10.04.1992 Government of India.
B-2.1 Pesticides not Approved for Use B-2.3 Pesticides Banned/Withdrawn
2,4, 5-T Pentachlorophenol, Toxaphene and Aldrin.
5
IS 16372 : 2015
ANNEX C
(Table 3)
LIST OF COUPLED AMINES RELEASED FROM AZO - DYES
i) 4-Aminodiphenyl xii) 3,3’ – Dimethylbenzidine

ii) 2-Amino-4 -nitrotouene xiii) 3,3’ – Dimethyl-4,4’ diaminodiphenylmethane
iii) Benzidine xiv) p-kresidin (2-Methoxy 5-methylaniline)
iv) 4-Chloro-o-toluidine xv) 4,4’ Methylene-bis-(2 -chloraniline)
v) 2-Naphy Iamine xvi) 4,4’ Oxydianiline
vi) o-Alminoazotolune xvii) 4,4’ Thiodianiline
vii) p-Chloraniline xviii) o-Toluidine
viii) 2,4-Diaminoanisole xix) 2,4, – Toluylenediamine
ix) 4,4’ – Diaminodiphenylmethane xx) 2,4,5 – Trimethylaniline
x) 3,3’ – Dimethoxybenzidine xxi) p-Amino-azobezene
xi) 3,3’ – Dimethoxybenzidine xxii) 2-Methoxyaniline
6
Copyright

Headquarters:

NEW DELHI 110002 { 2323 7617
2323 3841
KOLKATA 700054 { 2337 8499, 2337 8561
2337 8626, 2337 9120
{ 260 3843
260 9285
{ 2254 1216, 2254 1442
2254 2519, 2254 2315
MUMBAI 400093 { 2832 9295, 2832 7858
2832 7891, 2832 7892

SECTION III
INDIAN STANDARDS
FROM PETROLEUM,
COAL AND RELATED
PRODUCTS
DEPARTMENT
Indian Standard
IykfLVd&IykfLVd dpjs osQ

iqu% çkfIr vkSj iqu%çØe.k osQ fy,
fn'kk funsZ'k
( igyk iqujh{k.k )
Plastics — Guidelines for the

Recovery and Recycling of Plastics
Waste
( First Revision )
ICS 83.080.10
© BIS 2016
Hkkjrh; ekud C;wjks

NEW DELHI-110002
May 2016 Price Group 5
For BIS use only, New Delhi:2021-09-01 20:54:40

Plastics Sectional Committee, PCD 12
FOREWORD
the Plastics Sectional Committee had been approved by the Petroleum, Coal and Related Products Division
Council.
Recycling/reprocessing of plastics waste/scrap are not new to India. The Indian processors are already collecting
the plastics waste/scrap of all sorts and converting into pellets for re-use. Need for recycling/reprocessing of
plastics became more relevant with increase in the plastics consumption and also with availability of waste/scrap
plastics in huge quantities. The methods of recycling and the technology used for the same at present are quite
outmoded and need upgrading. Plastics waste scarp also occurs in the commingled form and has, therefore, to be
segregated before being recycled/reprocessed. It is essential to segregate the plastics waste/scrap fully and not to
attempt reprocessing of commingled plastics waste/scrap without appropriate technologies.
Keeping above in mind this standard was first published in 1998 which covered classification of recycling,
identification making of plastics, steps involved in its recycling etc. The standard also suggested various end
products using appropriate types of recycled/reprocessed plastics waste/scrap.
In 2008, the ISO Technical Committee on Plastics, ISO/TC 61 formulated Guidelines for recovery and recycle of
plastics waste, ISO 15270. This International Standard was developed to assist all plastics industry stakeholders
in the development of
— a sustainable global infrastructure for plastics recovery and recycling; and
— a sustainable market for recovered plastics materials and their derived manufactured products.
In view of the rampant use of plastics and its unchecked disposal, it was felt necessary by the Sectional Committee
to adopt ISO 15270 after modification to suit country’s need. Hence in this revision, ISO 15270 has been adopted
with modifications. The aspects related to identification marking on plastics and suggested various end products
using appropriate types of recycled/reprocessed plastics waste/scrap has been retained as the Committee felt the
need to retain them. Retaining the identification of plastics (7.2) is necessary as The Plastic Waste (Management
and Handling) Rules, 2011 refers IS 14534 to mark labels on recycled plastics.
Further in this revision while all the clauses of ISO 15270 have been adopted except clause 7, modifications to
clauses 5.2.2.1, 5.2.4 and 5.3 has been done to suit Indian requirements. List of other International Standards and
directives etc. on the subject has been included in bibliography as Annex C for information.

IS 14534 : 2016
Indian Standard
PLASTICS — GUIDELINES FOR THE RECOVERY AND
RECYCLING OF PLASTICS WASTE
( First Revision )
1 SCOPE 3.1 Agglomerate — Shredded and/or granulated
plastics material in the form of particles which cling
1.1 This standard prescribes guidelines for the
together.
selection, segregation and processing of plastics waste/
scrap. It establishes the different options for the 3.2 Baling — Process in which plastics waste is
recovery of plastics waste arising from pre-consumer compacted and secured as a bundle to facilitate
and post-consumer sources as illustrated handling, storage and transportation.
diagrammatically in Annex A. The standard also
3.3 Batch — Quantity of material regarded as a single
establishes the quality requirements that should be
unit, and having a unique reference.
considered in all steps of the recovery process. The
process stages, requirements, recommendations and NOTE — Batch is primarily a processing term.
terminology presented in this standard are intended to 3.4 Biodegradation — Degradation caused by
be of general applicability. biological activity, especially by enzymatic action,
1.2 This standard also prescribes guidelines to the leading to a significant change in the chemical structure
manufacturers of plastic products with regard to the of a material (see IS/ISO 16929).
marking to be used on the finished product in order to 3.5 Biological Recycling — Aerobic (composting) or
facilitate identification of the basic raw material. It will anaerobic (digestion) treatment of biodegradable
also help in identifying whether the material used on plastics waste under controlled conditions using micro-
the end product is virgin, recyclate or a blend of virgin organisms to produce, in the presence of oxygen,
and recyclate. stabilized organic residues, carbon dioxide and water
or, in the absence of oxygen, stabilized organic
2 REFERENCES
residues, methane, carbon dioxide and water.
The following standards contain provisions which,
3.6 Collection — Logistical process of moving plastics
waste from its source to a place where it can be
recovered.
revision and parties to agreements based on this 3.7 Commingled Plastics — Mixture of materials or
standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility products consisting of different types of plastics.
of applying the most recent editions of the standard NOTE — The term “mixed plastics” is used synonymously.
indicated below.
3.8 Contaminant — Unwanted substance or material.
IS/ISO No. Title
IS 2828 : 2001/ Plastics — Vocabulary (first NOTE — The term “impurity” is a deprecated synonym of
contaminant and should not be used.
ISO 472 : 1999 revision)
IS/ISO 14021 : Environmental labels and 3.9 Converter — Specialized operator capable of
1999 declarations — Self-declared shaping plastics raw material to make a usable semi-
environmental claims (Type II finished or finished product.
Environmental labelling)
3.10 Depolymerization — Chemical reversion of a
IS 14535 : 1998 Recycled plastics for the
polymer to its monomer(s) or to a polymer of lower
manufacturing of products —
relative molecular mass (see IS 2828).
Designation
3.11 Energy Recovery — Production of useful energy
3 TERMINOLOGY through direct and controlled combustion.
For the purposes of this standard, the terms and NOTE — Solid-waste incinerators producing hot water, steam
definitions given in IS 2828 shall apply, in addition to and/or electricity are a common form of energy recovery.
the following: 3.12 Environmental Aspect — Element of an

IS 14534 : 2016
organization’s activities or products or services that has fulfilled its intended purpose or can no longer be
can interact with the environment (see IS/ISO 14001). used (including material returned from within the
distribution chain).
3.13 Environmental Impact — Any change to the
environment, whether adverse or beneficial, wholly or NOTE — The term “post-use” is sometimes used
synonymously.
partially resulting from an organization’s
environmental aspects (see IS/ISO 14001). 3.25 Pre-Consumer — Descriptive term covering
3.14 Feedstock Recycling — Conversion to monomer material diverted during a manufacturing process.
or production of new raw materials by changing the NOTES
chemical structure of plastics waste through cracking, 1 This term excludes re-utilized material, such as rework,
gasification or depolymerization, excluding energy regrind or scrap that has been generated in a given process and
is capable of being reclaimed within that same process.
recovery and incineration.
2 The term “post-industrial material” is sometimes used
NOTE — Feedstock recycling and chemical recycling are synonymously.
synonyms.
3.26 Purge Material — Material resulting from the
3.15 Flake — Plate-like regrind. passing of polymer through plastics processing
NOTE — The shape of regrind depends both on the plastics equipment for the purpose of cleaning the equipment,
being processed and the manner of processing. or when changing from one polymer to another, or
3.16 Fluff — Filament-like regrind when changing from one colour or grade of polymer
to another.
NOTE — Common usage of the term “fluff” also includes
shredder residue fractions produced in the commercial recycling 3.27 Recovered Material — Plastics material that has
of durable goods such as automobiles. been separated, diverted or removed from the solid-
3.17 Homogenizing — Processing to improve the waste stream in order to be recycled or used to
degree to which a constituent and/or property is substitute virgin raw materials (see IS/ISO 14021).
uniformly distributed throughout a quantity of plastics 3.28 Recovery — Processing of plastics waste material
material [see EN 14899 : 2005). for the original purpose or for other purposes, including
3.18 Landfill — Waste disposal site for the deposit of energy recovery.
waste on to or into land under controlled or regulated 3.29 Recyclate — Plastics material resulting from the
conditions. recycling of plastics waste.
3.19 Lot — Definite quantity of some commodity NOTES
manufactured or produced under conditions that are 1 The terms “plastics secondary raw material”, “recycled
presumed uniform (see IS 2828). plastics” and “regenerate” are sometimes used synonymously.
2 As soon as the used plastics material has been treated in such
NOTE — Lot is primarily a commercial term. a way that it is ready to replace a virgin product, material or
3.20 Material Recovery — Material-processing substance in a production process, it loses its characteristics as
waste.
operations including mechanical recycling, feedstock
(chemical) recycling and organic recycling, but 3.30 Recycling — Processing of plastics waste
excluding energy recovery. materials for the original purpose or for other purposes,
excluding energy recovery.
3.21 Mechanical Recycling — Processing of plastics
waste into secondary raw material or products without 3.31 Regrind — Shredded and/or granulated recovered
significantly changing the chemical structure of the plastics material in the form of free-flowing material.
material. NOTE — The term “regrind” is frequently used to describe
NOTE — Plastics secondary raw material is a synonym of plastics material in the form of scrap generated in a plastics
recyclate. processing operation and re-used in-house. This term is also
used to describe fine plastics powder used as filler in the
3.22 Micronizing — Process by which a plastics recovery of plastics.
material is ground into a fine powder.
3.32 Re-use — Use of a product more than once in its
3.23 Organic Recycling — Controlled original form.
microbiological treatment of biodegradable plastics
NOTE — In view of the fact that a re-used product has not
waste under aerobic or anaerobic conditions. been discarded, re-use does not constitute a recovery option.
NOTE — The term “biological recycling” is used synonymously.
3.33 Shredding — Any mechanical process by which
3.24 Post-Consumer — Descriptive term covering plastics waste is fragmented into irregular pieces of
material, generated by the end-users of products, that any dimension or shape.

IS 14534 : 2016
NOTE — Shredding usually signifies the tearing or cutting of or energy content requirements. Relevant selection
materials that cannot be crushed by fragmentation methods
criteria include the relative costs, competitiveness and
applicable to brittle materials, as typically carried out in a
hammer mill. environmental performance of the available options
(see Annex A). Access to markets for recovered
3.34 Waste — Any material or object which the holder materials or energy is an important consideration.
discards, or intends to discard, or is required to discard.
NOTE — Concepts and definitions of recovery are continually
evolving. The basic principle of recovery lies in the
4 SOURCE
transformation of an input (waste) into an output (product).
Plastics material for recovery may be obtained from Recovery is considered to be complete when secondary
materials, fuels or products have been manufactured, or energy
various sources, including the following: has been generated, in accordance with consensus- standardized
criteria. Plastics recyclate with specified properties (secondary
4.1 Pre-consumer Sources of Materials raw material) is a product, and recovery is considered to be
accomplished when this product has been produced and has
4.1.1 Plastics Producers become commercially available, or energy has been generated
— off-grade materials. (see Annex A and Annex B).
4.1.2 Plastics Processors 5.2 Material Recovery

— processing purge material and scrap; 5.2.1 General
— scrap products, parts and semi-finished Material recovery of plastics waste encompasses three
products. distinct recycling routes: mechanical recycling,
4.1.3 Others feedstock or chemical recycling, and biological or
organic recycling.
— industrial and commercial products made of,
or containing, plastics, including packaging 5.2.2 Mechanical Recycling
and containers. 5.2.2.1 Sequence of operations
4.2 Post-consumer Sources of Materials The mechanical recycling option generally comprises
the following sequence of unit operations, some of
4.2.1 Disposables
which may occur simultaneously, that are carried out
— personal goods; as part of the recyclate preparation and production
— packaging films and containers. process:
NOTE — Such disposables may be recovered by sorted For plastics: collection  identification  sorting
municipal collection systems or by specific consumer incentive  grinding  washing  drying  separating
systems on containers or by any other organized/unorganized
individual or group of individuals for economic benefits.
 agglomerating/mixing  extruding/compounding
 pelletizing
4.2.2 Durable Goods
For reinforced plastics: collection  identification
— domestic appliances;  sorting  grinding  washing  separating
— electronic equipment; NOTES
— transportation equipment; 1 In practice, many plastics compounders use plastics recyclates
in the form of flake as feedstock, eliminating the need for a
— construction products;
prior pelletization step.
— industrial equipment. 2 In the case of ground plastics waste used as a secondary raw
material as aggregate in mortar or cement, the sequence of unit
NOTE — End-of-life products such as electronic equipment or
operations is: collection  identification  sorting  grinding
automobiles may be returned by the consumer to specialized
operators for recovery. Similarly, during building demolition  product.
operations, plastics materials and products may be segregated 3 In some cases where the sorting process is able to group the
and recovered. same type of plastics waste together, the “separating process”
after washing and drying may not be necessary.
5 RECOVERY Plastics waste for mechanical recycling may be offered
in the form of bulk waste as collected, or in an added-
5.1 General
value, sorted grade. As a general rule, manufacturers
Selection of the appropriate recovery option will and users of plastics materials and derived products
depend on many factors, such as the quality, quantity are advised to provide mechanical recyclers with the
and availability of the plastics waste, the availability necessary thermal-stability, reactivity and other data
and capability of existing technologies and equipment, in material safety data sheets or other appropriate
and the relevant recovery targets in terms of material documentation.

IS 14534 : 2016
5.2.2.2 Pre-treatment if manual sorting cannot be avoided, the workplace shall

be designed to minimize such problems.
Depending both on the intended application of the
recyclate and on the characteristics of the waste stream, NOTES
a preparatory step may be used to decontaminate as 1 Pre-consumer products can generally be sorted by type of
plastic, in order to permit their re-use in the production process.
far as practically possible the collected materials and
Re-use of post-consumer products is generally rendered more
products, and to optimize their handling characteristics complex as a result of their contamination by adventitious
for shipping, processing and other downstream heterogeneous plastics waste.
operations. In the absence of homogeneous plastics 2 Some post-consumer materials may consist of the same basic
waste consisting of materials of similar grade or type, plastic containing fractions with different material properties
such as in the case of HDPE bottles having different melt flow
material identification, sorting and separation steps rates, densities or colours. This may lead, as output of the next
become essential, such as in specialized sorting centres regenerating step, to recyclates with distinct, controlled levels
for household packaging or end-of-life electrical and of physical characteristics. In some cases, it may not be
electronic equipment. Wherever possible, these pre- practically or commercially viable to achieve the desired levels
of separation or cleanliness, with the result that the output
selective operational steps should be carried out prior consists of recyclates suited only for applications with lower
to any downstream mixing (commingling) with other requirements, as in the case of certain commingled plastics.
waste streams. In some cases, particularly affecting Standards for the characterization of recyclates may be efficient
post-consumer sources, attainment of this objective will tools for assessing the fit with the requirements of market
outlets.
require automated separation and sorting unit
3 Recycling of reinforced plastics may be carried out in some
operations. In the absence of such automatic process cases without separating the polymeric matrix from fibre
control, precise identification of the sources of the reinforcements. When sufficiently efficient separation, as
components of the waste may be of crucial importance. required for the desired property profile of the recyclate, is not
feasible at this preparatory process stage, appropriate
NOTE — In order to optimize the recovery efficiency of plastics preliminary operations should be conducted at the next
products and component parts, it is desirable to design for ease regenerating step.
of disassembly and material identification as well as for
minimization of variety in the types of plastic used in their 5.2.2.3 Recyclate production process
manufacture. Such criteria may evolve as a function of the future
development and implementation of technical options for The commercial production of plastics recyclate
resource recovery. comprises various unit operations, including the
5.2.2.2.1 Identification separation of materials, efficient removal of
contaminants by washing or other methods, drying
Various in-line analytical methods using techniques where appropriate, handling, constitution of lots,
such as infrared analysis and trace-element tracking storage, packaging and shipment. In addition, other
are available for the identification of specific types of processes, such as grinding, additional sorting,
plastic and associated additives, thus permitting their homogenizing, extruding, pelletizing, micronizing or
efficient downstream separation and segregation. dissolution in solvent, may be necessary in order to
NOTE — In some cases, identification codes, moulded into or regenerate the plastics material.
printed on to plastics parts or products, will also provide a means
of separating materials, by type of plastic, at any point in the Recyclates are usually conditioned as agglomerate or
process, including the post-consumer stage, during manual or regrind in the form of fluff, flake, chips, pellets or
automatic sorting at the collection facility, and during powder. Addition of modifiers or stabilizers may also
disassembly of durable goods. In addition, other methods are be carried out in order to enhance the value of
often used to identify specific types of plastic, for example by
the part shape or geometry, or acoustically by impact noise, or recyclates for subsequent use.
by combustion odour and copper wire corrosion test procedures. NOTE — All separated contaminants, such as those entrained
5.2.2.2.2 Separation and sorting in waste water, should be taken into account and handled
properly during these preparatory steps.
Plastics separation and sorting operations, which are 5.2.3 Feedstock or Chemical Recycling
generally required in all material recovery processes,
may be carried out manually or automatically using Using various processes, well-known within the
appropriate means of identification. The more accurate petrochemical industry, it is possible to convert some
and efficient the means of identification, sorting and plastics into their basic monomeric chemical
separation, the better is the quality of the recovered constituents or into hydrocarbon fractions. These
product obtained. Depending on specific circumstances, chemicals can then be used either as polymerization
a compaction process such as crushing or baling, or a feedstock or in other chemical processes.
size reduction process such as grinding or shredding, NOTES
may be necessary to ensure easier handling. In manual 1 The depolymerization technique has already been demonstrated,
sorting risk of chemical, microbiological and ergonomic for example for PET obtained from post-consumer packaging
problems due to repetitive work can appear. Therefore sources such as collected commingled plastic bottles where the

IS 14534 : 2016
PET is sorted and subsequently depolymerized, generating and quality control.

monomer feedstock for polymerization and the subsequent
NOTE — A suitable traceability system for the target market
manufacture of products such as bottles and fibres. In the case of
may be set up based on appropriate standards from the
some acrylic polymers, such as methyl methacrylate, monomer
IS/ISO 9000 and IS/ISO 14000 series. If relevant, provisions
obtained by depolymerization also provides feedstock for
of IS/ISO 14021 concerning self-declared environmental claims
commercial polymerization processes.
should also be met.
2 Suitable plastics wastes, as well as their derivative
hydrocarbon fractions, have been used as reducing agents in 6.2 Contamination
blast furnaces and can be used in metal-smelting operations.
Contaminants in recyclates may be polymeric in nature
5.2.4 Biological or Organic Recycling
(for example the inclusion of different polymers or of
Biodegradation is a viable option for the treatment of different grades and compounds of the same polymer)
certain types of plastics waste in what is referred to as or non-polymeric (for example the presence in the
organic or biological recycling. Such plastics may be original polymers of various functional additives,
treated by aerobic or anaerobic decomposition reinforcements or fillers such as are defined in
processes, after collection and separation of non- ISO 1043-2, ISO 1043-3 or ISO 1043-4). They may
biodegradable contaminants. There is generally no also be undefined as in the case of adventitious
need to separate biodegradable contaminants such as contaminants such as labels, closures, metal inserts,
foodstuffs or vegetable matter residues from plastics dirt and residual contents of plastics containers or
that meet the biodegradability and compostability packaging.
requirements of standards such as IS/ISO 17088,
NOTES
ASTM D 6400, ASTM D 6868 or EN 13432 (see 1 Relevant information about composition, additives, colorants,
Annex C ). In the context of mechanical recycling, fillers and reinforcing materials are also summarized in the
however, such plastics may themselves constitute material designation in International Standards. Excessive levels
contaminants if they are likely to be subject to thermal of contamination may degrade the quality of recyclates to the
extent of rendering the recovered materials useless because of
degradation and decomposition at the prevailing problems such as deterioration of their physical properties,
recycling operating temperatures. incompatibility and unacceptability of odour. Contamination
levels may be minimized by a number of means, including the
5.3 Energy Recovery following:
Energy recovery is a viable option for consideration — clear identification and efficient sorting of materials and
products;
with plastics materials in the same way as the other
— careful handling in the collection, separation and sorting
recovery options discussed in this Standard. The direct phases;
combustion or co-combustion of plastics wastes in — effective separation and washing processes;
systems such as Plasma Pyrolysis Technology (PPT), — the use of melt filtering or other filtering systems, where
municipal solid-waste incinerators operating in appropriate.
compliance with regulatory requirements for emissions 2 In some cases, contaminants, if present in airborne dust for
and ash are notable examples of energy recovery. example, may necessitate special treatment during recovery
operations in order to ensure observance of industrial health
NOTE — Since most plastics waste is hydrocarbon in nature, and safety requirements.
it possesses an inherently high calorific value. Because of this,
the final utilization of the recovered plastics stream as a fuel 6.3 Visual and Aesthetic Aspects
can be very effective, provided that adequate attention is given
to the control of factors such as combustion by-products. This In most cases, provided adequate controls and good
is demonstrated by the successful application of this recovery manufacturing practices are employed, visual and
option in industrial processes and systems for steam generation,
in electricity co-generation as well as in lime and cement kilns. aesthetic properties such as colour, transparency and
cleanliness should be provided when dealing with
6 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS recyclate generated from industrial sources of pre-
consumer material.
6.1 General
In the case of recovered material obtained from post-
Selection of any one of the available recycling options consumer sources, however, visual and aesthetic
should be based on compliance with the following aspects often present major difficulties, especially
requirements: when the recovered materials or products consist of a
a) the need to minimize adverse environmental wide variety of containers and disposables from diverse
impact; sources and applications. Consequently, even if
b) prior demonstration of sustainable effective separation is accomplished, efficient sorting
commercial viability; and of the various streams on the basis of colour or other
characteristics can sometime be difficult.
c) secure access to viable systems for collection

IS 14534 : 2016
6.4 Properties of Recyclates USA and adopted in the Plastic Waster (Management
and Handling) Rules, 2011 are as follows:
The properties of plastics recyclate may be affected
by previous exposure to a wide variety of service
environments as well as by other factors such as the
presence of contaminants, and chemical or structural
changes occurring during processing and recycling.
NOTE — PET — Polyethylene terephthalate. HDPE — High
Application of proper sorting techniques, minimization density polyethylene, V — Vinyl (PVC), LDPE — Low density
of contaminant levels as well as the observance of polyethylene. PP — Polypropylene. PS - Polystyrene and other
appropriate recovery practices will minimize adverse means all other resins and multi-materials, like ABS
(Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene), PPO (Polyphenylene oxide),
effects on the properties of the recyclate. This may be
PC (Polycarbonate), PBT (Polybutylene terephthalate), etc.
monitored by conducting tests appropriate to the
requirements of the intended application. Specific While marking the symbol 7, the respective basic raw
material properties of plastics recyclates may be material like ABS, PPO, PC, PBT, etc, and mixed shall
enhanced by the addition of property-modifying be indicated below the symbol.
additives, including virgin plastics material. Any 7.2.2 In addition to the symbol indicated at 7.2.1 the
compounded additives that are present should be end product made out of recycled/reprocessed plastics
disclosed in material specifications as well as in the shall be marked with ‘Recycled indicating percentage
material safety data sheets required by the regulator. of use of recycled material’.
6.5 Criteria for Acceptance Example : ‘This product contains 20 to 30 percent post
The criteria for the acceptance of recyclate for a consumer recycled plastics.’
specific application are governed by the requirements Alternatively, the following codification shall be used:
of the application and by the agreement between the
supplier and the user. These may include such R0 — No recycle/reprocess
information as: R1 — Less than 10 percent
R2 — 11 to 20 percent
a) proper identification, including the batch R3 — 21 to 30 percent
numbers of the identified polymer;
b) data on additives, fillers, colours and R5 — 41 to 50 percent
pigments, if any, reinforcements and
composition, such as the nature and
concentration of contaminants and the content
of identified polymers and recyclates; and R8 — 71 to 80 percent
c) mechanical, physical and chemical properties
and packaging requirements. Rl0 — over 90 percent
NOTE — The performance-based properties of specified The following information shall also be printed
recyclates will have to satisfy the requirements of any specific bilingually, English/Hindi and local language wherever
application. This requirement is of critical importance in order possible on the end-product for the benefit of users/
to promote and develop the use of recycled plastics.
re-processors:
7 GUIDELINES FOR MARKING ‘This product (like carry bags/shopping bags,
bottles, blow-mounded containers, etc) is
7.1 This prescribes guidelines to the manufacturers of made of (indicate materials) and is reusable/
plastic products with regard to the marking to be used recyclable.’
on the finished product in order to facilitate identification
of the basic raw material. It will also help in identifying However, carry bag/containers made out of recycled
whether the material used on the end product is virgin, plastics shall be labelled as ‘Not suitable for packaging/
recyclate or a blend of virgin and recyclate. carrying food products, pharmaceuticals and drinking
water’.
7.2 Identification Marking
7.3 To prevent pollution, appropriate measures shall
7.2.1 The manufacturers of plastics end products from be taken to dispose of the effluent and emission
either virgin or recycled plastics shall mark the symbol generated as a result of any operation of recycling and
at the time of processing in order to help the re- the provision of Pollution Control Acts, Environment
processors to identify the basic raw material. The (Protection) Act, 1986 and any Rules framed
symbols defined by Society of the Plastic Industry (SPI), thereunder shall be complied.

IS 14534 : 2016
7.4 Degradable polymers shall not be mixed with

Product Material
normal plastics for recycling. Such plastics shall be
segregated and isolated before recycling. g) Building products — Wood PS, PVC,
7.5 The recycled materials shall be designated in substitute such as fencing, PC
accordance with IS 14535. shingles, etc.
7.6 A typical suggested end-products using appropriate h) Municipal supplies — Garbage PE, PP
bins, wheel burrows, etc
types of recycled/reprocessed plastics waste/scrap is
as follows: j) Carpets and floor mats, playground PE, PP,
equipments, jacket, T-shirts, PET, PS
Product Material sports-wear, geo-textiles, tool
handles, footwear, luggage, etc
a) Trash/Garbage bags PE
k) Recreational equipments — PE, PP
b) Carry bags PE Garden furniture, etc., PP-
c) Office supplies — File folders, binder PVC, PE, Comparatives
covers, presentation folders, etc PP
m) Twine (Sutli), box strapping for PP. PE,
d) Non food containers for detergents, PE, PP, PS, packaging Nylon
petroleum products, pallets, including PET
reusable packaging containers n) Pipes and fittings for cable, PVC, PE,
e) Containers for eggs, fruits and PE, PP, PS ducts/conduits SWR, drainage, PP)
vegetable agricultural
f) Horticultural supplies — Planters, PE, PVC, p) Shoes, chappals PVC
trays, flowerpots, nursery bags. PP PS q) Film, sheet for non-food PET, PVC,
tarpaulins ice applications PE, PP

IS 14534 : 2016
ANNEX A
(Informative)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF SOME PLASTICS RECOVERY OPTIONS

IS 14534 : 2016
ANNEX B
(Informative)
PLASTICS RECOVERY AND INTEGRATED RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

IS 14534 : 2016
ANNEX C
(Foreword)
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. ISO 1043-1 : 2011, Plastics — Symbols and 14. EN 15342, Plastics — Recycled plastics —
abbreviated terms — Part 1: Basic polymers Characterization of polystyrene (PS)
and their special characteristics recyclates
abbreviated terms — Part 2: Fillers and Plastics recycling traceability and assessment
reinforcing materials of conformity and recycled content
abbreviated terms — Part 3: Plasticizers Characterization of polyethylene (PE)
4. ISO 1043-4 : 1998, Plastics — Symbols and recyclates
abbreviated terms — Part 4: Flame retardants 17. EN 15345, Plastics — Recycled plastics —
5. IS/ISO 9000 : 2000, Quality management Characterization of polypropylene (PP)
systems — Fundamentals and vocabulary recyclates
6. ISO 11469, Plastics — Generic identification 18. EN 15346, Plastics — Recycled plastics —
and marking of plastics products Characterization of poly (vinyl chloride)
7. IS/ISO 14001 : 2004, Environmental (PVC) recyclates
management systems — Requirements with 19. EN 15347, Plastics — Recycled plastics —
guidance for use Characterization of plastics wastes
8. IS/ISO 16929 : 2002, Plastics — 20. EN 15348, Plastics — Recycled plastics —
Determination of the degree of disintegration Characterization of poly (ethylene
of plastic materials under defined composting terephthalate) (PET) recyclates
conditions in a pilot-scale test 21. CEN/TR 15353, Plastics — Recycled plastics
9. IS/ISO 17088 : 2012, Specifications for — Guidelines for the development of
compostable plastics standards for recycled plastics
10. EN 13432, Packaging — Requirements for 22. EN 17134, Classification and marking of
packaging recoverable through composting plastics recyclates — General
and biodegradation — Test scheme and 23. ASTM D 6400, Standard Specification for
evaluation criteria for the final acceptance of Compostable Plastics
packaging 24. ASTM D 6868, Standard Specification for
11. EN 13437, Packaging and material recycling Biodegradable Plastics Used as Coatings on
— Criteria for recycling methods — Paper and Other Compostable Substrates
Description of recycling processes and flow 25. Council Directive 1999/31/EC of 26 April
chart 1999 on the landfill of waste
12. CWA 14243, Post-consumer tyre materials 26. Council Directive 2000/53/EC of 18
and applications September 2000 on end-of-life vehicles
13. EN 14899, Characterization of waste — (definition of energy recovery)
Sampling of waste materials — Framework 27. Council directive 75/442/EEC of 15 July 1975
for the preparation and application of a on Waste
Sampling Plan
10

Copyright
This Indian Standard has been developed from Doc No.: PCD 12 (2576).

Headquarters:

NEW DELHI 110002 { 2323 7617
2323 3841
KOLKATA 700054 { 2337 8499, 2337 8561
2337 8626, 2337 9120
{ 260 3843
260 9285
{ 2254 1216, 2254 1442
2254 2519, 2254 2315
MUMBAI 400093 { 2832 9295, 2832 7858
2832 7891, 2832 7892

IS 17899 T : 2022
Tentative Indian Standard
Assessment of Biodegradability of
Plastics in Varied Conditions
ICS 83.80.01
© BIS 2022
B U R E A U OF I N D I A N S T A N D A R D S

NEW DELHI-110002
www.bis.gov.in www.standardsbis.in
June 2022 Price Group 4

FOREWORD
This provisional Indian Standard was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized by the
Plastics Sectional Committee had been approved by the Petroleum, Coal and Related Products Division Council.
Through Plastic Waste Management (PWM) Rules 2021, the Government of India prohibited manufacturing,
import, stocking, distribution, sale and use of several single use plastics (SUPs) from 1st July 2022. The Rule 10
of PWM Rules 2016 “Protocols for Compostable Plastic Material” has been substituted with “Protocols for
Compostable and Biodegradable Plastic Materials” through Draft PWM Rules 2022. The rule states that
Biodegradable Plastics shall be as per appropriate Standard developed by Bureau of Indian Standards.
Therefore, due to urgent need of Indian Standard for implementation of PWM Rules, the Committee has decided
to formulate a comprehensive indigenous Indian Standard for biodegradable plastic. As the technology is new and
there are no international standards and validated data for the biodegradation of Plastics in environment like
aqueous and marine medium, the Committee has decided to formulate a provisional Indian Standard as per Rule
27 of BIS Rules, 2018. This provisional Standard has been formulated to specify the procedures for assessment
of the biodegradability of plastic in available varied conditions.
This provisional standard specifies the procedures for assessment of biodegradability of plastics, negative effects
of resulting biomass on terrestrial plant growth/organism and regulated heavy metals present in the biomass. This
standard is applicable only for the assessment of biodegradability of plastics in composting medium, soil medium,
municipal solid waste medium and aqueous medium. In this standard, the criteria for assessing the
biodegradability of plastics are applicable only in soil medium, municipal solid waste medium and composting
medium.
At present, there are no test methods available internationally to determine the biodegradability of plastic in marine
environment. The test methods are being developed by ISO for the same. Due to the unavailability of test methods
and validated data, biodegradation in marine environment is not covered in this standard.
This provisional standard contains the limits of regulated heavy metals to ensure safe application of biomass. The
values of the regulated heavy metals given in Table 1 and Table 2 have been taken from the Schedule II of Solid
Waste Management Rules, 2016.
This standard does not specify the service life or durability aspects of the plastic material under consideration.
As per the definition of biodegradable plastic given in Plastic Waste Management Rules 2016, duly amended, the
plastic material should not leave behind any micro plastics, or visible, distinguishable, or toxic residue, which has
adverse environment impacts. There are no validated test methods available for testing of microplastic, the same
will be introduced in the standard once available. Till the validated test methods are available, the 90 percent
biodegradation shall be considered as a safe threshold to rule out the presence of microplastic.
As per rule 27 of BIS rules, the provisional Indian Standard shall not be used for Standard Mark.
As per the recommendation of the Plastics Sectional Committee, and with the approval of Petroleum, Coal and
Related Products Division Council, this provisional standard is valid for a period of 2 years from the date of its
establishment. Before the expiry of the validity period, this provisional standard will be once again reviewed by
the Sectional Committee and will be established as a regular Indian Standard. However, if the Sectional
Committee is of the opinion that such standard should not be established, with or without modification, as a regular
Indian Standard, then this provisional Indian Standard shall lapse after its validity period.
The composition of the Committee responsible for the formulation of this standard is given in Annex A.
observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis shall be rounded off in accordance with IS 2 :
2022 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values (second revision)’. The number of significant places retained in
IS 17899 T : 2022
Tentative Indian Standard

ASSESSMENT OF BIODEGRADABILITY OF
PLASTICS IN VARIED CONDITIONS
1 SCOPE IS 3025 (Part 65) : 2022 Methods of sampling
/ISO 17294-2 : 2016 and test (Physical and
1.1 This provisional standard specifies the Chemical) for water and
procedures and assessment of biodegradability of wastewater:
plastics under varied conditions. This provisional Part 65 Application of
standard addresses the following aspects: inductively coupled
plasma mass
a) Biodegradation spectrometry (ICP-MS)
b) Negative effects of resulting biomass on — Determination of 62
terrestrial plant growth/organism. elements (first revision)
c) Negative effects of the quality of the resulting
biomass including the presence of high levels IS/ISO 14851 : 1999 Determination of the
ultimate aerobic
of regulated heavy metals.
biodegradability of
plastic materials in an
1.2 The provisional standard is applicable for aqueous medium —
assessing the biodegradability of plastics under Method by measuring
aerobic, anaerobic conditions. the oxygen demand in a
closed respirometer
1.3 The provisional standard is not applicable for
assessing the biodegradability of plastics under IS/ISO 14852 : 1999 Determination of the
marine environment. ultimate aerobic
biodegradability of
1.4 The assessment of biodegradability of plastic, if plastic materials in an
done through composting conditions only, vide aqueous medium —
IS/ISO 14855-1 and IS/ISO 14855-2, the plastic shall Method by analysis of
be certified as compostable plastic, and not as evolved carbon dioxide
biodegradable plastic as defined under PWM Rules
2016, as amended. IS/ISO 14853 : 2016 Plastics —
Determination of the
1.5 This provisional standard excludes compostable ultimate anaerobic
plastics as per IS/ISO 17088, as per PWM Rules biodegradation of plastic
2016, as amended. materials in an aqueous
system — Method by
2 REFERENCES measurement of biogas
production (first
The standards and the other publications listed revision)
below contain provisions which, through reference
in this text, constitute provisions of this standard. At IS/ISO 14855–1 : 2012 Determination of the
the time of publication, the editions indicated were ultimate aerobic
valid. All standards are subject to revision, and biodegradability of
parties to agreements based on this standard are plastic materials under
encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying controlled composting
the most recent editions of the standards listed conditions — Method by
below. analysis of evolved
carbon dioxide : Part 1
IS No./Other publication Title General method (first
revision)
IS 2828 : 2019/ Plastics — Vocabulary
ISO 472 : 2013 (second revision)
1
IS 17899 T : 2022
IS No./Other publication Title

Determination of effects
IS/ISO 14855-2 : 2018 Determination of the on reproduction of
ultimate aerobic Eisenia fetida/Eisenia
biodegradability of Andrei
plastic materials under
controlled composting OECD 208 : 2016 Terrestrial plant test:
conditions — Method by Seedling emergence and
analysis of evolved seedling growth test
carbon dioxide: Part 2
Gravimetric 3 TERMINOLOGY
measurement of carbon
dioxide evolved in a 3.1 For the purpose of this provisional standard,
laboratory-scale test (first definition given below and in IS 2828 shall apply.
revision)
IS 15109 (Part 2) : 2002 Soil quality — 3.2 Compostable Plastics1
/ISO 11269-2 : 1995 Determination of the
effects of pollutants on Plastic that undergoes degradation by biological
soil flora: Part 2 Effects process during composting to yield carbon dioxide,
of contaminated soil on water, inorganic compounds and biomass at a rate
the emergence and early consistent with other known compostable materials
growth of higher plants and leave no visible, distinguishable or toxic
(first revision) residue.
IS/ISO 15985 : 2014 Plastics — 3.3 Microplastic

ultimate anaerobic Any solid plastic particle insoluble in water with any
biodegradation under dimension between 1 μm and 1 000 μm (=1 mm).
high-solids anaerobic-
digestion conditions — NOTE — The above definition is being formalised at
Method by analysis of ISO technical committee, once finalized, the
released biogas (first definition would be adopted from the ISO document.
revision)
3.4 Ultimate Aerobic Biodegradation1
IS/ISO 17088 : 2021 Compostable plastics —
Specification (second Breakdown of an organic compound by
revision) microorganisms in the presence of oxygen into
carbon dioxide, water and mineral salts of any other
IS/ISO 17556 : 2019 Plastics — elements present (mineralization) plus new biomass.
ultimate aerobic 3.5 Ultimate Anaerobic Biodegradation2
biodegradability of
plastic materials in soil Breakdown of an organic compound by
by measuring the oxygen microorganisms in the absence of oxygen to carbon
demand in a dioxide, methane, water, and mineral salts of any
respirometer or the other elements present (mineralization) plus new
amount of carbon biomass.
dioxide evolved (second
revision) NOTES:
1 As per IS/ISO 17088
2 As per IS/ISO 15985
ISO 11268-1 Soil quality — Effects of
pollutants on 4 REQUIREMENTS
earthworms — Part 1:
Determination of acute 4.1 The purpose of this provisional standard is to
toxicity to Eisenia establish the requirements for plastics to meet the
fetida/Eisenia Andrei desired criteria under varied conditions. In order to
comply with this document, plastics shall
ISO 11268-2 Soil quality — Effects of demonstrate biodegradation (aerobic or anaerobic),
pollutants on safe limits for toxic residue and no adverse effects
earthworms — Part 2: on environment as mentioned in 4.2 to 4.4.
2
IS 17899 T : 2022
4.2 The level of biodegradability of the plastics shall

be assessed by testing under controlled conditions as 1 The plastic meeting the biodegradability
given below. criteria as per IS/ISO 14855-1 and IS/ISO
14855-2, shall only be considered for
4.2.1 Ultimate Aerobic Biodegradability certification as ‘Compostable plastics’ in
accordance with PWM Rules 2016, as
The ultimate level of aerobic biodegradation shall be
amended.
established by testing under controlled conditions in
accordance with the following standards: 2 Further, this provisional standard excludes
‘Compostable plastics’ as per IS/ISO 17088,
IS Number Conditions under PWM Rules 2016, as amended.
IS/ISO 14851 Aqueous medium 4.3 Assessment of Toxic Residues

(activated sludge from a
sewage treatment plant) 4.3.1 The assessment of toxic residues (regulated
IS/ISO 14852 Aqueous medium metal content) can only be analyzed after successful
(activated sludge from a completion of the biodegradation phase.
sewage treatment plant)
IS/ISO 14855 (Part 1) Composting 4.3.2 The resultant biomass shall be analyzed for
IS/ISO 14855 (Part 2) Composting heavy metal content as per Table 1 and Table 2 and
IS/ISO 17556 Soil tested as per IS 3025 (Part 65).
4.2.2 Ultimate Anaerobic Biodegradability 4.4 Assessment of Adverse Effect on

Environment
The ultimate level of anaerobic biodegradation shall
be established by testing under controlled typical 4.4.1 The plastics shall have no adverse effect on the
anaerobic digestion conditions in accordance with environment, which includes terrestrial organisms.
the following standards: Thus, the analysis requires determination of eco
toxicity testing as per column 4 of Table 1 and Table
IS Number Conditions 2, for assessment of adverse effect of resulting
biomass on terrestrial environment and plant growth
IS/ISO 15985 Municipal solid waste test.
IS/ISO 14853 Aqueous medium
(sludge with reduced 4.4.2 The biodegradability of the plastics under
inorganic carbon content various conditions should confirm to the following
less than 20 mg/l) requirements as specified in Table 1 or Table 2.
NOTES:
3
IS 17899 T : 2022
Table 1 Assessment of Aerobic Biodegradability in Plastics under varied conditions

______________________________________________________________________________________
Sl Characteristics Requirement Method of Test,
No. Ref to
(1) (2) (3) (4)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
i) Ultimate aerobic biodegradability of plastic 90 percent by the end of IS/ISO 14855-1 or

materials under composting conditions, Min the test period of 180 IS/ISO 14855-2
days
Ultimate aerobic biodegradability of plastic - do - IS/ISO 14851 or
materials in an aqueous medium, Min IS/ISO 14852
ii) Ultimate aerobic biodegradation of plastic 90 percent of the max IS/ISO 17556
materials in soil, Min level of biodegradation
has been reached
typically not exceeding
six months but no longer
than 2 years
Regulated Heavy Metal Analysis
iii) Arsenic (as As), mg/kg on dry mass basis, 10.00

Max
iv) Cadmium (as Cd), mg/kg on dry mass basis, 5.00
Max
v) Chromium (as Cr), mg/kg on dry mass 50.00
basis, Max
vi) Copper (as Cu), mg/kg on dry mass basis, 300.00 IS 3025 (Part 65)
Max
vii) Lead (as Pb), mg/kg on dry mass basis, Max 100.00
viii) Mercury (as Hg), mg/kg on dry mass basis, 0.15
Max
ix) Nickel (as Ni), mg/kg on dry mass basis, 50.00
Max
x) Zinc (as Zn), mg/kg on dry mass basis, Max 1000.00
Eco-toxicity Test
xi) Assessment of adverse impact on 90 percent plant OECD 208 / ISO

environment (Terrestrial plants growth test),
germination and plant 11269-2 / Annex-
Min biomass compared to C of IS/ISO 17088
control.
xii) Determination of acute/chronic ecotoxicity 90 percent of surviving ISO 11268-1 /
effects to earthworm, Min earthworm grown in Annex-D of
sample compost exposed IS/ISO 17088
to test material as well as and
reference compost ISO11268-2 /
exposed to reference Annex-E of
material IS/ISO 17088
__________________________________________________________________________________________
4
IS 17899 : 2022
Table 2 Assessment of Aerobic Biodegradability in Plastics

______________________________________________________________________________________
Sl Characteristics Requirement Method of Test,
No. Ref to
(1) (2) (3) (4)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
i) Ultimate anaerobic biodegradation, Min 90 percent within 2 IS/ISO 15985 or

years IS/ISO 14853
Regulated Heavy Metal Analysis
ii) Arsenic (as As), mg/kg on dry mass basis,

Max 10.00
iii) Cadmium (as Cd), mg/kg on dry mass basis, 5.00
Max
iv) Chromium (as Cr), mg/kg on dry mass 50.00
basis, Max
v) Copper (as Cu), mg/kg on dry mass basis, 300.00 As per IS 3025 (Part
Max 65)
vi) Lead (as Pb), mg/kg on dry mass basis, Max 100.00
vii) Mercury (as Hg), mg/kg on dry mass basis, 0.15
Max
viii) Nickel (as Ni), mg/kg on dry mass basis, 50.00
Max
ix) Zinc (as Zn), mg/kg on dry mass basis, Max 1000.00
Eco-toxicity Test
x) Assessment of adverse impact on 90 percent plant OECD 208 / ISO

environment (Terrestrial plants growth test), germination and plant 11269-2 / Annex-C of
Min biomass compared to IS/ISO 17088
control.
xi) Determination of acute/chronic ecotoxicity 90 percent of surviving ISO 11268-1 / Annex-

effects to earthworm, Min earthworm grown in D of IS/ISO 17088
sample compost exposed
to test material as well as and
reference compost
exposed to reference ISO11268-2 / Annex-
material E of IS/ISO 17088
___________________________________________________________________________
5
IS 17899 T : 2022
ANNEX A
(Foreword)
Central Institute of Plastics Engineering & Technology PROF (DR) SHISHIR SINHA (Chairman)
(CIPET), Chennai DR S. N . YADAV
DR SMITA MOHANTY (Alternate)
CSIR-Central Food Technological Research Institute SHRI R. S. MATCHE

(CFTRI), Mysore
Indian Centre for Plastics in the Environment (ICPE), SHRI T. K. BANDOPADHYAY

Mumbai SHRI ARUNAVA GUHA (Alternate)
CSIR-Indian Institute of Toxicological Research DR V. P. SHARMA

(IITR), Lucknow DR A. B. PANT (Alternate)
Reliance Industries Ltd. (RIL), Mumbai SHRI S. V. RAJU

SHRI AMIT SHAH (Alternate)
Sabic Innovative Plastics, Bengaluru DR SUMANDA BANDYOPADHYAY

SHRI SUNIL RAUTO (Alternate)
Haldia Petrochemicals Limited, Kolkata SHRI RAJ K. DATTA

SHRI SUVOMOY GANGULY (Alternate)
Ministry of Environment & Forests (MoEF), New SHRI SATYENDRA KUMAR

Delhi SHRI AMIT LOVE (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Packaging (IIP), Mumbai DR SANJAY CHATTOPADHYAY

DR TANWEER ALAM (Alternate)
GAIL (India) Ltd., NOIDA SHRI MANISH KHANDELWAL

CSIR- National Chemical Laboratory (NCL), Pune DR P. R. SURESHA
DR R. V. GUNDLOORI (Alternate)
Indian Plastic Institute (IPI), Mumbai SHRI V. B. LALL

SHRI MIHIR BANERJI (Alternate)
Voluntary Organization in Interest of Consumer SHRI M. A. U. KHAN

Education (VOICE), New Delhi SHRI H. WADHWA (Alternate)
All India Plastics Manufacturers Association SHRI DEEPAK BALLANI

(AIPMA), New Delhi
6
IS 17899 : 2022
The Toy Association of India (TAI), New Delhi SHRI RAJESH ARORA
SHRI R. K. VERMA (Alternate)
Department of Chemicals & Petrochemicals, Min. of SHRI O. P. SHARMA

Chemicals & Fertilizers, New Delhi SHRI VARUN SINGH POONIA (Alternate)
Organization of Plastics Processors of India, Mumbai DR SATYAPRASAD BHATTACHARYA

SHRI DEEPAK LAWALE (Alternate)
Plastindia Foundation, Mumbai DR E. SUNDARESAN

SHRI HITEN BHEDA (Alternate)
Central Pollution Control Board, New Delhi MS DIVYA SINHA

SHRI C. K. DIXIT (Alternate)
National Committee on Plasticulture Applications in SHRI ANAND ZAMBRE

Horticulture (NCPAH), Ministry of Agriculture & SHRI KRISHNA KUMAR KAUSHAL (Alternate)
Farmers Welfare, Govt. of India, New Delhi
Indian Oil Corporation, R&D Centre, Faridabad SHRI DHANANJAY SAHOO

ONGC Petro Additions Ltd. (OPAL), Gujarat SHRI VIVEK MEHTA
Chemical and Petrochemical Manufactures Association SHRI MAHINDER SINGH
(CPMA), New Delhi
Consumer Association of India (CONCERT), Chennai SHRI G. SANTHANARAJAN

SHRI M. R. KRISHNAN (Alternate)
Coca-Cola India Pvt. Ltd., Gurugram SHRI VIRENDRA LANDGE

SHRI RAJENDRA DOBRIYAL (Alternate)
Huhtamaki Paper Product Ltd. (HPPL), Hyderabad SHRI MUTHUSAMY CHOCKALINGAM

SHRI AISHWARYA VANGE (Alternate)
HMEL, Noida SHRI VINEET KUMAR GUPTA

SHRI ALAKESH GHOSH (Alternate)
Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI), SHRI CHIRAG GADI
Delhi
Indian Pharmacopoeia Commission, Ghaziabad DR JAI PRAKASH
DR MANOJ KUMAR PANDEY (Alternate)
Technical Training and Research Centre (TTRC), SHRI R. K. DWIVEDI
Lohia Group, Kanpur
IIT, Delhi SHRI ANUP K. GHOSH
Food Corporation of India (FCI), Delhi SHRI RAJAGOPAL A.
SHRI A. K. U. B. SINGH (Alternate)
Shivalik Agro-Poly Products Ltd., Mohali SHRI PANKAJ KUMAR MAHAJAN

DR G. D. TYAGI (Alternate)
7
IS 17899 T : 2022
IFCA, Delhi SHRI ATINDRA N. CHAUDHURI
BIS Directorate General SMT MEENAL PASSI, SCIENTIST ‘E’ AND HEAD (PCD)
[REPRESENTING DIRECTOR GENERAL (Ex-officio)]
Member Secretary
SHRI SHIVAM DWIVEDI
SCIENTIST ‘B’ (PCD), BIS
Panel for Preparing Standard on “Assessment of Biodegradability of Plastics in Varied

Conditions”
CIPET, Bhubaneswar DR SMITA MOHANTY (Convener)

ICPE, Mumbai SHRI T. K. BANDOPADHYAYA
TTRC, Lohia Corp SHRI RAJEEV K. DWIVEDI
IFCA, Delhi SHRI ATIN N. CHAUDHURI
ITC, Bangalore DR MANATESH CHAKRABORTY
Biotecbags, Bangalore DR T. S. SHANKKER
CSIR-IITR, Lucknow DR V. P. SHARMA
HMEL, Noida SHRI VINEET GUPTA
MoEF&CC, New Delhi DR AMIT LOVE (Special invitee)
CPCB, New Delhi MS DIVYA SINHA (Special invitee)
ITC, Bangalore DR KAMAL TYAGI (Special invitee)
8
Copyright
copyright be addressed to the Head (Publications & Sale), BIS.
should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest amendments or edition by referring to the website-
www.bis.gov.in or www.standardsbis.in.
This Indian Standard has been developed from Doc No.: PCD 12(19805).

__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________

Headquarters:
Central: 601/A Konnectus Tower-I, 6th Floor 2323 7617

DMRC Building, Bhavbhuti Marg, New Delhi 110 002
Eastern: 8th Floor, Plot No. 7/7 & 7/8, CP Block, Sector V 236 7012, 2320 9474
Salt Lake, Kolata 700091
Northern: Plot No. 4A, Sector 27-B, Madhya Marg 265 0206, 265 0290
Chandigarh 160 019
Southern: C I T Campus, IV Cross Road, Taramani 2254 1442, 2254 1216
Chennai 600 113
Western: Plot No. E-9, Road No. 8, MIDC, Andheri (East) 28218093
Mumbai 400 093
Branches: AHMEDABAD, BENGALURU, BHOPAL, BHUBANESHWAR, CHANDIGARH, CHENNAI,

COIMBATORE, DEHRADUN, DELHI, FARIDABAD, GHAZIABAD, GUWAHATI, HIMACHAL
PRADESH, HUBLI, HYDERABAD, JAIPUR, JAMMU & KASHMIR, JAMSHEDPUR, KOCHI, KOLKATA,
LUCKNOW, MADURAI, MUMBAI, NAGPUR, NOIDA, PANIPAT, PATNA, PUNE, RAIPUR, RAJKOT,
SURAT, VISHAKHAPATNAM.
________________________________
IS/ISO 17088 : 2021
Indian Standard
Compostable Plastics —
( Second Revision )
ICS 83.080.01
© BIS 2022

NEW DELHI-110002
www.bis.gov.in www.standardsbis.in
April 2022 Price Group 9

NATIONAL FOREWORD
The Indian Standard (Second Revision) which is identical with ISO 17088 : 2021 ‘Plastics — Organic
International Standard Corresponding Indian Standard Degree of

Equivalence
Identical
second revision)
IS 15109 (Part 2) : 2013/ISO 11269-2 : Identical
plants plants ( )
Identical
the oxygen demand in a closed oxygen demand in a closed respirometer

respirometer ( )
Identical
evolved carbon dioxide evolved carbon dioxide ( )

Identical
composting conditions — Method by composting conditions — Method by
Part 1: General method Part 1 General method ( )
(Continued on third cover)

IS/ISO 17088 : 2021
i
IS/ISO 17088 : 2021
Indian Standard
COMPOSTABLE PLASTICS — SPECIFICATION
( Second Revision )
d) control of constituents.
Plastics — Vocabulary
Soil quality — Effects of pollutants on earthworms — Part 1: Determination of acute toxicity
to Eisenia fetida/Eisenia andrei
Soil quality — Effects of pollutants on earthworms — Part 2: Determination of effects on
reproduction of Eisenia fetida/Eisenia andrei
contaminated soil on the emergence and early growth of higher plants

Determination of the ultimate aerobic biodegradability of plastic materials in an aqueous
medium — Method by measuring the oxygen demand in a closed respirometer
1
IS/ISO 17088 : 2021
Determination of the ultimate aerobic biodegradability of plastic materials in an aqueous

medium — Method by analysis of evolved carbon dioxide
Determination of the ultimate aerobic biodegradability of plastic materials under controlled
composting conditions — Method by analysis of evolved carbon dioxide — Part 1: General method
Determination of the ultimate aerobic biodegradability of plastic materials under controlled
composting conditions — Method by analysis of evolved carbon dioxide — Part 2: Gravimetric measurement
of carbon dioxide evolved in a laboratory-scale test
test by ammonium oxidation
composting conditions in a pilot-scale test

Plastics — Determination of the ultimate aerobic biodegradability of plastic materials in soil by
measuring the oxygen demand in a respirometer or the amount of carbon dioxide evolved
Characterization of waste — Halogen and sulfur content — Oxygen combustion in closed
systems and determination methods
Terrestrial Plant Test: Seedling Emergence and Seedling Growth Test
https://www.iso.org/obp
http://www. .org/
2
IS/ISO 17088 : 2021
total dry solids (3.7
PFC
3
IS/ISO 17088 : 2021
( National Foreword )
A-1 BIS CERTIFICATION MARKING
Bureau of Indian Standards Act
24
(Continued from second cover)
International Standard Corresponding Indian Standard Degree of

Equivalence
Identical
composting conditions — Method by composting conditions — Method by
carbon dioxide evolved in a laboratory- carbon dioxide evolved in a laboratory-

scale test scale test ( )
ISO 16929 Plastics — Determination IS/ISO 16929 : 2019 Plastics — Identical
composting conditions in a pilot-scale

test pilot-scale test (second revision)
ISO 17556 Plastics — Determination IS/ISO 17556 : 2019 Plastics — Identical
the oxygen demand in a respirometer
evolved carbon dioxide evolved (second revision)
standard:
International Standard/ Title
Other Publication
ISO 11268-1
ISO 11268-2
andrei
ISO 15685
OECD, (2006), Test No. 208, Terrestrial plant test: Seedling emergence and seedling growth test,
as 27 ± 2°C and 65 ± 5 percent respectively.
are given in National Annex A.
revised
this standard.
Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 2016 to promote
Copyright
www.bis.gov.in or www.standardsbis.in.
.
Date of Issue
Telephones Website: www.bis.gov.in

Telephones
Central th
2323 7617
Eastern : 8 th 2367 0012
Northern 265 9930

Chandigarh 160019
Western : Plot No. E-9, Road No.-8, MIDC, Andheri (East), 2821 8093
: AHMEDABAD. BENGALURU. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. CHANDIGARH. CHENNAI.

COIMBATORE. DEHRADUN. DELHI. FARIDABAD. GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI.
JAMSHEDPUR. KOCHI. KOLKATA. LUCKNOW. MADURAI. MUMBAI. NAGPUR.

NOIDA. PANIPAT. PATNA. PUNE. RAIPUR. RAJKOT. SURAT. VISAKHAPATNAM.

Final Handbook

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Final Handbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bureau of Indian Standards

Ministry of Consumer Affairs,

SUBSECTION I Paper Packaging for Consumer Products

SUBSECTION II Paper Packaging for food products

SUBSECTION III Paper Packaging for industrial products

SECTION II INDIAN STANDARDS FROM TEXTILE DEPARTMENT

SECTION III INDIAN STANDARDS FROM PETROLEUM, COAL AND

पैकिंग और रैपिंग के लिए क्राफ्ट

Kraft Paper for Packing and

भारतीय मानक ब्रयू ो

July 2020  Price Group 4

1 SCOPE 5.1.3 Grade 3

Table 1 Requirements for Kraft Paper

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

i) Moisture content, percent, Max 9 9 9 IS 1060 ( Part 5 / Sec 2) : 2014

Table 2 Optional Requirements for Kraft Paper, Grade 1

6.3.1 Package 6.5.4 It shall be suitably marked on kraft paper that

Table 3 Limits of Contaminants in Paper

IS No. Title IS No. Title

B-1 REAGENTS B-3 CALCULATIONS

B-1.1 Hydrochloric Acid, 0.02 N. Alkalinity (asCaCo3), percent by mass

Review of Indian Standards

Amendments Issued Since Publication

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

December 1989 Price Group 2

Reprography Unit, BIS, New Delhi, India

4.6.1 General Requirements

Table 3 Limits of Contaminants in Paper

'6.3 Additional Requirements for ECO Mark

(Page 3, Annex A) — Insert the following after Annex A:

Any spectrophotometer suitable for measurement at a wavelength of about 550 nm

Any shaker suitable tor rotating/moving at 30 ± 2 rev/min.

B-1.3.1 Extraction Fluid — Mix 5.7-ml of acetic acid in distilled water.

B-1.3.2 Nitric Acid — Concentrated.

B-1.3.3 Sulphuric acid — Approximately 0.2 N.

B-1.3.4 Diphenylcarbazide Solution

Dissolve 0.25 g of diphenylcarbazide in 50-ml acetone. Store in a brown bottle.

B-1.3.5 Stock Chromium Solution

B-1.3.6 Intermediate Chromium Solution

B-1.3.7 Standard Chromium Solution

B-1.4.1 Preparation of Calibration Curve

Standard Chromium Corresponding to Cr 6+

B-1.4.2.1 Sample preparation

B-1.4.2.2 Preparation of test solution

Chromium (as Cr 6+ ), ppm =

B-2.3.7 Stock Mercury Solution

FIG. 1 SCHEMATIC ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT FOR MEASUREMENT

B-2.4.3.1 Sample preparation

B-2.4.3.2 Preparation of test solution

Mercury (as Hg), ppm =

B-3.3.5 Intermediate Lead Solution

Construct a standard calibration graph by plotting the absorbance versus mg of lead

Lead (as Pb), ppm =

B-4.3.6 Standard Cadmium Solution

B-4.4.1 Sample Preparation

B-4.4.2 Preparation of Test Solution

Construct a standard calibration graph by plotting the absorbance versus mg of

Cadmium (as Cd), ppm =

B-5.2.1 Round Bottom Flask — 250-ml.

B-5.3.3 Acetic Anhydride

B-5.3.4 Sodium Sulphate Anhydrous

B-5.3.5 PCP Stock Solution

Dissolve 10 mg of pentachlorophenol in 100-ml of acetone. One millilitre of this

July 2020 Price Group 4

A B Vi 100 A-6.3.2 n-Hexane